Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

■When you configure VTP, you must configure a trunk port so that the switch can send and receive VTP advertisements to and from other switches in the domain.

■Before adding a VTP client switch to a VTP domain, always verify that its VTP configuration revision number is lower than the configuration revision number of the other switches in the VTP domain. Switches in a VTP domain always use the VLAN configuration of the switch with the highest VTP configuration revision number. If you add a switch that has a revision number higher than the revision number in the VTP domain, it can erase all VLAN information from the VTP server and VTP domain. See Adding a VTP Client Switch to a VTP Domain for the procedure for verifying and resetting the VTP configuration revision number.

■VTP version 1 and VTP version 2 are not interoperable on switches in the same VTP domain. Do not enable VTP version 2 unless every switch in the VTP domain supports version 2.

■In VTP versions 1 and 2, when you configure extended-range VLANs on the switch, the switch must be in VTP transparent mode. VTP version 3 also supports creating extended-range VLANs in client or server mode.

A VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) is a Layer 2 messaging protocol that maintains VLAN configuration consistency by managing the addition, deletion, and renaming of VLANs on a network-wide basis. VTP minimizes misconfigurations and configuration inconsistencies that can cause several problems, such as duplicate VLAN names, incorrect VLAN-type specifications, and security violations.

Before you create VLANs, you must decide whether to use VTP in your network. Using VTP, you can make configuration changes centrally on one or more switches and have those changes automatically communicated to all the other switches in the network. Without VTP, you cannot send information about VLANs to other switches.

VTP is designed to work in an environment where updates are made on a single switch and are sent through VTP to other switches in the domain. It does not work well in a situation where multiple updates to the VLAN database occur simultaneously on switches in the same domain, which would result in an inconsistency in the VLAN database.

The switch supports 1005 VLANs, but the number of configured features affects the usage of the switch hardware. If the switch is notified by VTP of a new VLAN and the switch is already using the maximum available hardware resources, it sends a message that there are not enough hardware resources available and shuts down the VLAN. The output of the show vlan user EXEC command shows the VLAN in a suspended state.

VTP version 1 and version 2 support only normal-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1 to 1005). VTP version 3 supports the entire VLAN range (VLANs 1 to 4096). Extended range VLANs (VLANs 1006 to 4096) are supported only in VTP version 3. You cannot convert from VTP version 3 to VTP version 2 if extended VLANs are configured in the domain.

A VTP domain (also called a VLAN management domain) consists of one switch or several interconnected switches under the same administrative responsibility sharing the same VTP domain name. A switch can be in only one VTP domain. You make global VLAN configuration changes for the domain.

By default, the switch is in the VTP no-management-domain state until it receives an advertisement for a domain over a trunk link (a link that carries the traffic of multiple VLANs) or until you configure a domain name. Until the management domain name is specified or learned, you cannot create or modify VLANs on a VTP server, and VLAN information is not propagated over the network.

If the switch receives a VTP advertisement over a trunk link, it inherits the management domain name and the VTP configuration revision number. The switch then ignores advertisements with a different domain name or an earlier configuration revision number.

When you make a change to the VLAN configuration on a VTP server, the change is propagated to all switches in the VTP domain. VTP advertisements are sent over all IEEE trunk connections, including IEEE 802.1Q. VTP dynamically maps VLANs with unique names and internal index associates across multiple LAN types. Mapping eliminates excessive device administration required from network administrators.

If you configure a switch for VTP transparent mode, you can create and modify VLANs, but the changes are not sent to other switches in the domain, and they affect only the individual switch. However, configuration changes made when the switch is in this mode are saved in the switch running configuration and can be saved to the switch startup configuration file.

For domain name and password configuration guidelines, see VTP Configuration Guidelines.

Table 36 VTP Modes

VTP Mode
Description

VTP server

In VTP server mode, you can create, modify, and delete VLANs, and specify other configuration parameters (such as the VTP version) for the entire VTP domain. VTP servers advertise their VLAN configurations to other switches in the same VTP domain and synchronize their VLAN configurations with other switches based on advertisements received over trunk links.

VTP server is the default mode.

Note: In VTP server mode, VLAN configurations are saved in NVRAM. If the switch detects a failure while writing a configuration to NVRAM, VTP mode automatically changes from server mode to client mode. If this happens, the switch cannot be returned to VTP server mode until the NVRAM is functioning.

VTP client

A VTP client behaves like a VTP server and transmits and receives VTP updates on its trunks, but you cannot create, change, or delete VLANs on a VTP client. VLANs are configured on another switch in the domain that is in server mode.

In VTP versions 1 and 2, in VTP client mode, VLAN configurations are not saved in NVRAM. In VTP version 3, VLAN configurations are saved in NVRAM in client mode.

VTP transparent

VTP transparent switches do not participate in VTP. A VTP transparent switch does not advertise its VLAN configuration and does not synchronize its VLAN configuration based on received advertisements. However, in VTP version 2 or version 3, transparent switches do forward VTP advertisements that they receive from other switches through their trunk interfaces. You can create, modify, and delete VLANs on a switch in VTP transparent mode.

In VTP versions 1 and 2, the switch must be in VTP transparent mode when you create extended-range VLANs. VTP version 3 also supports creating extended-range VLANs in client or server mode.

When the switch is in VTP transparent mode, the VTP and VLAN configurations are saved in NVRAM, but they are not advertised to other switches. In this mode, VTP mode and domain name are saved in the switch running configuration, and you can save this information in the switch startup configuration file by using the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command.

VTP off

A switch in VTP off mode functions in the same manner as a VTP transparent switch, except that it does not forward VTP advertisements on trunks.

■For VTP version 1 and version 2, if extended-range VLANs are configured on the switch, you cannot change VTP mode to client or server. You receive an error message, and the configuration is not allowed. VTP version 1 and version 2 do not propagate configuration information for extended range VLANs (VLANs 1006 to 4096). You must manually configure these VLANs on each device.

Note: For VTP version 1 and 2, before you create extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1006 to 4096), you must set VTP mode to transparent by using the vtp mode transparent global configuration command. Save this configuration to the startup configuration so that the switch starts in VTP transparent mode. Otherwise, you lose the extended-range VLAN configuration if the switch resets and boots up in VTP server mode (the default).

■VTP version 3 supports extended-range VLANs. If extended VLANs are configured, you cannot convert from VTP version 3 to VTP version 2.

■If you configure the switch for VTP client mode, the switch does not create the VLAN database file (vlan.dat). If the switch is then powered off, it resets the VTP configuration to the default. To keep the VTP configuration with VTP client mode after the switch restarts, you must first configure the VTP domain name before the VTP mode.

■When a switch is in VTP server mode, you can change the VLAN configuration and have it propagated throughout the network.

■When a switch is in VTP client mode, you cannot change its VLAN configuration. The client switch receives VTP updates from a VTP server in the VTP domain and then modifies its configuration accordingly.

■When you configure the switch for VTP transparent mode, VTP is disabled on the switch. The switch does not send VTP updates and does not act on VTP updates received from other switches. However, a VTP transparent switch running VTP version 2 does forward received VTP advertisements on its trunk links.

■VTP off mode is the same as VTP transparent mode except that VTP advertisements are not forwarded.

Caution: If all switches are operating in VTP client mode, do not configure a VTP domain name. If you do, it is impossible to make changes to the VLAN configuration of that domain. Therefore, make sure you configure at least one switch as a VTP server.

Each switch in the VTP domain sends periodic global configuration advertisements from each trunk port to a reserved multicast address. Neighboring switches receive these advertisements and update their VTP and VLAN configurations as necessary.

VTP advertisements distribute this global domain information:

■VTP domain name

■VTP configuration revision number

■Update identity and update timestamp

■MD5 digest VLAN configuration, including maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for each VLAN

■Frame format

VTP advertisements distribute this VLAN information for each configured VLAN:

■VLAN IDs (IEEE 802.1Q)

■VLAN name

■VLAN type

■VLAN state

■Additional VLAN configuration information specific to the VLAN type

In VTP version 3, VTP advertisements also include the primary server ID, an instance number, and a start index.

If you use VTP in your network, you must decide which version of VTP to use. By default, VTP operates in version 1.

VTP version 2 supports these features that are not supported in version 1:

■Token Ring support—VTP version 2 supports Token Ring Bridge Relay Function (TrBRF) and Token Ring Concentrator Relay Function (TrCRF) VLANs. For more information about Token Ring VLANs, see Normal-Range VLANs.

■Unrecognized Type-Length-Value (TLV) support—A VTP server or client propagates configuration changes to its other trunks, even for TLVs it is not able to parse. The unrecognized TLV is saved in NVRAM when the switch is operating in VTP server mode.

■Version-Dependent Transparent Mode—In VTP version 1, a VTP transparent switch inspects VTP messages for the domain name and version and forwards a message only if the version and domain name match. Although VTP version 2 supports only one domain, a VTP version 2 transparent switch forwards a message only when the domain name matches.

■Consistency Checks—In VTP version 2, VLAN consistency checks (such as VLAN names and values) are performed only when you enter new information through the CLI or SNMP. Consistency checks are not performed when new information is obtained from a VTP message or when information is read from NVRAM. If the MD5 digest on a received VTP message is correct, its information is accepted.

VTP version 3 supports these features that are not supported in version 1 or version 2:

■Enhanced authentication—You can configure the authentication as hidden or secret. When hidden, the secret key from the password string is saved in the VLAN database file, but it does not appear in plain text in the configuration. Instead, the key associated with the password is saved in hexadecimal format in the running configuration. You must reenter the password if you enter a takeover command in the domain. When you enter the secret keyword, you can directly configure the password secret key.

■Support for extended range VLAN (VLANs 1006 to 4096) database propagation. VTP versions 1 and 2 propagate only VLANs 1 to 1005. If extended VLANs are configured, you cannot convert from VTP version 3 to version 1 or 2.

VTP pruning still applies only to VLANs 1 to 1005, and VLANs 1002 to 1005 are still reserved and cannot be modified.

■Support for any database in a domain. In addition to propagating VTP information, version 3 can propagate Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) protocol database information. A separate instance of the VTP protocol runs for each application that uses VTP.

■VTP primary server and VTP secondary servers. A VTP primary server updates the database information and sends updates that are honored by all devices in the system. A VTP secondary server can only back up the updated VTP configurations received from the primary server to its NVRAM.

By default, all devices come up as secondary servers. You can enter the vtp primary privileged EXEC command to specify a primary server. Primary server status is only needed for database updates when the administrator issues a takeover message in the domain. You can have a working VTP domain without any primary servers. Primary server status is lost if the device reloads or domain parameters change, even when a password is configured on the switch.

■The option to turn VTP on or off on a per-trunk (per-port) basis. You can enable or disable VTP per port by entering the [ no ] vtp interface configuration command. When you disable VTP on trunking ports, all VTP instances for that port are disabled. You cannot set VTP to off for the MST database and on for the VLAN database on the same port.

When you globally set VTP mode to off, it applies to all the trunking ports in the system. However, you can specify on or off on a per-VTP instance basis. For example, you can configure the switch as a VTP server for the VLAN database but with VTP off for the MST database.

Follow these guidelines when deciding which VTP version to implement:

■All switches in a VTP domain must have the same domain name, but they do not need to run the same VTP version.

■A VTP version 2-capable switch can operate in the same VTP domain as a switch running VTP version 1 if version 2 is disabled on the version 2-capable switch (version 2 is disabled by default).

■If a switch running VTP version 1 but capable of running VTP version 2 receives VTP version 3 advertisements, it automatically moves to VTP version 2.

■If a switch running VTP version 3 is connected to a switch running VTP version 1, the VTP version 1 switch moves to VTP version 2, and the VTP version 3 switch sends scaled-down versions of the VTP packets so that the VTP version 2 switch can update its database.

■A switch running VTP version 3 cannot move to version 1 or 2 if it has extended VLANs.

■Do not enable VTP version 2 on a switch unless all of the switches in the same VTP domain are version-2-capable. When you enable version 2 on a switch, all of the version-2-capable switches in the domain enable version 2. If there is a version 1-only switch, it does not exchange VTP information with switches that have version 2 enabled.

■We recommend placing VTP version 1 and 2 switches at the edge of the network because they do not forward VTP version 3 advertisements.

■If there are TrBRF and TrCRF Token Ring networks in your environment, you must enable VTP version 2 or version 3 for Token Ring VLAN switching to function properly. To run Token Ring and Token Ring-Net, disable VTP version 2.

■VTP version 1 and version 2 do not propagate configuration information for extended range VLANs (VLANs 1006 to 4096). You must configure these VLANs manually on each device. VTP version 3 supports extended-range VLANs. You cannot convert from VTP version 3 to VTP version 2 if extended VLANs are configured.

■When a VTP version 3 device trunk port receives messages from a VTP version 2 device, it sends a scaled-down version of the VLAN database on that particular trunk in VTP version 2 format. A VTP version 3 device does not send VTP version 2-formatted packets on a trunk unless it first receives VTP version 2 packets on that trunk port.

■When a VTP version 3 device detects a VTP version 2 device on a trunk port, it continues to send VTP version 3 packets, in addition to VTP version 2 packets, to allow both kinds of neighbors to coexist on the same trunk.

■A VTP version 3 device does not accept configuration information from a VTP version 2 or version 1 device.

■Two VTP version 3 regions can only communicate in transparent mode over a VTP version 1 or version 2 region.

■Devices that are only VTP version 1 capable cannot interoperate with VTP version 3 devices.

■VTP version 2 and version 3 are disabled by default.

■When you enable VTP version 2 on a switch, every VTP version 2-capable switch in the VTP domain enables version 2. To enable VTP version 3, you must manually configure it on each switch.

■With VTP versions 1 and 2, you can configure the version only on switches in VTP server or transparent mode. If a switch is running VTP version 3, you can change to version 2 when the switch is in client mode if no extended VLANs exist, no private VLANs exist, and no hidden password was configured.

Caution: In VTP version 3, both the primary and secondary servers can exist on an instance in the domain.

VTP pruning increases network available bandwidth by restricting flooded traffic to those trunk links that the traffic must use to reach the destination devices. Without VTP pruning, a switch floods broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast traffic across all trunk links within a VTP domain even though receiving switches might discard them. VTP pruning is disabled by default.

VTP pruning blocks unneeded flooded traffic to VLANs on trunk ports that are included in the pruning-eligible list. Only VLANs included in the pruning-eligible list can be pruned. By default, VLANs 2 through 1001 are pruning eligible switch trunk ports. If the VLANs are configured as pruning-ineligible, the flooding continues. VTP pruning is supported in all VTP versions.

Figure 33 shows a switched network without VTP pruning enabled. Port 1 on Switch A and Port 2 on Switch D are assigned to the Red VLAN. If a broadcast is sent from the host connected to Switch A, Switch A floods the broadcast and every switch in the network receives it, even though Switches C, E, and F have no ports in the Red VLAN.

Figure 33 Flooding Traffic without VTP Pruning

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

Figure 34 shows a switched network with VTP pruning enabled. The broadcast traffic from Switch A is not forwarded to Switches C, E, and F because traffic for the Red VLAN has been pruned on the links shown (Port 5 on Switch B and Port 4 on Switch D).

Figure 34 Optimized Flooded Traffic with VTP Pruning

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

With VTP versions 1 and 2, enabling VTP pruning on a VTP server enables pruning for the entire management domain. Making VLANs pruning-eligible or pruning-ineligible affects pruning eligibility for those VLANs on that trunk only (not on all switches in the VTP domain). In VTP version 3, you must manually enable pruning on each switch in the domain.

See Enabling VTP Pruning. VTP pruning takes effect several seconds after you enable it. VTP pruning does not prune traffic from VLANs that are pruning-ineligible. VLAN 1 and VLANs 1002 to 1005 are always pruning-ineligible; traffic from these VLANs cannot be pruned. Extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs higher than 1005) are also pruning-ineligible.

VTP pruning is not designed to function in VTP transparent mode. If one or more switches in the network are in VTP transparent mode, you should do one of these:

■Turn off VTP pruning in the entire network.

■Turn off VTP pruning by making all VLANs on the trunk of the switch upstream to the VTP transparent switch pruning ineligible.

To configure VTP pruning on an interface, use the switchport trunk pruning vlan interface configuration command. VTP pruning operates when an interface is trunking. You can set VLAN pruning-eligibility, whether or not VTP pruning is enabled for the VTP domain, whether or not any given VLAN exists, and whether or not the interface is currently trunking.

Feature
Default Setting

VTP domain name

Null.

VTP mode (VTP version 1 and version 2)

Server.

VTP mode (VTP version 3)

The mode is the same as the mode in VTP version 1 or 2 before conversion to version 3.

VTP version

Version 1.

MST database mode

Transparent.

VTP version 3 server type

Secondary.

VTP password

None.

VTP pruning

Disabled.

You use the vtp global configuration command to set the VTP password, the version, the VTP filename, the interface providing updated VTP information, the domain name, and the mode, and to disable or enable pruning. The VTP information is saved in the VTP VLAN database. When VTP mode is transparent, the VTP domain name and mode are also saved in the switch running configuration file, and you can save it in the switch startup configuration file by entering the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command. You must use this command if you want to save VTP mode as transparent if the switch resets.

When you save VTP information in the switch startup configuration file and restart the switch, the configuration is selected as follows:

■If the VTP mode is transparent in both the startup configuration and the VLAN database and the VTP domain name from the VLAN database matches that in the startup configuration file, the VLAN database is ignored (cleared). The VTP and VLAN configurations in the startup configuration file are used. The VLAN database revision number remains unchanged in the VLAN database.

■If the VTP mode or the domain name in the startup configuration do not match the VLAN database, the domain name and the VTP mode and configuration for the first 1005 VLANs use the VLAN database information.

When configuring VTP for the first time, you must always assign a domain name. You must configure all switches in the VTP domain with the same domain name. Switches in VTP transparent mode do not exchange VTP messages with other switches, and you do not need to configure a VTP domain name for them.

Note: If NVRAM and DRAM storage is sufficient, all switches in a VTP domain should be in VTP server mode.

Caution: Do not configure a VTP domain if all switches are operating in VTP client mode. If you configure the domain, it is impossible to make changes to the VLAN configuration of that domain. Make sure that you configure at least one switch in the VTP domain for VTP server mode.

You can configure a password for the VTP domain, but it is not required. If you do configure a domain password, all domain switches must share the same password and you must configure the password on each switch in the management domain. Switches without a password or with the wrong password reject VTP advertisements.

If you configure a VTP password for a domain, a switch that is booted without a VTP configuration does not accept VTP advertisements until you configure it with the correct password. After the configuration, the switch accepts the next VTP advertisement that uses the same password and domain name in the advertisement.

If you are adding a new switch to an existing network with VTP capability, the new switch learns the domain name only after the applicable password has been configured on it.

Caution: When you configure a VTP domain password, the management domain does not function properly if you do not assign a management domain password to each switch in the domain.

Before adding a VTP client to a VTP domain, always verify that its VTP configuration revision number is lower than the configuration revision number of the other switches in the VTP domain. Switches in a VTP domain always use the VLAN configuration of the switch with the highest VTP configuration revision number. With VTP versions 1 and 2, adding a switch that has a revision number higher than the revision number in the VTP domain can erase all VLAN information from the VTP server and VTP domain. With VTP version 3, the VLAN information is not erased.

Before You Begin

You should configure the VTP domain before configuring other VTP parameters.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

vtp domain domain-name

Configures the VTP administrative-domain name. The name can be 1 to 32 characters. All switches operating in VTP server or client mode under the same administrative responsibility must be configured with the same domain name.

This command is optional for modes other than server mode. VTP server mode requires a domain name. If the switch has a trunk connection to a VTP domain, the switch learns the domain name from the VTP server in the domain.

3.

vtp mode { client | server | transparent | off } { vlan | mst | unknown }

Configures the switch for VTP mode (client, server, transparent, or off).

(Optional) Database parameters:

vlan —The VLAN database is the default if none are configured.

mst —The multiple spanning tree (MST) database.

unknown —An unknown database type.

4.

vtp password password

(Optional) Sets the password for the VTP domain. The password can be 8 to 64 characters. If you configure a VTP password, the VTP domain does not function properly if you do not assign the same password to each switch in the domain.

See Configuring a VTP Version 3 Password for options available with VTP version 3.

1.

vtp primary-server [ vlan | mst ] [ force ]

(Optional) Changes the operational state of a switch from a secondary server (the default) to a primary server and advertise the configuration to the domain. If the switch password is configured as hidden, you are prompted to reenter the password.

vlan —Selects the VLAN database as the takeover feature. This is the default.

mst —Selects the multiple spanning tree (MST) database as the takeover feature.

force —Overwrites the configuration of any conflicting servers. If you do not enter force, you are prompted for confirmation before the takeover.

2.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

3.

show vtp status

Verifies your entries in the VTP Operating Mode and the VTP Domain Name fields of the display.

4.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves the configuration in the startup configuration file.

Note: Only VTP mode and domain name are saved in the switch running configuration and can be copied to the startup configuration file.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

vtp password password [ hidden | secret ]

(Optional) Sets the password for the VTP domain. The password can be 8 to 64 characters.

■(Optional) hidden —Ensures that the secret key generated from the password string is saved in the nvam:vlan.dat file. If you configure a takeover by configuring a VTP primary server, you are prompted to reenter the password.

■(Optional) secret —Directly configures the password. The secret password must contain 32 hexadecimal characters.

3.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show vtp password

Verifies your entries.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

vtp version { 1 | 2 | 3 }

Enables the VTP version on the switch. The default is VTP version 1.

3.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show vtp status

Verifies that the configured VTP version is enabled.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves the configuration in the startup configuration file.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

vtp pruning

Enables pruning in the VTP administrative domain.

By default, pruning is disabled. You need to enable pruning on only one switch in VTP server mode.

3.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show vtp status

Verifies your entries in the VTP Pruning Mode field of the display.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Identifies an interface, and enters interface configuration mode.

3.

vtp

Enables VTP on the specified port.

4.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show running-config interface interface-id

Verifies the change to the port.

6.

show vtp status

Verifies the configuration.

Before You Begin

Before adding a VTP client to a VTP domain, always verify that its VTP configuration revision number is lower than the configuration revision number of the other switches in the VTP domain. Switches in a VTP domain always use the VLAN configuration of the switch with the highest VTP configuration revision number. With VTP versions 1 and 2, adding a switch that has a revision number higher than the revision number in the VTP domain can erase all VLAN information from the VTP server and VTP domain. With VTP version 3, the VLAN information is not erased.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

show vtp status

Checks the VTP configuration revision number.

If the number is 0, add the switch to the VTP domain.

If the number is greater than 0, follow these steps:

a. Write down the domain name.

b. Write down the configuration revision number.

c. Continue with the next steps to reset the switch configuration revision number.

2.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

3.

vtp domain domain-name

Changes the domain name from the original one displayed in Step 1 to a new name.

4.

end

Updates VLAN information on the switch and resets configuration revision number to 0.

5.

show vtp status

Verifies that the configuration revision number has been reset to 0.

6.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

7.

vtp domain domain-name

Enters the original domain name on the switch.

8.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

9.

show vtp status

(Optional) Verifies that the domain name is the same as in Step 1 and that the configuration revision number is 0.

10.

After resetting the configuration revision number, add the switch to the VTP domain.

Command
Purpose

show vtp counters

Displays counters about VTP messages that have been sent and received.

show vtp devices [ conflict ]

Displays information about all VTP version 3 devices in the domain. Conflicts are VTP version 3 devices with conflicting primary servers. The show vtp devices command does not display information when the switch is in transparent or off mode.

show vtp interface [ interface-id ]

Displays VTP status and configuration for all interfaces or the specified interface.

show vtp password

Displays the VTP password. The form of the password displayed depends on whether or not the hidden keyword was entered and if encryption is enabled on the switch.

show vtp status

Displays the VTP switch configuration information.

This example shows how to configure the switch as a VTP server with the domain name eng_group and the password mypassword :

Switch(config)# vtp domain eng_group
Setting VTP domain name to eng_group.
Switch(config)# vtp mode server
Setting device to VTP Server mode for VLANS.
Switch(config)# vtp password mypassword
Setting device VLAN database password to mypassword.
Switch(config)# end

This example shows how to configure a hidden password and how it appears:

Switch(config)# vtp password mypassword hidden
Generating the secret associated to the password.
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show vtp password
VTP password: 89914640C8D90868B6A0D8103847A733

This example shows how to configure a switch as the primary server for the VLAN database (the default) when a hidden or secret password was configured:

Switch# vtp primary vlan
Enter VTP password: mypassword
This switch is becoming Primary server for vlan feature in the VTP domain
 
VTP Database Conf Switch ID Primary Server Revision System Name
------------ ---- -------------- -------------- -------- --------------------
VLANDB Yes 00d0.00b8.1400=00d0.00b8.1400 1 stp7
 
Do you want to continue (y/n) [n]? y

The following sections provide references related to switch administration:

Related Topic
Document Title

Cisco IOS basic commands

Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference

VLAN configuration

Configuring VLANs

Standards
Title

No new or modified standards are supported by this feature, and support for existing standards has not been modified by this feature.

RFCs
Title

No new or modified RFCs are supported by this feature, and support for existing RFCs has not been modified by this feature.


Page 2

The voice VLAN feature enables access ports to carry IP voice traffic from an IP phone. When the switch is connected to a Cisco 7960 IP Phone, the phone sends voice traffic with Layer 3 IP precedence and Layer 2 class of service (CoS) values, which are both set to 5 by default. Because the sound quality of a Cisco IP phone call can deteriorate if the data is unevenly sent, the switch supports quality of service (QoS) based on IEEE 802.1p CoS. QoS uses classification and scheduling to send network traffic from the switch in a predictable manner. Voice VLAN is referred to as an auxiliary VLAN in some switch documentation.

The Cisco 7960 IP Phone is a configurable device, and you can configure it to forward traffic with an IEEE 802.1p priority. You can configure the switch to trust or override the traffic priority assigned by a Cisco IP phone.

The Cisco IP phone contains an integrated three-port 10/100 switch as shown in Figure 35. The ports provide dedicated connections to these devices:

■Port 1 connects to the switch or other voice-over-IP (VoIP) device.

■Port 2 is an internal 10/100 interface that carries the IP phone traffic.

■Port 3 (access port) connects to a PC or other device.

Figure 35 Cisco 7960 IP Phone Connected to a Switch

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

You can configure an access port with an attached Cisco IP phone to use one VLAN for voice traffic and another VLAN for data traffic from a device attached to the phone. You can configure access ports on the switch to send Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) packets that instruct an attached phone to send voice traffic to the switch in any of these ways:

■In the voice VLAN tagged with a Layer 2 CoS priority value

■In the access VLAN tagged with a Layer 2 CoS priority value

■In the access VLAN, untagged (no Layer 2 CoS priority value)

Note: In all configurations, the voice traffic carries a Layer 3 IP precedence value (the default is 5 for voice traffic and 3 for voice control traffic).

You can configure a port connected to the Cisco IP phone to send CDP packets to the phone to configure the way in which the phone sends voice traffic. The phone can carry voice traffic in IEEE 802.1Q frames for a specified voice VLAN with a Layer 2 CoS value. It can use IEEE 802.1p priority tagging to give voice traffic a higher priority and forward all voice traffic through the native (access) VLAN. The Cisco IP phone can also send untagged voice traffic or use its own configuration to send voice traffic in the access VLAN. In all configurations, the voice traffic carries a Layer 3 IP precedence value (the default is 5).

The switch can also process tagged data traffic (traffic in IEEE 802.1Q or IEEE 802.1p frame types) from the device attached to the access port on the Cisco IP phone (see Figure 35). You can configure Layer 2 access ports on the switch to send CDP packets that instruct the attached phone to configure the phone access port in one of these modes:

■In trusted mode, all traffic received through the access port on the Cisco IP phone passes through the phone unchanged.

■In untrusted mode, all traffic in IEEE 802.1Q or IEEE 802.1p frames received through the access port on the Cisco IP phone receive a configured Layer 2 CoS value. The default Layer 2 CoS value is 0. Untrusted mode is the default.

Note: Untagged traffic from the device attached to the Cisco IP phone passes through the phone unchanged, regardless of the trust state of the access port on the phone.

The voice VLAN feature is disabled by default.

When the voice VLAN feature is enabled, all untagged traffic is sent according to the default CoS priority of the port.

The CoS value is not trusted for IEEE 802.1p or IEEE 802.1Q tagged traffic.

■Voice VLAN configuration is only supported on switch access ports; voice VLAN configuration is not supported on trunk ports.

Note: Trunk ports can carry any number of voice VLANs, similar to regular VLANs. The configuration of voice VLANs is not required on trunk ports.

■The voice VLAN should be present and active on the switch for the IP phone to correctly communicate on the voice VLAN. Use the show vlan privileged EXEC command to see if the VLAN is present (listed in the display).

■Before you enable voice VLAN, we recommend that you enable QoS on the switch. If you use the auto-QoS feature, these settings are automatically configured. For more information, see Configuring QoS

■You must enable CDP on the switch port connected to the Cisco IP phone to send the configuration to the phone. (CDP is globally enabled by default on all switch interfaces.)

■The Port Fast feature is automatically enabled when voice VLAN is configured. When you disable voice VLAN, the Port Fast feature is not automatically disabled.

■If the Cisco IP phone and a device attached to the phone are in the same VLAN, they must be in the same IP subnet. These conditions indicate that they are in the same VLAN:

–They both use IEEE 802.1p or untagged frames.

–The Cisco IP phone uses IEEE 802.1p frames, and the device uses untagged frames.

–The Cisco IP phone uses untagged frames, and the device uses IEEE 802.1p frames.

–The Cisco IP phone uses IEEE 802.1Q frames, and the voice VLAN is the same as the access VLAN.

■The Cisco IP phone and a device attached to the phone cannot communicate if they are in the same VLAN and subnet but use different frame types because traffic in the same subnet is not routed (routing would eliminate the frame type difference).

■You cannot configure static secure MAC addresses in the voice VLAN.

■Voice VLAN ports can also be these port types:

–Dynamic access port.

–IEEE 802.1x authenticated port. See Configuring IEEE 802.1x Port-Based Authentication for more information.

If you enable IEEE 802.1x on an access port on which a voice VLAN is configured and to which a Cisco IP phone is connected, the phone loses connectivity to the switch for up to 30 seconds.

–Protected port.

–A source or destination port for a SPAN or RSPAN session.

–Secure port.

When you enable port security on an interface that is also configured with a voice VLAN, you must set the maximum allowed secure addresses on the port to two plus the maximum number of secure addresses allowed on the access VLAN. When the port is connected to a Cisco IP phone, the phone requires up to two MAC addresses. The phone address is learned on the voice VLAN and might also be learned on the access VLAN. Connecting a PC to the phone requires additional MAC addresses.

Because a Cisco 7960 IP Phone also supports a connection to a PC or other device, a port connecting the switch to a Cisco IP phone can carry mixed traffic. You can configure a port to decide how the Cisco IP phone carries voice traffic and data traffic.

You can connect a PC or other data device to a Cisco IP phone port. To process tagged data traffic (in IEEE 802.1Q or IEEE 802.1p frames), you can configure the switch to send CDP packets to instruct the phone how to send data packets from the device attached to the access port on the Cisco IP phone. The PC can generate packets with an assigned CoS value. You can configure the phone to not change (trust) or to override (not trust) the priority of frames arriving on the phone port from connected devices.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Specifies the interface connected to the Cisco IP phone, and enters interface configuration mode.

3.

switchport priority extend
{ cos value | trust }

Sets the priority of data traffic received from the Cisco IP phone access port:

cos value —Configures the phone to override the priority received from the PC or the attached device with the specified CoS value. The value is a number from 0 to 7, with 7 as the highest priority. The default priority is cos 0.

trust —Configures the phone access port to trust the priority received from the PC or the attached device.

4.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

Command
Purpose

show interfaces interface-id switchport

Verifies your entries.

copy running-config startup-config

Saves your entries in the configuration file.

This example shows how to configure a port connected to a Cisco IP phone to not change the priority of frames received from the PC or the attached device:

Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/17
Switch(config-if)# switchport priority extend trust
Switch(config-if)# end

The following sections provide references related to switch administration:

Standards
Title

No new or modified standards are supported by this feature, and support for existing standards has not been modified by this feature.

RFCs
Title

No new or modified RFCs are supported by this feature, and support for existing RFCs has not been modified by this feature.


Page 3

This chapter defines the types of interfaces and describes how to configure them.

■Understanding Interface Types

■Using the Switch USB Port

■Using Interface Configuration Mode

■Configuring Ethernet Interfaces

■Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces

■Configuring the System MTU

■Monitoring and Maintaining the Interfaces

This section describes the different types of interfaces supported by the switch with references to chapters that contain more detailed information about configuring these interface types. The rest of the chapter describes configuration procedures for physical interface characteristics.

■UNI, NNI, and ENI Port Types

■Port-Based VLANs

■Switch Ports

■Routed Ports

■Switch Virtual Interfaces

■EtherChannel Port Groups

■Power over Ethernet Ports

■Connecting Interfaces

The switch supports user-network interfaces (UNIs), network node interfaces (NNIs), and enhanced network interfaces (ENIs). UNIs are typically connected to a host, such as a PC or a Cisco IP phone. NNIs are typically connected to a router or to another switch. ENIs have the same functionality as UNIs, but can be configured to support protocol control packets for Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), Spanning-Tree Protocol (STP), Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), and EtherChannel Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) or Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP).

By default, all ports are enabled as NNI.

All ports on the switch can be configured as UNIs or ENIs.

The default state for a UNI or ENI is administratively down to prevent unauthorized users from gaining access to other ports as you configure the switch. Traffic is not switched between these ports, and all arriving traffic at UNIs or ENIs must leave on NNIs to prevent a user from gaining access to another user’s private network. If it is appropriate for two or more UNIs or ENIs to exchange traffic within the switch, the UNIs and ENIs can be assigned to a community VLAN. See Configuring VLANs for instructions on how to configure community VLANs.

Note: Even though the default state for a UNI or ENI is shutdown, entering the default interface interface-id command changes the port to the enabled state.

The default status for an NNI is administratively up to allow a service provider remote access to the switch during initial configuration.

A port can be reconfigured from UNI to NNI or ENI and the reverse. When a port is reconfigured as another interface type, it inherits all the characteristics of that interface type. When you reconfigure a UNI or ENI to be an NNI, you must enable the port before it becomes active.

Changing the port type from UNI to ENI does not affect the administrative state of the port. If the UNI status is shut down, it remains shut down when reconfigured as an ENI; if the port is in a no shutdown state, it remains in the no shutdown state. At any time, all ports on the switch are either UNI, NNI, or ENI.

A VLAN is a switched network that is logically segmented by function, team, or application, without regard to the physical location of the users. Packets received on a port are forwarded only to ports that belong to the same VLAN as the receiving port. Network devices in different VLANs cannot communicate with one another without a Layer 3 device to route traffic between the VLANs.

VLAN partitions provide hard firewalls for traffic in the VLAN, and each VLAN has its own MAC address table. A VLAN comes into existence when a local port is associated with the VLAN ID or when a user creates te VLAN ID.

To isolate VLANs of different customers in a service-provider network, the switch uses UNI-ENI VLANs. UNI-ENI VLANs isolate user network interfaces (UNIs) or enhanced network interfaces (ENIs) on the switch from UNIs or ENIs that belong to other customer VLANs. There are two types of UNI-ENI VLANs:

■UNI-ENI isolated VLAN—This is the default VLAN state for all VLANs created on the switch. Local switching does not occur among UNIs or ENIs on the switch that belong to the same UNI-ENI isolated VLAN.

■UNI-ENI community VLAN—Local switching is allowed among UNIs and ENIs on the switch that belong to the same UNI community VLAN. If UNIs or ENIs belong to the same customer, and you want to switch packets between the ports, you can configure the common VLAN as a UNI-ENI community VLAN.

Note: Local switching takes place between ENIs and UNIs in the same community VLAN. Because you can enable spanning tree on ENIs, but not on UNIs, you should use caution when configuring ENIs and UNIs in the same community VLAN. UNIs are always in the forwarding state.

To configure VLANs, use the vlan vlan-id global configuration command to enter VLAN configuration mode. The VLAN configurations for VLAN IDs 1 to 1005 are saved in the VLAN database. Extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1006 to 4094) are not added to the VLAN database. VLAN configuration is saved in the switch running configuration, and you can save it in the switch startup configuration file by entering the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command.

Add ports to a VLAN by using the switchport interface configuration commands:

■Identify the interface.

■For a trunk port, set trunk characteristics, and if desired, define the VLANs to which it can belong.

■For an access port, set and define the VLAN to which it belongs.

■For a tunnel port, set and define the VLAN ID for the customer-specific VLAN tag.

Switch ports are Layer 2 only interfaces associated with a physical port. Switch ports belong to one or more VLANs. A switch port can be an access port, a trunk port, a private-VLAN port, or a tunnel port. You can configure a port as an access port or trunk port. You configure a private VLAN port as a host or promiscuous port that belongs to a private-VLAN primary or secondary VLAN. (Only NNIs can be configured as promiscuous ports.) You must manually configure tunnel ports as part of an asymmetric link connected to an IEEE 802.1Q trunk port. Switch ports are used for managing the physical interface and associated Layer 2 protocols and do not handle routing or bridging.

Configure switch ports by using the switchport interface configuration commands. Use the switchport command with no keywords to put an interface that is in Layer 3 mode into Layer 2 mode.

Note: When you put an interface that is in Layer 3 mode into Layer 2 mode, the previous configuration information related to the affected interface might be lost, and the interface is returned to its default configuration.

An access port belongs to and carries the traffic of only one VLAN. Traffic is received and sent in native formats with no VLAN tagging. Traffic arriving on an access port is assumed to belong to the VLAN assigned to the port. If an access port receives an 802.1Q tagged packet, the packet is dropped, and the source address is not learned. 802.1x can also be used for VLAN assignment.

Two types of access ports are supported:

■Static access ports are manually assigned to a VLAN.

■VLAN membership of dynamic access ports is learned through incoming packets. By default, a dynamic access port is a member of no VLAN, and forwarding to and from the port is enabled only when the VLAN membership of the port is discovered. UNIs begin forwarding packets as soon as they are enabled. Dynamic access ports on the switch are assigned to a VLAN by a VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS). Dynamic access ports for VMPS are only supported on UNIs and ENIs.

An 802.1Q trunk port carries the traffic of multiple VLANs and by default is a member of all VLANs in the VLAN database. A trunk port supports simultaneous tagged and untagged traffic. An 802.1Q trunk port is assigned a default Port VLAN ID (PVID), and all untagged traffic travels on the port default PVID. All untagged traffic and tagged traffic with a NULL VLAN ID are assumed to belong to the port default PVID. A packet with a VLAN ID equal to the outgoing port default PVID is sent untagged. All other traffic is sent with a VLAN tag.

Although by default a trunk port is a member of multiple VLANs, you can limit VLAN membership by configuring an allowed list of VLANs for each trunk port. The list of allowed VLANs does not affect any other port but the associated trunk port. By default, all possible VLANs (VLAN ID 1 to 4094) are in the allowed list. A trunk port can become a member of a VLAN only if the VLAN is in the enabled state.

For more information about trunk ports, see Configuring VLANs

Tunnel ports are used in 802.1Q tunneling to segregate the traffic of customers in a service-provider network from other customers who are using the same VLAN number. You configure an asymmetric link from a tunnel port on a service-provider edge switch to an 802.1Q trunk port on the customer switch. Packets entering the tunnel port on the edge switch, already IEEE 802.1Q-tagged with the customer VLANs, are encapsulated with another layer of an 802.1Q tag (called the metro tag), containing a VLAN ID unique in the service-provider network, for each customer. The double-tagged packets go through the service-provider network keeping the original customer VLANs separate from those of other customers. At the outbound interface, also a tunnel port, the metro tag is removed, and the original VLAN numbers from the customer network are retrieved.

Note: IEEE 802.1Q tunneling is only supported when the switch is running the IP Services license.

Tunnel ports cannot be trunk ports or access ports and must belong to a VLAN unique to each customer.

A routed port is a physical port that acts like a port on a router; it does not have to be connected to a router. A routed port is not associated with a particular VLAN, as is an access port. A routed port behaves like a regular router interface, except that it does not support VLAN subinterfaces. Routed ports can be configured with a Layer 3 routing protocol. A routed port is a Layer 3 interface only and does not support Layer 2 protocols, such as STP.

Configure routed ports by putting the interface into Layer 3 mode with the no switchport interface configuration command. Then assign an IP address to the port, enable routing, and assign routing protocol characteristics by using the ip routing and router protocol global configuration commands.

Note: Entering a no switchport interface configuration command shuts down the interface and then re-enables it, which might generate messages on the device to which the interface is connected. When you put an interface that is in Layer 2 mode into Layer 3 mode, the previous configuration information related to the affected interface might be lost.

The number of routed ports that you can configure is not limited by software. However, the interrelationship between this number and the number of other features being configured might impact CPU performance because of hardware limitations. See Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces for information about what happens when hardware resource limitations are reached.

Note: For full Layer 3 routing, you must have the IP services image installed on the switch

A switch virtual interface (SVI) represents a VLAN of switch ports as one interface to the routing or bridging function in the system. Only one SVI can be associated with a VLAN, but you need to configure an SVI for a VLAN only when you wish to route between VLANs or to provide IP host connectivity to the switch. By default, an SVI is created for the default VLAN (VLAN 1) to permit remote switch administration. Additional SVIs must be explicitly configured.

Note: You cannot delete interface VLAN 1.

SVIs provide IP host connectivity only to the system; in Layer 3 mode, you can configure routing across SVIs.

Although the switch supports a total of 1005 VLANs (and SVIs), the interrelationship between the number of SVIs and routed ports and the number of other features being configured might impact CPU performance because of hardware limitations. See Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces for information about what happens when hardware resource limitations are reached.

SVIs are created the first time that you enter the vlan interface configuration command for a VLAN interface. The VLAN corresponds to the VLAN tag associated with data frames on an IEEE 802.1Q encapsulated trunk or the VLAN ID configured for an access port. Configure a VLAN interface for each VLAN for which you want to route traffic, and assign it an IP address. For more information, see Manually Assigning IP Information to SVIs.

Note: When you create an SVI, it does not become active until it is associated with a physical port.

SVIs support routing protocols.

Note: Routed ports (or SVIs) are supported only when the IP services image is installed on the switch.

EtherChannel port groups treat multiple switch ports as one switch port. These port groups act as a single logical port for high-bandwidth connections between switches or between switches and servers. An EtherChannel balances the traffic load across the links in the channel. If a link within the EtherChannel fails, traffic previously carried over the failed link changes to the remaining links. You can group multiple trunk ports into one logical trunk port, group multiple access ports into one logical access port, group multiple tunnel ports into one logical tunnel port, or group multiple routed ports into one logical routed port. Most protocols operate over either single ports or aggregated switch ports and do not recognize the physical ports within the port group. Exceptions are the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), and the Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), which operate only on physical NNI or ENI ports.

When you configure an EtherChannel, you create a port-channel logical interface and assign an interface to the EtherChannel. For Layer 3 interfaces, you manually create the logical interface by using the interface port-channel global configuration command. Then you manually assign an interface to the EtherChannel by using the channel-group interface configuration command. For Layer 2 interfaces, use the channel-group interface configuration command to dynamically create the port-channel logical interface. This command binds the physical and logical ports together. For more information, see Configuring EtherChannels

PoE-capable switch ports automatically supply power to these connected devices (if the switch senses that there is no power on the circuit):

■Cisco pre-standard powered devices (such as Cisco IP Phones and Cisco Aironet access points)

■802.3af/802.3at-compliant powered devices

A powered device can receive redundant power when it is connected only to a PoE switch port and to an AC power source.

After the switch detects a powered device, it determines the device power requirements and then grants or denies power to the device. The switch can also sense the real-time power consumption of the device by monitoring and policing the power usage.

This section has this PoE information:

■Supported Protocols and Standards

■Powered-Device Detection and Initial Power Allocation

■Power Management Modes

The switch uses these protocols and standards to support PoE:

■CDP with power consumption—The powered device notifies the switch of the amount of power it is consuming. The switch does not reply to the power-consumption messages. The switch can only supply power to or remove power from the PoE port.

■Cisco intelligent power management—The powered device and the switch negotiate through power-negotiation CDP messages for an agreed power-consumption level. The negotiation allows a high-power Cisco powered device, which consumes more than 7 W, to operate at its highest power mode. The powered device first boots up in low-power mode, consumes less than 7 W, and negotiates to obtain enough power to operate in high-power mode. The device changes to high-power mode only when it receives confirmation from the switch.

High-power devices can operate in low-power mode on switches that do not support power-negotiation CDP.

Cisco intelligent power management is backward-compatible with CDP with power consumption; the switch responds according to the CDP message that it receives. CDP is not supported on third-party powered devices; therefore, the switch uses the IEEE classification to determine the power usage of the device.

■IEEE 802.3af/802.3at—The major features of this standard are powered-device discovery, power administration, disconnect detection, and optional powered-device power classification. For more information, see the standard.

The switch detects a Cisco pre-standard or an IEEE-compliant powered device when the PoE-capable port is in the no-shutdown state, PoE is enabled (the default), and the connected device is not being powered by an AC adaptor.

After device detection, the switch determines the device power requirements based on its type:

■A Cisco pre-standard powered device does not provide its power requirement when the switch detects it, so the switch allocates 15.4 W as the initial allocation for power budgeting.

The initial power allocation is the maximum amount of power that a powered device requires. The switch initially allocates this amount of power when it detects and powers the powered device. As the switch receives CDP messages from the powered device and as the powered device negotiates power levels with the switch through CDP power-negotiation messages, the initial power allocation might be adjusted.

■The switch classifies the detected IEEE device within a power consumption class. Based on the available power in the power budget, the switch determines if a port can be powered. Table 1 lists these levels.

Class
Maximum Power Level Required from the Switch

0 (class status unknown)

15.4 W

1

4 W

2

7 W

3

15.4 W

4 (POE+)

30 W (requires LLDP)

Note: Prior to release 15.2(6)E1, if a rack mounted, IE4010 or IE5000 series switch, was powered by 2 PWR-RGD-AC-DC-250 power supplies, the correct total PoE budget (385W) as indicated in the Data Sheet, would not be displayed. If the proper total power budget isn’t displayed on your switch, upgrade to release 15.2(6)E1 or later.

The switch monitors and tracks requests for power and grants power only when it is available. The switch tracks its power budget (the amount of power available on the switch for PoE). The switch performs power-accounting calculations when a port is granted or denied power to keep the power budget up to date.

After power is applied to the port, the switch uses CDP to determine the actual power consumption requirement of the connected Cisco powered devices, and the switch adjusts the power budget accordingly. This does not apply to third-party PoE devices. The switch processes a request and either grants or denies power. If the request is granted, the switch updates the power budget. If the request is denied, the switch ensures that power to the port is turned off, generates a syslog message, and updates the LEDs. Powered devices can also negotiate with the switch for more power.

If the switch detects a fault caused by an undervoltage, overvoltage, overtemperature, oscillator-fault, or short-circuit condition, it turns off power to the port, generates a syslog message, and updates the power budget and LEDs.

Note: IE switches may show occasional PoE controller error messages on the console, for example:

%ILPOWER-3-CONTROLLER_ERR: Controller error, Controller number 0: accessing failed
 

This can occur when there are no powered devices connected and all ports continue to function normally. There are no workarounds. These messages can be ignored.

If these or any other errors seen cause performance issues, contact Cisco support.

To limit the overall PoE budget of DIN rail switches such as the IE-4000, use the global configuration command power inline wattage max <4-125>.

Note - This command does not apply to rack-mount switches with integrated power supplies, such as the IE-4010 and IE-5000.

The switch supports these PoE modes:

auto —The switch automatically detects if the connected device requires power. If the switch discovers a powered device connected to the port and if the switch has enough power, it grants power, updates the power budget, turns on power to the port on a first-come, first-served basis, and updates the LEDs. For LED information, see the hardware installation guide.

If the switch has enough power for all the powered devices, they all come up. If enough power is available for all powered devices connected to the switch, power is turned on to all devices. If there is not enough available PoE, or if a device is disconnected and reconnected while other devices are waiting for power, it cannot be determined which devices are granted or are denied power.

If granting power would exceed the system power budget, the switch denies power, ensures that power to the port is turned off, generates a syslog message, and updates the LEDs. After power has been denied, the switch periodically rechecks the power budget and continues to attempt to grant the request for power.

If a device being powered by the switch is then connected to wall power, the switch might continue to power the device. The switch might continue to report that it is still powering the device whether the device is being powered by the switch or receiving power from an AC power source.

If a powered device is removed, the switch automatically detects the disconnect and removes power from the port. You can connect a nonpowered device without damaging it.

You can specify the maximum wattage that is allowed on the port. If the IEEE class maximum wattage of the powered device is greater than the configured maximum value, the switch does not provide power to the port. If the switch powers a powered device, but the powered device later requests through CDP messages more than the configured maximum value, the switch removes power to the port. The power that was allocated to the powered device is reclaimed into the global power budget. If you do not specify a wattage, the switch delivers the maximum value. Use the auto setting on any PoE port. The auto mode is the default setting.

static —The switch pre-allocates power to the port (even when no powered device is connected) and guarantees that power will be available for the port. The switch allocates the port configured maximum wattage, and the amount is never adjusted through the IEEE class or by CDP messages from the powered device. Because power is pre-allocated, any powered device that uses less than or equal to the maximum wattage is guaranteed to be powered when it is connected to the static port. The port no longer participates in the first-come, first-served model.

However, if the powered-device IEEE class is greater than the maximum wattage, the switch does not supply power to it. If the switch learns through CDP messages that the powered device needs more than the maximum wattage, the powered device is shutdown.

If you do not specify a wattage, the switch pre-allocates the maximum value. The switch powers the port only if it discovers a powered device. Use the static setting on a high-priority interface.

never —The switch disables powered-device detection and never powers the PoE port even if an unpowered device is connected. Use this mode only when you want to make sure power is never applied to a PoE-capable port, making the port a data-only port.

For information on configuring a PoE port, see Configuring a Power Management Mode on a PoE Port.

When policing of the real-time power consumption is enabled, the switch takes action when a powered device consumes more power than the maximum amount allocated, also referred to as the cutoff-power value.

When PoE is enabled, the switch senses the real-time power consumption of the powered device. The switch monitors the real-time power consumption of the connected powered device; this is called power monitoring or power sensing. The switch also polices the power usage with the power policing feature.

Power monitoring is backward-compatible with Cisco intelligent power management and CDP-based power consumption. It works with these features to ensure that the PoE port can supply power to the powered device. For more information about these PoE features, see Supported Protocols and Standards.

The switch senses the real-time power consumption of the connected device as follows:

1. The switch monitors the real-time power consumption on individual ports.

2. The switch records the power consumption, including peak power usage. The switch reports the information through the CISCO-POWER-ETHERNET-EXT-MIB.

3. If power policing is enabled, the switch polices power usage by comparing the real-time power consumption to the maximum power allocated to the device. For more information about the maximum power consumption, also referred to as the cutoff power, on a PoE port, see Maximum Power Allocation (Cutoff Power) on a PoE Port.

If the device uses more than the maximum power allocation on the port, the switch can either turn off power to the port, or the switch can generate a syslog message and update the LEDs (the port LED is now blinking amber) while still providing power to the device based on the switch configuration. By default, power-usage policing is disabled on all PoE ports.

If error recovery from the PoE error-disabled state is enabled, the switch automatically takes the PoE port out of the error-disabled state after the specified amount of time.

If error recovery is disabled, you can manually re-enable the PoE port by using the shutdown and no shutdown interface configuration commands.

4. If policing is disabled, no action occurs when the powered device consumes more than the maximum power allocation on the PoE port, which could adversely affect the switch.

When power policing is enabled, the switch determines one of the these values as the cutoff power on the PoE port in this order:

1. Manually when you set the user-defined power level that the switch budgets for the port by using the power inline consumption default wattage global or interface configuration command

2. Manually when you set the user-defined power level that limits the power allowed on the port by using the power inline auto max max-wattage or the power inline static max max-wattage interface configuration command

3. Automatically when the switch sets the power usage of the device by using CDP power negotiation or by the IEEE classification

4. Automatically when the switch sets the power usage to be the default value of 15400 mW

Use the first or second method in the previous list to manually configure the cutoff-power value by entering the power inline consumption default wattage or the power inline [ auto | static max ] max-wattage command. If you are not manually configuring the cutoff-power value, the switch automatically determines the value by using CDP power negotiation or the device IEEE classification, which is the third method in the previous list. If the switch cannot determine the value by using one of these methods, it uses the default value of 15400 mW (the fourth method in the previous list).

You can configure the initial power allocation and the maximum power allocation on a port. However, these values are only the configured values that determine when the switch should turn on or turn off power on the PoE port. The maximum power allocation is not the same as the actual power consumption of the powered device. The actual cutoff power value that the switch uses for power policing is not equal to the configured power value.

When power policing is enabled, the switch polices the power usage at the switch port, which is greater than the power consumption of the device. When you are manually set the maximum power allocation, you must consider the power loss over the cable from the switch port to the powered device. The cutoff power is the sum of the rated power consumption of the powered device and the worst-case power loss over the cable.

The actual amount of power consumed by a powered device on a PoE port is the cutoff-power value plus a calibration factor of 500 mW (0.5 W). The actual cutoff value is approximate and varies from the configured value by a percentage of the configured value. For example, if the configured cutoff power is 12 W, the actual cutoff-value is 11.4 W, which is 5% less than the configured value.

We recommend that you enable power policing when PoE is enabled on your switch. For example, if policing is disabled and you set the cutoff-power value by using the power inline auto max 6300 interface configuration command, the configured maximum power allocation on the PoE port is 6.3 W (6300 mW). The switch provides power to the connected devices on the port if the device needs up to 6.3 W. If the CDP-power negotiated value or the IEEE classification value exceeds the configured cutoff value, the switch does not provide power to the connected device. After the switch turns on power on the PoE port, the switch does not police the real-time power consumption of the device, and the device can consume more power than the maximum allocate d amount, which could adversely affect the switch and the devices connected to the other PoE ports.

Because the switch supports internal power supplies and the Cisco Redundant Power System 2300 (also referred to as the RPS 2300), the total amount of power available for the powered devices varies depending on the power supply configuration.

The switch supports dual power supplies. If a power supply is removed or fails and the switch does not have enough power for the powered devices, the switch first denies power to low-priority ports in descending order of port numbers, and then to high priority ports in descending numbers. The total available PoE power is 65 watts per power supply.

■If a power supply is removed and replaced by a new power supply with less power and the switch does not have enough power for the powered devices, the switch denies power to the PoE ports in auto mode in descending order of the port numbers. If the switch still does not have enough power, the switch then denies power to the PoE ports in static mode in descending order of the port numbers.

■If the new power supply supports more power than the previous one and the switch now has more power available, the switch grants power to the PoE ports in static mode in ascending order of the port numbers. If it still has power available, the switch then grants power to the PoE ports in auto mode in ascending order of the port numbers.

Each dual-purpose port is considered a single interface with dual front ends (an RJ-45 connector and an SFP module connector). The dual front ends are not redundant interfaces; the switch activates only one connector of the pair.

By default, dual-purpose ports are user-network interfaces (UNIs) and SFP-only module ports are network node interfaces (NNIs). TBy default, the switch dynamically selects the dual-purpose port media type that first links up. However, you can use the media-type interface configuration command to manually select the RJ-45 connector or the SFP module connector.

Each dual-purpose port has two LEDs: one shows the status of the SFP module port, and one shows the status of the RJ-45 port. The port LED is on for whichever connector is active. For more information about the LEDs, see the hardware installation guide.

Devices within a single VLAN can communicate directly through any switch. Ports in different VLANs cannot exchange data without going through a routing device. With a standard Layer 2 switch, ports in different VLANs have to exchange information through a router.

By default, the switch provides VLAN isolation between UNIs or ENIs. UNIs and ENIs cannot exchange traffic unless they are changed to NNIs or assigned to a UNI-ENI community VLAN.

By using the switch with routing enabled, when you configure both VLAN 20 and VLAN 30 with an SVI to which an IP address is assigned, packets can be sent from Host A to Host B directly through the switch with no need for an external router (Figure 1).

Figure 1 Connecting VLANs with the Switch

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

When the IP services image is running on the switch, routing can be enabled on the switch. Whenever possible, to maintain high performance, forwarding is done by the switch hardware. However, only IP Version 4 packets with Ethernet II encapsulation can be routed in hardware. The routing function can be enabled on all SVIs and routed ports. The switch routes only IP traffic. When IP routing protocol parameters and address configuration are added to an SVI or routed port, any IP traffic received from these ports is routed.

Note: Windows PCs require a driver for the USB port. See the hardware installation guide for driver installation instructions.

Use the supplied USB Type A-to-USB mini-Type B cable to connect a PC or other device to the switch. The connected device must include a terminal emulation application. When the switch detects a valid USB connection to a powered-on device that supports host functionality (such as a PC), input from the RJ-45 console is immediately disabled, and input from the USB console is enabled. Removing the USB connection immediately reenables input from the RJ-45 console connection. A LED on the switch shows which console connection is in use.

At software startup, a log shows whether the USB or the RJ-45 console port is active. The switch first displays the RJ-45 media type.

In the sample output, the switch has a connected USB console cable. Because the bootloader did not change to the USB console, the first log from the switch shows the RJ-45 console. A short time later, the console changes and the USB console log appears.

switch
*Mar 1 00:01:00.171: %USB_CONSOLE-6-MEDIA_RJ45: Console media-type is RJ45.
*Mar 1 00:01:00.431: %USB_CONSOLE-6-MEDIA_USB: Console media-type is USB.
 

When the USB cable is removed or the PC de-activates the USB connection, the hardware automatically changes to the RJ-45 console interface:

switch
Mar 1 00:20:48.635: %USB_CONSOLE-6-MEDIA_RJ45: Console media-type is RJ45.
 

You can configure the console type to always be RJ-45, and you can configure an inactivity timeout for the USB connector.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to select the RJ-45 console media type. If you configure the RJ-45 console, USB console operation is disabled, and input always remains with the RJ-45 console.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

line console 0

Configure the console. Enter line configuration mode.

3.

media-type rj45

Configure the console media type to always be RJ-45. If you do not enter this command and both types are connected, the default is USB.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show running-configuration

Verify your settings.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

This example disables the USB console media type and enables the RJ-45 console media type.

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# line console 0
Switch(config-line)# media-type rj45
 

A log shows that this termination has occurred. This example shows that the console on switch reverted to RJ-45.

*Mar 1 00:25:36.860: %USB_CONSOLE-6-CONFIG_DISABLE: Console media-type USB disabled by system configuration, media-type reverted to RJ45.
 

A log entry shows when a console cable is attached. If a USB console cable is connected to the switch, it is prevented from providing input.

*Mar 1 00:34:27.498: %USB_CONSOLE-6-CONFIG_DISALLOW: Console media-type USB is disallowed by system configuration, media-type remains RJ45.
 

This example reverses the previous configuration and immediately activates the USB console that is connected.

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# line console 0
Switch(config-line)# no media-type rj45

The switch supports these interface types:

■Physical ports—switch ports, routed ports, UNIs, NNIs, and ENIs

■VLANs—switch virtual interfaces

■Port-channels—EtherChannel interfaces

You can also configure a range of interfaces (see Configuring a Range of Interfaces).

To configure a physical interface (port), specify the interface type, the module number, and the switch port number, and enter interface configuration mode.

■Type — 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports, Gigabit Ethernet (gigabitethernet or gi), TenGigabitEthernet (tengigethernet or te) for or small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

■Module number — The module or slot number on the switch.

■Port number—The interface number on the switch. The port numbers always begin at 1, starting with the leftmost port when facing the front of the switch, for example, gigabitethernet 1/1. If there is more than one interface type (for example, 10/100 ports and SFP module ports), the port numbers restart with the second interface type: gigabitethernet 1/1.

You can identify physical interfaces by physically checking the interface location on the switch. You can also use the show privileged EXEC commands to display information about a specific interface or all the interfaces on the switch. The remainder of this chapter primarily provides physical interface configuration procedures.

These general instructions apply to all interface configuration processes.

1. Enter the configure terminal command at the privileged EXEC prompt:

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)#
 

2. Enter the interface global configuration command. Identify the interface type and the number of the connector. In this example, Fast Ethernet port 1 is selected:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)#
 

Note: You do not need to add a space between the interface type and interface number. For example, in the preceding line, you can specify either fastethernet 0/1, fastethernet0/1, fa 0/1, or fa0/1.

3. If you are configuring a UNI or ENI, enter the no shutdown interface configuration command to enable the interface:

Switch(config-if)# no shutdown
 

4. Follow each interface command with the interface configuration commands that the interface requires. The commands that you enter define the protocols and applications that will run on the interface. The commands are collected and applied to the interface when you enter another interface command or enter end to return to privileged EXEC mode.

You can also configure a range of interfaces by using the interface range or interface range macro global configuration commands. Interfaces configured in a range must be the same type and must be configured with the same feature options.

5. After you configure an interface, verify its status by using the show privileged EXEC commands listed in the Monitoring and Maintaining the Interfaces.

Enter the show interfaces privileged EXEC command to see a list of all interfaces on or configured for the switch. A report is provided for each interface that the device supports or for the specified interface.

You can use the interface range global configuration command to configure multiple interfaces with the same configuration parameters. When you enter the interface range configuration mode, all command parameters that you enter are attributed to all interfaces within that range until you exit this mode.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a range of interfaces with the same parameters:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface range { port-range }

Specify the range of interfaces (VLANs or physical ports) to be configured, and enter interface range configuration mode.

■You can use the interface range command to configure up to five port ranges or a previously defined macro.

■In a comma-separated port-range, you must enter the interface type for each entry and enter spaces before and after the comma.

■In a hyphen-separated port-range, you do not need to re-enter the interface type, but you must enter a space before the hyphen.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the port, if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled, and NNIs are enabled.

4.

Use the normal configuration commands to apply the configuration parameters to all interfaces in the range.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show interfaces [ interface-id ]

Verify the configuration of the interfaces in the range.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

When using the interface range global configuration command, note these guidelines:

■Valid entries for port-range :

vlan vlan-ID - vlan-ID, where the VLAN ID is 1 to 4094

gigabitethernet module/{ first port } - { last port }, where the module is always 1

tengigabitethernet module/{ first port } - { last port }, where the module is always 1

port-channel port-channel-number - port-channel-number, where the port-channel-number is 1 to 10.

When you use the interface range command with port channels, the first and last port channel number must be active port channels.

■The interface range command only works with VLAN interfaces that have been configured with the interface vlan command. The show running-config privileged EXEC command displays the configured VLAN interfaces. VLAN interfaces not displayed by the show running-config command cannot be used with the interface range command.

■All interfaces defined as in a range must be the same type (all Fast Ethernet ports, all Gigabit Ethernet ports, all EtherChannel ports, or all VLANs), but you can enter multiple ranges in a command.

This example shows how to use the interface range global configuration command to set the speed on ports 1 and 2 to 100 Mbps:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface range fastethernet0/1 - 2
Switch(config-if-range)# no shutdown
Switch(config-if-range)# speed 100
 

This example shows how to use a comma to add different interface type strings to the range to enable Fast Ethernet ports 1 to 3 and Gigabit Ethernet ports 1 and 2 to receive 802.3x flow control pause frames:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface range fastethernet0/1 - 3, GigabitEthernet1/17 - 2
Switch(config-if-range)# flowcontrol receive on
 

If you enter multiple configuration commands while you are in interface range mode, each command is executed as it is entered. The commands are not batched together and executed after you exit interface range mode. If you exit interface range configuration mode while the commands are being executed, some commands might not be executed on all interfaces in the range. Wait until the command prompt reappears before exiting interface range configuration mode.

You can create an interface range macro to automatically select a range of interfaces for configuration. Before you can use the macro keyword in the interface range macro global configuration command string, you must use the define interface-range global configuration command to define the macro.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to define an interface range macro:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

define interface-range macro_name interface-range

Define the interface-range macro, and save it in NVRAM.

■The macro_name is a 32-character maximum character string.

■A macro can contain up to five comma-separated interface ranges.

■Each interface-range must consist of the same port type.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the port, if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled, and NNIs are enabled.

4.

interface range macro macro_name

Select the interface range to be configured using the values saved in the interface-range macro called macro_name.

You can now use the normal configuration commands to apply the configuration to all interfaces in the defined macro.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show running-config | include define

Show the defined interface range macro configuration.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no define interface-range macro_name global configuration command to delete a macro.

When using the define interface-range global configuration command, note these guidelines:

■Valid entries for interface-range :

vlan vlan-ID - vlan-ID, where the VLAN ID is 1 to 4094

gigabitethernet module/{ first port } - { last port }, where the module is always 1

tengigabitethernet module/{ first port } - { last port }, where the module is always 1

port-channel port-channel-number - port-channel-number, where the port-channel-number is 1 to 10.

When you use the interface ranges with port channels, the first and last port channel number must be active port channels.

■You must add a space between the first interface number and the hyphen when entering an interface-range. For example, GigabitEthernet1 /17 - 18 is a valid range; GigabitEthernet1/17-18 is not a valid range.

■The VLAN interfaces must have been configured with the interface vlan command. The show running-config privileged EXEC command displays the configured VLAN interfaces. VLAN interfaces not displayed by the show running-config command cannot be used as interface-ranges.

■All interfaces defined as in a range must be the same type (all Fast Ethernet ports, all Gigabit Ethernet ports, all EtherChannel ports, or all VLANs), but you can combine multiple interface types in a macro.

This example shows how to define an interface-range named enet_list to include ports 1 and 2 and to verify the macro configuration:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# define interface-range enet_list GigabitEthernet1/17 - 2
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show running-config | include define
define interface-range enet_list GigabitEthernet1/17 - 2
 

This example shows how to create a multiple-interface macro named macro1 and assign all of the interfaces in the range to a VLAN:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# define interface-range macro1 fastethernet0/1 - 2, GigabitEthernet1/17 - 2
Switch(config)# interface range macro macro1
Switch(config-if-range)# switchport access vlan 20
Switch(config-if-range)# no shut
Switch(config-if-range)# end
 

This example shows how to enter interface range configuration mode for the interface-range macro enet_list :

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface range macro enet_list
Switch(config-if-range)#
 

This example shows how to delete the interface-range macro enet_list and to verify that it was deleted.

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# no define interface-range enet_list
Switch(config)# end
Switch# show run | include define
Switch#

■Default Ethernet Interface Configuration

■Configuring the Port Type

■Configuring Interface Speed and Duplex Mode

■Configuring a Power Management Mode on a PoE Port

■Budgeting Power for Devices Connected to a PoE Port

■Configuring IEEE 802.3x Flow Control

■Configuring Auto-MDIX on an Interface

■Adding a Description for an Interface

Table 6 shows the Ethernet interface default configuration for NNIs, and Table 7 shows the Ethernet interface default configuration for UNIs and ENIs. For more details on the VLAN parameters listed in the table, see Configuring VLANs

Note: To configure Layer 2 parameters, if the interface is in Layer 3 mode, you must enter the switchport interface configuration command without any parameters to put the interface into Layer 2 mode. This shuts down the interface and then re-enables it, which might generate messages on the device to which the interface is connected. When you put an interface that is in Layer 3 mode into Layer 2 mode, the previous configuration information related to the affected interface might be lost, and the interface is returned to its default configuration.

Table 6 Default Ethernet Configuration for NNIs

Feature
Default Setting

Operating mode

Layer 2 or switching mode ( switchport command).

Allowed VLAN range

VLANs 1– 4094.

Default VLAN (for access ports)

VLAN 1 (Layer 2 interfaces only).

Native VLAN (for 802.1Q trunks)

VLAN 1 (Layer 2 interfaces only).

VLAN trunking

Switchport mode access (Layer 2 interfaces only).

Port enable state

Enabled.

Port description

None defined.

Speed

Autonegotiate.

Duplex mode

Full.

802.3x flow control

Flow control is set to receive : off. It is always off for sent packets.

EtherChannel

Disabled on all Ethernet ports. See Configuring EtherChannels

Port blocking (unknown multicast and unknown unicast traffic)

Disabled (not blocked) (only Layer 2 interfaces).

Broadcast, multicast, and unicast storm control

Disabled.

Port security

Disabled (only Layer 2 interfaces).

Port Fast

Disabled.

Auto-MDIX

Enabled.

Note: The switch might not support a pre-standard powered device—such as Cisco IP phones and access points that do not fully support 802.3af/802.3at—if that powered device is connected to the switch through a crossover cable. This is regardless of whether auto-MIDX is enabled on the switch port.

Power over Ethernet (PoE)

Enabled (auto).

Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP)

Enabled.

VMPS

Not configured.

Table 7 Default Ethernet Configuration for UNIs and ENIs

Feature
Default Setting

Operating mode

Layer 2 or switching mode ( switchport command).

Allowed VLAN range

VLANs 1– 4094.

Default VLAN (for access ports)

VLAN 1 (Layer 2 interfaces only).

Native VLAN (for 802.1Q trunks)

VLAN 1 (Layer 2 interfaces only).

VLAN trunking

Switchport mode access (Layer 2 interfaces only).

Dynamic VLAN

Enabled.

Port enable state

Disabled when no configuration file exists.

Port description

None defined.

Speed

Autonegotiate.

Duplex mode

Autonegotiate.

802.3x flow control

Flow control is set to receive : off. It is always off for sent packets.

EtherChannel

Disabled on all Ethernet ports. See Configuring EtherChannels

Port blocking (unknown multicast and unknown unicast traffic)

Disabled (not blocked) (only Layer 2 interfaces).

Broadcast, multicast, and unicast storm control

Disabled.

Port security

Disabled (only Layer 2 interfaces).

Auto-MDIX

Enabled.

By default, all the 10/100 ports on the switch are configured as UNIs, and the SFP module ports are configured as NNIs.

You use the port-type interface configuration command to change the port types. An ENI has the same characteristics as a UNI, but it can be configured to support CDP, STP, LLDP, and Etherchannel LACP and PAgP.

When a port is changed from an NNI to a UNI or ENI, it inherits the configuration of the assigned VLAN, either in isolated or community mode.

When you change a port from NNI to UNI or ENI or the reverse, any features exclusive to the port type revert to the default configuration. For Layer 2 protocols, such as STP, CDP, and LLDP, the default for UNIs and ENIs is disabled (although they can be enabled on ENIs) and the default for NNIs is enabled.

Note: By default, the switch sends keepalive messages on UNI s and ENIs and does not send keepalive messages on NNIs. Changing the port type from UNI or ENI to NNI or from NNI to UNI or ENI has no effect on the keepalive status. You can change the keepalive state from the default setting by entering the [ no ] keepalive interface configuration command. If you enter the keepalive command with no arguments, keepalive packets are sent with the default time interval (10 seconds) and number of retries (5). Entering the no keepalive command disables keepalive packets on the interface.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the port type on an interface:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode

2.

interface interface-id

Specify the interface to configure, and enter interface configuration mode.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the port, if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled, and NNIs are enabled.

4.

port-type { eni | nni | uni }

Change a port to an ENI, NNI, or UNI.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show interfaces interface-id

Verify the interface 802.3x flow control settings.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Entering the no port-type or default port-type interface configuration command returns the port to the default state: UNI for Fast Ethernet ports and NNI for Gigabit Ethernet ports.

This example shows how to change a port from a UNI to an NNI and save it to the running configuration.

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# port-type nni
Switch(config-if)# no shutdown
5d20h: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console
Switch(config-if)# end
Switch# copy running-config startup-config

Ethernet interfaces on the switch operate at 10, 100, or 1000 Mbps and in either full- or half-duplex mode. In full-duplex mode, two stations can send and receive traffic at the same time. Normally, 10-Mbps ports operate in half-duplex mode, which means that stations can either receive or send traffic.

Switch models include combinations of Fast Ethernet (10/100-Mbps) ports, Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000-Mbps) ports, and small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module slots supporting SFP modules.

These sections describe how to configure the interface speed and duplex mode:

■Speed and Duplex Configuration Guidelines

■Setting the Interface Speed and Duplex Parameters

When configuring an interface speed and duplex mode, note these guidelines:

■You can configure interface speed on Fast Ethernet (10/100-Mbps) and Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000-Mbps) ports. You can configure Fast Ethernet ports to full-duplex, half-duplex, or to autonegotiate mode. You can configure Gigabit Ethernet ports to full-duplex mode or to autonegotiate. You also can configure Gigabit Ethernet ports to half-duplex mode if the speed is 10 or 100 Mbps. Half-duplex mode is not supported on Gigabit Ethernet ports operating at 1000 Mbps.

■With the exception of when 1000BASE-T SFP modules are installed in the SFP module slots, you cannot configure speed on SFP module ports, but you can configure speed to not negotiate (nonegotiate) if connected to a device that does not support autonegotiation.

However, when a 1000BASE-T SFP module is in the SFP module slot, you can configure speed as 10, 100, or 1000 Mbps, or auto, but not as nonegotiate.

On a 100BASE-FX SFP module, you cannot configure the speed as nonegotiate.

■You cannot configure duplex mode on SFP module ports; they operate in full-duplex mode except in these situations:

–When a Cisco1000BASE-T SFP module is in the SFP module slot, you can configure duplex mode to auto or full. Half-duplex mode is supported with the auto setting.

–When a Cisco100BASE-FX SFP module is in the SFP module slot, you can configure duplex mode to half or full (the default for this SFP module). Although the auto keyword is available, it puts the interface in full-duplex mode because the 100BASE-FX SFP module does not support autonegotiation.

■If both ends of the line support autonegotiation, we highly recommend the default setting of auto negotiation.

■If you configure the speed as nonegotiate on one device and configure auto negotiation on the remote device, the port may go down on some platforms. The IEEE specification does not define the expected behavior of an auto negotiation mismatch on a 1000BaseX link. The link may or may not come up.

■If one interface supports autonegotiation and the other end does not, configure duplex and speed on both interfaces; do not use the auto setting on the supported side.

■When STP is enabled and a port is reconfigured, the switch can take up to 30 seconds to check for loops. The port LED is amber while STP reconfigures.

Caution: Changing the interface speed and duplex mode configuration might shut down and re-enable the interface during the reconfiguration.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set the speed and duplex mode for a physical interface.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Specify the physical interface to be configured, and enter interface configuration mode.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the port, if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled, and NNIs are enabled.

4.

speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | auto [ 10 | 100 | 1000 ] | nonegotiate }

Enter the appropriate speed parameter for the interface:

■Enter 10, 100, or 1000 to set a specific speed for the interface. The 1000 keyword is available only for 10/100/1000 Mbps ports or SFP module ports with a 1000BASE-T SFP module.

■Enter auto to enable the interface to autonegotiate speed with the connected device. If you use the 10, 100, or the 1000 keywords with the auto keyword, the port autonegotiates only at the specified speeds.

■The nonegotiate keyword is available only for SFP module ports. SFP module ports operate only at 1000 Mbps but can be configured to not negotiate if connected to a device that does not support autonegotiation.

Note: When a Cisco1000BASE-T SFP module is in the SFP module slot, the speed can be configured to 10, 100, 1000, or to auto, but not to nonegotiate.

5.

duplex { auto | full | half }

Enter the duplex parameter for the interface.

Note: The default duplex mode is full when an FE SFP module is inserted.

Enable half-duplex mode (for interfaces operating only at 10 or 100 Mbps). You cannot configure half-duplex mode for interfaces operating at 1000 Mbps.

You can configure the duplex setting when the speed is set to auto.

This command is not available on SFP module ports with these exceptions:

■If a Cisco 1000BASE-T SFP module is inserted, you can configure duplex to auto or to full.

■If a Cisco 100BASE-FX SFP module is inserted, you can configure duplex to full or to half. Although the auto keyword is available, it puts the interface in half-duplex mode (the default).

6.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

7.

show interfaces interface-id

Display the interface speed and duplex mode configuration.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no speed and no duplex interface configuration commands to return the interface to the default speed and duplex settings (autonegotiate). To return all interface settings to the defaults, use the default interface interface-id interface configuration command.

This example shows how to set the interface speed to 10 Mbps and the duplex mode to half on a 10/100 Mbps port:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface fasttethernet0/3
Switch(config-if)# no shutdown
Switch(config-if)# speed 10
Switch(config-if)# duplex half
 

This example shows how to set the interface speed to 100 Mbps on a 10/100/1000 Mbps port:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/18
Switch(config-if)# speed 100

For most situations, the default configuration (auto mode) works well, providing plug-and-play operation. No further configuration is required. However, use the following procedure to give a PoE port higher priority, to make it data only, or to specify a maximum wattage to disallow high-power powered devices on a port.

Note: When you make PoE configuration changes, the port being configured drops power. Depending on the new configuration, the state of the other PoE ports, and the state of the power budget, the port might not be powered up again. For example, port 1 is in the auto and on state, and you configure it for static mode. The switch removes power from port 1, detects the powered device, and repowers the port. If port 1 is in the auto and on state and you configure it with a maximum wattage of 10 W, the switch removes power from the port and then redetects the powered device. The switch repowers the port only if the powered device is a Class 1, Class 2, or a Cisco-only powered device.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a power management mode on a PoE-capable port:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Specify the physical port to be configured, and enter interface configuration mode.

3.

power inline { auto [ max max-wattage ] | never | static [ max max-wattage ]}

Configure the PoE mode on the port. The keywords have these meanings:

auto —Enable powered-device detection. If enough power is available, automatically allocate power to the PoE port after device detection. This is the default setting.

(Optional) max max-wattage— L imit the power allowed on the port. The range is 4000 to 30000 mW. The default is 30000 mW.

never —Disable device detection, and disable power to the port.

Note: If a port has a Cisco powered device connected to it, do not use the power inline never command to configure the port. A false link-up can occur, placing the port into an error-disabled state.

static —Enable powered-device detection. Pre-allocate (reserve) power for a port before the switch discovers the powered device. The switch reserves power for this port even when no device is connected and guarantees that power will be provided upon device detection.

The switch allocates power to a port configured in static mode before it allocates power to a port configured in auto mode.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show power inline [i nterface-id ]

Display PoE status for the switch or for the specified interface.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

When Cisco powered devices are connected to PoE ports, the switch uses Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) to determine the actual power consumption of the devices, and the switch adjusts the power budget accordingly. The CDP protocol works with Cisco powered devices and does not apply to IEEE third-party powered devices. For these devices, when the switch grants a power request, the switch adjusts the power budget according to the powered-device IEEE classification. If the powered device is a Class 0 (class status unknown) or a Class 3, the switch budgets 30,000 milliwatts for the device, regardless of the actual amount of power needed. If the powered device reports a higher class than its actual consumption or does not support power classification (defaults to Class 0), the switch can power fewer devices because it uses the IEEE class information to track the global power budget.

By using the power inline consumption wattage configuration command, you can override the default power requirement specified by the IEEE classification. The difference between what is mandated by the IEEE classification and what is actually needed by the device is reclaimed into the global power budget for use by additional devices. You can then extend the switch power budget and use it more effectively.

Caution: You should carefully plan your switch power budget and make certain not to oversubscribe the power supply.

Note: When you manually configure the power budget, you must also consider the power loss over the cable between the switch and the powered device.

When you enter the power inline consumption default wattage or the no power inline consumption default global configuration command, or the power inline consumption wattage or the no power inline consumption interface configuration command this caution message appears:

%CAUTION: Interface interface-id: Misconfiguring the 'power inline consumption/allocation' command may cause damage to the switch and void your warranty. Take precaution not to oversubscribe the power supply.
It is recommended to enable power policing if the switch supports it.
Refer to documentation.
 

If the power supply is over-subscribed to by up to 20 percent, the switch continues to operate but its reliability is reduced. If the power supply is subscribed to by more than 20 percent, the short-circuit protection circuitry triggers and shuts the switch down.

For more information about the IEEE power classifications, see Power over Ethernet Ports.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the amount of power budgeted to a powered device connected to each PoE port on a switch:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

no cdp run

(Optional) Disable CDP.

3.

power inline consumption default wattage

Configure the power consumption of powered devices connected to each the PoE port on the switch. The range for each device is 4000 to 15400 mW. The default is 15400 mW.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show power inline consumption

Display the power consumption status.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To return to the default setting, use the no power inline consumption default global configuration command.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure amount of power budgeted to a powered device connected to a specific PoE port:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

no cdp run

(Optional) Disable CDP.

3.

interface interface-id

Specify the physical port to be configured, and enter interface configuration mode.

4.

power inline consumption wattage

Configure the power consumption of a powered device connected to a PoE port on the switch. The range for each device is 4000 to 15400 mW. The default is 15400 mW.

Note: When you use this command, we recommend you also enable power policing.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show power inline consumption

Display the power consumption status.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To return to the default setting, use the no power inline consumption interface configuration command.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure amount of power budgeted to a powered device connected to a specific PoE port:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

no cdp run

(Optional) Disable CDP.

3.

interface interface-id

Specify the physical port to be configured, and enter interface configuration mode.

4.

power inline consumption wattage

Configure the power consumption of a powered device connected to a PoE port on the switch. The range for each device is 4000 to 15400 mW. The default is 15400 mW.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show power inline consumption

Display the power consumption status.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To return to the default setting, use the no power inline consumption interface configuration command.

802.3x flow control enables connected Ethernet ports to control traffic rates during congestion by allowing congested nodes to pause link operation at the other end. If one port experiences congestion and cannot receive any more traffic, it notifies the other port by sending a pause frame to stop sending until the condition clears. Upon receipt of a pause frame, the sending device stops sending any data packets, which prevents any loss of data packets during the congestion period.

Note: Ports can receive, but not send, pause frames.

You use the flowcontrol interface configuration command to set the interface’s ability to receive pause frames to on, off, or desired. The default state is off.

When set to desired, an interface can operate with an attached device that is required to send flow-control packets or with an attached device that is not required to but can send flow-control packets.

These rules apply to 802.3x flow control settings on the device:

receive on (or desired): The port cannot send pause frames but can operate with an attached device that is required to or can send pause frames; the port can receive pause frames.

receive off : 802.3x flow control does not operate in either direction. In case of congestion, no indication is given to the link partner, and no pause frames are sent or received by either device.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure 802.3x flow control on an interface:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode

2.

interface interface-id

Specify the physical interface to be configured, and enter interface configuration mode.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the port, if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled, and NNIs are enabled.

4.

flowcontrol { receive } { on | off | desired }

Configure the 802.3x flow control mode for the port.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show interfaces interface-id

Verify the interface 802.3x flow control settings.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable 802.3x flow control, use the flowcontrol receive off interface configuration command.

This example shows how to enable 802.3x flow control on a port:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/17
Switch(config-if)# flowcontrol receive on
Switch(config-if)# end

When automatic medium-dependent interface crossover (auto-MDIX) is enabled on an interface, the interface automatically detects the required cable connection type (straight through or crossover) and configures the connection appropriately. When connecting switches without the auto-MDIX feature, you must use straight-through cables to connect to devices such as servers, workstations, or routers and crossover cables to connect to other switches or repeaters. With auto-MDIX enabled, you can use either type of cable to connect to other devices, and the interface automatically corrects for any incorrect cabling. For more information about cabling requirements, see the hardware installation guide.

Auto-MDIX is enabled by default. When you enable auto-MDIX, you must also set the speed and duplex on the interface to auto so that the feature operates correctly. Auto-MDIX is supported on all 10/100 and 10/100/1000 Mbps interfaces and on Cisco 10/100/1000 BASE-T/TX SFP module interfaces. It is not supported on 1000 BASE-SX or -LX SFP module interfaces.

Table 4 shows the link states that result from auto-MDIX settings and correct and incorrect cabling.

Local Side Auto-MDIX
Remote Side Auto-MDIX
With Correct Cabling
With Incorrect Cabling

On

On

Link up

Link up

On

Off

Link up

Link up

Off

On

Link up

Link up

Off

Off

Link up

Link down

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure auto-MDIX on an interface:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode

2.

interface interface-id

Specify the physical interface to be configured, and enter interface configuration mode.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the port, if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled, and NNIs are enabled.

4.

speed auto

Configure the interface to autonegotiate speed with the connected device.

5.

duplex auto

Configure the interface to autonegotiate duplex mode with the connected device.

6.

mdix auto

Enable auto-MDIX on the interface.

7.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

show controllers ethernet-controller interface-id phy

Verify the operational state of the auto-MDIX feature on the interface.

9.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable auto-MDIX, use the no mdix auto interface configuration command.

This example shows how to enable auto-MDIX on a port:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/17
Switch(config-if)# no shutdown
Switch(config-if)# speed auto
Switch(config-if)# duplex auto
Switch(config-if)# mdix auto
Switch(config-if)# end

You can add a description about an interface to help you remember its function. The description appears in the output of these privileged EXEC commands: show configuration, show running-config, and show interfaces.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to add a description for an interface:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Specify the interface for which you are adding a description, and enter interface configuration mode.

3.

description string

Add a description (up to 240 characters) for an interface.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show interfaces interface-id description

or

show running-config

Verify your entry.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no description interface configuration command to delete the description.

This example shows how to add a description on a port and how to verify the description:

Switch# config terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/18
Switch(config-if)# description Connects to Marketing
Switch(config-if)# end
Switch# show interfaces GigabitEthernet1/18 description
Interface Status Protocol Description
Gi 0/2 admin down down Connects to Marketing

The switch must be running the IP services image to support Layer 3 interfaces:

■SVIs: You should configure SVIs for any VLANs for which you want to route traffic. SVIs are created when you enter a VLAN ID following the interface vlan global configuration command. To delete an SVI, use the no interface vlan global configuration command. You cannot delete interface VLAN 1.

When you create an SVI, it does not become active until it is associated with a physical port.

■Routed ports: Routed ports are physical ports configured to be in Layer 3 mode by using the no switchport interface configuration command.

■Layer 3 EtherChannel ports: EtherChannel interfaces made up of routed ports.

A Layer 3 switch can have an IP address assigned to each routed port and SVI.

There is no defined limit to the number of SVIs and routed ports that can be configured in a switch. However, the interrelationship between the number of SVIs and routed ports and the number of other features being configured might have an impact on CPU usage because of hardware limitations. If the switch is using maximum hardware resources, attempts to create a routed port or SVI have these results:

■If you try to create a new routed port, the switch generates a message that there are not enough resources to convert the interface to a routed port, and the interface remains as a switch port.

■If you try to create an extended-range VLAN, an error message is generated, and the extended-range VLAN is rejected.

■If the switch attempts to boot up with a configuration that has more VLANs and routed ports than hardware can support, the VLANs are created, but the routed ports are shut down, and the switch sends a message that this was due to insufficient hardware resources.

All Layer 3 interfaces require an IP address to route traffic. This procedure shows how to configure an interface as a Layer 3 interface and how to assign an IP address to an interface.

Note: If the physical port is in Layer 2 mode (the default), you must enter the no switc hport interface configuration command to put the interface into Layer 3 mode. Entering a no switchport command disables and then re-enables the interface, which might generate messages on the device to which the interface is connected. Furthermore, when you put an interface that is in Layer 2 mode into Layer 3 mode, the previous configuration information related to the affected interface might be lost, and the interface is returned to its default configuration

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a Layer 3 interface:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface {{ fastethernet | gigabitethernet } interface-id } | { vlan vlan-id } | { port-channel port-channel-number }

Specify the interface to be configured as a Layer 3 interface, and enter interface configuration mode.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the port, if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled, and NNIs are enabled.

4.

no switchport

For physical ports only, enter Layer 3 mode.

5.

ip address ip_address subnet_mask

Configure the IP address and IP subnet.

6.

no shutdown

Enable the interface.

7.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

show interfaces [ interface-id ]

show ip interface [ interface-id ]

show running-config interface [ interface-id ]

Verify the configuration.

9.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To remove an IP address from an interface, use the no ip address interface configuration command.

This example shows how to configure a port as a routed port and to assign it an IP address:

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/18
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ip address 192.20.135.21 255.255.255.0

The default maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for frames received and sent on all interfaces on the switch is 1500 bytes. You can increase the MTU size for all interfaces operating at 10 or 100 Mbps by using the system mtu global configuration command. You can increase the MTU size to support jumbo frames on all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces by using the system mtu jumbo global configuration command. You can change the MTU size for routed ports by using the system mtu routing global configuration command.

Note: You cannot configure a routing MTU size that exceeds the system MTU size. If you change the system MTU size to a value smaller than the currently configured routing MTU size, the configuration change is accepted, but not applied until the next switch reset. When the configuration change takes effect, the routing MTU size automatically defaults to the new system MTU size.

Gigabit Ethernet ports are not affected by the system mtu command. Fast Ethernet ports are not affected by the system mtu jumbo command because jumbo frames are not supported on 10/100 interfaces, including 100BASE-FX and 100BASE-BX SFP modules. If you do not configure the system mtu jumbo command, the setting of the system mtu command applies to all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

You cannot set the MTU size for an individual interface; you set it for all 10/100 or all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the switch. When you change the system MTU size, you must reset the switch before the new configuration takes effect. The system mtu routing command does not require a switch reset to take effect.

Note: The system MTU setting is saved in the switch environmental variable in NVRAM and becomes effective when the switch reloads. The MTU settings you enter with the system mtu and system mtu jumbo commands are not saved in the switch IOS configuration file, even if you enter the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command. Therefore, if you use TFTP to configure a new switch by using a backup configuration file and want the system MTU to be other than the default, you must explicitly configure the system mtu and system mtu jumbo settings on the new switch and then reload the switch.

Frames sizes that can be received by the switch CPU are limited to 1998 bytes, no matter what value was entered with the system mtu or system mtu jumbo commands. Although frames that are forwarded or routed are typically not received by the CPU, in some cases packets are sent to the CPU, such as traffic sent to control traffic, SNMP, Telnet, or routing protocols.

Because the switch does not fragment packets, it drops:

■switched packets larger than the packet size supported on the egress interface

■routed packets larger than the routing MTU value

For example, if the system mtu value is 1998 bytes and the system mtu jumbo value is 5000 bytes, packets up to 5000 bytes can be received on interfaces operating at 1000 Mbps. However, although a packet larger than 1998 bytes can be received on an interface operating at 1000 Mbps, if its destination interface is operating at 10 or 100 Mbps, the packet is dropped.

Routed packets are subjected to MTU checks on the sending ports. The MTU value used for routed ports is derived from the configured system mtu value (not the system mtu jumbo value). That is, the routed MTU is never greater than the system MTU for any VLAN. The routing protocols use the system MTU value when negotiating adjacencies and the MTU of the link. For example, the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol uses this MTU value before setting up an adjacency with a peer router. To view the MTU value for routed packets for a specific VLAN, use the show platform port-asic mvid privileged EXEC command.

Note: If Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces are configured to accept frames greater than the 10/100 interfaces, jumbo frames received on a Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet interface and sent on a Layer 2 10/100 interface are dropped.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the MTU size for all 10/100 or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

system mtu bytes

(Optional) Change the MTU size for all interfaces on the switch that are operating at 10 or 100 Mbps. The range is 1500 to 1998 bytes; the default is 1500 bytes.

3.

system mtu jumbo bytes

(Optional) Change the MTU size for all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the switch. The range is 1500 to 9000 bytes; the default is 1500 bytes.

4.

system mtu routing bytes

(Optional) Change the system MTU for routed ports. The range is 1500 to the system MTU value, the maximum MTU that can be routed for all ports.

Although larger packets can be accepted, they cannot be routed.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

Save your entries in the configuration file.

7.

reload

Reload the operating system.

If you enter a value that is outside the allowed range for the specific type of interface, the value is not accepted.

Once the switch reloads, you can verify your settings by entering the show system mtu privileged EXEC command.

This example shows how to set the maximum packet size for a Gigabit Ethernet port to 1800 bytes:

Switch(config)# system mtu jumbo 1800
Switch(config)# exit
Switch# reload
 

This example shows the response when you try to set Gigabit Ethernet interfaces to an out-of-range number:

Switch(config)# system mtu jumbo 25000
^
% Invalid input detected at '^' marker.

These sections contain interface monitoring and maintenance information:

■Monitoring Interface Status

■Using FEFI to Maintain the Fiber FE Interfaces

■Clearing and Resetting Interfaces and Counters

■Shutting Down and Restarting the Interface

Commands entered at the privileged EXEC prompt display information about the interface, including the versions of the software and the hardware, the configuration, and statistics about the interfaces. Table 8 lists some of these interface monitoring commands. (You can display the full list of show commands by using the show ? command at the privileged EXEC prompt.)

Table 8 Show Commands for Interfaces

Command
Purpose

show interfaces [ interface-id ]

Display the status and configuration of all interfaces or a specific interface.

show interfaces interface-id status [ err-disabled ]

Display interface status or a list of interfaces in an error-disabled state.

show interfaces [ interface-id ] switchport

Display administrative and operational status of switching mode. You can use this command to find out if a port is in routing or in switching mode.

show interfaces [ interface-id ] description

Display the description configured on an interface or all interfaces and the interface status.

show ip interface [ interface-id ]

Display the usability status of all interfaces configured for IP routing or the specified interface.

show interface [ interface-id ] stats

Display the input and output packets by the switching path for the interface.

show interfaces [ interface-id] transceiver [ detail | dom-supported-list | module number | properties | threshold-table ]

Display these physical and operational status about an SFP module:

■ interface-id– (Optional) Display configuration and status for a specified physical interface.

detail– (Optional) Display calibration properties, including high and low numbers and any alarm information for any Digital Optical Monitoring (DoM)-capable transceiver if one is installed in the switch.

■dom-supported-list–(Optional) List all supported DoM transceivers.

■module number –(Optional) Limit display to interfaces on module on the switch. The range is 1 to 9. This option is not available if you entered a specific interface ID.

■properties– ( Optional) Display speed, duplex, and inline power settings on an interface

■threshold-table–(Optional) Display alarm and warning threshold table

show interfaces [ interface-id ] [{ transceiver properties | detail }] module number ]

Display physical and operational status about an SFP module.

show port-type [ eni | nni | uni ]

Display interface type information for the Cisco ME switch.

show running-config interface [ interface-id ]

Display the running configuration in RAM for the interface.

show version

Display the hardware configuration, software version, the names and sources of configuration files, and the boot images.

show controllers ethernet-controller interface-id phy

Display the operational state of the auto-MDIX feature on the interface.

A far end fault is an error in the link that one station detects but the other does not, such as a disconnected Tx wire. In this example, the sending station still receives valid data and detects that the link is good through the link integrity monitor. The sending station does not detect that its own transmission is not being received by the other station. A 100BASE-FX station that detects a remote fault like this modifies its transmitted IDLE stream to send a special bit pattern (FEFI IDLE pattern) to inform the neighbor of the remote fault. The FEFI-IDLE pattern then triggers a shutdown of the remote port (notconnect).

Fiber FastEthernet hardware uses far end fault indication (FEFI) to bring the link down on both sides of the link in these situations. A similar function is provided by link negotiation for Gigabit Ethernet. FEFI is not supported on copper ports, which do not usually have issues in which one station can detect while the other cannot. Copper ports use Ethernet link pulses to monitor the link.

With FEFI, no forwarding loop occurs because there is no connectivity between the ports. If the link is up on one side and down on the other, however, blackholing of traffic might occur. Use Unidirectional Link Detection (UDLD) to prevent traffic blackholing.

FEFI is enabled globally and not configurable on the switch, however it applies only to the fiber Fast Ethernet SFP interfaces on the switch.

FEFI can be used on the switch Gigabit Ethernet (GE) SFP ports when the GE ports are connected with 100FX/LX SFP transceiver type. However, using these SFP transceivers limits the GE interfaces to 100 MB/s.

Table 9 lists the privileged EXEC mode clear commands that you can use to clear counters and reset interfaces.

Table 9 Clear Commands for Interfaces

Command
Purpose

clear counters [ interface-id ]

Clear interface counters.

clear interface interface-id

Reset the hardware logic on an interface.

clear line [ number | console 0 | vty number ]

Reset the hardware logic on an asynchronous serial line.

To clear the interface counters shown by the show interfaces privileged EXEC command, use the clear counters privileged EXEC command. The clear counters command clears all current interface counters from the interface unless you specify optional arguments that clear only a specific interface type from a specific interface number.

Note: The clear counters privileged EXEC command does not clear counters retrieved by using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), but only those seen with the show interface privileged EXEC command.

Shutting down an interface disables all functions on the specified interface and marks the interface as unavailable on all monitoring command displays. This information is communicated to other network servers through all dynamic routing protocols. The interface is not mentioned in any routing updates.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to shut down an interface:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface { vlan vlan-id } | {{ fastethernet | gigabitethernet } interface-id } | { port-channel port-channel-number }

Select the interface to be configured.

3.

shutdown

Shut down an interface.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show running-config

Verify your entry.

Use the no shutdown interface configuration command to enable an interface.

To verify that an interface is disabled, enter the show interfaces privileged EXEC command. A disabled interface is shown as administratively down in the display.


Page 4

Cisco IE series switches support PROFINET I/O, RT but not IRT (isochronous real-time).

PROFINET is the PROFIBUS International (PI) open Industrial Ethernet Standard that uses TCP/IP and IT standards for automation control. PROFINET is particularly useful for industrial automation systems and process control networks, in which motion control and precision control of instrumentation and test equipment are important. It emphasizes data exchange and defines communication paths to meet speed requirements. PROFINET communication is scalable on three levels:

■Normal non-real-time communication uses TCP/IP and enables bus cycle times of approximately 100 ms.

■Real-time communication enables cycle times of approximately 10 ms.

■Isochronous real-time communication enables cycle times of approximately 1 ms.

PROFINET I/O is a modular communication framework for distributed automation applications. PROFINET I/O uses cyclic data transfer to exchange data, alarms, and diagnostic information with programmable controllers, input/output (I/O) devices, and other automation controllers (for example, motion controllers).

PROFINET I/O recognizes three classes of devices:

■I/O devices

■I/O controllers

■I/O supervisors

Figure 15 PROFINET Device Roles

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

An I/O controller is a programmable logic controller (PLC) that controls I/O devices and exchanges data such as configuration, alarms, and I/O data through an automation program. The I/O controller and the I/O supervisor exchange diagnostic information. The I/O controller shares configuration and input/output information with the I/O device and receives alarms from the I/O device.

PROFINET is designed to be the sole or primary management system platform. Because the I/O controller detects the switch with the Discovery and Configuration Protocol (DCP), and sets the device name and IP address, you do not need to enter Cisco IOS commands for the basic configuration. For advanced configurations (for example, QoS, DHCP, and similar features) you must use Cisco IOS commands on the switch because these features cannot be configured by using PROFINET.

An I/O supervisor is an engineering station, such as a human machine interface (HMI) or PC, used for commissioning, monitoring, and diagnostic analysis. The I/O supervisor exchanges diagnostic, status, control, and parameter information with the I/O device.

An I/O device is a distributed input/output device such as a sensor, an actuator, or a motion controller.

Note: If Profinet DCP cannot detect the switch/PLC/IO mac addresses, temporarily disable the firewall/virus scan from the Window PC that installed the Siemens STEP7 or TIA Portal.

In a PROFINET I/O system, all the I/O devices communicate over an Ethernet communication network to meet the automation industry requirement for bus cycle times of less than 100 ms. The network uses switches and full-duplex data exchange to avoid data collisions.

After PROFINET uses DCP to discover devices, including the switch, they establish application relationships (ARs) and communication relationships (CRs). After a connection is established and information about device parameters is exchanged, input and output data is exchanged. The switch uses non-real-time CRs to exchange the data attributes listed in Table 17 and Table 18.

Table 17 PROFINET I/O Switch Attributes

PROFINET I/O Switch Configuration Attributes
Value or Action

Device name

Configures a name for the device.

TCP/IP

IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, SVI.

Primary temperature alarm

Enables or disables monitoring for the specified alarm.

Secondary temperature alarm

Enables or disables monitoring for the specified alarm.

RPS failed alarm

Enables or disables monitoring for the specified alarm.

Relay major alarm

Enables or disables monitoring for the specified alarm.

Reset to factory defaults

Uses the PROFINET I/O controller to reset the switch to factory defaults. This action removes the startup configuration and reloads the switch.

Relay major configuration

Specifies the type of port alarm (for example, link fault) that triggers the major relay. Any port configured with the specified alarm type can trigger the major relay.

Table 18 PROFINET I/O Port Attributes

PROFINET I/O Port Configuration Attributes
Value or Action

Speed

10/100/1000/auto,

Duplex

Half/full/auto,

Port mode

Access/trunk,

Link status

Shut down/no shut down,

Configure rate limiting

Broadcast, unicast, multicast threshold exceeds configured levels.

Port link fault alarm

Enables or disables monitoring for specified alarm.

Port not forwarding alarm

Enables or disables monitoring for specified alarm.

Port not operating alarm

Enables or disables monitoring for specified alarm.

Port FCS threshold alarm

Enables or disables monitoring for specified alarm.

PROFINET devices are integrated by using a general station description (GSD) file that contains the data for engineering and data exchange between the I/O controller, the I/O supervisor, and the I/O devices, including the switch. Each PROFINET I/O field device must have an associated GSD file that describes the properties of the device and contains all this information required for configuration:

■Device identification information (device ID, vendor ID and name, product family, number of ports)

■Number and types of pluggable modules

■Error text for diagnostic information

■Communication parameters for I/O devices, including the minimum cycle time, the reduction ratio, and the watch dog time

■Configuration data for the I/O device modules, including speed, duplex, VLAN, port security information, alarms, and broadcast-rate-limiting thresholds

■Parameters configured for I/O device modules for the attributes listed in Table 18

The GSD file is on the switch, but the I/O supervisor uses this file.

Note: You must use the GSD file that is associated with the Cisco IOS release on the switch to manage your PROFINET network. Both the I/O supervisor and the Cisco IOS software alert you to a mismatch between the GSD file and the switch Cisco IOS software version.

You can use either the PROFINET software on the I/O supervisor or the Cisco IOS software for basic switch configuration.

After you enable PROFINET, LLDP is automatically enabled on the switch because PROFINET relies on LLDP to fully function. If you disable PROFINET, you can enable or disable LLDP as needed.

PROFINET is enabled by default on all the base switch module ports. The default config is enabled on VLAN 1 but can be changed to another VLAN ID. If PROFINET has been disabled, follow the instructions in the Enabling PROFINET.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

profinet

Enables PROFINET on the switch.

3.

profinet id line

(Optional) Sets the PROFINET device identifier (ID) by using the Cisco IOS software.

The maximum length is 240 characters. The only special characters allowed are the period (.) and hyphen (-), and they are allowed only in specific positions within the ID string. It can have multiple labels within the string. Each label can be from 1 to 63 characters, and labels must be separated by a period (.). The final character in the string must not be zero (0).

For more details about configuring the PROFINET ID, see the PROFINET specification, document number TC2-06-0007a, filename PN-AL-protocol_2722_V22_Oct07, available from PROFIBUS.

4.

profinet vlan vlan id

(Optional) Changes the VLAN number. The default VLAN number is 1. The VLAN ID range is 1-4096. Supports one VLAN per switch.

5.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show running-config

Verifies your entries.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

Table 19 Commands for Displaying the PROFINET Configuration

Command
Purpose

show profinet sessions

Displays the currently connected PROFINET sessions.

show profinet status

Displays the status of the PROFINET subsystem.

show lldp neighbor interface x/x detail

Displays information about the adjacent interface.

Example
IE5000#show profinet status
State : Enabled
Vlan : 2
Id : Ie5000
Connected : Yes
ReductRatio : 128
GSD Version: Match

The PLC has LEDs that display red for alarms, and the I/O supervisor software monitors those alarms.

To troubleshoot PROFINET use the debug profinet privileged EXEC command with the keywords shown in Commands for Troubleshooting the PROFINET ConfigurationTable 20. Be aware that the output of a debug command might cause a serial link to fail. You should use these commands only under the guidance of a Cisco Technical Support engineer. When you use this command, use Telnet to access the Cisco IOS command-line interface (CLI) by using Ethernet rather than a serial port.

Table 20 Commands for Troubleshooting the PROFINET Configuration

Command
Purpose

debug profinet alarm

Displays the alarm status (on or off) and content of PROFINET alarms.

debug profinet cyclic

Displays information about the time-cycle-based PROFINET Ethernet frames.

debug profinet error

Displays the PROFINET session errors.

debug profinet packet ethernet

Displays information about the PROFINET Ethernet packets.

debug profinet packet udp

Displays information about the PROFINET Upper Layer Data Protocol (UDP) packets.

debug profinet platform

Displays information about the interaction between the Cisco IOS software and PROFINET.

debug profinet topology

Displays the PROFINET topology packets received.

debug profinet trace

Displays a group of traced debug output logs.

The following sections provide references related to switch administration:

Related Topic
Document Title

Cisco IOS basic commands

Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference

Standards
Title

No new or modified standards are supported by this feature, and support for existing standards has not been modified by this feature.

RFCs
Title

No new or modified RFCs are supported by this feature, and support for existing RFCs has not been modified by this feature.

Description
Link

The Cisco Technical Support website contains thousands of pages of searchable technical content, including links to products, technologies, solutions, technical tips, and tools. Registered Cisco.com users can log in from this page to access even more content.

http://www.cisco.com/techsupport


Page 5

Note: The documentation set for this product strives to use bias-free language. For purposes of this documentation set, bias-free is defined as language that does not imply discrimination based on age, disability, gender, racial identity, ethnic identity, sexual orientation, socioeconomic status, and intersectionality. Exceptions may be present in the documentation due to language that is hardcoded in the user interfaces of the product software, language used based on RFP documentation, or language that is used by a referenced third-party product.

This guide is for the networking professional managing your switch. Before using this guide, you should have experience working with the Cisco IOS software and be familiar with the concepts and terminology of Ethernet and local area networking.

This guide provides the information that you need to configure Cisco IOS software features on your switch.

This guide provides procedures for using the commands that have been created or changed for use with the switch. It does not provide detailed information about these commands.

For information about the standard Cisco IOS commands, see the Cisco IOS 15.0 documentation set available from the Cisco.com home page.

This guide does not provide detailed information on the graphical user interfaces (GUIs) for the embedded Device Manager. However, the concepts in this guide are applicable to the GUI user. For information about Device Manager, see the switch online help.

For documentation updates, see the release notes for this release.

This publication uses these conventions to convey instructions and information:

Command descriptions use these conventions:

■Commands and keywords are in boldface text.

■Arguments for which you supply values are in italic.

■Square brackets ([ ]) mean optional elements.

■Braces ({ }) group required choices, and vertical bars ( |) separate the alternative elements.

■Braces and vertical bars within square brackets ([{ | }]) mean a required choice within an optional element.

Interactive examples use these conventions:

■Terminal sessions and system displays are in screen font.

■Information you enter is in boldface screen font.

■Nonprinting characters, such as passwords or tabs, are in angle brackets (< >).

Notes, cautions, and timesavers use these conventions and symbols:

Note: Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in this manual.

Caution: Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data.

These documents provide complete information about the switch series and are available from this Cisco.com site:

http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/switches/industrial-ethernet-4000-series-switches/tsd-products-support-series-home.html

http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/switches/industrial-ethernet-4010-series-switches/tsd-products-support-series-home.html

http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/switches/industrial-ethernet-5000-series-switches/tsd-products-support-series-home.html

Before installing, configuring, or upgrading the switch, see these documents:

■For initial configuration information, see the “Configuring the Switch with the CLI-Based Setup Program” appendix in the hardware installation guide.

■For Device Manager requirements, see the “System Requirements” section in the release notes (not orderable but available on Cisco.com).

■For upgrading information, see the “Downloading Software” section in the release notes.

See these documents for other information about the switch:

■Release Notes

■ Software Configuration Guide

■ Hardware Installation Guide

■ Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information

■Device Manager online help (available on the switch)

■Compatibility matrix documents are available from this Cisco.com site:
http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/modules/ps5455/products_device_support_tables_list.html

■To receive timely, relevant information from Cisco, sign up at Cisco Profile Manager.

■To get the business impact you’re looking for with the technologies that matter, visit Cisco Services.

■To submit a service request, visit Cisco Support.

■To discover and browse secure, validated enterprise-class apps, products, solutions and services, visit Cisco Marketplace.

■To obtain general networking, training, and certification titles, visit Cisco Press.

■To find warranty information for a specific product or product family, access Cisco Warranty Finder.

Cisco Bug Search Tool (BST) is a web-based tool that acts as a gateway to the Cisco bug tracking system that maintains a comprehensive list of defects and vulnerabilities in Cisco products and software. BST provides you with detailed defect information about your products and software.


Page 6

CDP is a device discovery protocol that runs over Layer 2 (the data link layer) on all Cisco-manufactured devices (routers, bridges, access servers, and switches) and allows network management applications to discover Cisco devices that are neighbors of already known devices. With CDP, network management applications can learn the device type and the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent address of neighboring devices running lower-layer, transparent protocols. This feature enables applications to send SNMP queries to neighboring devices.

CDP runs on all media that support Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP). Because CDP runs over the data-link layer only, two systems that support different network-layer protocols can learn about each other.

Each CDP-configured device sends periodic messages to a multicast address, advertising at least one address at which it can receive SNMP messages. The advertisements also contain time-to-live, or holdtime information, which is the length of time a receiving device holds CDP information before discarding it. Each device also listens to the messages sent by other devices to learn about neighboring devices.

On the switch, CDP enables Network Assistant to display a graphical view of the network. The switch uses CDP to find cluster candidates and maintain information about cluster members and other devices up to three cluster-enabled devices away from the command switch by default.

For a switch and connected endpoint devices running Cisco Medianet, these events occur:

■CDP identifies connected endpoints that communicate directly with the switch.

■Only one wired switch reports the location information to prevent duplicate reports of neighboring devices.

■The wired switch and the endpoints both send and receive location information.

The switch supports CDP Version 2.

Feature
Default Setting

CDP global state

Enabled

CDP interface state

Enabled

CDP timer (packet update frequency)

60 seconds

CDP holdtime (before discarding)

180 seconds

CDP Version-2 advertisements

Enabled

You can configure the frequency of CDP updates, the amount of time to hold the information before discarding it, and whether or not to send Version-2 advertisements.

Note: Steps 2 through 4 are all optional and can be performed in any order.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

cdp timer seconds

(Optional) Sets the transmission frequency of CDP updates in seconds.

The range is 5 to 254; the default is 60 seconds.

3.

cdp holdtime seconds

(Optional) Specifies the amount of time a receiving device should hold the information sent by your device before discarding it.

The range is 10 to 255 seconds; the default is 180 seconds.

4.

cdp advertise-v2

(Optional) Configures CDP to send Version-2 advertisements.

This is the default state.

5.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

CDP is enabled by default.

Note: Switch clusters and other Cisco devices (such as Cisco IP Phones) regularly exchange CDP messages. Disabling CDP can interrupt cluster discovery and device connectivity.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

no cdp run

Disables CDP globally.

3.

interface interface-id

Specifies the interface on which you are disabling CDP, and enters interface configuration mode.

4.

no cdp enable

Disables CDP on the interface.

5.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

Command
Description

clear cdp counters

Resets the traffic counters to zero.

clear cdp table

Deletes the CDP table of information about neighbors.

show cdp

Displays global information, such as frequency of transmissions and the holdtime for packets being sent.

show cdp entry entry-name [ protocol | version ]

Displays information about a specific neighbor.

You can enter an asterisk (*) to display all CDP neighbors, or you can enter the name of the neighbor about which you want information.

You can also limit the display to information about the protocols enabled on the specified neighbor or information about the version of software running on the device.

show cdp interface [ interface-id ]

Displays information about interfaces where CDP is enabled.

You can limit the display to the interface about which you want information.

show cdp neighbors [ interface-id ] [ detail ]

Displays information about neighbors, including device type, interface type and number, holdtime settings, capabilities, platform, and port ID.

You can limit the display to neighbors of a specific interface or expand the display to provide more detailed information.

show cdp traffic

Displays CDP counters, including the number of packets sent and received and checksum errors.

This example shows how to configure CDP parameters:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# cdp timer 50
Switch(config)# cdp holdtime 120
Switch(config)# cdp advertise-v2
Switch(config)# end

This example shows how to enable CDP on a port when it has been disabled:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/17
Switch(config-if)# cdp enable
Switch(config-if)# end

Note: Voice VLAN is not counted against port security when CDP is disabled on the switch interface.

This example shows how to enable CDP if it has been disabled:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# cdp run
Switch(config)# end

The following sections provide references related to switch administration:

Related Topic
Document Title

Cisco IOS basic commands
Cisco IOS system management commands

Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference

Switch cluster configuration

Configuring Switch Clusters

Standards
Title

No new or modified standards are supported by this feature, and support for existing standards has not been modified by this feature.

RFCs
Title

No new or modified RFCs are supported by this feature, and support for existing RFCs has not been modified by this feature.


Page 7

You can use SDM templates to configure system resources in the switch to optimize support for specific features, depending on how the switch is used in the network.

You can select a template to provide maximum system usage for some functions or use the default template to balance resources.

To allocate ternary content addressable memory (TCAM) resources for different usages, the switch SDM templates prioritize system resources to optimize support for certain features. When running the IPservices license, you can select SDM templates to optimize these features:

■Default—The default template gives balance to all Layer 2 functions.

■Dual IPv4 and IPv6—Allows the switch to be used in dual-stack environments (supporting both IPv4 and IPv6).

■Routing—The routing template maximizes system resources for IPv4 unicast routing, typically required for a router or aggregator in the center of a network.

See Dual IPv4 and IPv6 SDM Default Template.

There are four templates for ip services and one template for lanbase licensing.

Table 23 IP Services license SDM Templates

Resource
Default
IPv4 Routing
Dual-Default
Dual-Routing

Unicast MAC addresses

16 K

16 K

16 K

16 K

IPv4 IGMP or IPv6 groups

1K IPv4

1K IPv4

1K IPv4

1K IPv6

1K IPv4

1K IPv6

Direct routes

16K IPv4

16K IPv4

4K IPv4

4K IPv6

4K IPv4

4K IPv6

Indirect routes

2K IPv4

8K IPv4

1.25K IPv4

1.25K IPv6

2K IPv4

3K IPv6

IPv4 or IPv6 policy-based routing ACEs

0.125K (IPv4 PBR)

0.5K (IPv4 PBR)

0.25K (IPv4 PBR)

0.25K (IPv6 PBR)

0.125K (IPv4 PBR)

0.125K (IPv6 PBR)

IPv4 or IPv6 QoSACEs

1.875K (IPv4 QoS)

0.5K (IPv4 QoS)

0.5K (IPv4 QoS)

0.375K (IPv6 QoS)

0.5K (IPv4 QoS)

0.125K (IPv6 QoS)

IPv4 or IPv6 port or MAC security ACEs

1.875K (IPv4 ACL)

1K (IPv4 ACL)

0.75K (IPv4 ACL)

0.375K (IPv6 ACL)

0.625K (IPv4 ACL)

0.125K (IPv6 ACL)

Table 24 Lanbase license SDM Template

Resource
Default

Unicast MAC addresses

16 K

IPv4 IGMP or IPv6 groups

1K IPv4/1K IPv6

Direct routes

4K IPv4/4K IPv6

Indirect routes

1.25K IPv4/1.25K IPv6

IPv4 or IPv6 policy-based routing ACEs

0.25K (IPv4 PBR)/0.25K (IPv6 PBR)

IPv4 or IPv6 QoSACEs

1K (IPv4 QoS)/0.25K (IPv6 QoS)

IPv4 or IPv6 port or MAC security ACEs

1K (IPv4 ACL)/0.25K (IPv6 ACL)

The first eight rows in the tables (unicast MAC addresses through security ACEs) represent approximate hardware boundaries set when a template is selected. If a section of a hardware resource is full, all processing overflow is sent to the CPU, seriously impacting switch performance.

You can select an SDM template to support IP Version 6 (IPv6) switching. The dual IPv4 and IPv6 template allows the switch to be used in dual-stack environments (supporting both IPv4 and IPv6). Using the dual-stack templates results in less TCAM capacity allowed for each resource. You should not use this template if you plan to forward only IPv4 traffic.

These SDM templates support IPv4 and IPv6 environments:

■Dual IPv4 and IPv6 default template—Supports Layer 2, QoS, and ACLs for IPv4; and Layer 2, IPv6 host, and ACLs for IPv6.

■Dual IPv4 and IPv6 routing template—Supports Layer 2, multicast, routing (including policy-based routing), QoS, and ACLs for IPv4; and Layer 2, routing, and ACLs for IPv6.


Page 8

This chapter describes how to configure the Cisco implementation of the IEEE 802.1s Multiple STP (MSTP) on the switch.

Note: The multiple spanning-tree (MST) implementation is based on the IEEE 802.1s standard.

The MSTP enables multiple VLANs to be mapped to the same spanning-tree instance, reducing the number of spanning-tree instances needed to support a large number of VLANs. The MSTP provides for multiple forwarding paths for data traffic and enables load balancing. It improves the fault tolerance of the network because a failure in one instance (forwarding path) does not affect other instances (forwarding paths). The most common initial deployment of MSTP is in the backbone and distribution layers of a Layer 2 switched network. This deployment provides the highly available network required in a service-provider environment.

When the switch is in the MST mode, the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), which is based on IEEE 802.1w, is automatically enabled. The RSTP provides rapid convergence of the spanning tree through explicit handshaking that eliminates the IEEE 802.1D forwarding delay and quickly transitions root ports and designated ports to the forwarding state.

Both MSTP and RSTP improve the spanning-tree operation and maintain backward compatibility with equipment that is based on the (original) IEEE 802.1D spanning tree, with existing Cisco-proprietary Multiple Instance STP (MISTP), and with existing Cisco per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (PVST+) and rapid per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (rapid PVST+).

MSTP, which uses RSTP for rapid convergence, enables VLANs to be grouped into a spanning-tree instance, with each instance having a spanning-tree topology independent of other spanning-tree instances. This architecture provides multiple forwarding paths for data traffic, enables load balancing, and reduces the number of spanning-tree instances required to support a large number of VLANs.

For switches to participate in multiple spanning-tree (MST) instances, you must consistently configure the switches with the same MST configuration information. A collection of interconnected switches that have the same MST configuration comprises an MST region as shown in Figure 1 on page 3.

The MST configuration controls to which MST region each switch belongs. The configuration includes the name of the region, the revision number, and the MST VLAN-to-instance assignment map. You configure the switch for a region by using the spanning-tree mst configuration global configuration command, after which the switch enters the MST configuration mode. From this mode, you can map VLANs to an MST instance by using the instance MST configuration command, specify the region name by using the name MST configuration command, and set the revision number by using the revision MST configuration command.

A region can have one or multiple members with the same MST configuration. Each member must be capable of processing RSTP bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). There is no limit to the number of MST regions in a network, but each region can support up to 65 spanning-tree instances. Instances can be identified by any number in the range from 0 to 4096. You can assign a VLAN to only one spanning-tree instance at a time.

Unlike PVST+ and rapid PVST+ in which all the spanning-tree instances are independent, the MSTP establishes and maintains two types of spanning trees:

■An internal spanning tree (IST), which is the spanning tree that runs in an MST region.

Within each MST region, the MSTP maintains multiple spanning-tree instances. Instance 0 is a special instance for a region, known as the internal spanning tree (IST). All other MST instances are numbered from 1 to 4096.

The IST is the only spanning-tree instance that sends and receives BPDUs. All of the other spanning-tree instance information is contained in M-records, which are encapsulated within MSTP BPDUs. Because the MSTP BPDU carries information for all instances, the number of BPDUs that need to be processed to support multiple spanning-tree instances is significantly reduced.

All MST instances within the same region share the same protocol timers, but each MST instance has its own topology parameters, such as root switch ID, root path cost, and so forth. By default, all VLANs are assigned to the IST.

An MST instance is local to the region; for example, MST instance 1 in region A is independent of MST instance 1 in region B, even if regions A and B are interconnected.

■A common and internal spanning tree (CIST), which is a collection of the ISTs in each MST region, and the common spanning tree (CST) that interconnects the MST regions and single spanning trees.

The spanning tree computed in a region appears as a subtree in the CST that encompasses the entire switched domain. The CIST is formed by the spanning-tree algorithm running among switches that support the IEEE 802.1w, IEEE 802.1s, and IEEE 802.1D standards. The CIST inside an MST region is the same as the CST outside a region.

For more information, see Operations Within an MST Region, page 2 and the Operations Between MST Regions, page 3.

Note: The implementation of the IEEE 802.1s standard, changes some of the terminology associated with MST implementations.

The IST connects all the MSTP switches in a region. When the IST converges, the root of the IST becomes the CIST regional root (called the IST master before the implementation of the IEEE 802.1s standard) as shown in Figure 1 on page 3. It is the switch within the region with the lowest switch ID and path cost to the CIST root. The CIST regional root is also the CIST root if there is only one region in the network. If the CIST root is outside the region, one of the MSTP switches at the boundary of the region is selected as the CIST regional root.

When an MSTP switch initializes, it sends BPDUs claiming itself as the root of the CIST and the CIST regional root, with both of the path costs to the CIST root and to the CIST regional root set to zero. The switch also initializes all of its MST instances and claims to be the root for all of them. If the switch receives superior MST root information (lower switch ID, lower path cost, and so forth) than currently stored for the port, it relinquishes its claim as the CIST regional root.

During initialization, a region might have many subregions, each with its own CIST regional root. As switches receive superior IST information, they leave their old subregions and join the new subregion that contains the true CIST regional root. All subregions shrink, except for the one that contains the true CIST regional root.

For correct operation, all switches in the MST region must agree on the same CIST regional root. Therefore, any two switches in the region only synchronize their port roles for an MST instance if they converge to a common CIST regional root.

If there are multiple regions or legacy IEEE 802.1D switches within the network, MSTP establishes and maintains the CST, which includes all MST regions and all legacy STP switches in the network. The MST instances combine with the IST at the boundary of the region to become the CST.

The IST connects all the MSTP switches in the region and appears as a subtree in the CIST that encompasses the entire switched domain. The root of the subtree is the CIST regional root. The MST region appears as a virtual switch to adjacent STP switches and MST regions.

Figure 1 on page 3 shows a network with three MST regions and a legacy IEEE 802.1D switch (D). The CIST regional root for region 1 (A) is also the CIST root. The CIST regional root for region 2 (B) and the CIST regional root for region 3 (C) are the roots for their respective subtrees within the CIST. The RSTP runs in all regions.

Figure 39 MST Regions, CIST Masters, and CST Root

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

Only the CST instance sends and receives BPDUs, and MST instances add their spanning-tree information into the BPDUs to interact with neighboring switches and compute the final spanning-tree topology. Because of this, the spanning-tree parameters related to BPDU transmission (for example, hello time, forward time, max-age, and max-hops) are configured only on the CST instance but affect all MST instances. Parameters related to the spanning-tree topology (for example, switch priority, port VLAN cost, and port VLAN priority) can be configured on both the CST instance and the MST instance.

MSTP switches use Version 3 RSTP BPDUs or IEEE 802.1D STP BPDUs to communicate with legacy IEEE 802.1D switches. MSTP switches use MSTP BPDUs to communicate with MSTP switches.

Some MST naming conventions used in Cisco’s prestandard implementation have been changed to identify some internal or regional parameters. These parameters are significant only within an MST region, as opposed to external parameters that are relevant to the whole network. Because the CIST is the only spanning-tree instance that spans the whole network, only the CIST parameters require the external rather than the internal or regional qualifiers.

■The CIST root is the root switch for the unique instance that spans the whole network, the CIST.

■The CIST external root path cost is the cost to the CIST root. This cost is left unchanged within an MST region. Remember that an MST region looks like a single switch for the CIST. The CIST external root path cost is the root path cost calculated between these virtual switches and switches that do not belong to any region.

■The CIST regional root was called the IST master in the prestandard implementation. If the CIST root is in the region, the CIST regional root is the CIST root. Otherwise, the CIST regional root is the closest switch to the CIST root in the region. The CIST regional root acts as a root switch for the IST.

■The CIST internal root path cost is the cost to the CIST regional root in a region. This cost is only relevant to the IST, instance 0.

Table 41 compares the IEEE standard and the Cisco prestandard terminology.

Table 41 IEEE standard and the Cisco Prestandard Terminology

IEEE Standard
Cisco Prestandard
Cisco Standard

CIST regional root

IST master

CIST regional root

CIST internal root path cost

IST master path cost

CIST internal path cost

CIST external root path cost

Root path cost

Root path cost

MSTI regional root

Instance root

Instance root

MSTI internal root path cost

Root path cost

Root path cost

The IST and MST instances do not use the message-age and maximum-age information in the configuration BPDU to compute the spanning-tree topology. Instead, they use the path cost to the root and a hop-count mechanism similar to the IP time-to-live (TTL) mechanism.

By using the spanning-tree mst max-hops global configuration command, you can configure the maximum hops inside the region and apply it to the IST and all MST instances in that region. The hop count achieves the same result as the message-age information (triggers a reconfiguration). The root switch of the instance always sends a BPDU (or M-record) with a cost of 0 and the hop count set to the maximum value. When a switch receives this BPDU, it decrements the received remaining hop count by one and propagates this value as the remaining hop count in the BPDUs it generates. When the count reaches zero, the switch discards the BPDU and ages the information held for the port.

The message-age and maximum-age information in the RSTP portion of the BPDU remain the same throughout the region, and the same values are propagated by the region designated ports at the boundary.

In the Cisco prestandard implementation, a boundary port connects an MST region to a single spanning-tree region running RSTP, to a single spanning-tree region running PVST+ or rapid PVST+, or to another MST region with a different MST configuration. A boundary port also connects to a LAN, the designated switch of which is either a single spanning-tree switch or a switch with a different MST configuration.

There is no definition of a boundary port in the IEEE 802.1s standard. The IEEE 802.1Q-2002 standard identifies two kinds of messages that a port can receive: internal (coming from the same region) and external. When a message is external, it is received only by the CIST. If the CIST role is root or alternate, or if the external BPDU is a topology change, it could have an impact on the MST instances. When a message is internal, the CIST part is received by the CIST, and each MST instance receives its respective M-record. The Cisco prestandard implementation treats a port that receives an external message as a boundary port. This means a port cannot receive a mix of internal and external messages.

An MST region includes both switches and LANs. A segment belongs to the region of its designated port. Therefore, a port in a different region than the designated port for a segment is a boundary port. This definition allows two ports internal to a region to share a segment with a port belonging to a different region, creating the possibility of receiving both internal and external messages on a port.

The primary change from the Cisco prestandard implementation is that a designated port is not defined as boundary, unless it is running in an STP-compatible mode.

Note: If there is a legacy STP switch on the segment, messages are always considered external.

The other change from the prestandard implementation is that the CIST regional root switch ID field is now inserted where an RSTP or legacy IEEE 802.1Q switch has the sender switch ID. The whole region performs like a single virtual switch by sending a consistent sender switch ID to neighboring switches. In this example, switch C would receive a BPDU with the same consistent sender switch ID of root, whether or not A or B is designated for the segment.

The Cisco implementation of the IEEE MST standard includes features required to meet the standard, as well as some of the desirable prestandard functionality that is not yet incorporated into the published standard.

The boundary role is no longer in the final MST standard, but this boundary concept is maintained in Cisco’s implementation. However, an MST instance port at a boundary of the region might not follow the state of the corresponding CIST port. Two cases exist now:

■The boundary port is the root port of the CIST regional root—When the CIST instance port is proposed and is in sync, it can send back an agreement and move to the forwarding state only after all the corresponding MSTI ports are in sync (and forwarding). The MSTI ports now have a special master role.

■The boundary port is not the root port of the CIST regional root—The MSTI ports follow the state and role of the CIST port. The standard provides less information, and it might be difficult to understand why an MSTI port can be alternately blocking when it receives no BPDUs (MRecords). In this case, although the boundary role no longer exists, the show commands identify a port as boundary in the type column of the output.

Because automatic detection of prestandard switches can fail, you can use an interface configuration command to identify prestandard ports. A region cannot be formed between a standard and a prestandard switch, but they can interoperate by using the CIST. Only the capability of load balancing over different instances is lost in that particular case. The CLI displays different flags depending on the port configuration when a port receives prestandard BPDUs. A syslog message also appears the first time a switch receives a prestandard BPDU on a port that has not been configured for prestandard BPDU transmission.

Figure 2 on page 6 illustrates this scenario. Assume that A is a standard switch and B a prestandard switch, both configured to be in the same region. A is the root switch for the CIST, and B has a root port (BX) on segment X and an alternate port (BY) on segment Y. If segment Y flaps, and the port on BY becomes the alternate before sending out a single prestandard BPDU, AY cannot detect that a prestandard switch is connected to Y and continues to send standard BPDUs. The port BY is fixed in a boundary, and no load balancing is possible between A and B. The same problem exists on segment X, but B might transmit topology changes.

Figure 40 Standard and Prestandard Switch Interoperation

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

Note: We recommend that you minimize the interaction between standard and prestandard MST implementations.

This feature is not yet present in the IEEE MST standard, but it is included in this Cisco IOS release. The software checks the consistency of the port role and state in the received BPDUs to detect unidirectional link failures that could cause bridging loops.

When a designated port detects a conflict, it keeps its role, but reverts to discarding state because disrupting connectivity in case of inconsistency is preferable to opening a bridging loop.

Figure 3 on page 6 illustrates a unidirectional link failure that typically creates a bridging loop. Switch A is the root switch, and its BPDUs are lost on the link leading to switch B. RSTP and MST BPDUs include the role and state of the sending port. With this information, switch A can detect that switch B does not react to the superior BPDUs it sends and that switch B is the designated, not root switch. As a result, switch A blocks (or keeps blocking) its port, preventing the bridging loop.

Figure 41 Detecting Unidirectional Link Failure

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

A switch running MSTP supports a built-in protocol migration mechanism that enables it to interoperate with legacy IEEE 802.1D switches. If this switch receives a legacy IEEE 802.1D configuration BPDU (a BPDU with the protocol version set to 0), it sends only IEEE 802.1D BPDUs on that port. An MSTP switch also can detect that a port is at the boundary of a region when it receives a legacy BPDU, an MSTP BPDU (Version 3) associated with a different region, or an RSTP BPDU (Version 2).

However, the switch does not automatically revert to the MSTP mode if it no longer receives IEEE 802.1D BPDUs because it cannot detect whether the legacy switch has been removed from the link unless the legacy switch is the designated switch. A switch might also continue to assign a boundary role to a port when the switch to which this switch is connected has joined the region. To restart the protocol migration process (force the renegotiation with neighboring switches), use the clear spanning-tree detected-protocols privileged EXEC command.

If all the legacy switches on the link are RSTP switches, they can process MSTP BPDUs as if they are RSTP BPDUs. Therefore, MSTP switches send either a Version 0 configuration and TCN BPDUs or Version 3 MSTP BPDUs on a boundary port. A boundary port connects to a LAN, the designated switch of which is either a single spanning-tree switch or a switch with a different MST configuration.

The RSTP takes advantage of point-to-point wiring and provides rapid convergence of the spanning tree. Reconfiguration of the spanning tree can occur in less than 1 second (in contrast to 50 seconds with the default settings in the IEEE 802.1D spanning tree).

The RSTP provides rapid convergence of the spanning tree by assigning port roles and by learning the active topology. The RSTP builds upon the IEEE 802.1D STP to select the switch with the highest switch priority (lowest numerical priority value) as the root switch as described in the Configuring STP, page 1. Then the RSTP assigns one of these port roles to individual ports:

■Root port—Provides the best path (lowest cost) when the switch forwards packets to the root switch.

■Designated port—Connects to the designated switch, which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding packets from that LAN to the root switch. The port through which the designated switch is attached to the LAN is called the designated port.

■Alternate port—Offers an alternate path toward the root switch to that provided by the current root port.

■Backup port—Acts as a backup for the path provided by a designated port toward the leaves of the spanning tree. A backup port can exist only when two ports are connected in a loopback by a point-to-point link or when a switch has two or more connections to a shared LAN segment.

■Disabled port—Has no role within the operation of the spanning tree.

A port with the root or a designated port role is included in the active topology. A port with the alternate or backup port role is excluded from the active topology.

In a stable topology with consistent port roles throughout the network, the RSTP ensures that every root port and designated port immediately transition to the forwarding state while all alternate and backup ports are always in the discarding state (equivalent to blocking in IEEE 802.1D). The port state controls the operation of the forwarding and learning processes. Table 42 provides a comparison of IEEE 802.1D and RSTP port states.

Table 42 EEE 802.1D and RSTP Port States

Operational Status
STP Port State (IEEE 802.1D)
RSTP Port State
Is Port Included in the
Active Topology?

Enabled

Blocking

Discarding

No

Enabled

Listening

Discarding

No

Enabled

Learning

Learning

Yes

Enabled

Forwarding

Forwarding

Yes

Disabled

Disabled

Discarding

No

To be consistent with Cisco STP implementations, this guide defines the port state as blocking instead of discarding. Designated ports start in the listening state.

The RSTP provides for rapid recovery of connectivity following the failure of a switch, a switch port, or a LAN. It provides rapid convergence for edge ports, new root ports, and ports connected through point-to-point links as follows:

■Edge ports—If you configure a port as an edge port on an RSTP switch by using the spanning-tree portfast interface configuration command, the edge port immediately transitions to the forwarding state. An edge port is the same as a Port Fast-enabled port, and you should enable it only on ports that connect to a single end station.

■Root ports—If the RSTP selects a new root port, it blocks the old root port and immediately transitions the new root port to the forwarding state.

■Point-to-point links—If you connect a port to another port through a point-to-point link and the local port becomes a designated port, it negotiates a rapid transition with the other port by using the proposal-agreement handshake to ensure a loop-free topology.

As shown in Figure 4 on page 9, Switch A is connected to Switch B through a point-to-point link, and all of the ports are in the blocking state. Assume that the priority of Switch A is a smaller numerical value than the priority of Switch B. Switch A sends a proposal message (a configuration BPDU with the proposal flag set) to Switch B, proposing itself as the designated switch.

After receiving the proposal message, Switch B selects as its new root port the port from which the proposal message was received, forces all nonedge ports to the blocking state, and sends an agreement message (a BPDU with the agreement flag set) through its new root port.

After receiving Switch B’s agreement message, Switch A also immediately transitions its designated port to the forwarding state. No loops in the network are formed because Switch B blocked all of its nonedge ports and because there is a point-to-point link between Switches A and B.

When Switch C is connected to Switch B, a similar set of handshaking messages are exchanged. Switch C selects the port connected to Switch B as its root port, and both ends immediately transition to the forwarding state. With each iteration of this handshaking process, one more switch joins the active topology. As the network converges, this proposal-agreement handshaking progresses from the root toward the leaves of the spanning tree.

The switch learns the link type from the port duplex mode: a full-duplex port is considered to have a point-to-point connection; a half-duplex port is considered to have a shared connection. You can override the default setting that is controlled by the duplex setting by using the spanning-tree link-type interface configuration command.

Figure 42 Proposal and Agreement Handshaking for Rapid Convergence

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

When the switch receives a proposal message on one of its ports and that port is selected as the new root port, the RSTP forces all other ports to synchronize with the new root information.

The switch is synchronized with superior root information received on the root port if all other ports are synchronized. An individual port on the switch is synchronized if

■That port is in the blocking state.

■It is an edge port (a port configured to be at the edge of the network).

If a designated port is in the forwarding state and is not configured as an edge port, it transitions to the blocking state when the RSTP forces it to synchronize with new root information. In general, when the RSTP forces a port to synchronize with root information and the port does not satisfy any of the above conditions, its port state is set to blocking.

After ensuring that all of the ports are synchronized, the switch sends an agreement message to the designated switch corresponding to its root port. When the switches connected by a point-to-point link are in agreement about their port roles, the RSTP immediately transitions the port states to forwarding. The sequence of events is shown in Figure 5 on page 10.

Figure 43 Sequence of Events During Rapid Convergence

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

The RSTP BPDU format is the same as the IEEE 802.1D BPDU format except that the protocol version is set to 2. A new 1-byte Version 1 Length field is set to zero, which means that no version 1 protocol information is present. Table 3 shows the RSTP flag fields.

Table 43 RSTP Flag Fields

Bit
Function

0

Topology change (TC)

1

Proposal

2–3:

00

01

10

11

Port role:

Unknown

Alternate port

Root port

Designated port

4

Learning

5

Forwarding

6

Agreement

7

Topology change acknowledgement (TCA)

The sending switch sets the proposal flag in the RSTP BPDU to propose itself as the designated switch on that LAN. The port role in the proposal message is always set to the designated port.

The sending switch sets the agreement flag in the RSTP BPDU to accept the previous proposal. The port role in the agreement message is always set to the root port.

The RSTP does not have a separate topology change notification (TCN) BPDU. It uses the topology change (TC) flag to show the topology changes. However, for interoperability with IEEE 802.1D switches, the RSTP switch processes and generates TCN BPDUs.

The learning and forwarding flags are set according to the state of the sending port.

If a port receives superior root information (lower switch ID, lower path cost, and so forth) than currently stored for the port, the RSTP triggers a reconfiguration. If the port is proposed and is selected as the new root port, RSTP forces all the other ports to synchronize.

If the BPDU received is an RSTP BPDU with the proposal flag set, the switch sends an agreement message after all of the other ports are synchronized. If the BPDU is an IEEE 802.1D BPDU, the switch does not set the proposal flag and starts the forward-delay timer for the port. The new root port requires twice the forward-delay time to transition to the forwarding state.

If the superior information received on the port causes the port to become a backup or alternate port, RSTP sets the port to the blocking state but does not send the agreement message. The designated port continues sending BPDUs with the proposal flag set until the forward-delay timer expires, at which time the port transitions to the forwarding state.

If a designated port receives an inferior BPDU (higher switch ID, higher path cost, and so forth than currently stored for the port) with a designated port role, it immediately replies with its own information.

This section describes the differences between the RSTP and the IEEE 802.1D in handling spanning-tree topology changes.

■Detection—Unlike IEEE 802.1D in which any transition between the blocking and the forwarding state causes a topology change, only transitions from the blocking to the forwarding state cause a topology change with RSTP (only an increase in connectivity is considered a topology change). State changes on an edge port do not cause a topology change. When an RSTP switch detects a topology change, it deletes the learned information on all of its nonedge ports except on those from which it received the TC notification.

■Notification—Unlike IEEE 802.1D, which uses TCN BPDUs, the RSTP does not use them. However, for IEEE 802.1D interoperability, an RSTP switch processes and generates TCN BPDUs.

■Acknowledgement—When an RSTP switch receives a TCN message on a designated port from an IEEE 802.1D switch, it replies with an IEEE 802.1D configuration BPDU with the TCA bit set. However, if the TC-while timer (the same as the topology-change timer in IEEE 802.1D) is active on a root port connected to an IEEE 802.1D switch and a configuration BPDU with the TCA bit set is received, the TC-while timer is reset.

This behavior is only required to support IEEE 802.1D switches. The RSTP BPDUs never have the TCA bit set.

■Propagation—When an RSTP switch receives a TC message from another switch through a designated or root port, it propagates the change to all of its nonedge, designated ports and to the root port (excluding the port on which it is received). The switch starts the TC-while timer for all such ports and flushes the information learned on them.

■Protocol migration—For backward compatibility with IEEE 802.1D switches, RSTP selectively sends IEEE 802.1D configuration BPDUs and TCN BPDUs on a per-port basis.

When a port is initialized, the migrate-delay timer is started (specifies the minimum time during which RSTP BPDUs are sent), and RSTP BPDUs are sent. While this timer is active, the switch processes all BPDUs received on that port and ignores the protocol type.

If the switch receives an IEEE 802.1D BPDU after the port migration-delay timer has expired, it assumes that it is connected to an IEEE 802.1D switch and starts using only IEEE 802.1D BPDUs. However, if the RSTP switch is using IEEE 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the timer has expired, it restarts the timer and starts using RSTP BPDUs on that port.

Table 44 Default MSTP Settings

Feature
Default Setting

Spanning-tree mode

PVST+ (Rapid PVST+ and MSTP are disabled)

Switch priority (configurable on a per-CIST port basis)

32768

Spanning-tree port priority (configurable on a per-CIST port basis)

128

Spanning-tree port cost (configurable on a per-CIST port basis)

1000 Mbps: 4

100 Mbps: 19

10 Mbps: 100

Hello time

2 seconds

Forward-delay time

15 seconds

Maximum-aging time

20 seconds

Maximum hop count

20 hops

These are the configuration guidelines for MSTP:

■When you enable MST by using the spanning-tree mode mst global configuration command, RSTP is automatically enabled.

■For two or more switches to be in the same MST region, they must have the same VLAN-to-instance map, the same configuration revision number, and the same name.

■The switch supports up to 65 MST instances. The number of VLANs that can be mapped to a particular MST instance is unlimited.

■PVST+, rapid PVST+, and MSTP are supported, but only one version can be active at any time. (For example, all VLANs run PVST+, all VLANs run rapid PVST+, or all VLANs run MSTP.) For more information, see “Spanning-Tree Interoperability and Backward Compatibility” section on page 10.

■VTP propagation of the MST configuration is not supported. However, you can manually configure the MST configuration (region name, revision number, and VLAN-to-instance mapping) on each switch within the MST region by using the command-line interface (CLI) or through the SNMP support.

■For load balancing across redundant paths in the network to work, all VLAN-to-instance mapping assignments must match; otherwise, all traffic flows on a single link.

■All MST boundary ports must be forwarding for load balancing between a PVST+ and an MST cloud or between a rapid-PVST+ and an MST cloud. For this to occur, the IST master of the MST cloud should also be the root of the CST. If the MST cloud consists of multiple MST regions, one of the MST regions must contain the CST root, and all of the other MST regions must have a better path to the root contained within the MST cloud than a path through the PVST+ or rapid-PVST+ cloud. You might have to manually configure the switches in the clouds.

■Partitioning the network into a large number of regions is not recommended. However, if this situation is unavoidable, we recommend that you partition the switched LAN into smaller LANs interconnected by routers or non-Layer 2 devices.

■For configuration information about UplinkFast and BackboneFast, see “Information About Configuring the Optional Spanning-Tree Features” section on page 1.

For two or more switches to be in the same MST region, they must have the same VLAN-to-instance mapping, the same configuration revision number, and the same name.

A region can have one member or multiple members with the same MST configuration; each member must be capable of processing RSTP BPDUs. There is no limit to the number of MST regions in a network, but each region can only support up to 65 spanning-tree instances. You can assign a VLAN to only one spanning-tree instance at a time.

The switch maintains a spanning-tree instance for the group of VLANs mapped to it. A switch ID, consisting of the switch priority and the switch MAC address, is associated with each instance. For a group of VLANs, the switch with the lowest switch ID becomes the root switch.

To configure a switch to become the root, use the spanning-tree mst instance-id root global configuration command to modify the switch priority from the default value (32768) to a significantly lower value so that the switch becomes the root switch for the specified spanning-tree instance. When you enter this command, the switch checks the switch priorities of the root switches. Because of the extended system ID support, the switch sets its own priority for the specified instance to 24576 if this value will cause this switch to become the root for the specified spanning-tree instance.

If any root switch for the specified instance has a switch priority lower than 24576, the switch sets its own priority to 4096 less than the lowest switch priority. (4096 is the value of the least-significant bit of a 4-bit switch priority value as shown in Table 1 on page 4.)

If your network consists of switches that both do and do not support the extended system ID, it is unlikely that the switch with the extended system ID support will become the root switch. The extended system ID increases the switch priority value every time the VLAN number is greater than the priority of the connected switches running older software.

The root switch for each spanning-tree instance should be a backbone or distribution switch. Do not configure an access switch as the spanning-tree primary root.

Use the diameter keyword, which is available only for MST instance 0, to specify the Layer 2 network diameter (that is, the maximum number of switch hops between any two end stations in the Layer 2 network). When you specify the network diameter, the switch automatically sets an optimal hello time, forward-delay time, and maximum-age time for a network of that diameter, which can significantly reduce the convergence time. You can use the hello keyword to override the automatically calculated hello time.

When you configure a switch with the extended system ID support as the secondary root, the switch priority is modified from the default value (32768) to 28672. The switch is then likely to become the root switch for the specified instance if the primary root switch fails. This is assuming that the other network switches use the default switch priority of 32768 and therefore are unlikely to become the root switch.

You can execute this command on more than one switch to configure multiple backup root switches. Use the same network diameter and hello-time values that you used when you configured the primary root switch with the spanning-tree mst instance-id root primary global configuration command.

If a loop occurs, the MSTP uses the port priority when selecting an interface to put into the forwarding state. You can assign higher priority values (lower numerical values) to interfaces that you want selected first and lower priority values (higher numerical values) that you want selected last. If all interfaces have the same priority value, the MSTP puts the interface with the lowest interface number in the forwarding state and blocks the other interfaces.

The MSTP path cost default value is derived from the media speed of an interface. If a loop occurs, the MSTP uses cost when selecting an interface to put in the forwarding state. You can assign lower cost values to interfaces that you want selected first and higher cost values that you want selected last. If all interfaces have the same cost value, the MSTP puts the interface with the lowest interface number in the forwarding state and blocks the other interfaces.

If you connect a port to another port through a point-to-point link and the local port becomes a designated port, the RSTP negotiates a rapid transition with the other port by using the proposal-agreement handshake to ensure a loop-free topology as described in the Rapid Convergence, page 8.

By default, the link type is controlled from the duplex mode of the interface: a full-duplex port is considered to have a point-to-point connection; a half-duplex port is considered to have a shared connection. If you have a half-duplex link physically connected point-to-point to a single port on a remote switch running MSTP, you can override the default setting of the link type and enable rapid transitions to the forwarding state.

A topology could contain both prestandard and IEEE 802.1s standard compliant devices. By default, ports can automatically detect prestandard devices, but they can still receive both standard and prestandard BPDUs. When there is a mismatch between a device and its neighbor, only the CIST runs on the interface.

You can choose to set a port to send only prestandard BPDUs. The prestandard flag appears in all the show commands, even if the port is in STP compatibility mode.

A switch running MSTP supports a built-in protocol migration mechanism that enables it to interoperate with legacy IEEE 802.1D switches. If this switch receives a legacy IEEE 802.1D configuration BPDU (a BPDU with the protocol version set to 0), it sends only IEEE 802.1D BPDUs on that port. An MSTP switch also can detect that a port is at the boundary of a region when it receives a legacy BPDU, an MST BPDU (Version 3) associated with a different region, or an RST BPDU (Version 2).

However, the switch does not automatically revert to the MSTP mode if it no longer receives IEEE 802.1D BPDUs because it cannot detect whether the legacy switch has been removed from the link unless the legacy switch is the designated switch. A switch also might continue to assign a boundary role to a port when the switch to which it is connected has joined the region.

This task is required.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

spanning-tree mst configuration

Enters MST configuration mode.

3.

instance instance-id vlan vlan-range

Maps VLANs to an MST instance.

■ instance-id— range is 0 to 4096.

vlan vlan-range —range is 1 to 4096.

When you map VLANs to an MST instance, the mapping is incremental, and the VLANs specified in the command are added to or removed from the VLANs that were previously mapped.

To specify a VLAN range, use a hyphen; for example, instance 1 vlan 1-63 maps VLANs 1 through 63 to MST instance 1.

To specify a VLAN series, use a comma; for example, instance 1 vlan 10, 20, 30 maps VLANs 10, 20, and 30 to MST instance 1.

4.

name name

Specifies the configuration name. The name string has a maximum length of 32 characters and is case sensitive.

5.

revision version

Specifies the configuration revision number. The range is 0 to 65535.

6.

show pending

Verifies your configuration by displaying the pending configuration.

7.

exit

Applies all changes, and returns to global configuration mode.

8.

spanning-tree mode mst

Enables MSTP. RSTP is also enabled.

Caution: Changing spanning-tree modes can disrupt traffic because all spanning-tree instances are stopped for the previous mode and restarted in the new mode.

You cannot run both MSTP and PVST+ or both MSTP and rapid PVST+ at the same time.

9.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

Before You Begin

After configuring the switch as the root switch, we recommend that you avoid manually configuring the hello time, forward-delay time, and maximum-age time through the spanning-tree mst hello-time, spanning-tree mst forward-time, and the spanning-tree mst max-age global configuration commands.

This task is optional.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

spanning-tree mst instance-id root primary [ diameter net-diameter [ hello-time seconds ]]

Configures a switch as the root switch.

■ instance-id —Specifies a single instance, a range of instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of instances separated by a comma. The range is 0 to 4096.

■(Optional) diameter net-diameter —Specifies the maximum number of switches between any two end stations. The range is 2 to 7. This keyword is available only for MST instance 0.

■(Optional) hello-time seconds —Specifies the interval in seconds between the generation of configuration messages by the root switch. The range is 1 to 10 seconds; the default is 2 seconds.

3.

spanning-tree mst instance-id root secondary [ diameter net-diameter [ hello-time seconds ]]

Configures a switch as the secondary root switch.

■ instance-id— Specifies a single instance, a range of instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of instances separated by a comma. The range is 0 to 4096.

■(Optional) diameter net-diameter— Specifies the maximum number of switches between any two end stations. The range is 2 to 7. This keyword is available only for MST instance 0.

■(Optional) hello-time seconds— Specifies the interval in seconds between the generation of configuration messages by the root switch. The range is 1 to 10 seconds; the default is 2 seconds.

Use the same network diameter and hello-time values that you used when configuring the primary root switch.

4.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

Before You Begin

Exercise care when configuring the switch priority. For most situations, we recommend that you use the spanning-tree mst instance-id root primary and the spanning-tree mst instance-id root secondary global configuration commands to modify the switch priority.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

spanning-tree mst instance-id priority priority

Configures the switch priority.

■ instance-id— Specifies a single instance, a range of instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of instances separated by a comma. The range is 0 to 4096.

■ priority —The range is 0 to 61440 in increments of 4096; the default is 32768. The lower the number, the more likely the switch will be chosen as the root switch.

Priority values are 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, and 61440. All other values are rejected.

3.

spanning-tree mst hello-time seconds

Configures the hello time for all MST instances. The hello time is the interval between the generation of configuration messages by the root switch. These messages mean that the switch is alive.

seconds —The range is 1 to 10; the default is 2.

4.

spanning-tree mst forward-time seconds

Configures the forward time for all MST instances. The forward delay is the number of seconds a port waits before changing from its spanning-tree learning and listening states to the forwarding state.

seconds —The range is 4 to 30; the default is 15.

5.

spanning-tree mst max-age seconds

Configures the maximum-aging time for all MST instances. The maximum-aging time is the number of seconds a switch waits without receiving spanning-tree configuration messages before attempting a reconfiguration.

seconds —The range is 6 to 40; the default is 20.

6.

spanning-tree mst max-hops hop-count

Specifies the number of hops in a region before the BPDU is discarded, and the information held for a port is aged.

hop-count —The range is 1 to 255; the default is 20.

7.

interface interface-id

Specifies an interface to configure, and enters interface configuration mode.

Valid interfaces include physical ports and port-channel logical interfaces.

8.

spanning-tree mst instance-id port-priority priority

Configures the port priority.

■ instance-id —Specifies a single instance, a range of instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of instances separated by a comma. The range is 0 to 4096.

■ priority —The range is 0 to 240 in increments of 16. The default is 128. The lower the number, the higher the priority.

The priority values are 0, 16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 176, 192, 208, 224, and 240. All other values are rejected.

9.

spanning-tree mst instance-id cost cost

Configures the cost.

If a loop occurs, the MSTP uses the path cost when selecting an interface to place into the forwarding state. A lower path cost represents higher-speed transmission.

■ instance-id —Specifies a single instance, a range of instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of instances separated by a comma. The range is 0 to 4096.

■ cost —The range is 1 to 200000000; the default value is derived from the media speed of the interface.

10.

spanning-tree link-type point-to-point

Specifies that the link type of a port is point-to-point.

11.

spanning-tree mst pre-standard

Specifies that the port can send only prestandard BPDUs.

12.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

Command
Purpose

show spanning-tree mst configuration

Displays the MST region configuration.

show spanning-tree mst configuration digest

Displays the MD5 digest included in the current MSTCI.

show spanning-tree mst instance-id

Displays MST information for the specified instance.

show spanning-tree mst interface interface-id

Displays MST information for the specified interface.

clear spanning-tree detected-protocols

Restarts the protocol migration process (forces the renegotiation with neighboring switches) on the switch,

clear spanning-tree detected-protocols interface interface-id

Restarts the protocol migration process on a specific interface.

show running-config

Verifies your entries.

copy running-config startup-config

Saves your entries in the configuration file.

This example shows how to enter MST configuration mode, map VLANs 10 to 20 to MST instance 1, name the region region1, set the configuration revision to 1, display the pending configuration, apply the changes, and return to global configuration mode:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
Switch(config-mst)# instance 1 vlan 10-20
Switch(config-mst)# name region1
Switch(config-mst)# revision 1
Switch(config-mst)# show pending
Pending MST configuration
Name [region1]
Revision 1
Instance Vlans Mapped
-------- ---------------------
0 1-9,21-4096
1 10-20
-------------------------------
 
Switch(config-mst)# exit
Switch(config)#

The following sections provide references related to switch administration:

Related Topic
Document Title

Cisco IOS basic commands

Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference

PVST+ and rapid PVST+ configuration

Chapter 19, “Configuring VLANs”

Optional Spanning-Tree configuration

Chapter 24, “Configuring Optional Spanning-Tree Features”

Supported number of spanning-tree instances

Chapter 22, “Supported Spanning-Tree Instances”

Standards
Title

No new or modified standards are supported by this feature, and support for existing standards has not been modified by this feature.

RFCs
Title

No new or modified RFCs are supported by this feature, and support for existing RFCs has not been modified by this feature.


Page 9

This chapter describes how to use Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) to provide routing redundancy for routing IP traffic not dependent on the availability of any single router. HSRP for IPv4 is supported on switches running the IP services image.

You can also use a version of HSRP in Layer 2 mode to configure a redundant command switch to take over cluster management if the cluster command switch fails.

For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see these documents:

This chapter consists of these sections:

HSRP is Cisco’s standard method of providing high network availability by providing first-hop redundancy for IP hosts on an IEEE 802 LAN configured with a default gateway IP address. HSRP routes IP traffic without relying on the availability of any single router. It enables a set of router interfaces to work together to present the appearance of a single virtual router or default gateway to the hosts on a LAN. When HSRP is configured on a network or segment, it provides a virtual Media Access Control (MAC) address and an IP address that is shared among a group of configured routers. HSRP allows two or more HSRP-configured routers to use the MAC address and IP network address of a virtual router. The virtual router does not exist; it represents the common target for routers that are configured to provide backup to each other. One of the routers is selected to be the active router and another to be the standby router, which assumes control of the group MAC address and IP address should the designated active router fail.

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

Note Routers in an HSRP group can be any router interface that supports HSRP, including routed ports and switch virtual interfaces (SVIs).

HSRP provides high network availability by providing redundancy for IP traffic from hosts on networks. In a group of router interfaces, the active router is the router of choice for routing packets; the standby router is the router that takes over the routing duties when an active router fails or when preset conditions are met.

HSRP is useful for hosts that do not support a router discovery protocol and cannot switch to a new router when their selected router reloads or loses power. When HSRP is configured on a network segment, it provides a virtual MAC address and an IP address that is shared among router interfaces in a group of router interfaces running HSRP. The router selected by the protocol to be the active router receives and routes packets destined for the group’s MAC address. For n routers running HSRP, there are n +1 IP and MAC addresses assigned.

HSRP detects when the designated active router fails, and a selected standby router assumes control of the Hot Standby group’s MAC and IP addresses. A new standby router is also selected at that time. Devices running HSRP send and receive multicast UDP-based hello packets to detect router failure and to designate active and standby routers. When HSRP is configured on an interface, Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) redirect messages are disabled by default for the interface.

You can configure multiple Hot Standby groups among switches that are operating in Layer 3 to make more use of the redundant routers. To do so, specify a group number for each Hot Standby command group you configure for an interface. For example, you might configure an interface on switch 1 as an active router and one on switch 2 as a standby router and also configure another interface on switch 2 as an active router with another interface on switch 1 as its standby router.

Figure 49-96 shows a segment of a network configured for HSRP. Each router is configured with the MAC address and IP network address of the virtual router. Instead of configuring hosts on the network with the IP address of Router A, you configure them with the IP address of the virtual router as their default router. When Host C sends packets to Host B, it sends them to the MAC address of the virtual router. If for any reason, Router A stops transferring packets, Router B responds to the virtual IP address and virtual MAC address and becomes the active router, assuming the active router duties. Host C continues to use the IP address of the virtual router to address packets destined for Host B, which Router B now receives and sends to Host B. Until Router A resumes operation, HSRP allows Router B to provide uninterrupted service to users on Host C’s segment that need to communicate with users on Host B’s segment and also continues to perform its normal function of handling packets between the Host A segment and Host B.

Figure 49-96 Typical HSRP Configuration

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

The switch supports these Hot Standby Redundancy Protocol (HSRP) versions:

  • HSRPv1—Version 1 of the HSRP, the default version of HSRP. It has these features:

– The HSRP group number can be from 0 to 255.

– HSRPv1 uses the multicast address 224.0.0.2 to send hello packets, which can conflict with Cisco Group Management Protocol (CGMP) leave processing. You cannot enable HSRPv1 and CGMP at the same time; they are mutually exclusive.

  • HSRPv2—Version 2 of the HSRP has these features:

– To match the HSRP group number to the VLAN ID of a subinterface, HSRPv2 can use a group number from 0 to 4095 and a MAC address from 0000.0C9F.F000 to 0000.0C9F.FFFF.

– HSRPv2 uses the multicast address 224.0.0.102 to send hello packets. HSRPv2 and CGMP leave processing are no longer mutually exclusive, and both can be enabled at the same time.

– HSRPv2 has a different packet format than HRSPv1.

A switch running HSRPv1 cannot identify the physical router that sent a hello packet because the source MAC address of the router is the virtual MAC address.

HSRPv2 has a different packet format than HSRPv1. A HSRPv2 packet uses the type-length-value (TLV) format and has a 6-byte identifier field with the MAC address of the physical router that sent the packet.

If an interface running HSRPv1 gets an HSRPv2 packet, the type field is ignored.

The switch supports Multiple HSRP (MHSRP), an extension of HSRP that allows load sharing between two or more HSRP groups. You can configure MHSRP to achieve load balancing and to use two or more standby groups (and paths) from a host network to a server network. In Figure 49-97, half the clients are configured for Router A, and half the clients are configured for Router B. Together, the configuration for Routers A and B establishes two HSRP groups. For group 1, Router A is the default active router because it has the assigned highest priority, and Router B is the standby router. For group 2, Router B is the default active router because it has the assigned highest priority, and Router A is the standby router. During normal operation, the two routers share the IP traffic load. When either router becomes unavailable, the other router becomes active and assumes the packet-transfer functions of the router that is unavailable.

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

Note For MHSRP, you need to enter the standby preempt interface configuration command on the HSRP interfaces so that if a router fails and then comes back up, preemption restores load sharing.

Figure 49-97 MHSRP Load Sharing

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

These sections contain this configuration information:

Table 49-62 shows the default HSRP configuration.

Table 49-62 Default HSRP Configuration

Feature
Default Setting

HSRP version

Version 1

HSRP groups

None configured

Standby group number

0

Standby MAC address

System assigned as: 0000.0c07.acXX, where XX is the HSRP group number

Standby priority

100

Standby delay

0 (no delay)

Standby track interface priority

10

Standby hello time

3 seconds

Standby holdtime

10 seconds

Follow these guidelines when configuring HSRP:

  • HSRP for IPv4 and HSRP for IPv6 are mutually exclusive. You cannot enable both at the same time.
  • HSRPv2 and HSRPv1 are mutually exclusive. HSRPv2 is not interoperable with HSRPv1 on an interface and the reverse.
  • You can configure up to 32 instances of HSRP groups.

If you configure the same HSRP group number on multiple interfaces, the switch counts each interface as one instance:

For example, if you configure HSRP group 0 on VLAN 1 and on port 1, the switch counts this as two instances.

  • In the configuration procedures, the specified interface must be a Layer 3 interface:

– Routed port: a physical port configured as a Layer 3 port by entering the no switchport interface configuration command.

– SVI: a VLAN interface created by using the interface vlan vlan_id global configuration command and by default a Layer 3 interface.

– EtherChannel port channel in Layer 3 mode: a port-channel logical interface created by using the interface port-channel port-channel-number global configuration command and binding the Ethernet interface into the channel group. For more information, see the “Configuring Layer 3 EtherChannels” section.

  • All Layer 3 interfaces must have assigned IP addresses.
  • Configure only one instance of an FHRP. The switches support HSRPv1, HSRPv2, and HSRP for IPv6.
  • The version of an HSRP group can be changed from HSRPv2 to HSRPv1 only if the group number is less than 256.
  • When configuring group numbers for HSRPv2 and HSRP for IPv6, you must use group numbers in ranges that are multiples of 256. Valid ranges are 0 to 255, 256 to 511, 512 to 767, 3840 to 4095, and so on.

Examples of valid and invalid group numbers:

– If you configure groups with the numbers 2, 150, and 225, you cannot configure another group with the number 3850. It is not in the range of 0 to 255.

– If you configure groups with the numbers 520, 600, and 700, you cannot configure another group with the number 900. It is not in the range of 512 to 767.

  • If you change the HSRP version on an interface, each HSRP group resets because it now has a new virtual MAC address.

The standby ip interface configuration command activates HSRP on the configured interface. If an IP address is specified, that address is used as the designated address for the Hot Standby group. If no IP address is specified, the address is learned through the standby function. You must configure at least one Layer 3 port on the LAN with the designated address. Configuring an IP address always overrides another designated address currently in use.

When the standby ip command is enabled on an interface and proxy ARP is enabled, if the interface’s Hot Standby state is active, proxy ARP requests are answered using the Hot Standby group MAC address. If the interface is in a different state, proxy ARP responses are suppressed.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create or enable HSRP on a Layer 3 interface:

Command
Purpose

Step 1

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

Step 2

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and enter the Layer 3 interface on which you want to enable HSRP.

Step 3

standby version { 1 | 2 }

(Optional) Configure the HSRP version on the interface.

  • 1— Select HSRPv1.
  • 2— Select HSRPv2.

If you do not enter this command or do not specify a keyword, the interface runs the default HSRP version, HSRP v1.

Step 4

standby [ group-number ] ip [ ip-address [ secondary ]]

Create (or enable) the HSRP group using its number and virtual IP address.

  • (Optional) group-number —The group number on the interface for which HSRP is being enabled. The range is 0 to 255; the default is 0. If there is only one HSRP group, you do not need to enter a group number.
  • (Optional on all but one interface) ip-address —The virtual IP address of the hot standby router interface. You must enter the virtual IP address for at least one of the interfaces; it can be learned on the other interfaces.
  • (Optional) secondary —The IP address is a secondary hot standby router interface. If neither router is designated as a secondary or standby router and no priorities are set, the primary IP addresses are compared and the higher IP address is the active router, with the next highest as the standby router.

Step 5

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

Step 6

show standby [ interface-id [ group ]]

Verify the configuration.

Step 7

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no standby [ group-number ] ip [ ip-address ] interface configuration command to disable HSRP.

This example shows how to activate HSRP for group 1 on an interface. The IP address used by the hot standby group is learned by using HSRP.

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

Note This procedure is the minimum number of steps required to enable HSRP. Other configuration is optional.

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 ip
Switch(config-if)# end
Switch# show standby

The standby priority, standby preempt, and standby track interface configuration commands are all used to set characteristics for finding active and standby routers and behavior regarding when a new active router takes over.

When configuring HSRP priority, follow these guidelines:

  • Assigning a priority allows you to select the active and standby routers. If preemption is enabled, the router with the highest priority becomes the active router. If priorities are equal, the current active router does not change.
  • The highest number (1 to 255) represents the highest priority (most likely to become the active router).
  • When setting the priority, preempt, or both, you must specify at least one keyword (priority, preempt, or both).
  • The priority of the device can change dynamically if an interface is configured with the standby track command and another interface on the router goes down.
  • The standby track interface configuration command ties the router hot standby priority to the availability of its interfaces and is useful for tracking interfaces that are not configured for HSRP. When a tracked interface fails, the hot standby priority on the device on which tracking has been configured decreases by 10. If an interface is not tracked, its state changes do not affect the hot standby priority of the configured device. For each interface configured for hot standby, you can configure a separate list of interfaces to be tracked.
  • The standby track interface-priority interface configuration command specifies how much to decrement the hot standby priority when a tracked interface goes down. When the interface comes back up, the priority is incremented by the same amount.
  • When multiple tracked interfaces are down and interface-priority values have been configured, the configured priority decrements are cumulative. If tracked interfaces that were not configured with priority values fail, the default decrement is 10, and it is noncumulative.
  • When routing is first enabled for the interface, it does not have a complete routing table. If it is configured to preempt, it becomes the active router, even though it is unable to provide adequate routing services. To solve this problem, configure a delay time to allow the router to update its routing table.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use one or more of these steps to configure HSRP priority characteristics on an interface:

Command
Purpose

Step 1

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

Step 2

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and enter the HSRP interface on which you want to set priority.

Step 3

standby [ group-number ] priority priority [ preempt [ delay delay ]]

Set a priority value used in choosing the active router. The range is 1 to 255; the default priority is 100. The highest number represents the highest priority.

  • (Optional) group-number —The group number to which the command applies.
  • (Optional) preempt— Select so that when the local router has a higher priority than the active router, it assumes control as the active router.
  • (Optional) delay —Set to cause the local router to postpone taking over the active role for the shown number of seconds. The range is 0 to 3600(1 hour); the default is 0 (no delay before taking over).

Use the no form of the command to restore the default values.

Step 4

standby [ group-number ] [ priority priority ] preempt [ delay delay ]

Configure the router to preempt, which means that when the local router has a higher priority than the active router, it assumes control as the active router.

  • (Optional) group-number —The group number to which the command applies.
  • (Optional) priority —Enter to set or change the group priority. The range is 1 to 255; the default is 100.
  • (Optional) delay —Set to cause the local router to postpone taking over the active role for the number of seconds shown. The range is 0 to 3600 (1 hour); the default is 0 (no delay before taking over).

Use the no form of the command to restore the default values.

Step 5

standby [ group-number ] track type number [ interface-priority ]

Configure an interface to track other interfaces so that if one of the other interfaces goes down, the device’s Hot Standby priority is lowered.

  • (Optional) group-number —The group number to which the command applies.
  • type— Enter the interface type (combined with interface number) that is tracked.
  • number— Enter the interface number (combined with interface type) that is tracked.
  • (Optional) interface-priority— Enter the amount by which the hot standby priority for the router is decremented or incremented when the interface goes down or comes back up. The default value is 10.

Step 6

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

Step 7

show running-config

Verify the configuration of the standby groups.

Step 8

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no standby [ group-number ] priority priority [ preempt [ delay delay ]] and no standby [ group-number ] [ priority priority ] preempt [ delay delay ] interface configuration commands to restore default priority, preempt, and delay values.

Use the no standby [ group-number ] track type number [ interface-priority ] interface configuration command to remove the tracking.

This example activates a port, sets an IP address and a priority of 120 (higher than the default value), and waits for 300 seconds (5 minutes) before attempting to become the active router:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# standby ip 172.20.128.3
Switch(config-if)# standby priority 120 preempt delay 300
Switch(config-if)# end

To enable MHSRP and load balancing, you configure two routers as active routers for their groups, with virtual routers as standby routers. This example shows how to enable the MHSRP configuration shown in Figure 49-97. You need to enter the standby preempt interface configuration command on each HSRP interface so that if a router fails and comes back up, the preemption occurs and restores load balancing.

Router A is configured as the active router for group 1, and Router B is configured as the active router for group 2. The HSRP interface for Router A has an IP address of 10.0.0.1 with a group 1 standby priority of 110 (the default is 100). The HSRP interface for Router B has an IP address of 10.0.0.2 with a group 2 standby priority of 110.

Group 1 uses a virtual IP address of 10.0.0.3 and group 2 uses a virtual IP address of 10.0.0.4.

Router A Configuration

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.0.0.1 255.255.255.0
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 ip 10.0.0.3
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 priority 110
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 preempt
Switch(config-if)# standby 2 ip 10.0.0.4
Switch(config-if)# standby 2 preempt
Switch(config-if)# end
 

Router B Configuration

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.0.0.2 255.255.255.0
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 ip 10.0.0.3
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 preempt
Switch(config-if)# standby 2 ip 10.0.0.4
Switch(config-if)# standby 2 priority 110
Switch(config-if)# standby 2 preempt
Switch(config-if)# end

You can optionally configure an HSRP authentication string or change the hello-time interval and holdtime.

When configuring these attributes, follow these guidelines:

  • The authentication string is sent unencrypted in all HSRP messages. You must configure the same authentication string on all routers and access servers on a cable to ensure interoperation. Authentication mismatch prevents a device from learning the designated Hot Standby IP address and timer values from other routers configured with HSRP.
  • Routers or access servers on which standby timer values are not configured can learn timer values from the active or standby router. The timers configured on an active router always override any other timer settings.
  • All routers in a Hot Standby group should use the same timer values. Normally, the holdtime is greater than or equal to 3 times the hellotime.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use one or more of these steps to configure HSRP authentication and timers on an interface:

Command
Purpose

Step 1

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

Step 2

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and enter the HSRP interface on which you want to set authentication.

Step 3

standby [ group-number ] authentication string

(Optional) authentication string —Enter a string to be carried in all HSRP messages. The authentication string can be up to eight characters in length; the default string is cisco.

(Optional) group-number —The group number to which the command applies.

Step 4

standby [ group-number ] timers hellotime holdtime

(Optional) Configure the time between hello packets and the time before other routers declare the active router to be down.

  • group-number —The group number to which the command applies.
  • hellotime —The hello interval in seconds. The range is from 1 to 255; the default is 3 seconds.
  • holdtime —The time in seconds before the active or standby router is declared to be down. The range is from 1 to 255; the default is 10 seconds.

Step 5

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

Step 6

show running-config

Verify the configuration of the standby groups.

Step 7

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no standby [ group-number ] authentication string interface configuration command to delete an authentication string. Use the no sta ndby [ group-number ] timers hellotime holdtime interface configuration command to restore timers to their default values.

This example shows how to configure word as the authentication string required to allow Hot Standby routers in group 1 to interoperate:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 authentication word
Switch(config-if)# end
 

This example shows how to set the timers on standby group 1 with the time between hello packets at 5 seconds and the time after which a router is considered down to be 15 seconds:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 ip
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 timers 5 15
Switch(config-if)# end

The Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is a network layer Internet protocol that provides message packets to report errors and other information relevant to IP processing. ICMP provides diagnostic functions, such as sending and directing error packets to the host.

When the switch is running HSRP, make sure hosts do not discover the interface (or real) MAC addresses of routers in the HSRP group. If a host is redirected by ICMP to the real MAC address of a router and that router later fails, packets from the host will be lost.

ICMP redirect messages are automatically enabled on interfaces configured with HSRP. This feature filters outgoing ICMP redirect messages through HSRP, in which the next hop IP address might be changed to an HSRP virtual IP address.

When a device is participating in an HSRP standby routing and clustering is enabled, you can use the same standby group for command switch redundancy and HSRP redundancy. Use the cluster standby-group HSRP-group-name [ routing-redundancy ] global configuration command to enable the same HSRP standby group to be used for command switch and routing redundancy. If you create a cluster with the same HSRP standby group name without entering the routing-redundancy keyword, HSRP standby routing is disabled for the group.

This example shows how to bind standby group my_hsrp to the cluster and enable the same HSRP group to be used for command switch redundancy and router redundancy. The command can only be executed on the cluster command switch. If the standby group name or number does not exist, or if the switch is a cluster member switch, an error message appears.

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# cluster standby-group my_hsrp routing-redundancy
Switch(config)# end

If one of the situations in Table 49-63 occurs, this message appears:

%FHRP group not consistent with already configured groups on the switch stack - virtual MAC reservation failed
 

Table 49-63 Troubleshooting HSRP

Situation
Action

You configure more than 32 HSRP group instances.

Remove HSRP groups so that up to 32 group instances are configured.

You configure HSRP for IPv4 and HSRP for IPv6 at the same time

Configure either HSRP for IPv4 or HSRP for IPv6 on the switch.

You configure group numbers that are not in valid ranges of 256.

Configure group numbers in a valid range.

From privileged EXEC mode, use this command to display HSRP settings:

show standby [ interface-id [ group ]] [ brief ] [ detail ]

You can display HSRP information for the whole switch, for a specific interface, for an HSRP group, or for an HSRP group on an interface. You can also specify whether to display a concise overview of HSRP information or detailed HSRP information. The default display is detail. If there are a large number of HSRP groups, using the show standby command without qualifiers can result in an unwieldy display.

This is a an example of output from the show standby privileged EXEC command, displaying HSRP information for two standby groups (group 1 and group 100):

Switch# show standby
VLAN1 - Group 1
Local state is Standby, priority 105, may preempt
Hellotime 3 holdtime 10
Next hello sent in 00:00:02.182
Hot standby IP address is 172.20.128.3 configured
Active router is 172.20.128.1 expires in 00:00:09
Standby router is local
Standby virtual mac address is 0000.0c07.ac01
Name is bbb
VLAN1 - Group 100
Local state is Active, priority 105, may preempt
Hellotime 3 holdtime 10
Next hello sent in 00:00:02.262
Hot standby IP address is 172.20.138.51 configured
Active router is local
Standby router is unknown expired
Standby virtual mac address is 0000.0c07.ac64
Name is test

The Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) is an election protocol that dynamically assigns responsibility for one or more virtual routers to the VRRP routers on a LAN, allowing several routers on a multiaccess link to utilize the same virtual IP address. A VRRP router is configured to run the VRRP protocol in conjunction with one or more other routers attached to a LAN. In a VRRP configuration, one router is elected as the virtual router master, with the other routers acting as backups in case the virtual router master fails.

  • The switch supports either HSRP or VRRP, but not both. The switch cannot join a stack that has both HSRP and VRRP configured.
  • The VRRP implementation on the switch does not support the MIB specified in RFC 2787.
  • The VRRP implementation on the switch supports only text -based authentication.
  • You cannot enable VRRP for IPv4 and IPv6 groups simultaneously.


Page 10

This chapter describes how to configure Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) snooping and option-82 data insertion, and the DHCP server port-based address allocation features on the switch. It also describes how to configure the IP source guard feature.

DHCP is widely used in LAN environments to dynamically assign host IP addresses from a centralized server, which significantly reduces the overhead of administration of IP addresses. DHCP also helps conserve the limited IP address space because IP addresses no longer need to be permanently assigned to hosts; only those hosts that are connected to the network consume IP addresses.

The DHCP server assigns IP addresses from specified address pools on a switch or router to DHCP clients and manages them. If the DHCP server cannot give the DHCP client the requested configuration parameters from its database, it forwards the request to one or more secondary DHCP servers defined by the network administrator.

A DHCP relay agent is a Layer 3 device that forwards DHCP packets between clients and servers. Relay agents forward requests and replies between clients and servers when they are not on the same physical subnet. Relay agent forwarding is different from the normal Layer 2 forwarding, in which IP datagrams are switched transparently between networks. Relay agents receive DHCP messages and generate new DHCP messages to send on output interfaces.

DHCP snooping is a DHCP security feature that provides network security by filtering untrusted DHCP messages and by building and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding database, also referred to as a DHCP snooping binding table.

DHCP snooping acts like a firewall between untrusted hosts and DHCP servers. You use DHCP snooping to differentiate between untrusted interfaces connected to the end user and trusted interfaces connected to the DHCP server or another switch.

Note: For DHCP snooping to function properly, all DHCP servers must be connected to the switch through trusted interfaces.

An untrusted DHCP message is a message that is received from outside the network or firewall. When you use DHCP snooping in a service-provider environment, an untrusted message is sent from a device that is not in the service-provider network, such as a customer’s switch. Messages from unknown devices are untrusted because they can be sources of traffic attacks.

The DHCP snooping binding database has the MAC address, the IP address, the lease time, the binding type, the VLAN number, and the interface information that corresponds to the local untrusted interfaces of a switch. It does not have information regarding hosts interconnected with a trusted interface.

In a service-provider network, a trusted interface is connected to a port on a device in the same network. An untrusted interface is connected to an untrusted interface in the network or to an interface on a device that is not in the network.

When a switch receives a packet on an untrusted interface and the interface belongs to a VLAN in which DHCP snooping is enabled, the switch compares the source MAC address and the DHCP client hardware address. If the addresses match (the default), the switch forwards the packet. If the addresses do not match, the switch drops the packet.

The switch drops a DHCP packet when one of these situations occurs:

■A packet from a DHCP server, such as a DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK, or DHCPLEASEQUERY packet, is received from outside the network or firewall.

■A packet is received on an untrusted interface, and the source MAC address and the DHCP client hardware address do not match.

■The switch receives a DHCPRELEASE or DHCPDECLINE broadcast message that has a MAC address in the DHCP snooping binding database, but the interface information in the binding database does not match the interface on which the message was received.

■A DHCP relay agent forwards a DHCP packet that includes a relay-agent IP address that is not 0.0.0.0, or the relay agent forwards a packet that includes option-82 information to an untrusted port.

If the switch is an aggregation switch supporting DHCP snooping and is connected to an edge switch that is inserting DHCP option-82 information, the switch drops packets with option-82 information when packets are received on an untrusted interface. If DHCP snooping is enabled and packets are received on a trusted port, the aggregation switch does not learn the DHCP snooping bindings for connected devices and cannot build a complete DHCP snooping binding database.

When an aggregation switch can be connected to an edge switch through an untrusted interface and you enter the ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted global configuration command, the aggregation switch accepts packets with option-82 information from the edge switch. The aggregation switch learns the bindings for hosts connected through an untrusted switch interface. The DHCP security features, such as dynamic ARP inspection or IP source guard, can still be enabled on the aggregation switch while the switch receives packets with option-82 information on untrusted input interfaces to which hosts are connected. The port on the edge switch that connects to the aggregation switch must be configured as a trusted interface.

In residential, metropolitan Ethernet-access environments, DHCP can centrally manage the IP address assignments for a large number of subscribers. When the DHCP option-82 feature is enabled on the switch, a subscriber device is identified by the switch port through which it connects to the network (in addition to its MAC address). Multiple hosts on the subscriber LAN can be connected to the same port on the access switch and are uniquely identified.

Note: The DHCP option-82 feature is supported only when DHCP snooping is globally enabled and on the VLANs to which subscriber devices using this feature are assigned.

Figure 60 is an example of a metropolitan Ethernet network in which a centralized DHCP server assigns IP addresses to subscribers connected to the switch at the access layer. Because the DHCP clients and their associated DHCP server do not reside on the same IP network or subnet, a DHCP relay agent (the Catalyst switch) is configured with a helper address to enable broadcast forwarding and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server.

Figure 60 DHCP Relay Agent in a Metropolitan Ethernet Network

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

When you enable the DHCP snooping information option-82 on the switch, this sequence of events occurs:

■The host (DHCP client) generates a DHCP request and broadcasts it on the network.

■When the switch receives the DHCP request, it adds the option-82 information in the packet. By default, the remote-ID suboption is the switch MAC address, and the circuit-ID suboption is the port identifier, vlan-mod-port, from which the packet is received.

■If the IP address of the relay agent is configured, the switch adds this IP address in the DHCP packet.

■The switch forwards the DHCP request that includes the option-82 field to the DHCP server.

■The DHCP server receives the packet. If the server is option-82-capable, it can use the remote ID, the circuit ID, or both to assign IP addresses and implement policies, such as restricting the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to a single remote ID or circuit ID. The DHCP server then repeats the option-82 field in the DHCP reply.

■The DHCP server unicasts the reply to the switch if the request was relayed to the server by the switch. The switch verifies that it originally inserted the option-82 data by inspecting the remote ID and possibly the circuit ID fields. The switch removes the option-82 field and forwards the packet to the switch port that connects to the DHCP client that sent the DHCP request.

In the default suboption configuration, when the described sequence of events occurs, the values in these fields in Figure 61 do not change:

■Circuit-ID suboption fields

–Suboption type

–Length of the suboption type

–Circuit-ID type

–Length of the circuit-ID type

■Remote-ID suboption fields

–Suboption type

–Length of the suboption type

–Remote-ID type

–Length of the remote-ID type

In the port field of the circuit-ID suboption, the port numbers start at 3. Figure 61 shows the packet formats for the remote-ID suboption and the circuit-ID suboption when the default suboption configuration is used. The switch uses the packet formats when you globally enable DHCP snooping and enter the ip dhcp snooping information option global configuration command.

Figure 61 Suboption Packet Formats

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

shows the packet formats for user-configured remote-ID and circuit-ID suboptions The switch uses these packet formats when DHCP snooping is globally enabled and when the ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id global configuration command and the ip dhcp snooping vlan information option format-type circuit-id string interface configuration command are entered.

The values for these fields in the packets change from the default values when you configure the remote-ID and circuit-ID suboptions:

■Circuit-ID suboption fields

–The circuit-ID type is 1.

–The length values are variable, depending on the length of the string that you configure.

■Remote-ID suboption fields

–The remote-ID type is 1.

–The length values are variable, depending on the length of the string that you configure.

Figure 62 User-Configured Suboption Packet Formats

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

During the DHCP-based autoconfiguration process, the designated DHCP server uses the Cisco IOS DHCP server database. It has IP addresses, address bindings, and configuration parameters, such as the boot file.

An address binding is a mapping between an IP address and a MAC address of a host in the Cisco IOS DHCP server database. You can manually assign the client IP address, or the DHCP server can allocate an IP address from a DHCP address pool.

When DHCP snooping is enabled, the switch uses the DHCP snooping binding database to store information about untrusted interfaces. The database can have up to 8192 bindings.

Each database entry ( binding) has an IP address, an associated MAC address, the lease time (in hexadecimal format), the interface to which the binding applies, and the VLAN to which the interface belongs. The database agent stores the bindings in a file at a configured location. At the end of each entry is a checksum that accounts for all the bytes from the start of the file through all the bytes associated with the entry. Each entry is 72 bytes, followed by a space and then the checksum value.

To keep the bindings when the switch reloads, you must use the DHCP snooping database agent. If the agent is disabled, dynamic ARP inspection or IP source guard is enabled, and the DHCP snooping binding database has dynamic bindings, the switch loses its connectivity. If the agent is disabled and only DHCP snooping is enabled, the switch does not lose its connectivity, but DHCP snooping might not prevent DHCP spoofing attacks.

When reloading, the switch reads the binding file to build the DHCP snooping binding database. The switch updates the file when the database changes.

When a switch learns of new bindings or when it loses bindings, the switch immediately updates the entries in the database. The switch also updates the entries in the binding file. The frequency at which the file is updated is based on a configurable delay, and the updates are batched. If the file is not updated in a specified time (set by the write-delay and abort-timeout values), the update stops.

This is the format of the file with bindings:

<initial-checksum>
TYPE DHCP-SNOOPING
VERSION 1
BEGIN
<entry-1> <checksum-1>
<entry-2> <checksum-1-2>
...
...
<entry-n> <checksum-1-2-..-n>
END
 

Each entry in the file is tagged with a checksum value that the switch uses to verify the entries when it reads the file. The initial-checksum entry on the first line distinguishes entries associated with the latest file update from entries associated with a previous file update.

This is an example of a binding file:

2bb4c2a1
TYPE DHCP-SNOOPING
VERSION 1
BEGIN
192.1.168.1 3 0003.47d8.c91f 2BB6488E interface-id 21ae5fbb
192.1.168.3 3 0003.44d6.c52f 2BB648EB interface-id 1bdb223f
192.1.168.2 3 0003.47d9.c8f1 2BB648AB interface-id 584a38f0
END
 

When the switch starts and the calculated checksum value equals the stored checksum value, the switch reads entries from the binding file and adds the bindings to its DHCP snooping binding database. The switch ignores an entry when one of these situations occurs:

■The switch reads the entry and the calculated checksum value does not equal the stored checksum value. The entry and the ones following it are ignored.

■An entry has an expired lease time (the switch might not remove a binding entry when the lease time expires).

■The interface in the entry no longer exists on the system.

■The interface is a routed interface or a DHCP snooping-trusted interface.

Table 46 Default DHCP Snooping Settings

Feature
Default Setting

DHCP server

Enabled in Cisco IOS software, requires configuration1

DHCP relay agent

Enabled2

DHCP packet forwarding address

None configured

Checking the relay agent information

Enabled (invalid messages are dropped)2.

DHCP relay agent forwarding policy

Replace the existing relay agent information2.

DHCP snooping enabled globally

Disabled

DHCP snooping information option

Enabled

DHCP snooping option to accept packets on untrusted input interfaces3

Disabled

DHCP snooping limit rate

None configured

DHCP snooping trust

Untrusted

DHCP snooping VLAN

Disabled

DHCP snooping MAC address verification

Enabled

Cisco IOS DHCP server binding database

Enabled in Cisco IOS software, requires configuration.

Note: The switch gets network addresses and configuration parameters only from a device configured as a DHCP server.

DHCP snooping binding database agent

Enabled in Cisco IOS software, requires configuration. This feature is operational only when a destination is configured.

■You must globally enable DHCP snooping on the switch.

■DHCP snooping is not active until DHCP snooping is enabled on a VLAN.

■Before globally enabling DHCP snooping on the switch, make sure that the devices acting as the DHCP server and the DHCP relay agent are configured and enabled.

■Before configuring the DHCP snooping information option on your switch, be sure to configure the device that is acting as the DHCP server. For example, you must specify the IP addresses that the DHCP server can assign or exclude, or you must configure DHCP options for these devices.

■When configuring a large number of circuit IDs on a switch, consider the impact of lengthy character serstrings on the NVRAM or the flash memory. If the circuit-ID configurations, combined with other data, exceed the capacity of the NVRAM or the flash memory, an error message appears.

■Before configuring the DHCP relay agent on your switch, make sure to configure the device that is acting as the DHCP server. For example, you must specify the IP addresses that the DHCP server can assign or exclude, configure DHCP options for devices, or set up the DHCP database agent.

■If the DHCP relay agent is enabled but DHCP snooping is disabled, the DHCP option-82 data insertion feature is not supported.

■If a switch port is connected to a DHCP server, configure a port as trusted by entering the ip dhcp snooping trust interface configuration command.

■If a switch port is connected to a DHCP client, configure a port as untrusted by entering the no ip dhcp snooping trust interface configuration command.

■Do not enter the ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted command on an aggregation switch to which an untrusted device is connected. If you enter this command, an untrusted device might spoof the option-82 information.

■You can display DHCP snooping statistics by entering the show ip dhcp snooping statistics user EXEC command, and you can clear the snooping statistics counters by entering the clear ip dhcp snooping statistics privileged EXEC command.

Note: Do not enable DHCP snooping on RSPAN VLANs. If DHCP snooping is enabled on RSPAN VLANs, DHCP packets might not reach the RSPAN destination port.

■Because both NVRAM and the flash memory have limited storage capacity, we recommend that you store the binding file on a TFTP server.

■For network-based URLs (such as TFTP and FTP), you must create an empty file at the configured URL before the switch can write bindings to the binding file at that URL. See the documentation for your TFTP server to determine whether you must first create an empty file on the server; some TFTP servers cannot be configured this way.

■To ensure that the lease time in the database is accurate, we recommend that you enable and configure NTP. For more information, see Configuring Time and Date Manually.

■If NTP is configured, the switch writes binding changes to the binding file only when the switch system clock is synchronized with NTP.

If the DHCP server and the DHCP clients are on different networks or subnets, you must configure the switch with the ip helper-address address interface configuration command. The general rule is to configure the command on the Layer 3 interface closest to the client. The address used in the ip helper-address command can be a specific DHCP server IP address, or it can be the network address if other DHCP servers are on the destination network segment. Using the network address enables any DHCP server to respond to requests.

DHCP server port-based address allocation is a feature that enables DHCP to maintain the same IP address on an Ethernet switch port regardless of the attached device client identifier or client hardware address.

When Ethernet switches are deployed in the network, they offer connectivity to the directly connected devices. In some environments, such as on a factory floor, if a device fails, the replacement device must be working immediately in the existing network. With the current DHCP implementation, there is no guarantee that DHCP would offer the same IP address to the replacement device. Control, monitoring, and other software expect a stable IP address associated with each device. If a device is replaced, the address assignment should remain stable even though the DHCP client has changed.

When configured, the DHCP server port-based address allocation feature ensures that the same IP address is always offered to the same connected port even as the client identifier or client hardware address changes in the DHCP messages received on that port. The DHCP protocol recognizes DHCP clients by the client identifier option in the DHCP packet. Clients that do not include the client identifier option are identified by the client hardware address. When you configure this feature, the port name of the interface overrides the client identifier or hardware address and the actual point of connection, the switch port, becomes the client identifier.

In all cases, by connecting the Ethernet cable to the same port, the same IP address is allocated through DHCP to the attached device.

The DHCP server port-based address allocation feature is only supported on a Cisco IOS DHCP server and not a third-party server.

By default, DHCP server port-based address allocation is disabled.

These are the configuration guidelines for DHCP port-based address allocation:

■Only one IP address can be assigned per port.

■Reserved addresses (preassigned) cannot be cleared by using the clear ip dhcp binding global configuration command.

■Preassigned addresses are automatically excluded from normal dynamic IP address assignment. Preassigned addresses cannot be used in host pools, but there can be multiple preassigned addresses per DHCP address pool.

■To restrict assignments from the DHCP pool to preconfigured reservations (unreserved addresses are not offered to the client and other clients are not served by the pool), you can enter the reserved-only DHCP pool configuration command.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

service dhcp

Enables the DHCP server and relay agent on your switch. By default, this feature is enabled.

3.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

interface vlan vlan-id

Creates a switch virtual interface by entering a VLAN ID, and enters interface configuration mode.

3.

ip address ip-address subnet-mask

Configures the interface with an IP address and an IP subnet.

4.

ip helper-address address

Specifies the DHCP packet forwarding address.

The helper address can be a specific DHCP server address, or it can be the network address if other DHCP servers are on the destination network segment. Using the network address enables other servers to respond to DHCP requests.

If you have multiple servers, you can configure one helper address for each server.

5.

exit

Returns to global configuration mode.

6.

interface range port-range

or

interface interface-id

Configures multiple physical ports that are connected to the DHCP clients, and enters interface range configuration mode.

or

Configures a single physical port that is connected to the DHCP client, and enters interface configuration mode.

7.

switchport mode access

Defines the VLAN membership mode for the port.

8.

switchport access vlan vlan-id

Assigns the ports to the same VLAN as configured in Step 2.

9.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

ip dhcp snooping

Enables DHCP snooping globally.

3.

ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-range

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or range of VLANs. The range is 1 to 4096.

You can enter a single VLAN ID identified by VLAN ID number, a series of VLAN IDs separated by commas, a range of VLAN IDs separated by hyphens, or a range of VLAN IDs separated by entering the starting and ending VLAN IDs separated by a space.

4.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables the switch to insert and to remove DHCP relay information (option-82 field) in forwarded DHCP request messages to the DHCP server. This is the default setting.

5.

ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id [string ASCII-string | hostname ]

(Optional) Configures the remote-ID suboption.

You can configure the remote ID as

■String of up to 63 ASCII characters (no spaces)

■Hostname for the switch

Note: If the hostname is longer than 63 characters, it is truncated to 63 characters in the remote-ID configuration.

The default remote ID is the switch MAC address.

6.

ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted

(Optional) If the switch is an aggregation switch connected to an edge switch, enable the switch to accept incoming DHCP snooping packets with option-82 information from the edge switch.

The default setting is disabled.

Note: Enter this command only on aggregation switches that are connected to trusted devices.

7.

interface interface-id

Specifies the interface to be configured, and enters interface configuration mode.

8.

ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan information option format-type circuit-id [override] string ASCII-string

(Optional) Configures the circuit-ID suboption for the specified interface.

Specifies the VLAN and port identifier, using a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4096. The default circuit ID is the port identifier in the format vlan-mod-port.

You can configure the circuit ID to be a string of 3 to 63 ASCII characters (no spaces).

(Optional) Use the override keyword when you do not want the circuit-ID suboption inserted in TLV format to define subscriber information.

9.

ip dhcp snooping trust

(Optional) Configures the interface as trusted or as untrusted. Use the no keyword to configure an interface to receive messages from an untrusted client. The default setting is untrusted.

10.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate rate

(Optional) Configures the number of DHCP packets per second that an interface can receive. The range is 1 to 2048. By default, no rate limit is configured.

Note: We recommend an untrusted rate limit of not more than 100 packets per second. If you configure rate limiting for trusted interfaces, you might need to increase the rate limit if the port is a trunk port assigned to more than one VLAN with DHCP snooping.

11.

exit

Returns to global configuration mode.

12.

ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address

(Optional) Configures the switch to verify that the source MAC address in a DHCP packet received on untrusted ports matches the client hardware address in the packet. The default is to verify that the source MAC address matches the client hardware address in the packet.

13.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

ip dhcp snooping database { flash:/ filename | ftp:// user : password@host / filename | http:// [[ username : password ]@]{ hostname | host-ip }[/ directory ]
/ image-name .tar | rcp:// user@host / filename }| tftp:// host / filename

Specifies the URL for the database agent or the binding file by using one of these forms:

flash:/ filename

ftp:// user : password @ host / filename

http:// [[ username : password ]@]{ hostname | host-ip }[/ directory ]
/ image-name .tar

rcp:// user @ host / filename

tftp:// host / filename

3.

ip dhcp snooping database timeout seconds

Specifies (in seconds) how long to wait for the database transfer process to finish before stopping the process.

The default is 300 seconds. The range is 0 to 86400. Use 0 to define an infinite duration, which means to continue trying the transfer indefinitely.

4.

ip dhcp snooping database write-delay seconds

Specifies the duration for which the transfer should be delayed after the binding database changes. The range is from 15 to 86400 seconds. The default is 300 seconds (5 minutes).

5.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

ip dhcp snooping binding mac-address vlan vlan-id ip-address interface interface-id expiry seconds

(Optional) Adds binding entries to the DHCP snooping binding database. The vlan-id range is from 1 to 4904. The seconds range is from 1 to 4294967295.

Enter this command for each entry that you add.

Note: Use this command when you are testing or debugging the switch.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

ip dhcp use subscriber-id client-id

Configures the DHCP server to globally use the subscriber identifier as the client identifier on all incoming DHCP messages.

3.

ip dhcp subscriber-id interface-name

Automatically generates a subscriber identifier based on the short name of the interface.

A subscriber identifier configured on a specific interface takes precedence over this command.

4.

interface interface-id

Specifies the interface to be configured, and enters interface configuration mode.

5.

ip dhcp server use subscriber-id client-id

Configures the DHCP server to use the subscriber identifier as the client identifier on all incoming DHCP messages on the interface.

6.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

After enabling DHCP port-based address allocation on the switch, use the ip dhcp pool global configuration command to preassign IP addresses and to associate them to clients. To restrict assignments from the DHCP pool to preconfigured reservations, you can enter the reserved-only DHCP pool configuration command. Unreserved addresses that are part of the network or on pool ranges are not offered to the client, and other clients are not served by the pool. By entering this command, users can configure a group of switches with DHCP pools that share a common IP subnet and that ignore requests from clients of other switches.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

ip dhcp pool poolname

Enters DHCP pool configuration mode, and defines the name for the DHCP pool. The pool name can be a symbolic string (such as Engineering) or an integer (such as 0).

3.

network network-number [ mask | /prefix-length ]

Specifies the subnet network number and mask of the DHCP address pool.

4.

address ip-address client-id string [ ascii ]

Reserves an IP address for a DHCP client identified by the interface name.

string —Can be an ASCII value or a hexadecimal value.

5.

reserved-only

(Optional) Uses only reserved addresses in the DHCP address pool. The default is to not restrict pool addresses.

6.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

Command
Purpose

show interface interface id

Displays the status and configuration of a specific interface.

show ip dhcp pool

Displays the DHCP address pools.

show ip dhcp binding

Displays address bindings on the Cisco IOS DHCP server.

ip dhcp snooping database timeout seconds

Specifies (in seconds) how long to wait for the database transfer process to finish before stopping.

ip dhcp snooping database write-delay seconds

Specifies (in seconds) the duration for which the transfer should be delayed after the binding database changes.

clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics

Clears the DHCP snooping binding database agent statistics.

renew ip dhcp snooping database

Renews the DHCP snooping binding database.

show ip dhcp snooping database [ detail ]

Displays the status and statistics of the DHCP snooping binding database agent.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration for a switch

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays only the dynamically configured bindings in the DHCP snooping binding database, also referred to as a binding table.

show ip dhcp snooping database

Displays the DHCP snooping binding database status and statistics.

show ip dhcp pool

Verifies DHCP pool configuration.

copy running-config startup-config

Saves your entries in the configuration file.

In this example, a subscriber identifier is automatically generated, and the DHCP server ignores any client identifier fields in the DHCP messages and uses the subscriber identifier instead. The subscriber identifier is based on the short name of the interface and the client preassigned IP address 10.1.1.7.

switch# show running config
Building configuration...
Current configuration : 4899 bytes
!
version 12.2
!
hostname switch
!
no aaa new-model
clock timezone EST 0
ip subnet-zero
ip dhcp relay information policy removal pad
no ip dhcp use vrf connected
ip dhcp use subscriber-id client-id
ip dhcp subscriber-id interface-name
ip dhcp excluded-address 10.1.1.1 10.1.1.3
!
ip dhcp pool dhcppool
network 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0
address 10.1.1.7 client-id “Et1/0” ascii
<output truncated>
 

This example shows that the preassigned address was correctly reserved in the DHCP pool:

switch# show ip dhcp pool dhcppool
Pool dhcp pool:
Utilization mark (high/low) : 100 / 0
Subnet size (first/next) : 0 / 0
Total addresses : 254
Leased addresses : 0
Excluded addresses : 4
Pending event : none
1 subnet is currently in the pool:
Current index IP address range Leased/Excluded/Total
10.1.1.1 10.1.1.1 - 10.1.1.254 0 / 4 / 254
1 reserved address is currently in the pool
Address Client
10.1.1.7 Et1/0

This example shows how to enable DHCP snooping globally and on VLAN 10 and to configure a rate limit of 100 packets per second on a port:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping
Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 10
Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping information option
Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/17
Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping limit rate 100

The following sections provide references related to switch administration:

Related Topic
Document Title

Cisco IOS basic commands

Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference

Cisco IOS DHCP Commands

Cisco IOS IP Command Reference, Volume 1 of 3: Addressing and Services

Cisco IOS DHCP Configuration

Cisco IOS DHCP server port-based address allocation

“IP Addressing and Services” chapter of the Cisco IOS IP Configuration Guide

Cisco IOS DHCP Configuration Task List

“Configuring DHCP” chapter of the Cisco IOS IP Configuration Guide

Standards
Title

No new or modified standards are supported by this feature, and support for existing standards has not been modified by this feature.

RFCs
Title

No new or modified RFCs are supported by this feature, and support for existing RFCs has not been modified by this feature.


Page 11

Media Access Control Security (MACsec) is the IEEE 802.1AE standard for authenticating and encrypting packets between two MACsec-capable devices.

For information about MACsec, including details about MACsec and MACsec Key Agreement (MKA), how to configure MKA and MACsec, and how to configure Cisco TrustSec MACsec, see Configuring MACsec Encryption.

This chapter includes the following information about MACsec specific to the IE 4000, IE 4010, and IE 5000 switches:

■PSK Based MKA Support for MACsec

■Certificate-based MACsec Encryption

Note: On the IE 4000, IE 4010, and the IE 5000, MACsec is included in the IP Services image only.

MACsec on the IE5000 has the following guidelines and limitations:

■Both models of IE 5000 downlinks are fully interoperable with IE 4000, IE 4010, Catalyst 9300/3850, and Catalyst IE 3x00 platforms.

■On the IE-5000-16S12P, uplinks are fully functional when connected to another IE-5000-16S12P or a Catalyst 3850.

■On the IE-5000-12S12P-10G, uplinks when running at 10GE are fully functional when connected to another IE-5000-12S12P-10G running at 10GE or to a Catalyst 3850 running at 10GE.

■When an IE 5000 uplink is connected to a Catalyst 9300, the IE 5000 must be the key server. CSCvs36043

■IE-5000-12S12P-10G uplinks MACsec is not currently supported at GE speeds. CSCvs41335

■IE-5000-16S12P uplinks connected to downlinks of the IE 5000 and IE 4000 is not currently supported. CSCvs44292

To interoperate with Cisco switches running IOS XE, the CKN configuration must be zero-padded. From Cisco IOS XE Everest Release 16.6.1 onwards, for MKA-PSK sessions, instead of fixed 32 bytes, the Connectivity Association Key name (CKN) uses exactly the same string as the CKN, which is configured as the hex-string for the key.

Example configuration:

configure terminal
key chain KEYCHAINONE macsec
key 1234
cryptographic-algorithm aes-128-cmac
key-string 123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF0
lifetime local 12:21:00 Sep 9 2015 infinite
end
 

For the above example, following is the output for the show mka session command:

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

Note that the CKN key-string is exactly the same that has been configured for the key as hex-string.

For interoperability between two images, one having the CKN behavior change and one without the CKN behavior change, the hex-string for the key must be a 64-character hex-string padded with zeros to work on a device that has an image with the CKN behavior change. See the example below:

Configuration without CKN key-string behavior change:

config t
key chain KEYCHAINONE macsec
key 1234
cryptographic-algorithm aes-128-cmac
key-string 123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF0
lifetime local 12:21:00 Sep 9 2015 infinite

Output:

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

Configuration with CKN key-string behavior change:

config t
key chain KEYCHAINONE macsec
key 1234000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
cryptographic-algorithm aes-128-cmac
key-string 123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF0
lifetime local 12:21:00 Sep 9 2015 infinite
 

Output:

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

This section provides information about configuring pre-shared key (PSK) based MACsec Key Agreement (MKA) MACsec encryption on the switch. This feature applies to Cisco IOS Release 15.2(7)E1a and later.

IE switches support Pairwise Master Key (PMK) Security Association Protocol (SAP) based support for MACsec to interconnect links between the switches. The PMK keys can be either derived statically from the switch configuration (manual mode) or derived from the RADIUS server during dot1X negotiation (dynamic mode). Manual mode does not support switch-to-host MACsec connections because SAP is a Cisco proprietary protocol.

IE switches have MKA support for MACSec on switch-to-host links. Here the keys are derived from the RADIUS server after dot1x authentication. However, manually configured PSK keys were not supported on IE switch platforms (running Cisco IOS) prior to Cisco IOS Release 15.2(7)E1a. Catalyst IE 3x00 platforms (running Cisco IOS XE) have PSK based MKA support for MACsec for statically derived keys from the switch configuration for switch-to-switch connections as well as dynamically derived keys from RADIUS server for switch-to-host links.

Catalyst IE 3x00 platforms do not have PMK SAP based support for MACsec. Therefore, for interoperability with the Catalyst IE 3x00 platforms, the PSK functionality is added to MACsec for Cisco IOS based IE switches.

Follow the procedures in this section to configure PSK based MKA on IE 4000, IE 4010, and IE 5000 switches.

The MACsec Key Agreement (MKA) enables configuration and control of keying parameters. Perform the following task to configure MKA.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

enable

Example:

Device> enable

Enables privileged EXEC mode.

■Enter your password if prompted.

2.

configure terminal

Example:

Device# configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

3.

mka policy policy-name

Example:

Device(config)# mka policy MKAPolicy

Configures an MKA policy.

4.

key-server priority key-server-priority

Example:

Device(config-mka-policy)# key-server priority 200

(Optional) Configures MKA key server priority.

5.

macsec-cipher-suite {gcm-aes-128 }

Example:

Device(config-mka-policy)# macsec-cipher-suite gcm-aes-128

(Optional) Configures cipher suite(s) for secure association key (SAK) derivation. Each of the cipher suite options can be repeated only once, but they can be used in any order.

6.

replay-protection

Example:

Device(config-mka-policy)# replay-protection

(Optional) Configure MKA to use replay protection for MACsec operation.

7.

confidentiality-offset 30

Example:

Device(config-mka-policy)# confidentiality-offset 30

(Optional) Configures confidentiality offset for MACsec operation.

8.

end

Example:

Device(config-mka-policy)# end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

You can use the show mka policy command to verify the configuration. Here's a sample output of the show command.

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

Perform the following task to configure MACsec and MKA on an interface.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

enable

Example:

Device> enable

Enables privileged EXEC mode.

■Enter your password if prompted.

2.

configure terminal

Example:

Device# configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

3.

interface type number

Example:

Device(config)# interface GigabitEthernet 1/1

Enters interface configuration mode.

4.

mka policy policy-name

Example:

Device(config-if)# mka policy MKAPolicy

Configures an MKA policy.

5.

mka pre-shared-key key-chain key-chain-name

Example:

Device(config-if)# mka pre-shared-key key-chain keychain1

Configures an MKA pre-shared-key key-chain keychain1.

Note: The MKA Pre-shared key can be configured on either physical interface or subinterfaces and not on both physical and subinterfaces.

6.

macsec network-link

Example:

Device(config-if)#macsec network-link

Configures PSK MKA MACsec on this interface. This is mutually exclusive with macsec.

7.

macsec replay-protection window-size

Example:

Device(config-if)# macsec replay-protection window-size 10

Sets the MACsec window size for replay protection.

8.

end

Example:

Device(config-mka-policy)# end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

Perform the following task to configure MACsec Key Agreement (MKA) pre-shared key.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

enable

Example:

Device> enable

Enables privileged EXEC mode.

■Enter your password if prompted.

2.

configure terminal

Example:

Device# configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

3.

key chain key-chain-name [ macsec ]

Example:

Device(config)# Key chain keychain1 macsec

Configures a key chain and enters keychain configuration mode

4.

key hex-string

Example:

Device(config-keychain)# key 9ABCD

Configures a key and enters keychain key configuration mode.

5.

cryptographic-algorithm {gcm-aes-128 }

Example:

Device(config-keychain-key)# cryptographic-algorithm gcm-aes-128

Set cryptographic authentication algorithm.

6.

key-string {[ 0 | 6 ] pwd-string | 7 | pwd-string }

Example:

Device(config-keychain-key)# key-string 0 pwd

Sets the password for a key string.

7.

lifetime local {{ day month year duration seconds }

Example:

Device(config-keychain-key)# lifetime local 16:00:00 Nov 9 2014 duration 6000

Sets the lifetime for a key string.

The range you can specify for the duration is between 1 and 864000 seconds.

8.

end

Example:

Device(config-mka-policy)# end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

This section provides information about Certificate-based MACsec Encryption. This feature applies to Cisco IOS Release 15.2(8)E and later.

■Certificate-based MACsec Encryption is supported on the IE4000, IE4010, and IE5000.

■Ensure that you have a Certificate Authority (CA) server configured for your network.

■Generate a CA certificate.

■Ensure that you have configured Cisco Identity Services Engine (ISE) Release 2.0. Refer to the Cisco Identity Services Engine Administrator Guide, Release 2.3.

■Ensure that both the participating devices, the CA server, and Cisco Identity Services Engine (ISE) are synchronized using Network Time Protocol (NTP). If time is not synchronized on all your devices, certificates will not be validated.

■Ensure that 802.1x authentication and AAA are configured on your device.

■MKA is not supported on port-channels.

■High Availability for MKA is not supported.

■When you remove dot1x pae both from an interface, all configuration related to dot1x is removed from the interface.

■Certificate-based MACsec is supported only if the access-session host-mode is configured in multiple-host mode. The other configuration modes (multi-auth, multi-domain, or single-host) are not supported.

MKA MACsec is supported on switch-to-switch links. Using IEEE 802.1X Port-based Authentication with Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP-TLS), you can configure MKA MACsec between device ports. EAP-TLS allows mutual authentication and obtains an MSK (master session key) from which the connectivity association key (CAK) is derived for MKA protocol. Device certificates are carried, using EAP-TLS, for authentication to the AAA server.

Refer to Certificate-based MACsec Encryption For more information about Certificate-based MACsec Encryption, including how to configure Certificate-based MACsec Encryption using Remote Authentication.

Follow these procedures to configure MACsec encryption using remote authentication:

■Configure Certificate Enrollment Manually

■Configure an Authentication Policy

■Configure EAP-TLS Profiles and IEEE 802.1x Credentials

■Configure MKA MACsec using EAP-TLS on Interfaces

If network connection between the router and CA is not possible, perform the following task to set up manual certificate enrollment:

 
Command or Action
Purpose

1.

enable

Enables privileged EXEC mode.

■Enter your password if prompted.

2.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

3.

crypto pki trustpoint server name

Declares the trustpoint and a given name and enters ca-trustpoint configuration mode.

4.

enrollment terminal

Enroll via the terminal (cut-and-paste).

5.

rsakeypair label

Specifies which key pair to associate with the certificate.

6.

serial-number

Specifies the router serial number in the certificate request.

7.

Subject-name Line

Declares the subject name.

For example:

subject-name cn=MUSTS.mkadt.cisco.com

,OU=CSG Security,O=Cisco Systems,L=Bengaluru,ST=KA,C=IN

8.

subject-alt-name Line

include subject alternative name.

9.

fqdn Line

include fully-qualified domain name.

10.

revocation-check none

The none keyword specifies to ignore revocation check.

11.

exit

Exits global configuration mode.

12.

crypto pki authenticate name

Retrieves the CA certificate and authenticates it.

13.

crypto pki enroll name

Generates certificate request and displays the request for copying and pasting into the certificate server.

Enter enrollment information when you are prompted. For example, specify whether to include the device FQDN and IP address in the certificate request.

You are also given the choice about displaying the certificate request to the console terminal.

The base-64 encoded certificate with or without PEM headers as requested is displayed.

14.

crypto pki import name
certificate

Imports a certificate via TFTP at the console terminal, which retrieves the granted certificate.

The device attempts to retrieve the granted certificate via TFTP using the same filename used to send the request, except the extension is changed from “.req” to “.crt”. For usage key certificates, the extensions “-sign.crt” and “-encr.crt” are used.

The device parses the received files, verifies the certificates, and inserts the certificates into the internal certificate database on the switch.

Note: Some CAs ignore the usage key information in the certificate request and issue general purpose usage certificates. If your CA ignores the usage key information in the certificate request, only import the general purpose certificate. The router will not use one of the two key pairs generated.

15.

exit

Exits global configuration mode.

16.

show crypto pki certificate
trustpoint name

Displays information about the certificate for the trust point.

17.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

 
Command or Action
Purpose

1.

enable

Enables privileged EXEC mode.

■Enter your password if prompted.

2.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

3.

aaa new-model

Enables AAA.

4.

dot1x system-auth-control

Enables 802.1X on your device.

5.

radius server name

Specifies the name of the RADIUS server configuration for Protected Access Credential (PAC) provisioning and enters RADIUS server

configuration mode.

6.

address i p-address auth-port
port-number acct-port port-number

Configures the IPv4 address for the RADIUS server accounting and authentication parameters.

7.

automate-tester username username

Enables the automated testing feature for the RADIUS server.

With this practice, the device sends periodic test authentication messages to the RADIUS server. It looks for a RADIUS response from the server. A success message is not necessary - a failed authentication suffices, because it shows that the server is alive.

8.

key string

Configures the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the device and the RADIUS server.

9.

radius-server deadtime minutes

Improves RADIUS response time when some servers might be unavailable and skips unavailable servers immediately.

10.

exit

Returns to global configuration mode.

11.

aaa group server radius group-name

Groups different RADIUS server hosts into distinct lists and distinct methods, and enters server group configuration mode.

12.

server name

Assigns the RADIUS server name.

13.

exit

Returns to global configuration mode.

14.

aaa authentication dot1x default group group-name

Sets the default authentication server group for IEEE 802.1x.

15.

aaa authorization network default group group-name

Sets the network authorization default group.

 
Command or Action
Purpose

1.

enable

Enables privileged EXEC mode.

■Enter your password if prompted.

2.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

3.

eap profile p rofile-name

Configures EAP profile and enters EAP profile configuration mode.

4.

method tls

Enables EAP-TLS method on the device.

5.

pki-trustpoint name

Sets the default PKI trustpoint.

6.

exit

Returns to global configuration mode.

7.

dot1x credentials p rofile-name

Configures 802.1x credentials profile and enters dot1x credentials configuration mode.

8.

username username

Sets the authentication user ID.

9.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

To apply MKA MACsec using EAP-TLS to interfaces, perform the following task:

 
Command or Action
Purpose

1.

enable

Enables privileged EXEC mode.

■Enter your password if prompted.

2.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

3.

interface i nterface-id

Identifies the MACsec interface, and enter interface

configuration mode. The interface must be a physical interface.

4.

macsec network-link

Enables MACsec on the interface.

5.

authentication periodic

Enables reauthentication for this port.

6.

access-session host-mode multi-host

Allows hosts to gain access to the interface.

7.

access-session closed

Prevents preauthentication access on the interface.

8.

access-session port-control auto

Sets the authorization state of a port.

9.

dot1x pae both

Configures the port as an 802.1X port access entity (PAE) supplicant and authenticator.

10.

dot1x credentials profile

Assigns a 802.1x credentials profile to the interface.

11.

dot1x supplicant eap profile name

Assigns the EAP-TLS profile to the interface.

dot1x authenticator eap profile name

Assigns the EAP-TLS profile to the interface

12.

service-policy type control subscriber
control-policy name

Applies a subscriber control policy to the interface.

13.

exit

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

14.

show macsec interface

Displays MACsec details for the interface.

15.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

Use the following show commands to verify the configuration of certificate-based MACsec encryption. Sample output is shown below.

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

The show access-session interface interface-id details displays detailed information about the access session for the given interface.

Device#show access-session interface gi 1/18 details
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/18
MAC Address: 5453.5632.0082
IPv6 Address: Unknown
IPv4 Address: Unknown
User-Name: scepen.mkadt.cisco.com
Status: Authorized
Domain: DATA
Oper host mode: multi-host
Oper control dir: both
Session timeout: N/A
Restart timeout: N/A
Periodic Acct timeout: N/A
Session Uptime: 25s
Common Session ID: 000000000000000C0011E814
Acct Session ID: 0x00000001
Handle: 0xC0000001
Current Policy: MUSTS_1
Local Policies:
Service Template: DEFAULT_LINKSEC_POLICY_MUST_SECURE (priority 150)
Security Policy: Must Secure
Security Status: Link Secured
Server Policies:
Method status list:
Method State
dot1xSupp Authc Success
dot1x Authc Success

Configure Crypto PKI Trustpoint:

Manual Installation of Root CA certificate:

crypto pki authenticate demo
aaa new-model
dot1x system-auth-control
radius server ISE
address ipv4 <ISE ipv4 address> auth-port 1645 acct-port 1646
key <secret configured on ise>
!
aaa group server radius ISEGRP
server name ISE
!
aaa authentication dot1x default group ISEGRP
aaa authorization network default group ISEGRP
!
eap profile scepen
method tls
pki-trustpoint demo
!
dot1x system-auth-control
dot1x credentials mis
username scepen.mkadt.cisco.com
!
interface GigabitEthernet1/2
switchport mode access
macsec network-link
authentication periodic
access-session host-mode multi-host
access-session closed
access-session port-control auto
dot1x pae both
dot1x authenticator eap profile scepen
dot1x credentials mis
dot1x supplicant eap profile scepen
service-policy type control subscriber MUSTS_1
!


Page 12

The switch software monitors switch conditions on a per-port or a switch basis. If the conditions present on the switch or a port do not match the set parameters, the switch software triggers an alarm or a system message. By default, the switch software sends the system messages to a system message logging facility, or a syslog facility. You can also configure the switch to send Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps to an SNMP server.

The switch processes alarms related to temperature and power supply conditions, referred to as global or facility alarms.

Table 10 Global Status Monitoring Alarms

Alarm
Description

Power supply alarm

The switch monitors dual power supply levels. If there are two power supplies installed in the switch, an alarm triggers if a power supply fails. The alarm is automatically cleared when both power supplies are working. You can configure the power supply alarm to be connected to the hardware relays. For more information, see Configuring the Power Supply Alarms.

Temperature alarms

The switch contains one temperature sensor with a primary and secondary temperature setting. The sensor monitors the environmental conditions inside the switch.

The primary and secondary temperature alarms can be set as follows:

■The primary alarm is enabled automatically to trigger both at a low temperature, –4°F (–20°C) and a high temperature, 203°F (95°C). It cannot be disabled. By default, the primary temperature alarm is associated with the major relay.

■The secondary alarm triggers when the system temperature is higher or lower than the configured high and low temperature thresholds. The secondary alarm is disabled by default.

For more information, see Configuring the Switch Temperature Alarms.

SD-Card

By default the alarm is disabled.

The Ethernet standard calls for a maximum bit-error rate of 10-8. The bit error-rate range is from 10-6 to 10-11. The bit error-rate input to the switch is a positive exponent. If you want to configure the bit error-rate of 10-9, enter the value 9 for the exponent. By default, the FCS bit error-rate is 10-8.

You can set the FCS error hysteresis threshold to prevent the toggle of the alarm when the actual bit-error rate fluctuates near the configured rate. The hysteresis threshold is defined as the ratio between the alarm clear threshold to the alarm set threshold, expressed as a percentage value.

For example, if the FCS bit error-rate alarm value is configured to 10–8, that value is the alarm set threshold. To set the alarm clear threshold at 5*10-10, the hysteresis, value h, is determined as follows:

h = alarm clear threshold / alarm set threshold

h = 5*10-10 / 10-8 = 5*10-2 = 0.05 = 5 percent

The FCS hysteresis threshold is applied to all ports on the switch. The allowable range is from 1 to 10 percent. The default value is 10 percent. See Configuring the FCS Bit Error Rate Alarm for more information.

The switch can also monitor the status of the Ethernet ports and generate alarm messages based on the alarms listed in Table 11. To save user time and effort, it supports changeable alarm configurations by using alarm profiles. You can create a number of profiles and assign one of these profiles to each Ethernet port.

Alarm profiles provide a mechanism for you to enable or disable alarm conditions for a port and associate the alarm conditions with one or both alarm relays. You can also use alarm profiles to set alarm conditions to send alarm traps to an SNMP server and system messages to a syslog server. The alarm profile defaultPort is applied to all interfaces in the factory configuration (by default).

Note: You can associate multiple alarms to one relay or one alarm to both relays.

Table 11 lists the port status monitoring alarms and their descriptions and functions. Each fault condition is assigned a severity level based on the Cisco IOS System Error Message Severity Level.

Table 11 Port Status Monitoring Alarms

Alarm List ID
Alarm
Description

1

Link Fault alarm

The switch generates a link fault alarm when problems with a port physical layer cause unreliable data transmission. A typical link fault condition is loss of signal or clock. The link fault alarm is cleared automatically when the link fault condition is cleared. The severity for this alarm is error condition, level 3.

2

Port not Forwarding alarm

The switch generates a port not-forwarding alarm when a port is not forwarding packets. This alarm is cleared automatically when the port begins to forward packets. The severity for this alarm is warning, level 4.

3

Port not Operating alarm

The switch generates a port not-operating alarm when a port fails during the startup self-test. When triggered, the port not-operating alarm is only cleared when the switch is restarted and the port is operational. The severity for this alarm is error condition, level 3.

4

FCS Bit Error Rate alarm

The switch generates an FCS bit error-rate alarm when the actual FCS bit error-rate is close to the configured rate. You can set the FCS bit error-rate by using the interface configuration CLI for each of the ports. See Configuring the FCS Bit Error Rate Alarm for more information. The severity for this alarm is error condition, level 3.

The switch supports these methods for triggering alarms:

■Configurable Relay

The switch is equipped with one independent alarm relay that can be triggered by alarms for global, port status and SD flash card conditions. You can configure the relay to send a fault signal to an external alarm device, such as a bell, light, or other signaling device. You can associate any alarm condition with the alarm relay. Each fault condition is assigned a severity level based on the Cisco IOS System Error Message Severity Level.

See Configuring the Power Supply Alarms for more information on configuring the relay.

■SNMP Traps

SNMP is an application-layer protocol that provides a message format for communication between managers and agents. The SNMP system consists of an SNMP manager, an SNMP agent, and a management information base (MIB).

The snmp-server enable traps command can be changed so that the user can send alarm traps to an SNMP server. You can use alarm profiles to set environmental or port status alarm conditions to send SNMP alarm traps. See Enabling SNMP Traps for more information.

■Syslog Messages

You can use alarm profiles to send system messages to a syslog server. See Configuring the Power Supply Alarms for more information.

Table 12 Default Switch Alarm Settings

 
Alarm
Default Setting

Global

Power supply alarm

Enabled in switch single power mode. No alarm.

In dual-power supply mode, the default alarm notification is a system message to the console.

Primary temperature alarm

Enabled for switch temperature range of 203oF (95oC) maximum to –4°F (–20oC) minimum.

The primary switch temperature alarm is associated with the major relay.

Secondary temperature alarm

Disabled.

Output relay mode alarm

Normally deenergized. The alarm output has switched off or is in an off state.

Port

Link fault alarm

Disabled on all interfaces.

Port not forwarding alarm

Disabled on all interfaces.

Port not operating alarm

Enabled on all interfaces.

FCS bit error rate alarm

Disabled on all interfaces.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

power-supply dual

Configures dual power supplies.

3.

alarm facility power-supply disable

Disables the power supply alarm.

4.

alarm facility power-supply relay major

Associates the power supply alarm to the relay.

5.

alarm facility power-supply notifies

Sends power supply alarm traps to an SNMP server.

6.

alarm facility power-supply syslog

Sends power supply alarm traps to a syslog server.

7.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

show env power

Displays the switch power status.

9.

show facility-alarm status

Displays all generated alarms for the switch.

10.

show alarm settings

Verifies the configuration.

11.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

alarm facility temperature { primary | secondary } high threshold

Sets the high temperature threshold value. Set the threshold from –238°F (–150°C) to 572°F (300°C).

3.

alarm facility temperature primary low threshold

Sets the low temperature threshold value. Set the threshold from –328°F (–200°C) to 482°F (250°C).

4.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show alarm settings

Verifies the configuration.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

By default, the primary temperature alarm is associated to the relay. You can use the alarm facility temperature global configuration command to associate the primary temperature alarm to an SNMP trap, or a syslog message, or to associate the secondary temperature alarm to the relay, an SNMP trap, or a syslog message.

Note: The single relay on the switch is called the major relay.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

alarm facility temperature { primary | secondary } relay major

Associates the primary or secondary temperature alarm to the relay.

3.

alarm facility temperature { primary | secondary } notifies

Sends primary or secondary temperature alarm traps to an SNMP server.

4.

alarm facility temperature { primary | secondary } syslog

Sends primary or secondary temperature alarm traps to a syslog server.

Uses the no alarm facility temperature secondary command to disable the secondary temperature alarm.

5.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show alarm settings

Verifies the configuration.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

The switch generates an FCS bit error-rate alarm when the actual rate is close to the configured rate.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enters the interface to be configured, and enters interface configuration mode.

3.

fcs-threshold value

Sets the FCS error rate.

For value, the range is 6 to 11 to set a maximum bit error rate of 10-6 to 10-11.

By default, the FCS bit error rate is 10-8.

4.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show fcs-threshold

Verifies the setting.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

The hysteresis setting prevents the toggle of an alarm when the actual bit error-rate fluctuates near the configured rate. The FCS hysteresis threshold is applied to all ports of a switch.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

alarm facility fcs-hysteresis percentage

Sets the hysteresis percentage for the switch.

For percentage, the range is 1 to 10. The default value is 10 percent.

3.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show running config

Verifies the configuration.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

You can use the alarm profile global configuration command to create an alarm profile or to modify an existing profile. When you create a new alarm profile, none of the alarms are enabled.

Note: The only alarm enabled in the defaultPort profile is the Port not operating alarm.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

alarm profile name

Creates the new profile or identifies an existing profile, and enters alarm profile configuration mode.

3.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show alarm profile name

Verifies the configuration.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

You can modify an alarm profile from alarm profile configuration mode.

You can enter more than one alarm type separated by a space.

Command
Purpose

alarm {fcs-error | link-fault | not-forwarding | not-operating}

(Optional) Adds or modifies alarm parameters for a specific alarm.

notifies {fcs-error | link-fault | not-forwarding | not-operating}

(Optional) Configures the alarm to send an SNMP trap to an SNMP server.

relay-major {fcs-error | link-fault | not-forwarding | not-operating}

(Optional) Configures the alarm to send an alarm trap to the relay.

syslog {fcs-error | link-fault | not-forwarding | not-operating}

(Optional) Configures the alarm to send an alarm trap to a syslog server.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

interface port interface

Enters interface configuration mode.

3.

alarm-profile name

Attaches the specified profile to the interface.

4.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show alarm profile

Verifies the configuration.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

snmp-server enable traps alarms

Enables the switch to send SNMP traps.

3.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show alarm settings

Verifies the configuration.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

Table 13 Commands for Displaying Global and Port Alarm Status

Command
Purpose

show alarm description ports

Displays an alarm number and its text description.

show alarm profile [ name ]

Displays all alarm profiles in the system or a specified profile.

show alarm settings

Displays all global alarm settings on the switch.

show env { alarm-contact | all | power | temperature }

Displays the status of environmental facilities on the switch.

show facility-alarm status [ critical | info | major | minor ]

Displays generated alarms on the switch.

This example configures alarm input 1 named door sensor to assert a major alarm when the door circuit is closed and then displays the status and configuration for all alarms:

Switch(config)# alarm contact 1 description door sensor
Switch(config)# alarm contact 1 severity major
Switch(config)# alarm contact 1 trigger closed
Switch(config)# end
Switch(config)# show env alarm-contact
Switch# show env alarm-contact
 
ALARM CONTACT 1
Status: not asserted
Description: door sensor
Severity: major
Trigger: closed
ALARM CONTACT 2
Status: not asserted
Description: external alarm contact 2
Severity: minor
Trigger: closed

This example sets the secondary temperature alarm to the major relay, with a high temperature threshold value of 113oF (45oC). All alarms and traps associated with this alarm are sent to a syslog server and an SNMP server.

Switch(config) # alarm facility temperature secondary high 45
Switch(config) # alarm facility temperature secondary relay major
Switch(config) # alarm facility temperature secondary syslog
Switch(config) # alarm facility temperature secondary notifies
 

This example sets the first (primary) temperature alarm to the major relay. All alarms and traps associated with this alarm are sent to a syslog server.

Switch(config) # alarm facility temperature primary syslog
Switch(config) # alarm facility temperature primary relay major

This example shows how to configure two power supplies:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# power-supply dual
 

These examples show how to display information when two power supplies are not present which results in a triggered alarm.

Switch# show facility-alarm status
Source Severity Description Relay Time
Switch MAJOR 5 Redundant Pwr missing or failed NONE Mar 01
1993 00:23:52
 
Switch# show env power
POWER SUPPLY A is DC OK
POWER SUPPLY B is DC FAULTY <--
 
Switch# show hard led
SWITCH: 1
SYSTEM: GREEN
ALARM : ALT_RED_BLACK <--
Switch# show alarm settings
Alarm relay mode: De-energized
Power Supply
Alarm Enabled
Relay
Notifies Disabled
Syslog Enabled
Temperature-Primary
Alarm Enabled
Thresholds MAX: 95C MIN: -20C
Relay MAJ
Notifies Enabled
Syslog Enabled
Temperature-Secondary
Alarm Disabled
Threshold
Relay
Notifies Disabled
Syslog Disabled
License-File-Corrupt
Alarm Enabled
Relay
Notifies Enabled
Syslog Enabled
 
Switch# show alarm settings
Alarm relay mode: De-energized
Power Supply
Alarm Enabled
Relay
Notifies Disabled
Syslog Enabled
Temperature-Primary
Alarm Enabled
Thresholds MAX: 95C MIN: -20C
Relay MAJ
Notifies Enabled
Syslog Enabled
Temperature-Secondary
Alarm Disabled
Threshold
Relay
Notifies Disabled
Syslog Disabled
SD-Card
Alarm Disabled
Relay
Notifies Disabled
Syslog Enabled
Input-Alarm 1
Alarm Enabled
Relay
Notifies Disabled
Syslog Enabled
Input-Alarm 2
Alarm Enabled
Relay
Notifies Disabled
Syslog Enabled

The following sections provide references related to switch administration:

Related Topic
Document Title

Alarm input and output ports.

Hardware Installation Guide Hardware Technical Guide

Standards
Title

No new or modified standards are supported by this feature, and support for existing standards has not been modified by this feature.

RFCs
Title

No new or modified RFCs are supported by this feature, and support for existing RFCs has not been modified by this feature.

Description
Link

The Cisco Technical Support website contains thousands of pages of searchable technical content, including links to products, technologies, solutions, technical tips, and tools. Registered Cisco.com users can log in from this page to access even more content.

http://www.cisco.com/techsupport


Page 13

A VLAN is a switched network that is logically segmented by function, project team, or application, without regard to the physical locations of the users. VLANs have the same attributes as physical LANs, but you can group end stations even if they are not physically located on the same LAN segment. Any switch port can belong to a VLAN, and unicast, broadcast, and multicast packets are forwarded and flooded only to end stations in the VLAN. Each VLAN is considered a logical network, and packets destined for stations that do not belong to the VLAN must be forwarded through a router or a switch supporting fallback bridging, as shown in Figure 29. Because a VLAN is considered a separate logical network, it contains its own bridge Management Information Base (MIB) information and can support its own implementation of spanning tree. See Configuring STP

Note: Before you create VLANs, you must decide whether to use VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) to maintain global VLAN configuration for your network.

Figure 29 VLANs as Logically Defined Networks

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

VLANs are often associated with IP subnetworks. For example, all the end stations in a particular IP subnet belong to the same VLAN. Interface VLAN membership on the switch is assigned manually on an interface-by-interface basis. When you assign switch interfaces to VLANs by using this method, it is known as interface-based, or static, VLAN membership.

Traffic between VLANs must be routed or fallback bridged. The switch can route traffic between VLANs by using switch virtual interfaces (SVIs). An SVI must be explicitly configured and assigned an IP address to route traffic between VLANs.

Note: If you plan to configure many VLANs on the switch and to not enable routing, you can use the sdm prefer vlan global configuration command to set the Switch Database Management (sdm) feature to the VLAN template, which configures system resources to support the maximum number of unicast MAC addresses. For more information on the SDM templates, see Configuring SDM Templates

The switch supports VLANs in VTP client, server, and transparent modes. VLANs are identified by a number from 1 to 4096. VLAN IDs 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs.

VTP version 1 and version 2 support only normal-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1 to 1005). In these versions, the switch must be in VTP transparent mode when you create VLAN IDs from 1006 to 4096.

This release supports VTP version 3. VTP version 3 supports the entire VLAN range (VLANs 1 to 4096). Extended range VLANs (VLANs 1006 to 4096) are supported only in VTP version 3. You cannot convert from VTP version 3 to VTP version 2 if extended VLANs are configured in the domain.

Although the switch supports a total of 1005 (normal range and extended range) VLANs, the number of routed ports, SVIs, and other configured features affects the use of the switch hardware.

The switch supports per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (PVST+) or rapid PVST+ with a maximum of 128 spanning-tree instances. One spanning-tree instance is allowed per VLAN. See Normal-Range VLAN Configuration Guidelines for more information about the number of spanning-tree instances and the number of VLANs.

You configure a port to belong to a VLAN by assigning a membership mode that specifies the kind of traffic the port carries and the number of VLANs to which it can belong. Table 33 lists the membership modes and membership and VTP characteristics.

Table 33 Port Membership Modes and Characteristics

Membership Mode
VLAN Membership Characteristics
VTP Characteristics

Static-access

A static-access port can belong to one VLAN and is manually assigned to that VLAN.

For more information, see Assigning Static-Access Ports to a VLAN.

VTP is not required. If you do not want VTP to globally propagate information, set the VTP mode to transparent. To participate in VTP, there must be at least one trunk port on the switch connected to a trunk port of a second switch.

Trunk (ISL or
IEEE 802.1Q)

A trunk port is a member of all VLANs by default, including extended-range VLANs, but membership can be limited by configuring the allowed-VLAN list. You can also modify the pruning-eligible list to block flooded traffic to VLANs on trunk ports that are included in the list.

For information about configuring trunk ports, see Configuring an Ethernet Interface as a Trunk Port.

VTP is recommended but not required. VTP maintains VLAN configuration consistency by managing the addition, deletion, and renaming of VLANs on a network-wide basis. VTP exchanges VLAN configuration messages with other switches over trunk links.

Dynamic access

A dynamic-access port can belong to one VLAN and is dynamically assigned by a VMPS (VLAN Membership Policy Server). The VMPS can be a Catalyst 5000 or Catalyst 6500 series switch, for example, but never an IE 2000 switch. The IE 2000 switch is a VMPS client.

You can have dynamic-access ports and trunk ports on the same switch, but you must connect the dynamic-access port to an end station or hub and not to another switch.

For configuration information, see Configuring Dynamic-Access Ports on VMPS Clients.

VTP is required.

Configure the VMPS and the client with the same VTP domain name.

To participate in VTP, at least one trunk port on the switch must be connected to a trunk port of a second switch.

Voice VLAN

A voice VLAN port is an access port attached to a Cisco IP Phone, configured to use one VLAN for voice traffic and another VLAN for data traffic from a device attached to the phone.

For more information about voice VLAN ports, see Configuring Voice VLAN

VTP is not required; it has no effect on a voice VLAN.

For more detailed definitions of access and trunk modes and their functions, see Table 35.

When a port belongs to a VLAN, the switch learns and manages the addresses associated with the port on a per-VLAN basis. For more information, see Changing the Address Aging Time.

Normal-range VLANs are VLANs with VLAN IDs 1 to 1005. If the switch is in VTP server or VTP transparent mode, you can add, modify or remove configurations for VLANs 2 to 1001 in the VLAN database. (VLAN IDs 1 and 1002 to 1005 are automatically created and cannot be removed.)

Configurations for VLAN IDs 1 to 1005 are written to the vlan.dat file (VLAN database), and you can display them by entering the show vlan privileged EXEC command. The vlan.dat file is stored in flash memory.

Caution: You can cause inconsistency in the VLAN database if you attempt to manually delete the vlan.dat file. If you want to modify the VLAN configuration, use the commands described in these sections.

You use the interface configuration mode to define the port membership mode and to add and remove ports from VLANs. The results of these commands are written to the running-configuration file, and you can display the file by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.

You can set these parameters when you create a new normal-range VLAN or modify an existing VLAN in the VLAN database:

■VLAN ID

■VLAN name

■VLAN type (Ethernet, Fiber Distributed Data Interface [FDDI], FDDI network entity title [NET], TrBRF, or TrCRF, Token Ring, Token Ring-Net)

■VLAN state (active or suspended)

■Maximum transmission unit (MTU) for the VLAN

■Security Association Identifier (SAID)

■Bridge identification number for TrBRF VLANs

■Ring number for FDDI and TrCRF VLANs

■Parent VLAN number for TrCRF VLANs

■Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) type for TrCRF VLANs

■VLAN number to use when translating from one VLAN type to another

You configure VLANs in vlan global configuration command by entering a VLAN ID. Enter a new VLAN ID to create a VLAN, or enter an existing VLAN ID to modify that VLAN. You can use the default VLAN configuration (Table 34) or enter multiple commands to configure the VLAN. When you have finished the configuration, you must exit VLAN configuration mode for the configuration to take effect. To display the VLAN configuration, enter the show vlan privileged EXEC command.

The configurations of VLAN IDs 1 to 1005 are always saved in the VLAN database (vlan.dat file). If the VTP mode is transparent, they are also saved in the switch running configuration file. You can enter the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command to save the configuration in the startup configuration file. To display the VLAN configuration, enter the show vlan privileged EXEC command.

When you save VLAN and VTP information (including extended-range VLAN configuration information) in the startup configuration file and reboot the switch, the switch configuration is selected as follows:

■If the VTP mode is transparent in the startup configuration, and the VLAN database and the VTP domain name from the VLAN database matches that in the startup configuration file, the VLAN database is ignored (cleared), and the VTP and VLAN configurations in the startup configuration file are used. The VLAN database revision number remains unchanged in the VLAN database.

■If the VTP mode or domain name in the startup configuration does not match the VLAN database, the domain name and VTP mode and configuration for the first 1005 VLANs use the VLAN database information.

■In VTP versions 1 and 2, if VTP mode is server, the domain name and VLAN configuration for only the first 1005 VLANs use the VLAN database information. VTP version 3 also supports VLANs 1006 to 4096.

Although the switch does not support Token Ring connections, a remote device such as a Catalyst 6500 series switch with Token Ring connections could be managed from one of the supported switches. Switches running VTP Version 2 advertise information about these Token Ring VLANs:

■Token Ring TrBRF VLANs

■Token Ring TrCRF VLANs

For more information on configuring Token Ring VLANs, see the Catalyst 6500 Series Software Configuration Guide.

Follow these guidelines when creating and modifying normal-range VLANs in your network:

■The switch supports 1005 VLANs in VTP client, server, and transparent modes.

■Normal-range VLANs are identified with a number between 1 and 1001. VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs.

■VLAN configuration for VLANs 1 to 1005 are always saved in the VLAN database. If the VTP mode is transparent, VTP and VLAN configuration are also saved in the switch running configuration file.

■With VTP versions 1 and 2, the switch supports VLAN IDs 1006 through 4096 only in VTP transparent mode (VTP disabled). These are extended-range VLANs and configuration options are limited. Extended-range VLANs created in VTP transparent mode are not saved in the VLAN database and are not propagated. VTP version 3 supports extended range VLAN (VLANs 1006 to 4096) database propagation. If extended VLANs are configured, you cannot convert from VTP version 3 to version 1 or 2. See Creating an Extended-Range VLAN.

■Before you can create a VLAN, the switch must be in VTP server mode or VTP transparent mode. If the switch is a VTP server, you must define a VTP domain or VTP will not function.

■The switch does not support Token Ring or FDDI media. The switch does not forward FDDI, FDDI-Net, TrCRF, or TrBRF traffic, but it does propagate the VLAN configuration through VTP.

■The switch supports 128 spanning-tree instances. If a switch has more active VLANs than supported spanning-tree instances, spanning tree can be enabled on 128 VLANs and is disabled on the remaining VLANs. If you have already used all available spanning-tree instances on a switch, adding another VLAN anywhere in the VTP domain creates a VLAN on that switch that is not running spanning-tree. If you have the default allowed list on the trunk ports of that switch (which is to allow all VLANs), the new VLAN is carried on all trunk ports. Depending on the topology of the network, this could create a loop in the new VLAN that would not be broken, particularly if there are several adjacent switches that all have run out of spanning-tree instances. You can prevent this possibility by setting allowed lists on the trunk ports of switches that have used up their allocation of spanning-tree instances.

If the number of VLANs on the switch exceeds the number of supported spanning-tree instances, we recommend that you configure the IEEE 802.1s Multiple STP (MSTP) on your switch to map multiple VLANs to a single spanning-tree instance. For more information about MSTP, see Configuring MSTP

Note: The switch supports Ethernet interfaces exclusively. Because FDDI and Token Ring VLANs are not locally supported, you only configure FDDI and Token Ring media-specific characteristics for VTP global advertisements to other switches.

Table 34 Ethernet VLAN Defaults and Ranges

Parameter
Default
Range

VLAN ID

1

1 to 4096.

Note: Extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1006 to 4096) are only saved in the VLAN database in VTP version 3.

VLAN name

VLANxxxx, where xxxx represents four numeric digits (including leading zeros) equal to the VLAN ID number

No range

IEEE 802.10 SAID

100001 (100000 plus the VLAN ID)

1 to 4294967294

MTU size

1500

1500 to 18190

Translational bridge 1

0

0 to 1005

Translational bridge 2

0

0 to 1005

VLAN state

active

active, suspend

Remote SPAN

disabled

enabled, disabled

Each Ethernet VLAN in the VLAN database has a unique, 4-digit ID that can be a number from 1 to 1001. VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs. To create a normal-range VLAN to be added to the VLAN database, assign a number and name to the VLAN.

Note: With VTP version 1 and 2, if the switch is in VTP transparent mode, you can assign VLAN IDs greater than 1006, but they are not added to the VLAN database. See Creating an Extended-Range VLAN.

For the list of default parameters that are assigned when you add a VLAN, see Normal-Range VLANs.

When you delete a VLAN from a switch that is in VTP server mode, the VLAN is removed from the VLAN database for all switches in the VTP domain. When you delete a VLAN from a switch that is in VTP transparent mode, the VLAN is deleted only on that specific switch.

You cannot delete the default VLANs for the different media types: Ethernet VLAN 1 and FDDI or Token Ring VLANs 1002 to 1005.

Caution: When you delete a VLAN, any ports assigned to that VLAN become inactive. They remain associated with the VLAN (and thus inactive) until you assign them to a new VLAN.

You can assign a static-access port to a VLAN without having VTP globally propagate VLAN configuration information by disabling VTP (VTP transparent mode).

If you are assigning a port on a cluster member switch to a VLAN, first use the rcommand privileged EXEC command to log in to the cluster member switch.

Note: If you assign an interface to a VLAN that does not exist, the new VLAN is created. (See Creating or Modifying an Ethernet VLAN.)

With VTP version 1 and version 2, when the switch is in VTP transparent mode (VTP disabled), you can create extended-range VLANs (in the range 1006 to 4096). VTP version supports extended-range VLANs in server or transparent move. Extended-range VLANs enable service providers to extend their infrastructure to a greater number of customers. The extended-range VLAN IDs are allowed for any switchport commands that allow VLAN IDs.

With VTP version 1 or 2, extended-range VLAN configurations are not stored in the VLAN database, but because VTP mode is transparent, they are stored in the switch running configuration file, and you can save the configuration in the startup configuration file by using the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command. Extended-range VLANs created in VTP version 3 are stored in the VLAN database.

See Table 34 for the default configuration for Ethernet VLANs. You can change only the MTU size, private VLAN, and the remote SPAN configuration state on extended-range VLANs; all other characteristics must remain at the default state.

Follow these guidelines when creating extended-range VLANs:

■VLAN IDs in the extended range are not saved in the VLAN database and are not recognized by VTP unless the switch is running VTP version 3.

■You cannot include extended-range VLANs in the pruning eligible range.

■In VTP version 1 and 2, a switch must be in VTP transparent mode when you create extended-range VLANs. If VTP mode is server or client, an error message is generated, and the extended-range VLAN is rejected. VTP version 3 supports extended VLANs in server and transparent modes.

■For VTP version 1 or 2, you can set the VTP mode to transparent in global configuration mode. See Adding a VTP Client Switch to a VTP Domain. You should save this configuration to the startup configuration so that the switch boots up in VTP transparent mode. Otherwise, you lose the extended-range VLAN configuration if the switch resets. If you create extended-range VLANs in VTP version 3, you cannot convert to VTP version 1 or 2.

■STP is enabled by default on extended-range VLANs, but you can disable it by using the no spanning-tree vlan vlan-id global configuration command. When the maximum number of spanning-tree instances are on the switch, spanning tree is disabled on any newly created VLANs. If the number of VLANs on the switch exceeds the maximum number of spanning-tree instances, we recommend that you configure the IEEE 802.1s Multiple STP (MSTP) on your switch to map multiple VLANs to a single spanning-tree instance.

■Each routed port on the switch creates an internal VLAN for its use. These internal VLANs use extended-range VLAN numbers, and the internal VLAN ID cannot be used for an extended-range VLAN. If you try to create an extended-range VLAN with a VLAN ID that is already allocated as an internal VLAN, an error message is generated, and the command is rejected.

–Because internal VLAN IDs are in the lower part of the extended range, we recommend that you create extended-range VLANs beginning from the highest number (4096) and moving to the lowest (1006) to reduce the possibility of using an internal VLAN ID.

–Before configuring extended-range VLANs, enter the show vlan internal usage privileged EXEC command to see which VLANs have been allocated as internal VLANs.

–If necessary, you can shut down the routed port assigned to the internal VLAN, which frees up the internal VLAN, and then create the extended-range VLAN and re-enable the port, which then uses another VLAN as its internal VLAN. See Creating an Extended-Range VLAN with an Internal VLAN ID.

■Although the switch supports a total of 1005 (normal-range and extended-range) VLANs, the number of routed ports, SVIs, and other configured features affects the use of the switch hardware. If you try to create an extended-range VLAN and there are not enough hardware resources available, an error message is generated, and the extended-range VLAN is rejected.

A trunk is a point-to-point link between one or more Ethernet switch interfaces and another networking device such as a router or a switch. Ethernet trunks carry the traffic of multiple VLANs over a single link, and you can extend the VLANs across an entire network.

You can configure a trunk on a single Ethernet interface or on an EtherChannel bundle.

Ethernet trunk interfaces support different trunking modes (see Table 35). You can set an interface as trunking or nontrunking or to negotiate trunking with the neighboring interface. To autonegotiate trunking, the interfaces must be in the same VTP domain.

Trunk negotiation is managed by the Dynamic Trunking Protocol ( DTP), which is a Point-to-Point Protocol. However, some internetworking devices might forward DTP frames improperly, which could cause misconfigurations.

To avoid this, you should configure interfaces connected to devices that do not support DTP to not forward DTP frames, that is, to turn off DTP.

■If you do not intend to trunk across those links, use the switchport mode access interface configuration command to disable trunking.

■To enable trunking to a device that does not support DTP, use the switchport mode trunk and switchport nonegotiate interface configuration commands to cause the interface to become a trunk but to not generate DTP frames.

Table 35 Layer 2 Interface Modes

Mode
Function

switchport mode access

Puts the interface (access port) into permanent nontrunking mode and negotiates to convert the link into a nontrunk link. The interface becomes a nontrunk interface regardless of whether or not the neighboring interface is a trunk interface.

switchport mode dynamic auto

Makes the interface able to convert the link to a trunk link. The interface becomes a trunk interface if the neighboring interface is set to trunk or desirable mode. The default switch port mode for all Ethernet interfaces is dynamic auto.

switchport mode dynamic desirable

Makes the interface actively attempt to convert the link to a trunk link. The interface becomes a trunk interface if the neighboring interface is set to trunk, desirable, or auto mode.

switchport mode trunk

Puts the interface into permanent trunking mode and negotiates to convert the neighboring link into a trunk link. The interface becomes a trunk interface even if the neighboring interface is not a trunk interface.

switchport nonegotiate

Prevents the interface from generating DTP frames. You can use this command only when the interface switchport mode is access or trunk. You must manually configure the neighboring interface as a trunk interface to establish a trunk link.

The IEEE 802.1Q trunks impose these restrictions on the trunking strategy for a network:

■In a network of Cisco switches connected through IEEE 802.1Q trunks, the switches maintain one spanning-tree instance for each VLAN allowed on the trunks. Non-Cisco devices might support one spanning-tree instance for all VLANs.

When you connect a Cisco switch to a non-Cisco device through an IEEE 802.1Q trunk, the Cisco switch combines the spanning-tree instance of the VLAN of the trunk with the spanning-tree instance of the non-Cisco IEEE 802.1Q switch. However, spanning-tree information for each VLAN is maintained by Cisco switches separated by a cloud of non-Cisco IEEE 802.1Q switches. The non-Cisco IEEE 802.1Q cloud separating the Cisco switches is treated as a single trunk link between the switches.

■Make sure the native VLAN for an IEEE 802.1Q trunk is the same on both ends of the trunk link. If the native VLAN on one end of the trunk is different from the native VLAN on the other end, spanning-tree loops might result.

■Disabling spanning tree on the native VLAN of an IEEE 802.1Q trunk without disabling spanning tree on every VLAN in the network can potentially cause spanning-tree loops. We recommend that you leave spanning tree enabled on the native VLAN of an IEEE 802.1Q trunk or disable spanning tree on every VLAN in the network. Make sure your network is loop-free before you disable spanning tree.

Feature
Default Setting

Interface mode

switchport mode dynamic auto

Allowed VLAN range

VLANs 1 to 4096

VLAN range eligible for pruning

VLANs 2 to 1001

Default VLAN (for access ports)

VLAN 1

Native VLAN (for IEEE 802.1Q trunks)

VLAN 1

Because trunk ports send and receive VTP advertisements, to use VTP you must ensure that at least one trunk port is configured on the switch and that this trunk port is connected to the trunk port of a second switch. Otherwise, the switch cannot receive any VTP advertisements.

Note: By default, an interface is in Layer 2 mode. The default mode for Layer 2 interfaces is switchport mode dynamic auto. If the neighboring interface supports trunking and is configured to allow trunking, the link is a Layer 2 trunk or, if the interface is in Layer 3 mode, it becomes a Layer 2 trunk when you enter the switchport interface configuration command.

Trunking interacts with other features in these ways:

■A trunk port cannot be a secure port.

■A trunk port cannot be a tunnel port.

■Trunk ports can be grouped into EtherChannel port groups, but all trunks in the group must have the same configuration. When a group is first created, all ports follow the parameters set for the first port to be added to the group. If you change the configuration of one of these parameters, the switch propagates the setting you entered to all ports in the group:

–Allowed-VLAN list.

–STP port priority for each VLAN.

–STP Port Fast setting.

–Trunk status. If one port in a port group ceases to be a trunk, all ports cease to be trunks.

■We recommend that you configure no more than 24 trunk ports in PVST mode and no more than 40 trunk ports in MST mode.

■If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on a trunk port, an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled. If you try to change the mode of an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to trunk, the port mode is not changed.

■A port in dynamic mode can negotiate with its neighbor to become a trunk port. If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on a dynamic port, an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled. If you try to change the mode of an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to dynamic, the port mode is not changed.

By default, a trunk port sends traffic to and receives traffic from all VLANs. All VLAN IDs, 1 to 4096, are allowed on each trunk. However, you can remove VLANs from the allowed list, preventing traffic from those VLANs from passing over the trunk. To restrict the traffic a trunk carries, use the switchport trunk allowed vlan remove vlan-list interface configuration command to remove specific VLANs from the allowed list.

Note: VLAN 1 is the default VLAN on all trunk ports in all Cisco switches, and it has previously been a requirement that VLAN 1 always be enabled on every trunk link. You can use the VLAN 1 minimization feature to disable VLAN 1 on any individual VLAN trunk link so that no user traffic (including spanning-tree advertisements) is sent or received on VLAN 1.

To reduce the risk of spanning-tree loops or storms, you can disable VLAN 1 on any individual VLAN trunk port by removing VLAN 1 from the allowed list. When you remove VLAN 1 from a trunk port, the interface continues to send and receive management traffic, for example, Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), DTP, and VTP in VLAN 1.

If a trunk port with VLAN 1 disabled is converted to a nontrunk port, it is added to the access VLAN. If the access VLAN is set to 1, the port will be added to VLAN 1, regardless of the switchport trunk allowed setting. The same situation applies for any VLAN that has been disabled on the port.

A trunk port can become a member of a VLAN if the VLAN is enabled, if VTP knows of the VLAN, and if the VLAN is in the allowed list for the port. When VTP detects a newly enabled VLAN and the VLAN is in the allowed list for a trunk port, the trunk port automatically becomes a member of the enabled VLAN. When VTP detects a new VLAN and the VLAN is not in the allowed list for a trunk port, the trunk port does not become a member of the new VLAN.

A trunk port configured with IEEE 802.1Q tagging can receive both tagged and untagged traffic. By default, the switch forwards untagged traffic in the native VLAN configured for the port. The native VLAN is VLAN 1 by default.

Note: The native VLAN can be assigned any VLAN ID.

For information about IEEE 802.1Q configuration issues, see IEEE 802.1Q Configuration Guidelines.

Load sharing divides the bandwidth supplied by parallel trunks connecting switches. To avoid loops, STP normally blocks all but one parallel link between switches. Using load sharing, you divide the traffic between the links according to which VLAN the traffic belongs.

You configure load sharing on trunk ports by using STP port priorities or STP path costs. For load sharing using STP port priorities, both load-sharing links must be connected to the same switch. For load sharing using STP path costs, each load-sharing link can be connected to the same switch or to two different switches.

When two ports on the same switch form a loop, the switch uses the STP port priority to decide which port is enabled and which port is in a blocking state. You can set the priorities on a parallel trunk port so that the port carries all the traffic for a given VLAN. The trunk port with the higher priority (lower values) for a VLAN is forwarding traffic for that VLAN. The trunk port with the lower priority (higher values) for the same VLAN remains in a blocking state for that VLAN. One trunk port sends or receives all traffic for the VLAN.

Figure 30 shows two trunks connecting supported switches. In this example, the switches are configured as follows:

■VLANs 8 through 10 are assigned a port priority of 16 on Trunk 1.

■VLANs 3 through 6 retain the default port priority of 128 on Trunk 1.

■VLANs 3 through 6 are assigned a port priority of 16 on Trunk 2.

■VLANs 8 through 10 retain the default port priority of 128 on Trunk 2.

In this way, Trunk 1 carries traffic for VLANs 8 through 10, and Trunk 2 carries traffic for VLANs 3 through 6. If the active trunk fails, the trunk with the lower priority takes over and carries the traffic for all of the VLANs. No duplication of traffic occurs over any trunk port.

Figure 30 Load Sharing by Using STP Port Priorities

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

You can configure parallel trunks to share VLAN traffic by setting different path costs on a trunk and associating the path costs with different sets of VLANs, blocking different ports for different VLANs. The VLANs keep the traffic separate and maintain redundancy in the event of a lost link.

In Figure 31, Trunk ports 1 and 2 are configured as 100BASE-T ports. These VLAN path costs are assigned:

■VLANs 2 through 4 are assigned a path cost of 30 on Trunk port 1.

■VLANs 8 through 10 retain the default 100BASE-T path cost on Trunk port 1 of 19.

■VLANs 8 through 10 are assigned a path cost of 30 on Trunk port 2.

■VLANs 2 through 4 retain the default 100BASE-T path cost on Trunk port 2 of 19.

Figure 31 Load-Sharing Trunks with Traffic Distributed by Path Cost

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

See Configuring Load Sharing Using STP Path Cost.

The VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) is used to support dynamic-access ports, which are not permanently assigned to a VLAN, but give VLAN assignments based on the MAC source addresses seen on the port. Each time an unknown MAC address is seen, the switch sends a VQP query to a remote VMPS; the query includes the newly seen MAC address and the port on which it was seen. The VMPS responds with a VLAN assignment for the port. The switch cannot be a VMPS server but can act as a client to the VMPS and communicate with it through VQP.

Each time the client switch receives the MAC address of a new host, it sends a VQP query to the VMPS. When the VMPS receives this query, it searches its database for a MAC-address-to-VLAN mapping. The server response is based on this mapping and whether or not the server is in open or secure mode. In secure mode, the server shuts down the port when an illegal host is detected. In open mode, the server simply denies the host access to the port.

If the port is currently unassigned (that is, it does not yet have a VLAN assignment), the VMPS provides one of these responses:

■If the host is allowed on the port, the VMPS sends the client a vlan-assignment response containing the assigned VLAN name and allowing access to the host.

■If the host is not allowed on the port and the VMPS is in open mode, the VMPS sends an access-denied response.

■If the VLAN is not allowed on the port and the VMPS is in secure mode, the VMPS sends a port-shutdown response.

If the port already has a VLAN assignment, the VMPS provides one of these responses:

■If the VLAN in the database matches the current VLAN on the port, the VMPS sends a success response, allowing access to the host.

■If the VLAN in the database does not match the current VLAN on the port and active hosts exist on the port, the VMPS sends an access-denied or a port-shutdown response, depending on the secure mode of the VMPS.

If the switch receives an access-denied response from the VMPS, it continues to block traffic to and from the host MAC address. The switch continues to monitor the packets directed to the port and sends a query to the VMPS when it identifies a new host address. If the switch receives a port-shutdown response from the VMPS, it disables the port. The port must be manually reenabled by using Network Assistant, the CLI or SNMP.

A dynamic-access port can belong to only one VLAN with an ID from 1 to 4096. When the link comes up, the switch does not forward traffic to or from this port until the VMPS provides the VLAN assignment. The VMPS receives the source MAC address from the first packet of a new host connected to the dynamic-access port and attempts to match the MAC address to a VLAN in the VMPS database.

If there is a match, the VMPS sends the VLAN number for that port. If the client switch was not previously configured, it uses the domain name from the first VTP packet it receives on its trunk port from the VMPS. If the client switch was previously configured, it includes its domain name in the query packet to the VMPS to obtain its VLAN number. The VMPS verifies that the domain name in the packet matches its own domain name before accepting the request and responds to the client with the assigned VLAN number for the client. If there is no match, the VMPS either denies the request or shuts down the port (depending on the VMPS secure mode setting).

Multiple hosts (MAC addresses) can be active on a dynamic-access port if they are all in the same VLAN; however, the VMPS shuts down a dynamic-access port if more than 20 hosts are active on the port.

If the link goes down on a dynamic-access port, the port returns to an isolated state and does not belong to a VLAN. Any hosts that come online through the port are checked again through the VQP with the VMPS before the port is assigned to a VLAN.

Dynamic-access ports can be used for direct host connections, or they can connect to a network. A maximum of 20 MAC addresses are allowed per port on the switch. A dynamic-access port can belong to only one VLAN at a time, but the VLAN can change over time, depending on the MAC addresses seen.

Feature
Default Setting

VMPS domain server

None

VMPS reconfirm interval

60 minutes

VMPS server retry count

3

Dynamic-access ports

None configured

These guidelines and restrictions apply to dynamic-access port VLAN membership:

■You should configure the VMPS before you configure ports as dynamic-access ports.

■When you configure a port as a dynamic-access port, the spanning-tree Port Fast feature is automatically enabled for that port. The Port Fast mode accelerates the process of bringing the port into the forwarding state.

■IEEE 802.1x ports cannot be configured as dynamic-access ports. If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on a dynamic-access (VQP) port, an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled. If you try to change an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to dynamic VLAN assignment, an error message appears, and the VLAN configuration is not changed.

■Trunk ports cannot be dynamic-access ports, but you can enter the switchport access vlan dynamic interface configuration command for a trunk port. In this case, the switch retains the setting and applies it if the port is later configured as an access port.

You must turn off trunking on the port before the dynamic-access setting takes effect.

■Dynamic-access ports cannot be monitor ports.

■Secure ports cannot be dynamic-access ports. You must disable port security on a port before it becomes dynamic.

■Private VLAN ports cannot be dynamic-access ports.

■Dynamic-access ports cannot be members of an EtherChannel group.

■Port channels cannot be configured as dynamic-access ports.

■A dynamic-access port can participate in fallback bridging.

■The VTP management domain of the VMPS client and the VMPS server must be the same.

■The VLAN configured on the VMPS server should not be a voice VLAN.

VMPS clients periodically reconfirm the VLAN membership information received from the VMPS.You can set the number of minutes after which reconfirmation occurs.

If you are configuring a member switch in a cluster, this parameter must be equal to or greater than the reconfirmation setting on the command switch. You must also first use the rcommand privileged EXEC command to log in to the member switch.

The VMPS shuts down a dynamic-access port under these conditions:

■The VMPS is in secure mode, and it does not allow the host to connect to the port. The VMPS shuts down the port to prevent the host from connecting to the network.

■More than 20 active hosts reside on a dynamic-access port.

To reenable a disabled dynamic-access port, enter the shutdown interface configuration command followed by the no shutdown interface configuration command.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

vlan vlan-id

Enters a VLAN ID, and enters VLAN configuration mode.

Note: The available VLAN ID range for this command is 1 to 4096. For information about adding VLAN IDs greater than 1005 (extended-range VLANs), see Creating an Extended-Range VLAN.

3.

name vlan-name

(Optional) Enters a name for the VLAN. If no name is entered for the VLAN, the default is to append the vlan-id with leading zeros to the word VLAN. For example, VLAN0004 is a default VLAN name for VLAN 4.

4.

mtu mtu-size

(Optional) Changes the MTU size (or other VLAN characteristic).

5.

remote-span

(Optional) Configures the VLAN as the RSPAN VLAN for a remote SPAN session.

Note: For more information on remote SPAN, see Configuring SPAN and RSPAN

6.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

no vlan vlan-id

Removes the VLAN by entering the VLAN ID.

3.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode

2.

interface interface-id

Enters the interface to be added to the VLAN.

3.

switchport mode access

Defines the VLAN membership mode for the port (Layer 2 access port).

4.

switchport access vlan vlan-id

Assigns the port to a VLAN. Valid VLAN IDs are 1 to 4096.

5.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

vtp mode transparent

Configures the switch for VTP transparent mode and disables VTP.

Note: This step is not required for VTP version 3.

3.

vlan vlan-id

Enters an extended-range VLAN ID and enters VLAN configuration mode. The range is 1006 to 4096.

4.

mtu mtu-size

(Optional) Modifies the VLAN by changing the MTU size.

Note: Although all VLAN commands appear in the CLI help, only the mtu mtu-size, private-vlan, and remote-span commands are supported for extended-range VLANs.

5.

remote-span

(Optional) Configures the VLAN as the RSPAN VLAN. See Configuring a VLAN as an RSPAN VLAN.

6.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

show vlan internal usage

Displays the VLAN IDs being used internally by the switch. If the VLAN ID that you want to use is an internal VLAN, the display shows the routed port that is using the VLAN ID. Enter that port number in Step 3.

2.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

3.

interface interface-id

Specifies the interface ID for the routed port that is using the VLAN ID, and enters interface configuration mode.

4.

shutdown

Shuts down the port to free the internal VLAN ID.

5.

exit

Returns to global configuration mode.

6.

vtp mode transparent

Sets the VTP mode to transparent for creating extended-range VLANs.

Note: This step is not required for VTP version 3.

7.

vlan vlan-id

Enters the new extended-range VLAN ID, and enters VLAN configuration mode.

8.

exit

Exits from VLAN configuration mode, and returns to global configuration mode.

9.

interface interface-id

Specifies the interface ID for the routed port that you shut down in Step 4, and enters interface configuration mode.

10.

no shutdown

Reenables the routed port. It will be assigned a new internal VLAN ID.

11.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Specifies the port to be configured for trunking, and enters interface configuration mode.

3.

switchport mode { dynamic { auto | desirable } | trunk }

Configures the interface as a Layer 2 trunk (required only if the interface is a Layer 2 access port or tunnel port or to specify the trunking mode).

dynamic auto —Sets the interface to a trunk link if the neighboring interface is set to trunk or desirable mode. This is the default.

dynamic desirable —Sets the interface to a trunk link if the neighboring interface is set to trunk, desirable, or auto mode.

trunk —Sets the interface in permanent trunking mode and negotiate to convert the link to a trunk link even if the neighboring interface is not a trunk interface.

4.

switchport access vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies the default VLAN, which is used if the interface stops trunking.

5.

switchport trunk native vlan vlan-id

Specifies the native VLAN for IEEE 802.1Q trunks.

6.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Specifies the port to be configured, and enters interface configuration mode.

3.

switchport mode trunk

Configures the interface as a VLAN trunk port.

4.

switchport trunk allowed vlan { add | all | except | remove } vlan-list

(Optional) Configures the list of VLANs allowed on the trunk.

5.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Selects the trunk port for which VLANs should be pruned, and enters interface configuration mode.

3.

switchport trunk pruning vlan { add | except | none | remove } vlan-list [ ,vlan [ ,vlan [ ,,, ]]

Configures the list of VLANs allowed to be pruned from the trunk. (See VTP Pruning.)

4.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Defines the interface that is configured as the IEEE 802.1Q trunk, and enters interface configuration mode.

3.

switchport trunk native vlan vlan-id

Configures the VLAN that is sending and receiving untagged traffic on the trunk port.

4.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode on Switch A.

2.

vtp domain domain-name

Configures a VTP administrative domain.

The domain name can be 1 to 32 characters.

3.

vtp mode server

Configures Switch A as the VTP server.

4.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show vtp status

Verifies the VTP configuration on both Switch A and Switch B.

6.

show vlan

Verifies that the VLANs exist in the database on Switch A.

7.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

8.

interface interface-id_1

Defines the interface to be configured as a trunk, and enters interface configuration mode.

9.

switchport mode trunk

Configures the port as a trunk port.

10.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

11.

show interfaces interface-id_1 switchport

Verifes the VLAN configuration.

12.

Repeat Steps 7 through 10 on Switch A for a second port in the switch.

13.

Repeat Steps 7 through 10 on Switch B to configure the trunk ports that connect to the trunk ports configured on Switch A.

14.

show vlan

When the trunk links come up, VTP passes the VTP and VLAN information to Switch B. Verifies that Switch B has learned the VLAN configuration.

15.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode on Switch A.

16.

interface interface-id_1

Defines the interface to set the STP port priority, and enters interface configuration mode.

17.

spanning-tree vlan 8-10 port-priority 16

Assigns the port priority of 16 for VLANs 8 through 10.

18.

exit

Returns to global configuration mode.

19.

interface interface-id_2

Defines the interface to set the STP port priority, and enters interface configuration mode.

20.

spanning-tree vlan 3-6 port-priority 16

Assigns the port priority of 16 for VLANs 3 through 6.

21.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode on Switch A.

2.

interface interface-id_1

Defines the interface to be configured as a trunk, and enters interface configuration mode.

3.

switchport mode trunk

Configures the port as a trunk port.

4.

exit

Returns to global configuration mode.

5.

Repeat Steps 2 through 4 on a second interface in Switch A.

6.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

7.

show running-config

Verifies your entries. In the display, make sure that the interfaces are configured as trunk ports.

8.

show vlan

When the trunk links come up, Switch A receives the VTP information from the other switches. Verifies that Switch A has learned the VLAN configuration.

9.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

10.

interface interface-id_1

Defines the interface on which to set the STP cost, and enters interface configuration mode.

11.

spanning-tree vlan 2-4 cost 30

Sets the spanning-tree path cost to 30 for VLANs 2 through 4.

12.

end

Returns to global configuration mode.

13.

Repeat Steps 9 through 12 on the other configured trunk interface on Switch A, and set the spanning-tree path cost to 30 for VLANs 8, 9, and 10.

14.

exit

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

15.

show running-config

Verifies your entries. In the display, verify that the path costs are set correctly for both trunk interfaces.

You configure dynamic VLANs by using the VMPS (VLAN Membership Policy Server). The switch can be a VMPS client; it cannot be a VMPS server.

Before You Begin

■You must first enter the IP address of the server to configure the switch as a client.

■You must have IP connectivity to the VMPS for dynamic-access ports to work. You can test for IP connectivity by pinging the IP address of the VMPS and verifying that you get a response.

■If the VMPS is being defined for a cluster of switches, enter the address on the command switch.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

vmps server ipaddress primary

Enters the IP address of the switch acting as the primary VMPS server.

3.

vmps server ipaddress

(Optional) Enters the IP address of the switch acting as a secondary VMPS server.

You can enter up to three secondary server addresses.

4.

vmps reconfirm

(Optional) Reconfirms dynamic-access port VLAN membership.

5.

vmps retry count

(Optional) Changes the retry count.

6.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

Before You Begin

If you are configuring a port on a cluster member switch as a dynamic-access port, first use the rcommand privileged EXEC command to log in to the cluster member switch.

Caution: Dynamic-access port VLAN membership is for end stations or hubs connected to end stations. Connecting dynamic-access ports to other switches can cause a loss of connectivity.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Specifies the switch port that is connected to the end station, and enters interface configuration mode.

3.

switchport mode access

Sets the port to access mode.

4.

switchport access vlan dynamic

Configures the port as eligible for dynamic VLAN membership.

The dynamic-access port must be connected to an end station.

5.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

Command
Purpose

copy running-config startup config

Saves your entries in the configuration file

■To save an extended-range VLAN configuration, you need to save the VTP transparent mode configuration and the extended-range VLAN configuration in the switch startup configuration file. Otherwise, if the switch resets, it will default to VTP server mode, and the extended-range VLAN IDs will not be saved.

■This step is not required for VTP version 3 because VLANs are saved in the VLAN database.

show interfaces interface-id switchport

Displays the switch port configuration of the interface.

show interfaces interface-id trunk

Displays the trunk configuration of the interface.

show running-config interface interface-id

Verifies the VLAN membership mode of the interface.

show vmps

Verifies your VMPS entries.

show vlan

Verifies your VLAN entries.

Figure 32 shows a network with a VMPS server switch and VMPS client switches with dynamic-access ports. In this example, these assumptions apply:

■The VMPS server and the VMPS client are separate switches.

■The Catalyst 6500 series Switch A is the primary VMPS server.

■The Catalyst 6500 series Switch C and Switch J are secondary VMPS servers.

■End stations are connected to the clients, Switch B and Switch I.

■The database configuration file is stored on the TFTP server with the IP address 172.20.22.7.

Figure 32 Dynamic Port VLAN Membership Configuration

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

This example shows how to create Ethernet VLAN 20, name it test20, and add it to the VLAN database:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# vlan 20
Switch(config-vlan)# name test20
Switch(config-vlan)# end

This example shows how to configure a port as an access port in VLAN 2:

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/17
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access
Switch(config-if)# switchport access vlan 2
Switch(config-if)# end

This example shows how to create a new extended-range VLAN with all default characteristics:

Switch(config)# vtp mode transparent
Switch(config)# vlan 2000
Switch(config-vlan)# end
Switch# copy running-config startup config

This example shows how to configure a port as an IEEE 802.1Q trunk. The example assumes that the neighbor interface is configured to support IEEE 802.1Q trunking.

Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/18
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode dynamic desirable
Switch(config-if)# end

This example shows how to remove VLAN 2 from the allowed VLAN list on a port:

Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/17
Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan remove 2
Switch(config-if)# end

This is an example of output for the show vmps privileged EXEC command:

Switch# show vmps
VQP Client Status:
--------------------
VMPS VQP Version: 1
Reconfirm Interval: 60 min
Server Retry Count: 3
VMPS domain server: 172.20.128.86 (primary, current)
172.20.128.87
 
Reconfirmation status
---------------------
VMPS Action: other

The following sections provide references related to switch administration:

Related Topic
Document Title

Cisco IOS basic commands

Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference

Standards
Title

No new or modified standards are supported by this feature, and support for existing standards has not been modified by this feature.

RFCs
Title

No new or modified RFCs are supported by this feature, and support for existing RFCs has not been modified by this feature.


Page 14

■You must configure SNMP on the switch to access RMON MIB objects.

■We recommend that you use a generic RMON console application on the network management station (NMS) to take advantage of the RMON network management capabilities.

■64-bit counters are not supported for RMON alarms.

RMON is an Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) standard monitoring specification that allows various network agents and console systems to exchange network monitoring data. You can use the RMON feature with the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent in the switch to monitor all the traffic flowing among switches on all connected LAN segments as shown in Figure 72.

Figure 72 Remote Monitoring Example

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

The switch supports these RMON groups (defined in RFC 1757):

■Statistics (RMON group 1)—Collects Ethernet statistics on an interface.

■History (RMON group 2)—Collects a history group of statistics on Ethernet ports for a specified polling interval.

■Alarm (RMON group 3)—Monitors a specific management information base (MIB) object for a specified interval, triggers an alarm at a specified value (rising threshold), and resets the alarm at another value (falling threshold). Alarms can be used with events; the alarm triggers an event, which can generate a log entry or an SNMP trap.

■Event (RMON group 9)—Specifies the action to take when an event is triggered by an alarm. The action can be to generate a log entry or an SNMP trap.

Because switches supported by this software release use hardware counters for RMON data processing, the monitoring is more efficient, and little processing power is required.

Note: 64-bit counters are not supported for RMON alarms.

RMON is disabled by default; no alarms or events are configured.

You can configure your switch for RMON by using the command-line interface (CLI) or an SNMP-compatible network management station.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

rmon alarm number variable interval { absolute | delta } rising-threshold value [ event-number ]
falling-threshold value [ event-number ]
[ owner string ]

Sets an alarm on a MIB object.

■ number —Specifies the alarm number. The range is 1 to 65535.

■ variable —Specifies the MIB object to monitor.

■ interval —Specifies the time in seconds the alarm monitors the MIB variable. The range is 1 to 4294967295 seconds.

■Specifies the absolute keyword to test each MIB variable directly. Specifies the delta keyword to test the change between samples of a MIB variable.

■ value —Specifies a number at which the alarm is triggered and one for when the alarm is reset. The range for the rising threshold and falling threshold values is -2147483648 to 2147483647.

■(Optional) event-number —Specifies the event number to trigger when the rising or falling threshold exceeds its limit.

■(Optional) owner string —Specifies the owner of the alarm.

3.

rmon event number [ description string ] [ log ] [ owner string ] [ trap community ]

Adds an event in the RMON event table that is associated with an RMON event number.

■ number —Assigns an event number. The range is 1 to 65535.

■(Optional) description string —Specifies a description of the event.

■(Optional) log —Generates an RMON log entry when the event is triggered.

■(Optional) owner string —Specifies the owner of this event.

■(Optional) trap community —Enters the SNMP community string used for this trap.

4.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

You must first configure RMON alarms and events to display collection information.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Specifies the interface on which to collect history, and enters interface configuration mode.

3.

rmon collection history index
[ buckets bucket-number ] [ interval seconds ] [ owner ownername ]

Enables history collection for the specified number of buckets and time period.

■ index —Identifies the RMON group of statistics. The range is 1 to 65535.

■(Optional) buckets bucket-number —Specifies the maximum number of buckets desired for the RMON collection history group of statistics. The range is 1 to 65535. The default is 50 buckets.

■(Optional) interval seconds —Specifies the number of seconds in each polling cycle. The range is 1 to 3600. The default is 1800 seconds.

■(Optional) owner ownername —Enters the name of the owner of the RMON group of statistics.

4.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Specifies the interface on which to collect statistics, and enters interface configuration mode.

3.

rmon collection stats index [ owner ownername ]

Enables RMON statistic collection on the interface.

■ index —Specifies the RMON group of statistics. The range is from 1 to 65535.

■(Optional) owner ownername —Enters the name of the owner of the RMON group of statistics.

4.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

Command
Purpose

show rmon

Displays general RMON statistics.

show rmon alarms

Displays the RMON alarm table.

show rmon events

Displays the RMON event table.

show rmon history

Displays the RMON history table.

show rmon statistics

Displays the RMON statistics table.

The following example shows how to configure an RMON alarm number:

Switch(config)# rmon alarm 10 ifEntry.20.1 20 delta rising-threshold 15 1 falling-threshold 0 owner jjohnson
 

The alarm monitors the MIB variable ifEntry.20.1 once every 20 seconds until the alarm is disabled and checks the change in the variable’s rise or fall. If the ifEntry.20.1 value shows a MIB counter increase of 15 or more, such as from 100000 to 100015, the alarm is triggered. The alarm in turn triggers event number 1, which is configured with the rmon event command. Possible events can include a log entry or an SNMP trap. If the ifEntry.20.1 value changes by 0, the alarm is reset and can be triggered again.

 

The following example creates RMON event number 1:

Switch(config)# rmon event 1 log trap eventtrap description "High ifOutErrors" owner jjones
 

The event is defined as High ifOutErrors and generates a log entry when the event is triggered by the alarm. The user jjones owns the row that is created in the event table by this command. This example also generates an SNMP trap when the event is triggered.

This example shows how to collect RMON statistics for the owner root :

Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/17
Switch(config-if)# rmon collection stats 2 owner root
 

The following sections provide references related to switch administration:

Related Topic
Document Title

Cisco IOS basic commands
Cisco IOS system management commands

Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference

SNMP configuration

Configuring SNMP

Alarm and event interaction

RFC 1757

Standards
Title

No new or modified standards are supported by this feature, and support for existing standards has not been modified by this feature.

RFCs
Title

No new or modified RFCs are supported by this feature, and support for existing RFCs has not been modified by this feature.

Description
Link

The Cisco Technical Support website contains thousands of pages of searchable technical content, including links to products, technologies, solutions, technical tips, and tools. Registered Cisco.com users can log in from this page to access even more content.

http://www.cisco.com/techsupport


Page 15

Software Licensing is now simplified with the introduction of right-to-use (RTU) licensing. This allows you to order and activate a specific license type and level via command line. Uploading an extra license file is no longer necessary.

Note: Upgrading to the IP Services feature set requires the purchase of one of the following licenses (product IDs listed):
The IE-5000 uses " L-IE5000-RTU= " and IE-4000 and IE-4010 use " L-IE4000-RTU= " to upgrade to IP Services.

The introduction of right-to-use (RTU) licensing allows you to order and activate a specific license type and level via command line. Uploading an extra license file is no longer necessary.

LanBase images provide basic Layer2 functionality, including:

■QOS

■Port-Security

■1588 PTP

■EtherNet/IP

■Profinet

IPService: L3 routing features:

■RIP

■OSPF

■ISIS BGP

■Policy-based routing

■IPV6

The default license is a lanbase RTU permanent license.

To configure RTU Licenses, follow these guidelines.

To determine which license is running on your device, do the following:

■Enter the show version privileged EXEC command. The first line of output indicates the image, such as LANBASE.

■Enter the show license privileged EXEC command, to see which is the active image:

Switch# show license
Index 1 Feature: ipservices
Period left: 8 weeks 4 days
License Type: Evaluation
License State: Active, Not in Use, EULA not accepted
License Priority: None
License Count: Non-Counted
 
Index 2 Feature: lanbase
Period left: Life time
License Type: PermanentRightToUse
License State: Active, In Use
License Priority: High
License Count: Non-Counted
 
Index 3 Feature: mrp-manager
Period left: 8 weeks 4 days
License Type: Evaluation
License State: Active, Not in Use, EULA not accepted
License Priority: None
License Count: 1/0/0 (Active/In-use/Violation)
 
Index 4 Feature: mrp-client
Period left: 8 weeks 4 days
License Type: Evaluation
License State: Active, Not in Use, EULA not accepted
License Priority: None
License Count: 1/0/0 (Active/In-use/Violation)
License Count: Non-Counted
 

To activate a Permanent Right-To-Use ipservices license, use the following command:

IE5000#license right-to-use activate ipservices

PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS CAREFULLY. INSTALLING THE LICENSE OR

LICENSE KEY PROVIDED FOR ANY CISCO PRODUCT FEATURE OR USING SUCH

PRODUCT FEATURE CONSTITUTES YOUR FULL ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING

TERMS. YOU MUST NOT PROCEED FURTHER IF YOU ARE NOT WILLING TO BE BOUND

BY ALL THE TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN.

Use of this product feature requires an additional license from Cisco, together

with an additional payment. You may use this product feature subject to the

Cisco end user license agreement

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/warranty/English/EU1KEN_.html,

together with any supplements relating to such product feature.

It is your responsibility to make payment to Cisco for your use of the

product feature if not already licensed to do so. Your acceptance

of this agreement for the software features on one product shall be deemed

your acceptance with respect to all such software on all Cisco products you

purchase which includes the same software. (The foregoing notwithstanding, you must

purchase a license for each software feature you use, so that if you enable

a software feature on 1000 devices, you must purchase 1000 licenses for use.)

This license may be transferrable from another Cisco device of the same model

for the same functionality if such license already is owned.

Activation of the software command line interface will be evidence of your acceptance

of this agreement.

ACCEPT? (yes/[no]): yes

Activated Permanent Right-To-Use ipservices license

Next Reboot level is ipservices

IE5000#

■Express Setup for quickly configuring a switch for the first time with basic IP information, contact information, switch and Telnet passwords, and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) information through a browser-based program.

■User-defined and Cisco-default Smartports macros for creating custom switch configurations for simplified deployment across the network.

■A removable SD flash card that stores the Cisco IOS software image and configuration files for the switch. You can replace and upgrade the switch without reconfiguring the software features.

■An embedded Device Manager GUI for configuring and monitoring a single switch through a web browser. For more information about Device Manager, see the switch online help.

■Autosensing of port speed and autonegotiation of duplex mode on all switch ports for optimizing bandwidth

■Automatic medium-dependent interface crossover (auto-MDIX) capability on 10/100 and 10/100/1000 Mb/s interfaces and on 10/100/1000 BASE-TX SFP module interfaces that enables the interface to automatically detect the required cable connection type (straight-through or crossover) and to configure the connection appropriately

■Support for up to 1546 bytes routed frames, up to 9000 bytes for frames that are bridged in hardware, and up to 2000 bytes for frames that are bridged by software

■IEEE 802.3x flow control on all ports (the switch does not send pause frames)

■Support for up to 10 EtherChannel groups

■Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) and Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for automatic creation of EtherChannel links

■Per-port storm control for preventing broadcast, multicast, and unicast storms

■Port blocking on forwarding unknown Layer 2 unknown unicast, multicast, and bridged broadcast traffic

■Cisco Group Management Protocol (CGMP) server support and Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping for IGMP Versions 1, 2, and 3:

–(For CGMP devices) CGMP for limiting multicast traffic to specified end stations and reducing overall network traffic

–(For IGMP devices) IGMP snooping for forwarding multimedia and multicast traffic

■IGMP report suppression for sending only one IGMP report per multicast router query to the multicast devices (supported only for IGMPv1 or IGMPv2 queries)

■IGMP snooping querier support to configure switch to generate periodic IGMP general query messages

■IGMP helper to allow the switch to forward a host request to join a multicast stream to a specific IP destination address

■IGMP filtering for controlling the set of multicast groups to which hosts on a switch port can belong

■IGMP throttling for configuring the action when the maximum number of entries is in the IGMP forwarding table

■IGMP leave timer for configuring the leave latency for the network

■Switch Database Management (SDM) templates for allocating system resources to maximize support for user-selected features such as lanbase-routing, ipv6 routing.

■Cisco IOS IP Service Level Agreements (SLAs), a part of Cisco IOS software that uses active traffic monitoring for measuring network performance

■Configurable small-frame arrival threshold to prevent storm control when small frames (64 bytes or less) arrive on an interface at a specified rate (the threshold)

■FlexLink Multicast Fast Convergence to reduce the multicast traffic convergence time after a FlexLink failure

■RADIUS server load balancing to allow access and authentication requests to be distributed evenly across a server group

■Support for QoS marking of CPU-generated traffic and queue CPU-generated traffic on the egress network ports

■An embedded Device Manager—Device Manager is a GUI application that is integrated in the software image. You use it to configure and to monitor a single switch. For more information about Device Manager, see the switch online help.

■Network Assistant—Network Assistant is a network management application that can be downloaded from Cisco.com. You use it to manage a single switch, a cluster of switches, or a community of devices. For more information about Network Assistant, see Getting Started with Cisco Network Assistant, available at software.cisco.com/download/.

■Prime Infrastructure—Cisco Prime Infrastructure simplifies the management of wireless and wired networks. It offers Day 0 and 1 provisioning, as well as Day N assurance from the branch to the data center. We call it One Management. With this single view and point of control, you can reap the benefits of One Management across both network and compute.

■CLI—The Cisco IOS software supports desktop- and multilayer-switching features. You can access the CLI either by connecting your management station directly to the switch console port or by using Telnet from a remote management station.

■SNMP—SNMP management applications such as CiscoWorks2000 LAN Management Suite (LMS) and HP OpenView. You can manage from an SNMP-compatible management station that is running platforms such as HP OpenView or SunNet Manager. The switch supports a comprehensive set of MIB extensions and four remote monitoring (RMON) groups. For more information about using SNMP, see Configuring SNMP

■Cisco IOS Configuration Engine (previously known as the Cisco IOS CNS agent)—Configuration service automates the deployment and management of network devices and services. You can automate initial configurations and configuration updates by generating switch-specific configuration changes, sending them to the switch, executing the configuration change, and logging the results.

For more information about CNS, see Configuring Cisco IOS Configuration Engine

■CIP—Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) is a peer-to-peer application protocol that provides application level connections between the switch and industrial devices such as I/O controllers, sensors, relays, and so forth.You can manage the switch using RSlogix/RSlinx then monitor the CIP functionality via IOS command lines or Web based Device Manager.

■Profinet Version 2—Support for PROFINET IO, a modular communication framework for distributed automation applications. The embedded Profinet GSD file allows user to bring up Cisco IE switch using Siemens STEP7 or TIA Portal software then monitor the functionality via command line or Web based Device Manger.


Page 16

This chapter describes how to identify and resolve software problems related to the Cisco IOS software on the switch. Depending on the nature of the problem, you can use the command-line interface (CLI), Network Assistant or Device Manager to identify and solve problems.

For additional troubleshooting information, such as LED descriptions, see the Hardware Installation Guide.

The IEEE 802.3ab autonegotiation protocol manages the switch settings for speed (10 Mb/s, 100 Mb/s, and 1000 Mb/s, excluding SFP module ports) and duplex (half or full). There are situations when this protocol can incorrectly align these settings, reducing performance. A mismatch occurs under these circumstances:

■A manually set speed or duplex parameter is different from the manually set speed or duplex parameter on the connected port.

■A port is set to autonegotiate, and the connected port is set to full duplex with no autonegotiation.

To maximize switch performance and ensure a link, follow one of these guidelines when changing the settings for duplex and speed:

■Let both ports autonegotiate both speed and duplex.

■Manually set the speed and duplex parameters for the ports on both ends of the connection.

Note: If a remote device does not autonegotiate, configure the duplex settings on the two ports to match. The speed parameter can adjust itself even if the connected port does not autonegotiate.

Cisco small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules have a serial EEPROM that contains the module serial number, the vendor name and ID, a unique security code, and cyclic redundancy check (CRC). When an SFP module is inserted in the switch, the switch software reads the EEPROM to verify the serial number, vendor name and vendor ID, and recompute the security code and CRC. If the serial number, the vendor name or vendor ID, the security code, or CRC is invalid, the software generates a security error message and places the interface in an error-disabled state.

Note: The security error message references the GBIC_SECURITY facility. The switch supports SFP modules and does not support GBIC modules. Although the error message text refers to GBIC interfaces and modules, the security messages actually refer to the SFP modules and module interfaces.

If you are using a non-Cisco SFP module, remove the SFP module from the switch, and replace it with a Cisco module. After inserting a Cisco SFP module, use the errdisable recovery cause gbic-invalid global configuration command to verify the port status, and enter a time interval for recovering from the error-disabled state. After the elapsed interval, the switch brings the interface out of the error-disabled state and retries the operation.

If the module is identified as a Cisco SFP module, but the system is unable to read vendor-data information to verify its accuracy, an SFP module error message is generated. In this case, you should remove and reinsert the SFP module. If it continues to fail, the SFP module might be defective.

The switch supports IP ping, which you can use to test connectivity to remote hosts. Ping sends an echo request packet to an address and waits for a reply. Ping returns one of these responses:

■Normal response—The normal response ( hostname is alive) occurs in 1 to 10 seconds, depending on network traffic.

■Destination does not respond—If the host does not respond, a no-answer message is returned.

■Unknown host—If the host does not exist, an unknown host message is returned.

■Destination unreachable—If the default gateway cannot reach the specified network, a destination-unreachable message is returned.

■Network or host unreachable—If there is no entry in the route table for the host or network, a network or host unreachable message is returned.

The Layer 2 traceroute feature allows the switch to identify the physical path that a packet takes from a source device to a destination device. Layer 2 traceroute supports only unicast source and destination MAC addresses. It finds the path by using the MAC address tables of the switches in the path. When the switch detects a device in the path that does not support Layer 2 traceroute, the switch continues to send Layer 2 trace queries and lets them time out.

The switch can only identify the path from the source device to the destination device. It cannot identify the path that a packet takes from source host to the source device or from the destination device to the destination host.

■Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) must be enabled on all the devices in the network. For Layer 2 traceroute to function properly, do not disable CDP.

If any devices in the physical path are transparent to CDP, the switch cannot identify the path through these devices. For more information about enabling CDP, see Configuring CDP

■A switch is reachable from another switch when you can test connectivity by using the ping privileged EXEC command. All switches in the physical path must be reachable from each other.

■The maximum number of hops identified in the path is ten.

■You can enter the traceroute mac or the traceroute mac ip privileged EXEC command on a switch that is not in the physical path from the source device to the destination device. All switches in the path must be reachable from this switch.

■The traceroute mac command output shows the Layer 2 path only when the specified source and destination MAC addresses belong to the same VLAN. If you specify source and destination MAC addresses that belong to different VLANs, the Layer 2 path is not identified, and an error message appears.

■If you specify a multicast source or destination MAC address, the path is not identified, and an error message appears.

■If the source or destination MAC address belongs to multiple VLANs, you must specify the VLAN to which both the source and destination MAC addresses belong. If the VLAN is not specified, the path is not identified, and an error message appears.

■The traceroute mac ip command output shows the Layer 2 path when the specified source and destination IP addresses belong to the same subnet. When you specify the IP addresses, the switch uses the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to associate the IP addresses with the corresponding MAC addresses and the VLAN IDs.

–If an ARP entry exists for the specified IP address, the switch uses the associated MAC address and identifies the physical path.

–If an ARP entry does not exist, the switch sends an ARP query and tries to resolve the IP address. If the IP address is not resolved, the path is not identified, and an error message appears.

■When multiple devices are attached to one port through hubs (for example, multiple CDP neighbors are detected on a port), the Layer 2 traceroute feature is not supported. When more than one CDP neighbor is detected on a port, the Layer 2 path is not identified, and an error message appears.

You can use IP traceroute to identify the path that packets take through the network on a hop-by-hop basis. The command output displays all network layer (Layer 3) devices, such as routers, that the traffic passes through on the way to the destination.

Your switches can participate as the source or destination of the traceroute privileged EXEC command and might or might not appear as a hop in the traceroute command output. If the switch is the destination of the traceroute, it is displayed as the final destination in the traceroute output. Intermediate switches do not show up in the traceroute output if they are only bridging the packet from one port to another within the same VLAN. However, if the intermediate switch is a multilayer switch that is routing a particular packet, this switch shows up as a hop in the traceroute output.

The traceroute privileged EXEC command uses the Time To Live (TTL) field in the IP header to cause routers and servers to generate specific return messages. Traceroute starts by sending a User Datagram Protocol (UDP) datagram to the destination host with the TTL field set to 1. If a router finds a TTL value of 1 or 0, it drops the datagram and sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) time-to-live-exceeded message to the sender. Traceroute finds the address of the first hop by examining the source address field of the ICMP time-to-live-exceeded message.

To identify the next hop, traceroute sends a UDP packet with a TTL value of 2. The first router decrements the TTL field by 1 and sends the datagram to the next router. The second router sees a TTL value of 1, discards the datagram, and returns the time-to-live-exceeded message to the source. This process continues until the TTL is incremented to a value large enough for the datagram to reach the destination host (or until the maximum TTL is reached).

To learn when a datagram reaches its destination, traceroute sets the UDP destination port number in the datagram to a very large value that the destination host is unlikely to be using. When a host receives a datagram destined to itself containing a destination port number that is unused locally, it sends an ICMP port-unreachable error to the source. Because all errors except port-unreachable errors come from intermediate hops, the receipt of a port-unreachable error means that this message was sent by the destination port.

You can use the Time Domain Reflector (TDR) feature to diagnose and resolve cabling problems. When running TDR, a local device sends a signal through a cable and compares the reflected signal to the initial signal.

TDR is supported only on 10/100 and 10/100/1000 copper Ethernet ports. It is not supported on SFP module ports.

TDR can detect these cabling problems:

■Open, broken, or cut twisted-pair wires—The wires are not connected to the wires from the remote device.

■Shorted twisted-pair wires—The wires are touching each other or the wires from the remote device. For example, a shorted twisted pair can occur if one wire of the twisted pair is soldered to the other wire.

If one of the twisted-pair wires is open, TDR can find the length at which the wire is open.

Use TDR to diagnose and resolve cabling problems in these situations:

■Replacing a switch

■Setting up a wiring closet

■Troubleshooting a connection between two devices when a link cannot be established or when it is not operating properly

The crashinfo files save information that helps Cisco technical support representatives to debug problems that caused the Cisco IOS image to fail (crash). The switch writes the crash information to the console at the time of the failure. The switch creates two types of crashinfo files:

■Basic crashinfo file—The switch automatically creates this file the next time you boot up the Cisco IOS image after the failure.

■Extended crashinfo file—The switch automatically creates this file when the system is failing.

The information in the basic file includes the Cisco IOS image name and version that failed, a list of the processor registers, and other switch-specific information. You can provide this information to the Cisco technical support representative by using the show tech-support privileged EXEC command.

Basic crashinfo files are kept in this directory on the flash file system:

flash:/crashinfo/.

The filenames are crashinfo_ n where n is a sequence number.

Each new crashinfo file that is created uses a sequence number that is larger than any previously existing sequence number, so the file with the largest sequence number describes the most recent failure. Version numbers are used instead of a timestamp because the switches do not include a real-time clock. You cannot change the name of the file that the system will use when it creates the file. However, after the file is created, you can use the rename privileged EXEC command to rename it, but the contents of the renamed file will not be displayed by the show tech-support privileged EXEC command. You can delete crashinfo files by using the delete privileged EXEC command.

You can display the most recent basic crashinfo file (that is, the file with the highest sequence number at the end of its filename) by entering the show tech-support privileged EXEC command. You also can access the file by using any command that can copy or display files, such as the more or the copy privileged EXEC command.

The switch creates the extended crashinfo file when the system is failing. The information in the extended file includes additional information that can help determine the cause of the switch failure. You provide this information to the Cisco technical support representative by manually accessing the file and using the more or the copy privileged EXEC command.

Extended crashinfo files are kept in this directory on the flash file system:

flash:/crashinfo_ext/.

The filenames are crashinfo_ext_ n where n is a sequence number.

You can configure the switch to not create the extended creashinfo file by using the no exception crashinfo global configuration command.

This section lists some possible symptoms that could be caused by the CPU being too busy and shows how to verify a CPU utilization problem. Table 71 lists the primary types of CPU utilization problems that you can identify. It gives possible causes and corrective action with links to the Troubleshooting High CPU Utilization document on Cisco.com.

Excessive CPU utilization might result in these symptoms, but the symptoms could also result from other causes.

■Spanning tree topology changes

■EtherChannel links brought down due to loss of communication

■Failure to respond to management requests (ICMP ping, SNMP timeouts, slow Telnet or SSH sessions)

■UDLD flapping

■IP SLAs failures because of SLAs responses beyond an acceptable threshold

■DHCP or IEEE 802.1x failures if the switch does not forward or respond to requests

To determine if high CPU utilization is a problem, enter the show processes cpu sorted privileged EXEC command. Note the underlined information in the first line of the output example.

Switch# show processes cpu sorted
CPU utilization for five seconds: 8%/0%; one minute: 7%; five minutes: 8%
PID Runtime(ms) Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min TTY Process
140 8820183 4942081 1784 0.63% 0.37% 0.30% 0 HRPC qos request
100 3427318 16150534 212 0.47% 0.14% 0.11% 0 HRPC pm-counters
192 3093252 14081112 219 0.31% 0.14% 0.11% 0 Spanning Tree
143 8 37 216 0.15% 0.01% 0.00% 0 Exec
...
<output truncated>
 

This example shows normal CPU utilization. The output shows that utilization for the last 5 seconds is 8%/0%, which has this meaning:

■The total CPU utilization is 8 percent, including both time running Cisco IOS processes and time spent handling interrupts.

■The time spent handling interrupts is zero percent.

Table 71 Troubleshooting CPU Utilization Problems

Type of Problem
Cause
Corrective Action

Interrupt percentage value is almost as high as total CPU utilization value.

The CPU is receiving too many packets from the network.

Determine the source of the network packet. Stop the flow, or change the switch configuration. See the section on “Analyzing Network Traffic.”

Total CPU utilization is greater than 50% with minimal time spent on interrupts.

One or more Cisco IOS process is consuming too much CPU time. This is usually triggered by an event that activated the process.

Identify the unusual event, and troubleshoot the root cause. See the section on “Debugging Active Processes.”

■For complete information about CPU utilization and how to troubleshoot utilization problems, see the Troubleshooting High CPU Utilization document on Cisco.com.

Switch software can be corrupted during an upgrade, by downloading the wrong file to the switch, and by deleting the image file. In all of these cases, the switch does not pass the power-on self-test (POST), and there is no connectivity.

This procedure uses the Xmodem Protocol to recover from a corrupt or wrong image file. There are many software packages that support the Xmodem Protocol, and this procedure is largely dependent on the emulation software that you are using.

This recovery procedure requires that you have physical access to the switch.

1. From your PC, download the software image tar file ( image_filename.tar) from Cisco.com.

The Cisco IOS image is stored as a bin file in a directory in the tar file. For information about locating the software image files on Cisco.com, see the release notes.

2. Extract the bin file from the tar file.

■If you are using Windows, use a zip program that can read a tar file. Use the zip program to navigate to and extract the bin file.

■If you are using UNIX, follow these steps:

–Display the contents of the tar file by using the tar -tvf < image_filename.tar > UNIX command.

switch% tar -tvf image_filename.tar

–Locate the bin file, and extract it by using the tar -xvf < image_filename.tar > < image_filename.bin > UNIX command.

switch% tar -xvf image_filename.tar image_filename.binx
 
x image_name.bin, 3970586 bytes, 7756 tape blocks
 

–Verify that the bin file was extracted by using the ls -l < image_filename.bin > UNIX command.

switch% ls -l image_filename.bin-rwxr-xr-x 1 bschuett eng 6365325 May 19 13:03
<insert path for lan base image>
 
-rw-r--r-- 1 boba 3970586 Apr 21 12:00 image_name.bin
 

3. Connect your PC with terminal-emulation software supporting the Xmodem Protocol to the switch console port.

4. Set the line speed on the emulation software to 9600 baud.

5. Unplug the switch power cord.

6. Press the Express Setup buttonfactory default button and at the same time, reconnect the power cord to the switch.

You can release the button a second or two after the LED above port 1 goes offwhen the password-recovery mechanism is enabled. message appears. Several lines of information about the software appear along with instructions:

The system has been interrupted prior to initializing the flash file system. The following commands will initialize the flash file system, and finish loading the operating system software#
 
flash_init
load_helper
boot
 

7. Initialize the flash file system:

switch: flash_init
 

8. If you had set the console port speed to anything other than 9600, it has been reset to that particular speed. Change the emulation software line speed to match that of the switch console port.

9. Load any helper files:

switch: load_helper
 

10. Start the file transfer by using the Xmodem Protocol.

switch: copy xmodem: flash:image_filename.bin
 

11. After the Xmodem request appears, use the appropriate command on the terminal-emulation software to start the transfer and to copy the software image into flash memory.

12. Boot the newly downloaded Cisco IOS image.

switch:boot flash:image_filename.bin
 

13. Use the archive download-sw privileged EXEC command to download the software image to the switch.

14. Use the reload privileged EXEC command to restart the switch and to verify that the new software image is operating properly.

15. Delete the flash: image_filename.bin file from the switch.

If you lose or forget your password, you can delete the switch password and set a new one.

Before you begin, make sure that:

■You have physical access to the switch.

■At least one switch port is enabled and is not connected to a device.

To delete the switch password and set a new one, follow these steps:

1. Press the Express Setup button until the SETUP LED blinks green and the LED of an available switch downlink port blinks green.

If no switch downlink port is available for your PC or laptop connection, disconnect a device from one of the switch downlink ports. Press the Express Setup button again until the SETUP LED and the port LED blink green.

2. Connect your PC or laptop to the port with the blinking green LED.

The SETUP LED and the switch downlink port LED stop blinking and stay solid green.

3. Press and hold the Express Setup button. Notice that the SETUP LED starts blinking green again. Continue holding the button until the SETUP LED turns solid green (approximately 5 seconds). Release the Express Setup button immediately.

This procedure deletes the password without affecting any other configuration settings. You can now access the switch without a password through the console port or by using Device Manager.

4. Enter a new password through the device manager by using the Express Setup window or through the command line interface by using the enable secret global configuration command.

Some configurations can prevent the command switch from maintaining contact with member switches. If you are unable to maintain management contact with a member, and the member switch is forwarding packets normally, check for these conflicts:

■A member switch (Catalyst 3750, Catalyst 3560, Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 3500 XL, Catalyst 2970, Catalyst 2960, Catalyst 2950, Catalyst 2900 XL, Catalyst 2820, and Catalyst 1900 switch) cannot connect to the command switch through a port that is defined as a network port.

■Catalyst 3500 XL, Catalyst 2900 XL, Catalyst 2820, and Catalyst 1900 member switches must connect to the command switch through a port that belongs to the same management VLAN.

■A member switch (Catalyst 3750, Catalyst 3560, Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 2970, Catalyst 2960, Catalyst 2950, Catalyst 3500 XL, Catalyst 2900 XL, Catalyst 2820, and Catalyst 1900 switch) connected to the command switch through a secured port can lose connectivity if the port is disabled because of a security violation.

If you attempt to ping a host in a different IP subnetwork, you must define a static route to the network or have IP routing configured to route between those subnets.

IP routing is disabled by default on all switches. If you need to enable or configure IP routing, see Configuring Static IP Unicast Routing

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use this command to ping another device on the network from the switch:

Command
Purpose

ping ip host | address

Pings a remote host through IP or by supplying the hostname or network address.

Note: Other protocol keywords are available with the ping command, but they are not supported in this release.

This example shows how to ping an IP host:

Switch# ping 172.20.52.3
 
Type escape sequence to abort.
Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echoes to 172.20.52.3, timeout is 2 seconds:
!!!!!
Success rate is 100 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/4 ms
Switch#
 

Table 72 describes the possible ping character output.

Table 72 Ping Text Characters

Character
Description

!

Each exclamation point means receipt of a reply.

.

Each period means the network server timed out while waiting for a reply.

U

A destination unreachable error PDU was received.

C

A congestion experienced packet was received.

I

User interrupted test.

?

Unknown packet type.

&

Packet lifetime exceeded.

To end a ping session, enter the escape sequence (Ctrl-^ X by default). Simultaneously press and release the Ctrl, Shift, and 6 keys and then press the X key.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, enter the following command to trace that the path packets take through the network:

Command
Purpose

traceroute ip host

Traces the path that packets take through the network.

Note: Other protocol keywords are available with the traceroute privileged EXEC command, but they are not supported in this release.

This example shows how to perform a traceroute to an IP host:

Switch# traceroute ip 171.9.15.10
 
Type escape sequence to abort.
Tracing the route to 171.69.115.10
 
1 172.2.52.1 0 msec 0 msec 4 msec
2 172.2.1.203 12 msec 8 msec 0 msec
3 171.9.16.6 4 msec 0 msec 0 msec
4 171.9.4.5 0 msec 4 msec 0 msec
5 171.9.121.34 0 msec 4 msec 4 msec
6 171.9.15.9 120 msec 132 msec 128 msec
7 171.9.15.10 132 msec 128 msec 128 msec
Switch#
 

The display shows the hop count, the IP address of the router, and the round-trip time in milliseconds for each of the three probes that are sent.

Table 73 lists the characters that can appear in the traceroute command output.

Table 73 Traceroute Text Characters

Character
Description

*

The probe timed out.

?

Unknown packet type.

A

Administratively unreachable. Usually, this output means that an access list is blocking traffic.

H

Host unreachable.

N

Network unreachable.

P

Protocol unreachable.

Q

Source quench.

U

Port unreachable.

To end a trace in progress, enter the escape sequence (Ctrl-^ X by default). Simultaneously press and release the Ctrl, Shift, and 6 keys and then press the X key.

To run TDR, enter the test cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id privileged EXEC command:

To display the results, enter the show cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id privileged EXEC command.

Caution: Because debugging output is assigned high priority in the CPU process, it can render the system unusable. For this reason, use debug commands only to troubleshoot specific problems or during troubleshooting sessions with Cisco technical support staff. It is best to use debug commands during periods of lower network traffic and fewer users. Debugging during these periods decreases the likelihood that increased debug command processing overhead will affect system use.

All debug commands are entered in privileged EXEC mode, and most debug commands take no arguments. For example, beginning in privileged EXEC mode, enter this command to enable the debugging for Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN):

Switch# debug span-session
 

The switch continues to generate output until you enter the no form of the command.

If you enable a debug command and no output appears, consider these possibilities:

■The switch might not be properly configured to generate the type of traffic you want to monitor. Use the show running-config command to check its configuration.

■Even if the switch is properly configured, it might not generate the type of traffic you want to monitor during the particular period that debugging is enabled. Depending on the feature you are debugging, you can use commands such as the TCP/IP ping command to generate network traffic.

To disable debugging of SPAN, enter this command in privileged EXEC mode:

Switch# no debug span-session
 

Alternately, in privileged EXEC mode, you can enter the undebug form of the command:

Switch# undebug span-session
 

To display the state of each debugging option, enter this command in privileged EXEC mode:

Switch# show debugging

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, enter this command to enable all-system diagnostics:

Switch# debug all
 

Caution: Because debugging output takes priority over other network traffic, and because the debug all privileged EXEC command generates more output than any other debug command, it can severely diminish switch performance or even render it unusable. In virtually all cases, it is best to use more specific debug commands.

The no debug all privileged EXEC command disables all diagnostic output. Using the no debug all command is a convenient way to ensure that you have not accidentally left any debug commands enabled.

By default, the network server sends the output from debug commands and system error messages to the console. If you use this default, you can use a virtual terminal connection to monitor debug output instead of connecting to the console port.

Possible destinations include the console, virtual terminals, internal buffer, and UNIX hosts running a syslog server. The syslog format is compatible with 4.3 Berkeley Standard Distribution (BSD) UNIX and its derivatives.

Note: Be aware that the debugging destination you use affects system overhead. Logging messages to the console produces very high overhead, whereas logging messages to a virtual terminal produces less overhead. Logging messages to a syslog server produces even less, and logging to an internal buffer produces the least overhead of any method.

For more information about system message logging, see Configuring System Message Logging

You can display the physical path that a packet takes from a source device to a destination device by using one of these privileged EXEC commands:

tracetroute mac [ interface interface-id ] { source-mac-address } [ interface interface-id ] { destination-mac-address } [ vlan vlan-id ] [ detail ]

tracetroute mac ip { source-ip-address | source-hostname }{ destination-ip-address | destination-hostname } [ detail ]

You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module by using the show interfaces transceiver privileged EXEC command. This command shows the operational status, such as the temperature and the current for an SFP module on a specific interface and the alarm status. You can also use the command to check the speed and the duplex settings on an SFP module.

The output from the show platform forward privileged EXEC command provides some useful information about the forwarding results if a packet entering an interface is sent through the system. Depending upon the parameters entered about the packet, the output provides lookup table results and port maps used to calculate forwarding destinations, bitmaps, and egress information.

Most of the information in the output from the command is useful mainly for technical support personnel, who have access to detailed information about the switch application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs). However, packet forwarding information can also be helpful in troubleshooting.

This is an example of the output from the show platform forward command on port 1 in VLAN 5 when the packet entering that port is addressed to unknown MAC addresses. The packet should be flooded to all other ports in VLAN 5.

Switch# show platform forward GigabitEthernet1/17 vlan 5 1.1.1 2.2.2 ip 13.1.1.1 13.2.2.2 udp 10 20
Global Port Number:24, Asic Number:5
Src Real Vlan Id:5, Mapped Vlan Id:5
 
Ingress:
Lookup Key-Used Index-Hit A-Data
InptACL 40_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFA 03000000
L2Local 80_00050002_00020002-00_00000000_00000000 00C71 0000002B
Station Descriptor:02340000, DestIndex:0239, RewriteIndex:F005
 
==========================================
Egress:Asic 2, switch 1
Output Packets:
 
------------------------------------------
Packet 1
Lookup Key-Used Index-Hit A-Data
OutptACL 50_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFE 03000000
 
Port Vlan SrcMac DstMac Cos Dscpv
Gi1/17 0005 0001.0001.0001 0002.0002.0002
 
------------------------------------------
Packet 2
Lookup Key-Used Index-Hit A-Data
OutptACL 50_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFE 03000000
 
Port Vlan SrcMac DstMac Cos Dscpv
Gi1/17 0005 0001.0001.0001 0002.0002.0002
 
------------------------------------------
<output truncated>
------------------------------------------
Packet 10
Lookup Key-Used Index-Hit A-Data
OutptACL 50_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFE 03000000
Packet dropped due to failed DEJA_VU Check on Gi1/0/2
Packet dropped due to failed DEJA_VU Check on Gi1/18
 

This is an example of the output when the packet coming in on port 1 in VLAN 5 is sent to an address already learned on the VLAN on another port. It should be forwarded from the port on which the address was learned.

Switch# show platform forward GigabitEthernet1/17 vlan 5 1.1.1 0009.43a8.0145 ip 13.1.1.1 13.2.2.2 udp 10 20
Global Port Number:24, Asic Number:5
Src Real Vlan Id:5, Mapped Vlan Id:5
 
Ingress:
Lookup Key-Used Index-Hit A-Data
InptACL 40_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFA 03000000
L2Local 80_00050009_43A80145-00_00000000_00000000 00086 02010197
Station Descriptor:F0050003, DestIndex:F005, RewriteIndex:0003
 
==========================================
Egress:Asic 3, switch 1
Output Packets:
 
------------------------------------------
Packet 1
Lookup Key-Used Index-Hit A-Data
OutptACL 50_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFE 03000000
 
Port Vlan SrcMac DstMac Cos Dscpv
interface-id 0005 0001.0001.0001 0009.43A8.0145
 

This is an example of the output when the packet coming in on port 1 in VLAN 5 has a destination MAC address set to the router MAC address in VLAN 5 and the destination IP address unknown. Because there is no default route set, the packet should be dropped.

Switch# show platform forward GigabitEthernet1/17 vlan 5 1.1.1 03.e319.ee44 ip 13.1.1.1 13.2.2.2 udp 10 20
Global Port Number:24, Asic Number:5
Src Real Vlan Id:5, Mapped Vlan Id:5
 
Ingress:
Lookup Key-Used Index-Hit A-Data
InptACL 40_0D020202_0D010101-00_41000014_000A0000 01FFA 03000000
L3Local 00_00000000_00000000-90_00001400_0D020202 010F0 01880290
L3Scndr 12_0D020202_0D010101-00_40000014_000A0000 034E0 000C001D_00000000
Lookup Used:Secondary
Station Descriptor:02260000, DestIndex:0226, RewriteIndex:0000
 

This is an example of the output when the packet coming in on port 1 in VLAN 5 has a destination MAC address set to the router MAC address in VLAN 5 and the destination IP address set to an IP address that is in the IP routing table. It should be forwarded as specified in the routing table.

Switch# show platform forward GigabitEthernet1/17 vlan 5 1.1.1 03.e319.ee44 ip 110.1.5.5 16.1.10.5
Global Port Number:24, Asic Number:5
Src Real Vlan Id:5, Mapped Vlan Id:5
 
Ingress:
Lookup Key-Used Index-Hit A-Data
InptACL 40_10010A05_0A010505-00_41000014_000A0000 01FFA 03000000
L3Local 00_00000000_00000000-90_00001400_10010A05 010F0 01880290
L3Scndr 12_10010A05_0A010505-00_40000014_000A0000 01D28 30090001_00000000
Lookup Used:Secondary
Station Descriptor:F0070007, DestIndex:F007, RewriteIndex:0007
 
==========================================
Egress:Asic 3, switch 1
Output Packets:
 
------------------------------------------
Packet 1
Lookup Key-Used Index-Hit A-Data
OutptACL 50_10010A05_0A010505-00_40000014_000A0000 01FFE 03000000
 
Port Vlan SrcMac DstMac Cos Dscpv
Gi1/18 0007 XXXX.XXXX.0246 0009.43A8.0147

The following sections provide references related to switch administration:

Related Topic
Document Title

Cisco IOS basic commands

Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference

Additional troubleshooting information

Hardware Installation Guide

Standards
Title

No new or modified standards are supported by this feature, and support for existing standards has not been modified by this feature.

RFCs
Title

No new or modified RFCs are supported by this feature, and support for existing RFCs has not been modified by this feature.

Description
Link

The Cisco Technical Support website contains thousands of pages of searchable technical content, including links to products, technologies, solutions, technical tips, and tools. Registered Cisco.com users can log in from this page to access even more content.

http://www.cisco.com/techsupport


Page 17

■Understanding MODBUS TCP

■Configuring the Switch as the MODBUS TCP Server

■Displaying MODBUS TCP Information

Use Modicon Communication Bus (MODBUS) TCP over an Ethernet network when connecting the switch to devices such as intelligent electronic devices (IEDs), distributed controllers, substation routers, Cisco IP Phones, Cisco Wireless Access Points, and other network devices such as redundant substation switches.

MODBUS is a serial communications protocol for client-server communication between a switch (server) and a device in the network running MODBUS client software (client). You can use MODBUS to connect a computer to a remote terminal unit (RTU) in supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) systems.

The client can be an IED or a human machine interface (HMI) application that remotely configure and manage devices running MODBUS TCP. The switch functions as the server.

The switch encapsulates a request or response message in a MODBUS TCP application data unit (ADU). A client sends a message to a TCP port on the switch. The default port number is 502.

■MODBUS and Security

■Multiple Request Messages

If a firewall or other security services are enabled, the switch TCP port might be blocked, and the switch and the client cannot communicate.

If a firewall and other security services are disabled, a denial-of-service attack might occur on the switch.

■To prevent a denial-of-service attack and to allow a specific client to send messages to the switch (server), you can use this standard access control list (ACL) that permits traffic only from the source IP address 10.1.1.n :

interface Ethernet0/0
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
ip access-group 1 in
!
access-list 1 permit 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255
 

■To configure quality of service (QoS) to set the rate-limit for MODBUS TCP traffic:

interface FastEthernet0/1
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
ip access-group 1 in
rate-limit input access-group 101 8000 8000 8000 conform-action transmit exceed-action drop
!
access-list 101 permit tcp 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 any eq 502
 

The switch can receive multiple request messages from clients and respond to them simultaneously.

You can set the number of client connections from 1 to 5. The default is 1.

■Defaults

■Enabling MODBUS TCP on the Switch

The switch is not configured as a MODBUS TCP server.

The TCP switch port number is 502.

The number of simultaneous connection requests is 1.

Beginning in privileged EXEC mode:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

scada modbus tcp server

Enables MODBUS TCP on the switch

3.

scada modbus tcp server port tcp-port-number

(Optional) Sets the TCP port to which clients send messages. The range for tcp-port-number is 1 to 65535. The default is 502.

4.

scada modbus tcp server connection connection-requests

(Optional) Sets the number of simultaneous connection requests sent to the switch. The range for connection-requests is 1 to 5. The default is 1.

5.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show scada modbus tcp server

Displays the server information and statistics.

7.

copy running-config startup config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

To disable MODBUS on the switch and return to the default settings, enter the no scada modbus tcp server global configuration command.

To clear the server and client statistics, enter the clear scada modbus tcp server statistics privileged EXEC command.

After you enable MODBUS TCP on the switch, this warning appears:

WARNING: Starting Modbus TCP server is a security risk. Please understand the security issues involved before proceeding further. Do you still want to start the

server? [yes/no]:

To add security when using MODBUS TCP, configure an ACL to permit traffic from specific clients or configure QoS to rate-limit traffic.

Command
Purpose

show scada modbus tcp server

Displays the server information and statistics.

show scada modbus tcp server connections

Displays the client information and statistics.


Page 18

■By default, the IP device tracking feature is disabled on a switch. You must enable the IP device tracking feature to use web-based authentication.

■You must configure at least one IP address to run the switch HTTP server. You must also configure routes to reach each host IP address. The HTTP server sends the HTTP login page to the host.

■You must configure the default ACL on the interface before configuring web-based authentication. Configure a port ACL for a Layer 2 interface.

■Web-based authentication is an ingress-only feature.

■You can configure web-based authentication only on access ports. Web-based authentication is not supported on trunk ports, EtherChannel member ports, or dynamic trunk ports.

■You cannot authenticate hosts on Layer 2 interfaces with static ARP cache assignment. These hosts are not detected by the web-based authentication feature because they do not send ARP messages.

■Hosts that are more than one hop away might experience traffic disruption if an STP topology change results in the host traffic arriving on a different port. This occurs because the ARP and DHCP updates might not be sent after a Layer 2 (STP) topology change.

■Web-based authentication does not support VLAN assignment as a downloadable-host policy.

■Web-based authentication is not supported for IPv6 traffic.

■Web-based authentication and Network Edge Access Topology (NEAT) are mutually exclusive. You cannot use web-based authentication when NEAT is enabled on an interface, and you cannot use NEAT when web-based authentication is running on an interface.

■Web-based authentication supports only RADIUS authorization servers. You cannot use TACACS+ servers or local authorization.

Use the web-based authentication feature, known as web authentication proxy, to authenticate end users on host systems that do not run the IEEE 802.1x supplicant.

Note: You can configure web-based authentication on Layer 2 interfaces.

When you initiate an HTTP session, web-based authentication intercepts ingress HTTP packets from the host and sends an HTML login page to the users. The users enter their credentials, which the web-based authentication feature sends to the authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server for authentication.

If authentication succeeds, web-based authentication sends a Login-Successful HTML page to the host and applies the access policies returned by the AAA server.

If authentication fails, web-based authentication forwards a Login-Fail HTML page to the user, prompting the user to retry the login. If the user exceeds the maximum number of attempts, web-based authentication forwards a Login-Expired HTML page to the host, and the user is placed on a watch list for a waiting period.

These sections describe the role of web-based authentication as part of AAA:

■Device Roles

■Host Detection

■Session Creation

■Authentication Process

■Web Authentication Customizable Web Pages

■Web-Based Authentication Interactions with Other Features

With web-based authentication, the devices in the network have these specific roles:

■Client—The device (workstation) that requests access to the LAN and the services and responds to requests from the switch. The workstation must be running an HTML browser with Java Script enabled.

■Authentication server—Authenticates the client. The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch that the client is authorized to access the LAN and the switch services or that the client is denied.

■Switch—Controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client. The switch acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the client and the authentication server, requesting identity information from the client, verifying that information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the client.

Figure 24 Web-Based Authentication Device Roles

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

The switch maintains an IP device tracking table to store information about detected hosts.

Note: By default, the IP device tracking feature is disabled on a switch. You must enable the IP device tracking feature to use web-based authentication.

For Layer 2 interfaces, web-based authentication detects IP hosts by using these mechanisms:

■ARP-based trigger—ARP redirect ACL allows web-based authentication to detect hosts with a static IP address or a dynamic IP address.

■Dynamic ARP inspection

■DHCP snooping—Web-based authentication is notified when the switch creates a DHCP-binding entry for the host.

When web-based authentication detects a new host, it creates a session as follows:

■Reviews the exception list.

If the host IP is included in the exception list, the policy from the exception list entry is applied, and the session is established.

■Reviews for authorization bypass.

If the host IP is not on the exception list, web-based authentication sends a nonresponsive-host (NRH) request to the server.

If the server response is access accepted, authorization is bypassed for this host. The session is established.

■Sets up the HTTP intercept ACL.

If the server response to the NRH request is access rejected, the HTTP intercept ACL is activated, and the session waits for HTTP traffic from the host.

When you enable web-based authentication, these events occur:

■The user initiates an HTTP session.

■The HTTP traffic is intercepted, and authorization is initiated. The switch sends the login page to the user. The user enters a username and password, and the switch sends the entries to the authentication server.

■If the authentication succeeds, the switch downloads and activates the user’s access policy from the authentication server. The login success page is sent to the user.

■If the authentication fails, the switch sends the login fail page. The user retries the login. If the maximum number of attempts fails, the switch sends the login expired page, and the host is placed in a watch list. After the watch list times out, the user can retry the authentication process.

■If the authentication server does not respond to the switch, and if an AAA fail policy is configured, the switch applies the failure access policy to the host. The login success page is sent to the user. (See Local Web Authentication Banner.)

■The switch reauthenticates a client when the host does not respond to an ARP probe on a Layer 2 interface, or when the host does not send any traffic within the idle timeout on a Layer 3 interface.

■The feature applies the downloaded timeout or the locally configured session timeout.

■If the terminate action is RADIUS, the feature sends a nonresponsive host (NRH) request to the server. The terminate action is included in the response from the server.

■If the terminate action is default, the session is dismantled, and the applied policy is removed.

You can create a banner that will appear when you log in to a switch by using web authentication.

The banner appears on both the login page and the authentication-result pop-up pages:

■Authentication Successful

■Authentication Failed

■Authentication Expired

You create a banner by using the ip admission auth-proxy-banner http global configuration command. The default banner Cisco Systems and Switch host-name Authentication appear on the Login Page. Cisco Systems appears on the authentication result pop-up page, as shown in Figure 25.

Figure 25 Authentication Successful Banner

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

You can also customize the banner, as shown in Figure 26.

■Add a switch, router, or company name to the banner by using the ip admission auth-proxy-banner http banner-text global configuration command.

■Add a logo or text file to the banner by using the ip admission auth-proxy-banner http file-path global configuration command.

Figure 26 Customized Web Banner

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

If you do not enable a banner, only the username and password dialog boxes appear in the web authentication login screen, and no banner appears when you log into the switch, as shown in Login Screen with No Banner.

Figure 27 Login Screen with No Banner

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

For more information, see the Cisco IOS Security Command Reference and Configuring a Web Authentication Local Banner.

During the web-based authentication process, the switch internal HTTP server hosts four HTML pages to deliver to an authenticating client. The server uses these pages to notify you of these four-authentication process states:

■Login—Your credentials are requested.

■Success—The login was successful.

■Fail—The login failed.

■Expire—The login session has expired because of excessive login failures.

■You can substitute your own HTML pages for the default internal HTML pages.

■You can use a logo or specify text in the login, success, failure, and expire web pages.

■On the banner page, you can specify text in the login page.

■The pages are in HTML.

■You must include an HTML redirect command in the success page to access a specific URL.

■The URL string must be a valid URL (for example, http://www.cisco.com). An incomplete URL might cause page not found error or similar errors on a web browser.

■If you configure web pages for HTTP authentication, they must include the appropriate HTML commands (for example, to set the page time out, to set a hidden password, or to confirm that the same page is not submitted twice).

■The CLI command to redirect users to a specific URL is not available when the configured login form is enabled. The administrator should ensure that the redirection is configured in the web page.

■If the CLI command redirecting users to a specific URL after authentication occurs is entered and then the command configuring web pages is entered, the CLI command redirecting users to a specific URL does not take effect.

■Configured web pages can be copied to the switch boot flash or flash.

■Configured pages can be accessed from the flash on the stack master or members.

■The login page can be on one flash, and the success and failure pages can be another flash (for example, the flash on the stack master or a member).

■You must configure all four pages.

■The banner page has no effect if it is configured with the web page.

■All of the logo files (image, flash, audio, video, and so on) that are stored in the system directory (for example, flash, disk0, or disk) and that must be displayed on the login page must use web_auth_filename as the filename.

■The configured authentication proxy feature supports both HTTP and SSL.

When configuring customized authentication proxy web pages, follow these guidelines:

■To enable the custom web pages feature, specify all four custom HTML files. If you specify fewer than four files, the internal default HTML pages are used.

■The four custom HTML files must be present on the flash memory of the switch. The maximum size of each HTML file is 8 KB.

■Any images on the custom pages must be on an accessible HTTP server. Configure an intercept ACL within the admission rule.

■Any external link from a custom page requires configuration of an intercept ACL within the admission rule.

■To access a valid DNS server, any name resolution required for external links or images requires configuration of an intercept ACL within the admission rule.

■If the custom web pages feature is enabled, a configured auth-proxy-banner is not used.

■If the custom web pages feature is enabled, the redirection URL for successful login feature is not available.

■To remove the specification of a custom file, use the no form of the command.

Because the custom login page is a public web form, consider these guidelines for the page:

■The login form must accept user entries for the username and password and must show them as uname and pwd.

■The custom login page should follow best practices for a web form, such as page timeout, hidden password, and prevention of redundant submissions.

You can substitute your HTML pages, as shown in Customizeable Authentication Page, for the default internal HTML pages. You can also specify a URL to which users are redirected after authentication occurs, which replaces the internal Success page.

Figure 28 Customizeable Authentication Page

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

■Port Security

■LAN Port IP

■Gateway IP

■ACLs

■Context-Based Access Control

■802.1x Authentication

■EtherChannel

You can configure web-based authentication and port security on the same port. Web-based authentication authenticates the port, and port security manages network access for all MAC addresses, including that of the client. You can then limit the number or group of clients that can access the network through the port.

You can configure LAN port IP (LPIP) and Layer 2 web-based authentication on the same port. The host is authenticated by using web-based authentication first, followed by LPIP posture validation. The LPIP host policy overrides the web-based authentication host policy.

If the web-based authentication idle timer expires, the NAC policy is removed. The host is authenticated, and posture is validated again.

You cannot configure Gateway IP (GWIP) on a Layer 3 VLAN interface if web-based authentication is configured on any of the switch ports in the VLAN.

You can configure web-based authentication on the same Layer 3 interface as Gateway IP. The host policies for both features are applied in software. The GWIP policy overrides the web-based authentication host policy.

If you configure a VLAN ACL or a Cisco IOS ACL on an interface, the ACL is applied to the host traffic only after the web-based authentication host policy is applied.

For Layer 2 web-based authentication, you must configure a port ACL (PACL) as the default access policy for ingress traffic from hosts connected to the port. After authentication, the web-based authentication host policy overrides the PACL.

Note: When a proxy ACL is configured for a web-based authentication client, the proxy ACL is downloaded and applied as part of the authorization process. Hence, the PACL displays the proxy ACL access control entry (ACE).

You cannot configure a MAC ACL and web-based authentication on the same interface.

You cannot configure web-based authentication on a port whose access VLAN is configured for VACL capture.

Web-based authentication cannot be configured on a Layer 2 port if context-based access control (CBAC) is configured on the Layer 3 VLAN interface of the port VLAN.

You cannot configure web-based authentication on the same port as 802.1x authentication except as a fallback authentication method.

You can configure web-based authentication on a Layer 2 EtherChannel interface. The web-based authentication configuration applies to all member channels.

Feature
Default Settings

AAA

Disabled

RADIUS server

■IP address

■UDP authentication port

■Key

■None specified

■ 1812

■None specified

Default value of inactivity timeout

3600 seconds

Inactivity timeout

Enabled

RADIUS security servers identification:

■Host name

■Host IP address

■Host name and specific UDP port numbers

■IP address and specific UDP port numbers

The combination of the IP address and UDP port number creates a unique identifier, that enables RADIUS requests to be sent to multiple UDP ports on a server at the same IP address. If two different host entries on the same RADIUS server are configured for the same service (for example, authentication) the second host entry that is configured functions as the failover backup to the first one. The RADIUS host entries are chosen in the order that they were configured.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

ip admission name name proxy http

Configures an authentication rule for web-based authorization.

2.

interface type slot/port

Enters interface configuration mode and specifies the ingress Layer 2 interface to be enabled for web-based authentication.

type can be Gigabit Ethernet, or 10-Gigabit Ethernet.

3.

ip access-group name

Applies the default ACL.

4.

ip admission name

Configures web-based authentication on the specified interface.

5.

exit

Returns to configuration mode.

6.

ip device tracking

Enables the IP device tracking table.

7.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

show ip admission configuration

Displays the configuration.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

aaa new-model

Enables AAA functionality.

2.

aaa authentication login default group { tacacs+ | radius }

Defines the list of authentication methods at login.

3.

aaa authorization auth-proxy default group { tacacs+ | radius }

Creates an authorization method list for web-based authorization.

4.

radius-server host { hostname | ip-address } test username username

Specifies an AAA server.

Specifies the host name or IP address of the remote RADIUS server.

The test username username option enables automated testing of the RADIUS server connection. The specified username does not need to be a valid user name.

5.

radius-server key string

Configures the authorization and encryption key used between the switch and the RADIUS daemon running on the RADIUS server. To use multiple RADIUS servers, reenter this command for each server.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

ip radius source-interface interface_name

Specifies that the RADIUS packets have the IP address of the indicated interface.

2.

radius-server host { hostname | ip-address } test username username

Specifies the host name or IP address of the remote RADIUS server.

The test username username option enables automated testing of the RADIUS server connection. The specified username does not need to be a valid user name.

The key option specifies an authentication and encryption key to use between the switch and the RADIUS server.

To use multiple RADIUS servers, reenter this command for each server.

3.

radius-server key string

Configures the authorization and encryption key used between the switch and the RADIUS daemon running on the RADIUS server.

4.

radius-server vsa send authentication

Enables downloading of an ACL from the RADIUS server. This feature is supported in
Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SG.

5.

radius-server dead-criteria tries num-tries

Specifies the number of unanswered sent messages to a RADIUS server before considering the server to be inactive. The range of num-tries is 1 to 100.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

ip http server

Enables the HTTP server. The web-based authentication feature uses the HTTP server to communicate with the hosts for user authentication.

2.

ip http secure-server

Enables HTTPS.

Before You Begin

You can configure web authentication to display four substitute HTML pages to the user in place of the switch default HTML pages during web-based authentication.

To specify the use of your custom authentication proxy web pages, first store your custom HTML files on the switch flash memory, then perform this task in global configuration mode:

 
Command
Purpose

1.

ip admission proxy http login page file device:login-filename

Specifies the location in the switch memory file system of the custom HTML file to use in place of the default login page. The device: is flash memory.

2.

ip admission proxy http success page file device:success-filename

Specifies the location of the custom HTML file to use in place of the default login success page.

3.

ip admission proxy http failure page file device:fail-filename

Specifies the location of the custom HTML file to use in place of the default login failure page.

4.

ip admission proxy http login expired page file device:expired-filename

Specifies the location of the custom HTML file to use in place of the default login expired page.

You can specify a URL to which the user is redirected after authentication, effectively replacing the internal Success HTML page.

 
Command
Purpose

ip admission proxy http success redirect url-string

Specifies a URL for redirection of the user in place of the default login success page.

You can configure the maximum number of failed login attempts before the client is placed in a watch list for a waiting period.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

ip admission max-login-attempts number

Sets the maximum number of failed login attempts. The range is 1 to 2147483647 attempts. The default is 5.

2.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

3.

show ip admission configuration

Displays the authentication proxy configuration.

4.

show ip admission cache

Displays the list of authentication entries.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

2.

ip admission auth-proxy-banner http [banner-text | file-path]

Enables the local banner.

(Optional) Creates a custom banner by entering C banner-text C, where C is a delimiting character or a file-path indicates a file (for example, a logo or text file) that appears in the banner.

3.

end

Returns to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Saves your entries in the configuration file.

Enter a specific IP address to delete the entry for a single host. Use an asterisk to delete all cache entries.

Command
Purpose

clear ip auth-proxy cache { * | host ip address }

Clears authentication proxy entries from the switch.

clear ip admission cache { * | host ip address }

Clears IP admission cache entries from the switch.

Command
Purpose

show authentication sessions

Displays the web-based authentication settings.

show ip admission configuration

Displays the authentication proxy configuration.

show ip admission cache

Displays the list of authentication entries.

 

This example shows how to verify the configuration:

Switch# show ip admission configuration
Authentication Proxy Banner not configured
Authentication global cache time is 60 minutes
Authentication global absolute time is 0 minutes
Authentication global init state time is 2 minutes
Authentication Proxy Watch-list is disabled
 
Authentication Proxy Rule Configuration
Auth-proxy name webauth1
http list not specified inactivity-time 60 minutes
 
Authentication Proxy Auditing is disabled
Max Login attempts per user is 5

This example shows how to enable AAA:

Switch(config)# aaa new-model
Switch(config)# aaa authentication login default group radius
Switch(config)# aaa authorization auth-proxy default group radius

This example shows how to configure the RADIUS server parameters on a switch:

Switch(config)# ip radius source-interface Vlan80
Switch(config)# radius-server host 172.l20.39.46 test username user1
Switch(config)# radius-server key rad123
Switch(config)# radius-server dead-criteria tries 2

This example shows how to configure custom authentication proxy web pages:

Switch(config)# ip admission proxy http login page file flash:login.htm
Switch(config)# ip admission proxy http success page file flash:success.htm
Switch(config)# ip admission proxy http fail page file flash:fail.htm
Switch(config)# ip admission proxy http login expired page flash flash:expired.htm

This example shows how to verify the configuration of a custom authentication proxy web pages:

Switch# show ip admission configuration
Authentication proxy webpage
Login page : flash:login.htm
Success page : flash:success.htm
Fail Page : flash:fail.htm
Login expired Page : flash:expired.htm
 
Authentication global cache time is 60 minutes
Authentication global absolute time is 0 minutes
Authentication global init state time is 2 minutes
Authentication Proxy Session ratelimit is 100
Authentication Proxy Watch-list is disabled
Authentication Proxy Auditing is disabled
Max Login attempts per user is 5

This example shows how to configure a redirection URL for successful login:

Switch(config)# ip admission proxy http success redirect www.cisco.com

This example shows how to verify the redirection URL for successful login:

Switch# show ip admission configuration
Authentication Proxy Banner not configured
Customizable Authentication Proxy webpage not configured
HTTP Authentication success redirect to URL: http://www.cisco.com
Authentication global cache time is 60 minutes
Authentication global absolute time is 0 minutes
Authentication global init state time is 2 minutes
Authentication Proxy Watch-list is disabled
Authentication Proxy Max HTTP process is 7
Authentication Proxy Auditing is disabled
Max Login attempts per user is 5

This example shows how to configure a local banner with the custom message My Switch:

Switch(config) configure terminal
Switch(config)# aaa new-model
Switch(config)# aaa ip auth-proxy auth-proxy-banner C My Switch C
Switch(config) end

This example shows how to remove the web-based authentication session for the client at the IP address 209.165.201.1:

Switch# clear ip auth-proxy cache 209.165.201.1

The following sections provide references related to switch administration:

Related Topic
Document Title

Cisco IOS basic commands

Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference

Authentication proxy commands
Radius server commands

Cisco IOS Security Command Reference

Authentication proxy configuration
Radius server configuration

Cisco IOS Security Configuration Guide

Standards
Title

No new or modified standards are supported by this feature, and support for existing standards has not been modified by this feature.

RFCs
Title

No new or modified RFCs are supported by this feature, and support for existing RFCs has not been modified by this feature.

Description
Link

The Cisco Technical Support website contains thousands of pages of searchable technical content, including links to products, technologies, solutions, technical tips, and tools. Registered Cisco.com users can log in from this page to access even more content.

http://www.cisco.com/techsupport

 


Page 19

This chapter describes how to configure IP Version 4 (IPv4) unicast routing on the Cisco Industrial Ethernet Switches, hereafter referred to as switch.

Note: Dynamic routing protocols are only supported on switches running IP Services feature set. Static routing is supported on Lan Base feature set.

For more detailed IPv4 unicast configuration information and complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see documents listed in the Related Documents.

This chapter includes the following sections:

■Information About IP Routing

■Prerequisites

■Guidelines and Limitations

■Configuring IP Addressing

■Enabling IPv4 Unicast Routing

■Configuring RIP

■Configuring OSPF

■Configuring EIGRP

■Configuring BGP

■Configuring ISO CLNS Routing

■Configuring BFD

■Configuring Multi-VRF CE

■Configuring Protocol-Independent Features

■Verifying Configuration

■Related Documents

In an IP network, each subnetwork is mapped to an individual VLAN. However, network devices in different VLANs cannot communicate with one another without a Layer 3 device (router) to route traffic between the VLAN, referred to as inter-VLAN routing. You configure one or more routers to route traffic to the appropriate destination VLAN.

Figure 99 shows a basic routing topology. Switch A is in VLAN 10, and Switch B is in VLAN 20. The router has an interface in each VLAN.

Figure 99 Routing Topology Example

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

When Host A in VLAN 10 needs to communicate with Host B in VLAN 10, it sends a packet addressed to that host. Switch A forwards the packet directly to Host B, without sending it to the router.

When Host A sends a packet to Host C in VLAN 20, Switch A forwards the packet to the router, which receives the traffic on the VLAN 10 interface. The router checks the routing table, finds the correct outgoing interface, and forwards the packet on the VLAN 20 interface to Switch B. Switch B receives the packet and forwards it to Host C.

Routers and Layer 3 switches can route packets in the following ways:

■By using default routing—sending traffic with a destination unknown to the router to a default outlet or destination.

■By using preprogrammed static routes for the traffic

Static unicast routing forwards packets from predetermined ports through a single path into and out of a network. Static routing does not automatically respond to changes in the network and therefore, might result in unreachable destinations.

■By dynamically calculating routes by using a routing protocol

Dynamic routing protocols are used by routers to dynamically calculate the best route for forwarding traffic. Routing protocols supported by the switch are Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol, Enhanced IGRP (EIGRP), System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS), and Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD).

■In order to use dynamic routing protocols, an IP Services License is needed.

■To support VLAN interfaces, create and configure VLANs on the switch, and assign VLAN membership to Layer 2 interfaces.

■By default, IPv4 routing is disabled on the switch, and you must enable it before routing can take place. See Enabling IPv4 Unicast Routing.

■We recommend that you configure the BFD interval parameters on an interface before configuring the routing protocol commands, especially when using EIGRP. For information about BFD, see Configuring BFD.

■In the following procedures, the specified interface must be one of these Layer 3 interfaces:

–A routed port: a physical port configured as a Layer 3 port by using the no switchport interface configuration command.

–A switch virtual interface (SVI): a VLAN interface created by using the interface vlan vlan_id global configuration command and by default a Layer 3 interface.

–An EtherChannel port channel in Layer 3 mode: a port-channel logical interface created by using the interface port-channel port- channel-number global configuration command and binding the Ethernet interface into the channel group.

■The switch does not support tunnel interfaces for unicast routed traffic.

■All Layer 3 interfaces on which routing will occur must have IP addresses assigned to them. See Assigning IP Addresses to Network Interfaces.

■A Layer 3 switch can have an IP address assigned to each routed port and SVI. The number of routed ports and SVIs that you can configure is not limited by software. However, the interrelationship between this number and the number and volume of features being implemented might have an impact on CPU utilization because of hardware limitations.

To support IPv4 routing, use the sdm prefer default global configuration command to set the Switch Database Management (sdm) feature to balance resources. For more information on the SDM templates, see the sdm prefer command in the command reference listed in the Related Documents.

Configuring IPv4 routing consists of several main procedures:

■Configure Layer 3 interfaces.

■Enable IPv4 routing on the switch.

■Assign IPv4 addresses to the Layer 3 interfaces.

■Enable selected routing protocols on the switch.

■Configure routing protocol parameters (optional).

IP routing requires that Layer 3 network interfaces are assigned IP addresses to enable the interfaces and to allow communication with the hosts on interfaces that use IP. These sections describe how to configure various IP addressing features. Assigning IP addresses to the interface is required; the other procedures are optional.

■Default Addressing Configuration

■Assigning IP Addresses to Network Interfaces

■Configuring Address Resolution Methods

■Routing Assistance When IP Routing is Disabled

■Configuring Broadcast Packet Handling

■Monitoring and Maintaining IP Addressing

Feature
Default Setting

IP address

None defined.

ARP

No permanent entries in the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache.

Encapsulation: Standard Ethernet-style ARP.

Timeout: 14400 seconds (4 hours).

IP broadcast address

255.255.255.255 (all ones).

IP classless routing

Enabled.

IP default gateway

Disabled.

IP directed broadcast

Disabled (all IP directed broadcasts are dropped).

IP domain

Domain list: No domain names defined.

Domain lookup: Enabled.

Domain name: Enabled.

IP forward-protocol

If a helper address is defined or User Datagram Protocol (UDP) flooding is configured, UDP forwarding is enabled on default ports.

Any-local-broadcast: Disabled.

Turbo-flood: Disabled.

IP helper address

Disabled.

IP host

Disabled.

IRDP

Disabled.

Defaults when enabled:

■Broadcast IRDP advertisements.

■Maximum interval between advertisements: 600 seconds.

■Minimum interval between advertisements: 0.75 times max interval.

■Preference: 0.

IP proxy ARP

Enabled.

IP routing

Disabled.

IP subnet-zero

Disabled.

An IP address identifies a location to which IP packets can be sent. An interface can have one primary IP address. A mask identifies the bits that denote the network number in an IP address. When you use the mask to subnet a network, the mask is referred to as a subnet mask.

To receive an assigned network number, contact your Internet service provider.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. User network interfaces (UNIs) and enhanced network interfaces (ENIs) are disabled by default; network node interfaces (NNIs) are enabled by default.

4.

no switchport

Remove the interface from Layer 2 configuration mode (if it is a physical interface).

5.

ip address ip-address subnet-mask

Configure the IP address and IP subnet mask.

6.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

7.

show interfaces [ interface-id ]
show ip interface [ interface-id ]
show running-config interface [ interface-id ]

Verify your entries.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface gi0/2
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.1.5.1 255.255.255.0
Switch(config-if)# end
 

Enabling subnet zero provides the ability to configure and route to subnet 0 subnets.

You can use the all ones subnet (131.108.255.0) and even though it is discouraged, you can enable the use of subnet zero if you need the entire subnet space for your IP address.

Subnetting with a subnet address of zero is strongly discouraged because of the problems that can arise if a network and a subnet have the same addresses. For example, if network 131.108.0.0 is subnetted as 255.255.255.0, subnet zero would be written as 131.108.0.0, which is the same as the network address.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip subnet-zero

Enable the use of subnet zero for interface addresses and routing updates.

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show running-config

Verify your entry.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entry in the configuration file.

Use the no ip subnet-zero global configuration command to restore the default and disable the use of subnet zero.

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# ip subnet-zero
Switch(config)# end
 

By default, classless routing behavior is enabled on the switch when it is configured to route. With classless routing, if a router receives packets for a subnet of a network with no default route, the router forwards the packet to the best supernet route. A supernet consists of contiguous blocks of Class C address spaces used to simulate a single, larger address space and is designed to relieve the pressure on the rapidly depleting Class B address space.

In Figure 100, classless routing is enabled. When the host sends a packet to 120.20.4.1, instead of discarding the packet, the router forwards it to the best supernet route. If you disable classless routing and a router receives packets destined for a subnet of a network with no network default route, the router discards the packet.

Figure 100 IP Classless Routing

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

In Figure 101, the router in network 128.20.0.0 is connected to subnets 128.20.1.0, 128.20.2.0, and 128.20.3.0. If the host sends a packet to 120.20.4.1, because there is no network default route, the router discards the packet.

Figure 101 No IP Classless Routing

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

To prevent the switch from forwarding packets destined for unrecognized subnets to the best supernet route possible, you can disable classless routing behavior.

Review the Information About IP Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

no ip classless

Disable classless routing behavior.

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show running-config

Verify your entry.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entry in the configuration file.

To restore the default and have the switch forward packets destined for a subnet of a network with no network default route to the best supernet route possible, use the ip classless global configuration command.

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# no ip classless
Switch(config)# end
 

You can control interface-specific handling of IP by using address resolution. A device using IP can have both a local address or MAC address, which uniquely defines the device on its local segment or LAN, and a network address, which identifies the network to which the device belongs. To communicate with a device on Ethernet, the software must learn the MAC address of the device. The process of learning the MAC address from an IP address is called address resolution . The process of learning the IP address from the MAC address is called reverse address resolution .

The switch can use these forms of address resolution:

■Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is used to associate IP address with MAC addresses. Taking an IP address as input, ARP learns the associated MAC address and then stores the IP address/MAC address association in an ARP cache for rapid retrieval. Then the IP datagram is encapsulated in a link-layer frame and sent over the network. Encapsulation of IP datagrams and ARP requests or replies on IEEE 802 networks other than Ethernet is specified by the Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP).

■Proxy ARP helps hosts with no routing tables learn the MAC addresses of hosts on other networks or subnets. If the switch (router) receives an ARP request for a host that is not on the same interface as the ARP request sender, and if the router has all of its routes to the host through other interfaces, it generates a proxy ARP packet giving its own local data link address. The host that sent the ARP request then sends its packets to the router, which forwards them to the intended host.

The switch also uses the Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP), which functions the same as ARP does, except that the RARP packets request an IP address instead of a local MAC address. Using RARP requires a RARP server on the same network segment as the router interface. Use the ip rarp-server address interface configuration command to identify the server.

For more information on RARP, see IP Addressing: ARP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T.

You can perform these tasks to configure address resolution:

■Defining a Static ARP Cache

■Setting ARP Encapsulation

■Enabling Proxy ARP

ARP and other address resolution protocols provide dynamic mapping between IP addresses and MAC addresses. Because most hosts support dynamic address resolution, you usually do not need to specify static ARP cache entries. If you must define a static ARP cache entry, you can do so globally, which installs a permanent entry in the ARP cache that the switch uses to translate IP addresses into MAC addresses. Optionally, you can also specify that the switch respond to ARP requests as if it were the owner of the specified IP address. If you do not want the ARP entry to be permanent, you can specify a timeout period for the ARP entry.

Review the Configuring Address Resolution Methods.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

arp ip-address hardware-address type

Globally associate an IP address with a MAC (hardware) address in the ARP cache, and specify encapsulation type as one of these:

arpa —ARP encapsulation for Ethernet interfaces

snap —Subnetwork Address Protocol encapsulation for Token Ring and FDDI interfaces

sap —HP’s ARP type

3.

arp ip-address hardware-address type [ alias ]

(Optional) Specify that the switch respond to ARP requests as if it were the owner of the specified IP address.

4.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the interface to configure.

5.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

6.

arp timeout seconds

(Optional) Set the length of time an ARP cache entry will stay in the cache. The default is 14400 seconds (4 hours). The range is 0 to 2147483 seconds.

7.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

show interfaces [ interface-id ]

Verify the type of ARP and the timeout value used on all interfaces or a specific interface.

9.

show arp

or

show ip arp

View the contents of the ARP cache.

10.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To remove an entry from the ARP cache, use the no arp ip-address hardware-address type global configuration command. To remove all nonstatic entries from the ARP cache, use the clear arp-cache privileged EXEC command.

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# arp 10.0.0.0 aabb.cc03.8200 arpa
Switch(config)# end

By default, Ethernet ARP encapsulation (represented by the arpa keyword) is enabled on an IP interface. You can change the encapsulation methods to SNAP if required by your network.

The encapsulation type specified in this procedure should match the encapsulation type specified in the Defining a Static ARP Cache.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

arp { arpa | snap }

Specify the ARP encapsulation method:

arpa —Address Resolution Protocol

snap —Subnetwork Address Protocol

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show interfaces [ interface-id ]

Verify ARP encapsulation configuration on all interfaces or the specified interface.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable an encapsulation type, use the no arp arpa or no arp snap interface configuration command.

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface gi0/2
Switch(config-if)# arp arpa
Switch(config-if)# end

By default, the switch uses proxy ARP to help hosts learn MAC addresses of hosts on other networks or subnets. Follow these steps to enable proxy ARP if it has been disabled.

Review the Configuring Address Resolution Methods.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

ip proxy-arp

Enable proxy ARP on the interface.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show ip interface [ interface-id ]

Verify the configuration on the interface or all interfaces.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable proxy ARP on the interface, use the no ip proxy-arp interface configuration command.

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface gi0/2
Switch(config-if)# ip proxy-arp
Switch(config-if)# end

These mechanisms allow the switch to learn about routes to other networks when it does not have IP routing enabled:

■Proxy ARP

■Default Gateway

■ICMP Router Discovery Protocol (IRDP)

Proxy ARP, the most common method for learning about other routes, enables an Ethernet host with no routing information to communicate with hosts on other networks or subnets. The host assumes that all hosts are on the same local Ethernet and that they can use ARP to learn their MAC addresses. If a switch receives an ARP request for a host that is not on the same network as the sender, the switch evaluates whether it has the best route to that host. If it does, it sends an ARP reply packet with its own Ethernet MAC address, and the host that sent the request sends the packet to the switch, which forwards it to the intended host. Proxy ARP treats all networks as if they are local and performs ARP requests for every IP address.

Proxy ARP is enabled by default. To enable it after it has been disabled, see Enabling Proxy ARP. Proxy ARP works as long as other routers support it.

Another method for locating routes is to define a default router or default gateway. All nonlocal packets are sent to this router, which either routes them appropriately or sends an IP Control Message Protocol (ICMP) redirect message back, defining which local router the host should use. The switch caches the redirect messages and forwards each packet as efficiently as possible. A limitation of this method is that there is no means of detecting when the default router has gone down or is unavailable.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip default-gateway ip-address

Set up a default gateway (router).

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show ip redirects

Display the address of the default gateway router to verify the setting.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no ip default-gateway global configuration command to disable this function.

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# ip default-gateway 192.31.7.18
Switch(config)# end

Router discovery allows the switch to dynamically learn about routes to other networks using IRDP. IRDP allows hosts to locate routers. When operating as a client, the switch generates router discovery packets. When operating as a host, the switch receives router discovery packets. The switch can also listen to Routing Information Protocol (RIP) routing updates and use this information to infer locations of routers. The switch does not actually store the routing tables sent by routing devices; it merely keeps track of which systems are sending the data. The advantage of using IRDP is that it allows each router to specify both a priority and the time after which a device is assumed to be down if no further packets are received.

Each device discovered becomes a candidate for the default router, and a new highest-priority router is selected when a higher priority router is discovered, when the current default router is declared down, or when a TCP connection is about to time out because of excessive retransmissions.

The only required task for IRDP routing on an interface is to enable IRDP processing on that interface. When enabled, the default parameters apply. You can optionally change any of these parameters.

■The ip irdp multicast command allows for compatibility with Sun Microsystems Solaris, which requires IRDP packets to be sent out as multicasts. Many implementations cannot receive these multicasts; ensure end-host ability before using this command.

■If you change the maxadvertinterval value, the holdtime and minadvertinterval values also change, so it is important to first change the maxadvertinterval value before manually changing either the holdtime or minadvertinterval values.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

ip irdp

Enable IRDP processing on the interface.

5.

ip irdp multicast

(Optional) Send IRDP advertisements to the multicast address (224.0.0.1) instead of IP broadcasts.

6.

ip irdp holdtime seconds

(Optional) Set the IRDP period for which advertisements are valid. The default is three times the maxadvertinterval value. It must be greater than maxadvertinterval and cannot be greater than 9000 seconds. If you change the maxadvertinterval value, this value also changes.

7.

ip irdp maxadvertinterval seconds

(Optional) Set the IRDP maximum interval between advertisements. The default is 600 seconds.

8.

ip irdp minadvertinterval seconds

(Optional) Set the IRDP minimum interval between advertisements. The default is 0.75 times the maxadvertinterval. If you change the maxadvertinterval, this value changes to the new default (0.75 of maxadvertinterval).

9.

ip irdp preference number

(Optional) Set a device IRDP preference level. The allowed range is –2 31 to 2 31. The default is 0. A higher value increases the router preference level.

10.

ip irdp address address [ number ]

(Optional) Specify an IRDP address and preference to proxy-advertise.

11.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

12.

show ip irdp

Verify settings by displaying IRDP values.

13.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no ip irdp interface configuration command to disable IRDP routing.

Switch(config)# interface ethernet 0 !Enable irdp on interface Ethernet 0.
Switch(config-if)# ip irdp
Switch(config-if)# ip irdp multicast !Send IRDP advertisements to the multicast address.
Switch(config-if)# ip irdp preference 900 !Increase router preference from 0 to 900.
Switch(config-if)# ip irdp maxadvertinterval 400 !Set maximum time between advertisements to 400 secs.
Switch(config-if)# ip irdp minadvertinterval 100 !Set minimum time between advertisements to 100 secs.
Switch(config-if)# ip irdp holdtime 6000 !Advertisements are good for 6000 seconds.
Switch(config-if)# ip irdp address 10.108.14.5 !Proxy-advertise 10.108.14.5 with default router preference.
Switch(config-if)# ip irdp address 10.108.14.6 50 !Proxy-advertise 10.108.14.6 with preference of 50.

After configuring an IP interface address, you can enable routing and configure one or more routing protocols, or you can configure the way the switch responds to network broadcasts. A broadcast is a data packet destined for all hosts on a physical network. The switch supports two kinds of broadcasting:

■A directed broadcast packet is sent to a specific network or series of networks. A directed broadcast address includes the network or subnet fields.

■A flooded broadcast packet is sent to every network.

Note: You can also limit broadcast, unicast, and multicast traffic on Layer 2 interfaces by using the storm-control interface configuration command to set traffic suppression levels.

Routers provide some protection from broadcast storms by limiting their extent to the local cable. Bridges (including intelligent bridges), because they are Layer 2 devices, forward broadcasts to all network segments, thus propagating broadcast storms. The best solution to the broadcast storm problem is to use a single broadcast address scheme on a network. In most modern IP implementations, you can set the address to be used as the broadcast address. The switch supports several addressing schemes for forwarding broadcast messages.

■Enabling Directed Broadcast-to-Physical Broadcast Translation

■Forwarding UDP Broadcast Packets and Protocols

■Establishing an IP Broadcast Address

■Flooding IP Broadcasts

By default, IP-directed broadcasts are not forwarded; they are dropped to make routers less susceptible to denial-of-service attacks. You can enable forwarding of IP-directed broadcasts on an interface where the broadcast becomes a physical (MAC-layer) broadcast. Only those protocols configured by using the ip forward-protocol global configuration command are forwarded.

You can specify an access list to control which broadcasts are forwarded. Only those IP packets permitted by the access list are eligible to be translated from directed broadcasts to physical broadcasts.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

ip directed-broadcast [ access-list-number ]

Enable directed broadcast-to-physical broadcast translation on the interface. You can include an access list to control which broadcasts are forwarded. When an access list is specified, only IP packets permitted by the access list are eligible to be translated.

5.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

6.

ip forward-protocol { udp [ port ] | nd | sdns }

Specify which protocols and ports the router forwards when forwarding broadcast packets.

udp —Forward UPD datagrams.

port: (Optional) Destination port that controls which UDP services are forwarded.

nd —Forward ND datagrams.

sdns —Forward SDNS datagrams.

7.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

show ip interface [ interface-id ]

or

show running-config

Verify the configuration on the interface or all interfaces.

9.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no ip directed-broadcast interface configuration command to disable translation of directed broadcast to physical broadcasts. Use the no ip forward-protocol global configuration command to remove a protocol or port.

The following example enables forwarding of IP directed broadcasts on Ethernet interface 0. The ip forward-protocol command using the udp keyword without specifying any port numbers allows forwarding of UDP packets on the default ports.

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface ethernet 0
Switch(config-if)# ip directed-broadcast
Switch(config-if)# exit
Switch(config)# ip forward-protocol udp
Switch(config)# end
 

User Datagram Protocol (UDP) is an IP host-to-host layer protocol that provides a low-overhead, connectionless session between two end systems and does not provide for acknowledgment of received datagrams. Network hosts occasionally use UDP broadcasts to find address, configuration, and name information. If such a host is on a network segment that does not include a server, UDP broadcasts are normally not forwarded. You can configure an interface on a router to forward certain classes of broadcasts to a helper address. You can use more than one helper address per interface.

You can specify a UDP destination port to control which UDP services are forwarded. You can specify multiple UDP protocols. You can also specify the Network Disk (ND) protocol, which is used by older diskless Sun workstations and the network security protocol SDNS.

By default, both UDP and ND forwarding are enabled if a helper address has been defined for an interface.

If you do not specify any UDP ports when you configure the forwarding of UDP broadcasts, you are configuring the router to act as a BOOTP forwarding agent. BOOTP packets carry DHCP information.

See the description for the ip forward-protocol interface configuration command in the Cisco IOS IP Application Services Command Reference for the list of ports that are forwarded by default if you do not specify any UDP ports.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

ip helper-address address

Enable forwarding and specify the destination address for forwarding UDP broadcast packets, including BOOTP.

5.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

6.

ip forward-protocol { udp [ port ] | nd | sdns }

Specify which protocols the router forwards when forwarding broadcast packets.

7.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

show ip interface [ interface-id ]

or

show running-config

Verify the configuration on the interface or all interfaces.

9.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no ip helper-address interface configuration command to disable the forwarding of broadcast packets to specific addresses. Use the no ip forward-protocol global configuration command to remove a protocol or port.

The following example defines a helper address and uses the ip forward-protocol command. Using the udp keyword without specifying any port numbers will allow forwarding of UDP packets on the default ports.

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface ethernet 0
Switch(config-if)# ip helper-address 10.24.42.2
Switch(config-if)# exit
Switch(config)# ip forward-protocol udp
Switch(config)# end

The most popular IP broadcast address (and the default) is an address consisting of all ones (255.255.255.255). However, the switch can be configured to generate any form of IP broadcast address.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

ip broadcast-address ip-address

Enter a broadcast address different from the default, for example 128.1.255.255.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show ip interface [ interface-id ]

Verify the broadcast address on the interface or all interfaces.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To restore the default IP broadcast address, use the no ip broadcast-address interface configuration command.

The following example specifies an IP broadcast address of 0.0.0.0:

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface ethernet 0
Switch(config-if)# ip broadcast-address 0.0.0.0
Switch(config-if)# end

You can allow IP broadcasts to be flooded throughout your internetwork in a controlled fashion by using the database created by the bridging STP. Using this feature also prevents loops. To support this capability, bridging must be configured on each interface that is to participate in the flooding. If bridging is not configured on an interface, the interface can receive broadcasts but it never forwards the broadcasts it receives, and the router never uses that interface to send broadcasts received on a different interface.

Packets that are forwarded to a single network address using the IP helper-address mechanism can be flooded. Only one copy of the packet is sent on each network segment.

To be considered for flooding, packets must meet these criteria. (Note that these are the same conditions used to consider packet forwarding using IP helper addresses.)

■The packet must be a MAC-level broadcast.

■The packet must be an IP-level broadcast.

■The packet must be a TFTP, DNS, Time, NetBIOS, ND, or BOOTP packet, or a UDP specified by the ip forward-protocol udp global configuration command.

■The time-to-live (TTL) value of the packet must be at least two.

A flooded UDP datagram is given the destination address specified with the ip broadcast-address interface configuration command on the output interface. The destination address can be set to any address so it might change as the datagram propagates through the network. The source address is never changed. The TTL value is decremented.

When a flooded UDP datagram is sent out an interface (and the destination address possibly changed), the datagram is handed to the normal IP output routines and is, therefore, subject to access lists, if they are present on the output interface.

Ensure that bridging is configured on each interface that is to participate in the flooding.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip forward-protocol spanning-tree

Use the bridging spanning-tree database to flood UDP datagrams.

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show running-config

Verify your entry.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entry in the configuration file.

Use the no ip forward-protocol spanning-tree global configuration command to disable the flooding of IP broadcasts.

The following example permits IP broadcasts to be flooded through the internetwork in a controlled fashion:

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# ip forward-protocol spanning-tree
Switch(config)# end

In the switch, the majority of packets are forwarded in hardware; most packets do not go through the switch CPU. For those packets that do go to the CPU, you can speed up spanning tree-based UDP flooding by a factor of about four to five times by using turbo-flooding. This feature is supported over Ethernet interfaces configured for ARP encapsulation.

Enable the flooding of IP broadcasts as described in the Flooding IP Broadcasts.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode

2.

ip forward-protocol turbo-flood

Use the spanning-tree database to speed up flooding of UDP datagrams.

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show running-config

Verify your entry.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entry in the configuration file.

To disable this feature, use the no ip forward-protocol turbo-flood global configuration command.

The following example shows how to speed up the flooding of UDP packets using the spanning-tree algorithm:

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# ip forward-protocol turbo-flood
Switch(config)# end

When the contents of a particular cache, table, or database have become or are suspected to be invalid, you can remove all its contents by using the clear privileged EXEC commands.

Command
Purpose

clear arp-cache

Clear the IP ARP cache and the fast-switching cache.

clear host { name | *}

Remove one or all entries from the hostname and the address cache.

clear ip route { network [ mask ] |*}

Remove one or more routes from the IP routing table.

You can display specific statistics, such as the contents of IP routing tables, caches, and databases; the reachability of nodes; and the routing path that packets are taking through the network.

Command
Purpose

show arp

Display the entries in the ARP table.

show hosts

Display the default domain name, style of lookup service, name server hosts, and the cached list of hostnames and addresses.

show ip aliases

Display IP addresses mapped to TCP ports (aliases).

show ip arp

Display the IP ARP cache.

show ip interface [ interface-id ]

Display the IP status of interfaces.

show ip irdp

Display IRDP values.

show ip masks address

Display the masks used for network addresses and the number of subnets using each mask.

show ip redirects

Display the address of a default gateway.

show ip route [ address [ mask ]] | [ protocol ]

Display the current state of the routing table.

show ip route summary

Display the current state of the routing table in summary form.

By default, the switch is in Layer 2 switching mode and IP routing is disabled. To use the Layer 3 capabilities of the switch, you must enable IP routing.

Review the Guidelines and Limitations.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip routing

Enable IP routing.

3.

router ip_routing_protocol

Specify an IP routing protocol. This step might include other commands, such as specifying the networks to route with the network (RIP) router configuration command. For information on specific protocols, see sections later in this chapter.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show running-config

Verify your entries.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no ip routing global configuration command to disable routing.

This example shows how to enable IP routing using RIP as the routing protocol:

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# ip routing
Switch(config)# router rip
Switch(config-router)# network 10.0.0.0
Switch(config-router)# end
 

The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an interior gateway protocol (IGP) used in small, homogeneous networks. It is a distance-vector routing protocol that uses broadcast User Datagram Protocol (UDP) data packets to exchange routing information. You can find detailed information about RIP in IP Routing Fundamentals, published by Cisco Press.

Using RIP, the switch sends routing information updates (advertisements) every 30 seconds. If a router does not receive an update from another router for 180 seconds or more, it marks the routes served by that router as unusable. If there is still no update after 240 seconds, the router removes all routing table entries for the non-updating router.

RIP uses hop counts to rate the value of different routes. The hop count is the number of routers that can be traversed in a route. A directly connected network has a hop count of zero; a network with a hop count of 16 is unreachable. This small range (0 to 15) makes RIP unsuitable for large networks.

If the router has a default network path, RIP advertises a route that links the router to the pseudonetwork 0.0.0.0. The 0.0.0.0 network does not exist, but is treated by RIP as a network to implement default routing. The switch advertises the default network if a default was learned by RIP or if the router has a gateway of last resort and RIP is configured with a default metric. RIP sends updates to the interfaces in specified networks. If an interface’s network is not specified, it is not advertised in any RIP update.

This section includes the following topics:

■Default RIP Configuration

■Configuring Basic RIP Parameters

■Configuring RIP Authentication

■Configuring Split Horizon

Feature
Default Setting

Auto summary

Enabled.

Default-information originate

Disabled.

Default metric

Built-in; automatic metric translations.

IP RIP authentication key-chain

No authentication.

Authentication mode: clear text.

IP RIP receive version

According to the version router configuration command.

IP RIP send version

According to the version router configuration command.

IP RIP triggered

According to the version router configuration command.

IP split horizon

Varies with media.

Neighbor

None defined.

Network

None specified.

Offset list

Disabled.

Output delay

0 milliseconds.

Timers basic

■Update: 30 seconds.

■Invalid: 180 seconds.

■Hold-down: 180 seconds.

■Flush: 240 seconds.

Validate-update-source

Enabled.

Version

Receives RIP Version 1 and 2 packets; sends Version 1 packets.

To configure RIP, you enable RIP routing for a network and optionally configure other parameters. RIP configuration commands are ignored until you configure the network number.

Complete the RIP network strategy and planning for your network. For example, you must decide whether to receive and send only RIP Version 1 or RIP Version 2 packets and whether to use RIP authentication. (RIP Version 1 does not support authentication.)

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip routing

Enable IP routing. (Required only if IP routing is disabled.)

3.

router rip

Enable a RIP routing process, and enter router configuration mode.

4.

network network number

Associate a network with a RIP routing process. You can specify multiple network commands. RIP routing updates are sent and received through interfaces only on these networks.

Note: You must configure a network number for RIP commands to take effect.

5.

neighbor ip-address

(Optional) Define a neighboring router with which to exchange routing information. This step allows routing updates from RIP (normally a broadcast protocol) to reach nonbroadcast networks.

6.

offset list [ access-list number | name ] { in | out } offset [ type number ]

(Optional) Apply an offset list to routing metrics to increase incoming and outgoing metrics to routes learned through RIP. You can limit the offset list with an access list or an interface.

7.

timers basic update invalid holddown flush

(Optional) Adjust routing protocol timers. Valid ranges for all timers are 0 to 4294967295 seconds.

■ update —The time between sending routing updates. The default is 30 seconds.

■ invalid —The timer after which a route is declared invalid. The default is 180 seconds.

■ holddown —The time before a route is removed from the routing table. The default is 180 seconds.

■ flush —The amount of time for which routing updates are postponed. The default is 240 seconds.

8.

version { 1 | 2 }

(Optional) Configure the switch to receive and send only RIP Version 1 or RIP Version 2 packets. By default, the switch receives Version 1 and 2 but sends only Version 1.
You can also use the interface commands ip rip { send | receive } version 1 | 2 | 1 2 } to control what versions are used for sending and receiving on interfaces.

9.

no auto summary

(Optional) Disable automatic summarization. By default, the switch summarizes subprefixes when crossing classful network boundaries. Disable summarization (RIP Version 2 only) to advertise subnet and host routing information to classful network boundaries.

10.

no validate-update-source

(Optional) Disable validation of the source IP address of incoming RIP routing updates. By default, the switch validates the source IP address of incoming RIP routing updates and discards the update if the source address is not valid. Under normal circumstances, disabling this feature is not recommended. However, if you have a router that is off-network and you want to receive its updates, you can use this command.

11.

output-delay delay

(Optional) Add interpacket delay for RIP updates sent.
By default, packets in a multiple-packet RIP update have no delay added between packets. If you are sending packets to a lower-speed device, you can add an interpacket delay in the range of 8 to 50 milliseconds.

12.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

13.

show ip protocols

Verify your entries.

14.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To turn off the RIP routing process, use the no router rip global configuration command.

To display the parameters and current state of the active routing protocol process, use the show ip protocols privileged EXEC command. Use the show ip rip database privileged EXEC command to display summary address entries in the RIP database.

In the following example, RIP updates are sent to all interfaces on network 10.108.0.0 except Ethernet interface 1. However, in this case, a neighbor router configuration command is included. This command permits the sending of routing updates to specific neighbors. One copy of the routing update is generated per neighbor.

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# ip routing
Switch(config)# router rip
Switch(config-router)# network 10.108.0.0
Router(config-router)# passive-interface Ethernet 1
Router(config-router)# neighbor 10.108.20.4
Router(config-router)# end
 

RIP Version 1 does not support authentication. If you are sending and receiving RIP Version 2 packets, you can enable RIP authentication on an interface. The key chain specifies the set of keys that can be used on the interface. If a key chain is not configured, no authentication is performed, not even the default. Therefore, you must also perform the tasks in the Managing Authentication Keys.

The switch supports two modes of authentication on interfaces for which RIP authentication is enabled: plain text and MD5. The default is plain text.

Configure RIP as described in the Configuring Basic RIP Parameters.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

ip rip authentication key-chain name-of-chain

Enable RIP authentication.

5.

ip rip authentication mode [ text | md5 }

Configure the interface to use plain text authentication (the default) or MD5 digest authentication.

6.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

7.

show running-config interface [ interface-id ]

Verify your entries.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To restore clear text authentication, use the no ip rip authentication mode interface configuration command. To prevent authentication, use the no ip rip authentication key-chain interface configuration command.

The following example configures the interface to accept and send any key belonging to the key chain named trees and configures the interface to use MD5 authentication:

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface ethernet 0
Switch(config-if)# ip rip authentication key-chain trees
Switch(config-if)# ip rip authentication mode md5
Switch(config-if)# end

Routers connected to broadcast-type IP networks and using distance-vector routing protocols normally use the split-horizon mechanism to reduce the possibility of routing loops. Split horizon blocks information about routes from being advertised by a router on any interface from which that information originated. This feature can optimize communication among multiple routers when links are broken.

In general, Cisco does not recommend disabling split horizon unless you are certain that your application requires disabling it to properly advertise routes.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

ip address ip-address subnet-mask

Configure the IP address and IP subnet.

5.

no ip split-horizon

Disable split horizon on the interface.

6.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

7.

show ip interface interface-id

Verify your entries.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To enable the split horizon mechanism, use the ip split-horizon interface configuration command.

The following simple example disables split horizon on a serial link:

Switch# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
Switch(config)# interface serial 0
Switch(config-if)# no ip split-horizon
Switch(config-if)# end

To configure an interface running RIP to advertise a summarized local IP address pool on a network access server for dial-up clients, use the ip summary-address rip interface configuration command.

Note: If split horizon is enabled, neither autosummary nor interface IP summary addresses are advertised.

If the interface is in Layer 2 mode (the default), you must enter a no switchport interface configuration command before entering the ip address interface configuration command.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

ip address ip-address subnet-mask

Configure the IP address and IP subnet.

5.

ip summary-address rip ip address ip-network mask

Configure the IP address to be summarized and the IP network mask.

6.

no ip split horizon

Disable split horizon on the interface.

7.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

show ip interface interface-id

Verify your entries.

9.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable IP summarization, use the no ip summary-address rip router configuration command.

In this example, the major net is 10.0.0.0. The summary address 10.2.0.0 overrides the autosummary address of 10.0.0.0 so that 10.2.0.0 is advertised out interface Gigabit Ethernet port 2, and 10.0.0.0 is not advertised.

Switch(config)# router rip
Switch(config-router)# interface gi0/2
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.1.5.1 255.255.255.0
Switch(config-if)# ip summary-address rip 10.2.0.0 255.255.0.0
Switch(config-if)# no ip split-horizon
Switch(config-if)# exit
Switch(config)# router rip
Switch(config-router)# network 10.0.0.0
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 2.2.2.2 peer-group mygroup
Switch(config-router)# end

Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) designed expressly for IP networks, supporting IP subnetting and tagging of externally derived routing information. OSPF also allows packet authentication and uses IP multicast when sending and receiving packets.

This section briefly describes how to configure OSPF. For a complete description of the OSPF commands, see the OSPF documents listed in the Related Documents.

Note: OSPF classifies different media into broadcast, nonbroadcast multiaccess (NBMA), or point-to-point networks. Broadcast and nonbroadcast networks can also be configured as point-to-multipoint networks. The switch supports all these network types.

The Cisco implementation conforms to the OSPF Version 2 specifications with these key features:

■Definition of stub areas is supported.

■Routes learned through any IP routing protocol can be redistributed into another IP routing protocol. At the intradomain level, this means that OSPF can import routes learned through EIGRP and RIP. OSPF routes can also be exported into RIP.

■Plain text and MD5 authentication among neighboring routers within an area is supported.

■Configurable routing interface parameters include interface output cost, retransmission interval, interface transmit delay, router priority, router dead and hello intervals, and authentication key.

■Virtual links are supported.

■Not-so-stubby-areas (NSSAs) per RFC 1587 are supported.

OSPF typically requires coordination among many internal routers, area border routers (ABRs) connected to multiple areas, and autonomous system boundary routers (ASBRs). The minimum configuration would use all default parameter values, no authentication, and interfaces assigned to areas. If you customize your environment, you must ensure coordinated configuration of all routers.

This section includes the following topics:

■Default OSPF Configuration

■Nonstop Forwarding Awareness

■Configuring OSPF Interfaces

■Configuring OSPF Network Types

■Configuring OSPF Area Parameters

■Configuring Other OSPF Parameters

■Changing LSA Group Pacing

■Configuring a Loopback Interface

■Monitoring OSPF

Feature
Default Setting

Interface parameters

Cost: No default cost predefined.

Retransmit interval: 5 seconds.

Transmit delay: 1 second.

Priority: 1.

Hello interval: 10 seconds.

Dead interval: 4 times the hello interval.

No authentication.

No password specified.

MD5 authentication disabled.

Area

Authentication type: 0 (no authentication).

Default cost: 1.

Range: Disabled.

Stub: No stub area defined.

NSSA: No NSSA area defined.

Auto cost

100 Mbps.

Default-information originate

Disabled. When enabled, the default metric setting is 10, and the external route type default is Type 2.

Default metric

Built-in, automatic metric translation, as appropriate for each routing protocol.

Distance OSPF

dist1 (all routes within an area): 110. dist2 (all routes from one area to another): 110.

and dist3 (routes from other routing domains): 110.

OSPF database filter

Disabled. All outgoing link-state advertisements (LSAs) are flooded to the interface.

IP OSPF name lookup

Disabled.

Log adjacency changes

Enabled.

Neighbor

None specified.

Neighbor database filter

Disabled. All outgoing LSAs are flooded to the neighbor.

Network area

Disabled.

NSF1 awareness

Enabled2. Allows Layer 3 switches to continue forwarding packets from a neighboring NSF-capable router during hardware or software changes.

Router ID

No OSPF routing process defined.

Summary address

Disabled.

Timers LSA group pacing

240 seconds.

Timers shortest path first (spf)

spf delay: 5 seconds.

spf-holdtime: 10 seconds.

Virtual link

No area ID or router ID defined.

Hello interval: 10 seconds.

Retransmit interval: 5 seconds.

Transmit delay: 1 second.

Dead interval: 40 seconds.

Authentication key: no key predefined.

Message-digest key (MD5): no key predefined.

The OSPF NSF Awareness feature is supported for IPv4 in the IP services image. When the neighboring router is NSF-capable, the Layer 3 switch continues to forward packets from the neighboring router during the interval between the primary Route Processor (RP) in a router crashing and the backup RP taking over, or while the primary RP is manually reloaded for a non-disruptive software upgrade.

This feature cannot be disabled. For more information about this feature, see the “Configuring Nonstop Forwarding” chapter in the High Availability Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15S.

Enabling OSPF requires that you create an OSPF routing process, specify the range of IP addresses to be associated with the routing process, and assign area IDs to be associated with that range.

Complete the OSPF network strategy and planning for your network. For example, you must decide whether multiple areas are required.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router ospf process-id

Enable OSPF routing, and enter router configuration mode. The process ID is an internally used identification parameter that is locally assigned and can be any positive integer. Each OSPF routing process has a unique value.

3.

network address wildcard-mask area area-id

Define an interface on which OSPF runs and the area ID for that interface. You can use the wildcard-mask to use a single command to define one or more multiple interfaces to be associated with a specific OSPF area. The area ID can be a decimal value or an IP address.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show ip protocols

Verify your entries.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To terminate an OSPF routing process, use the no router ospf process-id global configuration command.

This example shows how to configure an OSPF routing process and assign it a process number of 109:

Switch(config)# router ospf 109
Switch(config-router)# network 131.108.0.0 255.255.255.0 area 24

You can use the ip ospf interface configuration commands to modify interface-specific OSPF parameters. You are not required to modify any of these parameters, but some interface parameters (hello interval, dead interval, and authentication key) must be consistent across all routers in an attached network.

Note: The ip ospf interface configuration commands are all optional.

If you modify these parameters, be sure all routers in the network have compatible values.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

ip ospf cost

(Optional) Explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on the interface.

5.

ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds

(Optional) Specify the number of seconds between link state advertisement transmissions. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 5 seconds.

6.

ip ospf transmit-delay seconds

(Optional) Set the estimated number of seconds to wait before sending a link state update packet. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 1 second.

7.

ip ospf priority number

(Optional) Set priority to help find the OSPF designated router for a network. The range is from 0 to 255. The default is 1.

8.

ip ospf hello-interval seconds

(Optional) Set the number of seconds between hello packets sent on an OSPF interface. The value must be the same for all nodes on a network. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.

9.

ip ospf dead-interval seconds

(Optional) Set the number of seconds after the last device hello packet was seen before its neighbors declare the OSPF router to be down. The value must be the same for all nodes on a network. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 4 times the hello interval.

10.

ip ospf authentication-key key

(Optional) Assign a password to be used by neighboring OSPF routers. The password can be any string of keyboard-entered characters up to 8 bytes in length. All neighboring routers on the same network must have the same password to exchange OSPF information.

11.

ip ospf message digest-key keyid md5 key

(Optional) Enable MDS authentication.

■ keyid —An identifier from 1 to 255.

■ key —An alphanumeric password of up to 16 bytes.

12.

ip ospf database-filter all out

(Optional) Block flooding of OSPF LSA packets to the interface. By default, OSPF floods new LSAs over all interfaces in the same area, except the interface on which the LSA arrives.

13.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

14.

show ip ospf interface [ interface-name ]

Display OSPF-related interface information.

15.

show ip ospf neighbor detail

Display NSF awareness status of neighbor switch. The output matches one of these examples:

■ Options is 0x52

LLS Options is 0x1 (LR)

When both of these lines appear, the neighbor switch is NSF aware.

■ Options is 0x42 —This means the neighbor switch is not NSF aware.

16.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no form of these commands to remove the configured parameter value or return to the default value.

The following example specifies a cost of 65 and sets the interval between link-state advertisement (LSA) retransmissions to 1 second:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet 0/0
Switch(config-if)# ip ospf cost 65
Switch(config-if)# ip ospf retransmit-interval 1
Switch(config-if)# end

OSPF classifies different media into the three types of networks by default:

■Broadcast networks (Ethernet, Token Ring, and FDDI)

■Nonbroadcast multiaccess (NBMA) networks (Switched Multimegabit Data Service [SMDS], Frame Relay, and X.25)

■Point-to-point networks (High-Level Data Link Control [HDLC], PPP)

You can also configure network interfaces as either a broadcast or an NBMA network and as point-to point or point-to-multipoint, regardless of the default media type.

Because many routers might be attached to an OSPF network, a designated router is selected for the network. If broadcast capability is not configured in the network, the designated router selection requires special configuration parameters. You need to configure these parameters only for devices that are eligible to become the designated router or backup designated router (in other words, routers with a nonzero router priority value).

Complete the OSPF network strategy and planning for your network.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router ospf process-id

Configure an OSPF routing process and enter router configuration mode.

3.

neighbor ip-address [ priority number ] [ poll-interval seconds ]

Specify an OSPF neighbor with neighbor parameters as required.

■ ip-address —Enter the interface IP address of the OSPF neighbor.

■(Optional) priority number —Specify the router priority value of the nonbroadcast neighbor associated with the IP address. The range is 0 to 255; the default is 0.

■(Optional) poll-interval seconds —Specify a number that represents the poll interval time (in seconds). This value should be much larger than the hello interval. The range is 0-4294967295; the default is 120 seconds (2 minutes).

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show ip ospf [ process-id ]

Display OSPF-related information.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

On point-to-multipoint, nonbroadcast networks, you then use the neighbor router configuration command to identify neighbors. Assigning a cost to a neighbor is optional.

The following example declares a router at address 192.168.3.4 on a nonbroadcast network, with a priority of 1 and a poll interval of 180 seconds:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# router ospf
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 192.168.3.4 priority 1 poll-interval 180
Switch(config-router)# end

You can configure network interfaces as either broadcast or NBMA and as point-to point or point-to-multipoint, regardless of the default media type.

An OSPF point-to-multipoint interface is defined as a numbered point-to-point interface with one or more neighbors. On point-to-multipoint broadcast networks, specifying neighbors is optional. When you configure an interface as point-to-multipoint when the media does not support broadcast, you should use the neighbor command to identify neighbors.

Complete the OSPF network strategy and planning for your network.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

ip ospf network { broadcast | non-broadcast | { point-to-multipoint [ non-broadcast ] | point-to-point }}

Configure the OSFP network type for the specified interface. Select one of these network types:

broadcast —Specify an OSPF broadcast multi-access network.

non-broadcast —Specify an OSPF NBMA network.

point-to-multipoint —Specify an OSPF point-to-multipoint network. If you do not enter another keyword, the interface is point-to-multipoint for broadcast media.

point-to-multipoint non-broadcast —Specify an OSPF nonbroadcast point-to-multipoint network.

point-to-point —Specify an OSPF point-to-point network.

5.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

6.

router ospf process-id

(Optional for point-to-multipoint; required for point-to-multipoint nonbroadcast) Configure an OSPF routing process and enter router configuration mode.

7.

neighbor ip-address cost number

(Optional for point-to-multipoint; required for point-to-multipoint nonbroadcast). Specify a configured OSPF neighbor and assign a cost to the neighbor.

■ ip-address —Enter the interface IP address of the OSPF neighbor.

cost number —Specify a cost for the neighbor as an integer from 1 to 65535.

Note: On point-to-multipoint broadcast networks, specifying a neighbor is optional, but if you do specify a neighbor, you must specify a cost for that neighbor.
On point-to-multipoint nonbroadcast neighbors, you must specify a neighbor, but assigning a cost to the neighbor is optional. If not specified, neighbors assume the cost of the interface, based on the ip ospf cost interface configuration command.

8.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

9.

show ip ospf interface [ interface-id ]

Display OSPF-related interface information.

10.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no form of the ip ospf network command to return to the default network type for the media.

The following example sets your OSPF network as a broadcast network:

interface serial 0
ip address 192.168.77.17 255.255.255.0
ip ospf network broadcast
encapsulation frame-relay
 

The following example illustrates a point-to-multipoint network with broadcast:

interface serial 0
ip address 10.0.1.1 255.255.255.0
encapsulation frame-relay
ip ospf cost 100
ip ospf network point-to-multipoint
frame-relay map ip 10.0.1.3 202 broadcast
frame-relay map ip 10.0.1.4 203 broadcast
frame-relay map ip 10.0.1.5 204 broadcast
frame-relay local-dlci 200
!
router ospf 1
network 10.0.1.0 0.0.0.255 area 0
neighbor 10.0.1.5 cost 5
neighbor 10.0.1.4 cost 10

You can optionally configure several OSPF area parameters. These parameters include authentication for password-based protection against unauthorized access to an area, stub areas, and not-so-stubby-areas (NSSAs). Stub areas are areas into which information on external routes is not sent. Instead, the area border router (ABR) generates a default external route into the stub area for destinations outside the autonomous system (AS). An NSSA does not flood all LSAs from the core into the area, but can import AS external routes within the area by redistribution.

Route summarization is the consolidation of advertised addresses into a single summary route to be advertised by other areas. If network numbers are contiguous, you can use the area range router configuration command to configure the ABR to advertise a summary route that covers all networks in the range.

Note: The OSPF area router configuration commands are all optional.

Evaluate the following considerations before you implement this feature:

■You can set a Type 7 default route that can be used to reach external destinations. When configured, the router generates a Type 7 default into the NSSA or the NSSA ABR.

■Every router within the same area must agree that the area is NSSA; otherwise, the routers will not be able to communicate.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router ospf process-id

Enable OSPF routing, and enter router configuration mode.

3.

area area-id authentication

(Optional) Allow password-based protection against unauthorized access to the identified area. The identifier can be either a decimal value or an IP address.

4.

area area-id authentication message-digest

(Optional) Enable MD5 authentication on the area.

5.

area area-id stub [ no-summary ]

(Optional) Define an area as a stub area. The no-summary keyword prevents an ABR from sending summary link advertisements into the stub area.

6.

area area-id nssa [ no-redistribution ] [ default-information-originate ] [ no-summary ]

(Optional) Defines an area as a not-so-stubby-area. Every router within the same area must agree that the area is NSSA. Select one of these keywords:

no-redistribution —Select when the router is an NSSA ABR and you want the redistribute command to import routes into normal areas, but not into the NSSA.

default-information-originate —Select on an ABR to allow importing type 7 LSAs into the NSSA.

no-redistribution —Select to not send summary LSAs into the NSSA.

7.

area area-id range address mask

(Optional) Specify an address range for which a single route is advertised. Use this command only with area border routers.

8.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

9.

show ip ospf [ process-id ]

show ip ospf [ process-id [ area-id ]] database

Display information about the OSPF routing process in general or for a specific process ID to verify configuration.

Display lists of information related to the OSPF database for a specific router.

10.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no form of these commands to remove the configured parameter value or to return to the default value.

The following example mandates authentication for areas 0 and 10.0.0.0 of OSPF routing process 201. Authentication keys are also provided.

interface ethernet 0
ip address 192.168.251.201 255.255.255.0
ip ospf authentication-key adcdefgh
!
interface ethernet 1
ip address 10.56.0.201 255.255.0.0
ip ospf authentication-key ijklmnop
!
router ospf 201
network 10.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 10.0.0.0
network 192.168.0.0 0.0.255.255 area 0
area 10.0.0.0 authentication
area 0 authentication

You can optionally configure other OSPF parameters in router configuration mode.

■Route summarization: When redistributing routes from other protocols as described in the Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information, each route is advertised individually in an external LSA. To help decrease the size of the OSPF link state database, you can use the summary-address router configuration command to advertise a single router for all the redistributed routes included in a specified network address and mask.

■Virtual links: In OSPF, all areas must be connected to a backbone area. You can establish a virtual link in case of a backbone-continuity break by configuring two Area Border Routers as endpoints of a virtual link. Configuration information includes the identity of the other virtual endpoint (the other ABR) and the nonbackbone link that the two routers have in common (the transit area). Virtual links cannot be configured through a stub area.

■Default route: When you specifically configure redistribution of routes into an OSPF routing domain, the route automatically becomes an autonomous system boundary router (ASBR). You can force the ASBR to generate a default route into the OSPF routing domain.

■Domain Name Server (DNS) names for use in all OSPF show privileged EXEC command displays makes it easier to identify a router than displaying it by router ID or neighbor ID.

■Default Metrics: OSPF calculates the OSPF metric for an interface according to the bandwidth of the interface. The metric is calculated as ref-bw divided by bandwidth, where ref is 10 by default, and bandwidth ( bw) is specified by the bandwidth interface configuration command. For multiple links with high bandwidth, you can specify a larger number to differentiate the cost on those links.

■Administrative distance is a rating of the trustworthiness of a routing information source, an integer between 0 and 255, with a higher value meaning a lower trust rating. An administrative distance of 255 means the routing information source cannot be trusted at all and should be ignored. OSPF uses three different administrative distances: routes within an area (interarea), routes to another area (interarea), and routes from another routing domain learned through redistribution (external). You can change any of the distance values.

■Passive interfaces: Because interfaces between two devices on an Ethernet represent only one network segment, to prevent OSPF from sending hello packets for the sending interface, you must configure the sending device to be a passive interface. Both devices can identify each other through the hello packet for the receiving interface.

■Route calculation timers: You can configure the delay time between when OSPF receives a topology change and when it starts the shortest path first (SPF) calculation and the hold time between two SPF calculations.

■Log neighbor changes: You can configure the router to send a syslog message when an OSPF neighbor state changes, providing a high-level view of changes in the router.

Complete the OSPF network strategy and planning for your network.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router ospf process-id

Enable OSPF routing, and enter router configuration mode.

3.

summary-address address mask

(Optional) Specify an address and IP subnet mask for redistributed routes so that only one summary route is advertised.

4.

area area-id virtual-link router-id [ hello-interval seconds ] [ retransmit-interval seconds ] [ trans ] [[ authentication-key key ] | message-digest-key keyid md5 key ]]

(Optional) Establish a virtual link and set its parameters. See Configuring OSPF Interfaces for parameter definitions and the Default OSPF Configuration for virtual link defaults.

5.

default-information originate [ always ] [ metric metric-value ] [ metric-type type-value ] [ route-map map-name ]

(Optional) Force the ASBR to generate a default route into the OSPF routing domain. Parameters are all optional.

6.

ip ospf name-lookup

(Optional) Configure DNS name lookup. The default is disabled.

7.

ip auto-cost reference-bandwidth ref-bw

(Optional) Specify an address range for which a single route will be advertised. Use this command only with area border routers.

8.

distance ospf {[ inter-area dist1 ] [ inter-area dist2 ] [ external dist3 ]}

(Optional) Change the OSPF distance values. The default distance for each type of route is 110. The range is 1 to 255.

9.

passive-interface type number

(Optional) Suppress the sending of hello packets through the specified interface.

10.

timers throttle spf spf-delay spf-holdtime spf-wait

(Optional) Configure route calculation timers.

■ spf-delay —Delay between receiving a change to SPF calculation. The range is from 1 to 600000 miliseconds.

■ spf-holdtim e—Delay between first and second SPF calculation. The range is form 1 to 600000 in milliseconds.

■ spf-wait —Maximum wait time in milliseconds for SPF calculations. The range is from 1 to 600000 in milliseconds.

11.

ospf log-adj-changes

(Optional) Send syslog message when a neighbor state changes.

12.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

13.

show ip ospf [ process-id [ area-id ]] database

Display lists of information related to the OSPF database for a specific router. For some of the keyword options, see Monitoring OSPF.

14.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

In the following example, the summary address 10.1.0.0 includes address 10.1.1.0, 10.1.2.0, 10.1.3.0, and so on. Only the address 10.1.0.0 is advertised in an external link-state advertisement.

Switch(config)# router ospf 201
Switch(config-router)# summary-address 10.1.0.0 255.255.0.0
Switch(config-router)# end

The OSPF LSA group pacing feature allows the router to group OSPF LSAs and pace the refreshing, check-summing, and aging functions for more efficient router use. This feature is enabled by default with a 4-minute default pacing interval, and you will not usually need to modify this parameter. The optimum group pacing interval is inversely proportional to the number of LSAs the router is refreshing, check-summing, and aging. For example, if you have approximately 10,000 LSAs in the database, decreasing the pacing interval would benefit you. If you have a very small database (40 to 100 LSAs), increasing the pacing interval to 10 to 20 minutes might benefit you slightly.

Do not change the packet pacing timers unless all other options to meet OSPF packet flooding requirements have been exhausted. Specifically, network operators should prefer summarization, stub area usage, queue tuning, and buffer tuning before changing the default flooding timers. Furthermore, there are no guidelines for changing timer values; each OSPF deployment is unique and should be considered on a case-by-case basis. The network operator assumes the risks associated with changing the default timer values.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router ospf process-id

Enable OSPF routing, and enter router configuration mode.

3.

timers pacing lsa-group seconds

Change the group pacing of LSAs.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show running-config

Verify your entries.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To return to the default value, use the no timers pacing lsa-group router configuration command.

The following example configures OSPF group packet-pacing updates between LSA groups to occur in 60-second intervals for OSPF routing process 1:

Switch(config)# router ospf 1
Switch(config-router)# timers pacing lsa-group 60

OSPF uses the highest IP address configured on the interfaces as its router ID. If this interface is down or removed, the OSPF process must recalculate a new router ID and resend all its routing information out its interfaces. If a loopback interface is configured with an IP address, OSPF uses this IP address as its router ID, even if other interfaces have higher IP addresses. Because loopback interfaces never fail, this provides greater stability. OSPF automatically prefers a loopback interface over other interfaces, and it chooses the highest IP address among all loopback interfaces.

The IP address for the loopback interface must be unique and not in use by another interface.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface loopback 0

Create a loopback interface, and enter interface configuration mode.

3.

ip address address mask

Assign an IP address to this interface.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show ip interface

Verify your entries.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no interface loopback 0 global configuration c ommand to disable the loopback interface.

Switch(config)# interface loopback 0
Switch(config-if)# ip address 10.108.1.1 255.255.255.0

You can display specific statistics such as the contents of IP routing tables, caches, and databases.

Following are some of the privileged EXEC commands for displaying OSPF statistics. For more show ip ospf database privileged EXEC command options and for explanations of fields in the resulting display, see Cisco IOS IP Routing: OSPF Command Reference.

Command
Purpose

show ip ospf [ process-id ]

Display general information about OSPF routing processes.

show ip ospf [ process-id ] database [ router ] [ link-state-id ]

show ip ospf [ process-id ] database [ router ] [ self-originate ]

show ip ospf [ process-id ] database [ router ] [ adv-router [ ip-address ]]

show ip ospf [ process-id ] database [ network ] [ link-state-id ]

show ip ospf [ process-id ] database [ summary ] [ link-state-id ]

show ip ospf [ process-id ] database [ asbr-summary ] [ link-state-id ]

show ip ospf [ process-id ] database [ external ] [ link-state-id ]

show ip ospf [ process-id area-id ] database [ database-summary ]

Display lists of information related to the OSPF database.

show ip ospf border-routes

Display the internal OSPF routing ABR and ASBR table entries.

show ip ospf interface [ interface-name ]

Display OSPF-related interface information.

show ip ospf neighbor [ interface-name ] [ neighbor-id ] detail

Display OSPF interface neighbor information.

show ip ospf virtual-links

Display OSPF-related virtual links information.

Enhanced IGRP (EIGRP) is a Cisco proprietary enhanced version of the Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (IGRP). EIGRP uses the same distance vector algorithm and distance information as IGRP; however, the convergence properties and the operating efficiency of EIGRP are significantly improved.

The convergence technology employs an algorithm referred to as the Diffusing Update Algorithm (DUAL), which guarantees loop-free operation at every instant throughout a route computation and allows all devices involved in a topology change to synchronize at the same time. Routers that are not affected by topology changes are not involved in recomputations.

IP EIGRP provides increased network width. With RIP, the largest possible width of your network is 15 hops. Because the EIGRP metric is large enough to support thousands of hops, the only barrier to expanding the network is the transport-layer hop counter. EIGRP increments the transport control field only when an IP packet has traversed 15 routers and the next hop to the destination was learned through EIGRP.

EIGRP has these four basic components:

■ Neighbor discovery and recovery is the process that routers use to dynamically learn of other routers on their directly attached networks. Routers must also discover when their neighbors become unreachable or inoperative. Neighbor discovery and recovery is achieved by periodically sending small hello packets. As long as hello packets are received, the neighbor is alive and functioning. When this status is determined, the neighboring routers exchange routing information.

■The reliable transport protocol is responsible for guaranteed, ordered delivery of EIGRP packets to all neighbors. It supports intermixed transmission of multicast and unicast packets. Some EIGRP packets must be sent reliably, and others need not be. For efficiency, reliability is provided only when necessary. For example, on a multiaccess network that has multicast capabilities, it is not necessary to send hellos reliably to all neighbors individually. Therefore, EIGRP sends a single multicast hello with an indication in the packet informing the receivers that the packet need not be acknowledged. Other types of packets (such as updates) require acknowledgment, which is shown in the packet. To ensure low convergence time, the reliable transport sends multicast packets quickly when there are unacknowledged packets pending.

■The DUAL finite state machine handles the decision process for all route computations. It tracks all routes advertised by all neighbors and uses the distance information (known as a metric) to select efficient, loop-free paths. DUAL selects routes to be inserted into a routing table based on feasible successors. A successor is a neighboring router used for packet forwarding that has a least-cost path to a destination that is guaranteed not to be part of a routing loop.

When there are no feasible successors, but there are neighbors advertising the destination, a recomputation must occur to determine a new successor. The amount of time it takes to recompute the route affects the convergence time. When a topology change occurs, DUAL tests for feasible successors to avoid unnecessary recomputation.

■The protocol-dependent modules are responsible for network layer protocol-specific tasks. An example is the IP EIGRP module, which is responsible for sending and receiving EIGRP packets that are encapsulated in IP. It is also responsible for parsing EIGRP packets and informing DUAL of the new information received. Routing decisions are stored in the IP routing table. EIGRP also redistributes routes learned by other IP routing protocols.

This section includes the following topics:

■Default EIGRP Configuration

■Configuring Basic EIGRP Parameters

■Configuring EIGRP Interfaces

■Configuring EIGRP Route Authentication

■Configuring EIGRP Stub Routing

■Monitoring and Maintaining EIGRP

Feature
Default Setting

Auto summary

Enabled. Subprefixes are summarized to the classful network boundary when crossing classful network boundaries.

Default-information

Exterior routes are accepted and default information is passed between EIGRP processes when doing redistribution.

Default metric

Only connected routes and interface static routes can be redistributed without a default metric. The metric includes:

■Bandwidth: 0 or greater kbps.

■Delay (tens of microseconds): 0 or any positive number that is a multiple of 39.1 nanoseconds.

■Reliability: any number between 0 and 255 (255 means 100 percent reliability).

■Loading: effective bandwidth as a number between 0 and 255 (255 is 100 percent loading).

■MTU: maximum transmission unit size of the route in bytes. 0 or any positive integer.

Distance

Internal distance: 90.

External distance: 170.

EIGRP log-neighbor changes

Disabled. No adjacency changes logged.

IP authentication key-chain

No authentication provided.

IP authentication mode

No authentication provided.

IP bandwidth-percent

50 percent.

IP hello interval

For low-speed nonbroadcast multiaccess (NBMA) networks: 60 seconds; all other networks: 5 seconds.

IP hold-time

For low-speed NBMA networks: 180 seconds; all other networks: 15 seconds.

IP split-horizon

Enabled.

IP summary address

No summary aggregate addresses are predefined.

Metric weights

tos: 0; k1 and k3: 1; k2, k4, and k5: 0.

Network

None specified.

NSF3 Awareness

Enabled4. Allows Layer 3 switches to continue forwarding packets from a neighboring NSF-capable router during hardware or software changes.

Offset-list

Disabled.

Router EIGRP

Disabled.

Set metric

No metric set in the route map.

Traffic-share

Distributed proportionately to the ratios of the metrics.

Variance

1 (equal-cost load balancing).

To create an EIGRP routing process, you must enable EIGRP and associate networks. EIGRP sends updates to the interfaces in the specified networks. If you do not specify an interface network, it is not advertised in any EIGRP update.

The EIGRP NSF Awareness feature is supported for IPv4 in the IP services image. When the neighboring router is NSF-capable, the Layer 3 switch continues to forward packets from the neighboring router during the interval between the primary Route Processor (RP) in a router failing and the backup RP taking over, or while the primary RP is manually reloaded for a nondisruptive software upgrade.

This feature cannot be disabled. For more information on this feature, see the “Configuring Nonstop Forwarding” chapter in the High Availability Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15S.

In this procedure, configuring the routing process is required; other steps are optional.

Complete the EIGRP network strategy and planning for your network.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router eigrp autonomous-system

Enable an EIGRP routing process, and enter router configuration mode. The AS number identifies the routes to other EIGRP routers and is used to tag routing information.

3.

network network-number

Associate networks with an EIGRP routing process. EIGRP sends updates to the interfaces in the specified networks.

4.

eigrp log-neighbor-changes

(Optional) Enable logging of EIGRP neighbor changes to monitor routing system stability.

5.

metric weights tos k1 k2 k3 k4 k5

(Optional) Adjust the EIGRP metric. Although the defaults have been carefully set to provide excellent operation in most networks, you can adjust them.

Caution: Setting metrics is complex and is not recommended without guidance from an experienced network designer.

6.

offset list [ access-list number | name ] { in | out } offset [ type number ]

(Optional) Apply an offset list to routing metrics to increase incoming and outgoing metrics to routes learned through EIGRP. You can limit the offset list with an access list or an interface.

7.

no auto-summary

(Optional) Disable automatic summarization of subnet routes into network-level routes.

8.

ip summary-address eigrp autonomous-system-number address mask

(Optional) Configure a summary aggregate.

9.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

10.

show ip protocols

Verify your entries.

For NSF awareness, the output shows:

*** IP Routing is NSF aware ***
 
EIGRP NSF enabled

11.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no forms of these commands to disable the feature or return the setting to the default value.

The following example configures EIGRP autonomous system 1 and establishes neighbors through networks 172.16.0.0 and 192.168.0.0:

Switch(config)# router eigrp 1
Switch(config-router)# network 172.16.0.0
Switch(config-router)# network 192.168.0.0

Other optional EIGRP parameters can be configured on an interface basis.

Enable EIGRP as described in the Configuring Basic EIGRP Parameters.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

ip bandwidth-percent eigrp percent

(Optional) Configure the percentage of bandwidth that can be used by EIGRP on an interface. The default is 50 percent.

5.

ip summary-address eigrp autonomous-system-number address mask

(Optional) Configure a summary aggregate address for a specified interface (not usually necessary if auto-summary is enabled).

6.

ip hello-interval eigrp autonomous-system-number seconds

(Optional) Change the hello time interval for an EIGRP routing process. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 60 seconds for low-speed NBMA networks and 5 seconds for all other networks.

7.

ip hold-time eigrp autonomous-system-number seconds

(Optional) Change the hold time interval for an EIGRP routing process. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 180 seconds for low-speed NBMA networks and 15 seconds for all other networks.

Caution: Do not adjust the hold time without consulting Cisco technical support.

8.

no ip split-horizon eigrp autonomous-system-number

(Optional) Disable split horizon to allow route information to be advertised by a router out any interface from which that information originated.

9.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

10.

show ip eigrp interface

Display which interfaces EIGRP is active on and information about EIGRP relating to those interfaces.

11.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no forms of these commands to disable the feature or return the setting to the default value.

The following example allows EIGRP to use up to 75 percent (42 kbps) of a 56-kbps serial link in autonomous system 209:

Switch(config)# interface serial 0
Switch(config-if)# bandwidth 56
Switch(config-if)# ip bandwidth-percent eigrp 209 75

EIGRP route authentication provides MD5 authentication of routing updates from the EIGRP routing protocol to prevent the introduction of unauthorized or false routing messages from unapproved sources.

Enable EIGRP as described in the Configuring Basic EIGRP Parameters.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

ip authentication mode eigrp autonomous-system md5

Enable MD5 authentication in IP EIGRP packets.

5.

ip authentication key-chain eigrp autonomous-system key-chain

Enable authentication of IP EIGRP packets.

6.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

7.

key chain name-of-chain

Identify a key chain and enter key-chain configuration mode. Match the name configured in Step 4.

8.

key number

In key-chain configuration mode, identify the key number.

9.

key-string text

In key-chain key configuration mode, identify the key string.

10.

accept-lifetime start-time { infinite | end-time | duration seconds }

(Optional) Specify the time period during which the key can be received.

The start-time and end-time syntax can be either hh : mm : ss Month date year or hh : mm : ss date Month year. The default is forever with the default start-time and the earliest acceptable date as January 1, 1993. The default end-time and duration is infinite.

11.

send-lifetime start-time { infinite | end-time | duration seconds }

(Optional) Specify the time period during which the key can be sent.

The start-time and end-time syntax can be either hh : mm : ss Month date year or hh : mm : ss date Month year. The default is forever with the default start-time and the earliest acceptable date as January 1, 1993. The default end-time and duration is infinite.

12.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

13.

show key chain

Display authentication key information.

14.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no forms of these commands to disable the feature or to return the setting to the default value.

The following example configures EIGRP to apply authentication to address-family autonomous system 1 and identifies a key chain named SITE1:

Switch(config)# router eigrp virtual-name
Switch(config-router)# address-family ipv4 autonomous-system 1
Switch(config-router-af)# af-interface ethernet0/0
Switch(config-router-af-interface)# authentication key-chain SITE1
Switch(config-router-af-interface)# authentication mode md5

The EIGRP stub routing feature reduces resource utilization by moving routed traffic closer to the end user. In a network using EIGRP stub routing, the only allowable route for IP traffic to the user is through a switch that is configured with EIGRP stub routing. The switch sends the routed traffic to interfaces that are configured as user interfaces or are connected to other devices.

When using EIGRP stub routing, you need to configure the distribution and remote routers to use EIGRP and to configure only the switch as a stub. Only specified routes are propagated from the switch. The switch responds to all queries for summaries, connected routes, and routing updates.

Note: EIGRP stub routing only advertises connected or summary routes from the routing tables to other switches in the network. The switch uses EIGRP stub routing at the access layer to eliminate the need for other types of routing advertisements. If you try to configure multi-VRF-CE and EIGRP stub routing at the same time, the configuration is not allowed.

Any neighbor that receives a packet informing it of the stub status does not query the stub router for any routes, and a router that has a stub peer does not query that peer. The stub router depends on the distribution router to send the proper updates to all peers.

In Figure 102, switch B is configured as an EIGRP stub router. Switches A and C are connected to the rest of the WAN. Switch B advertises connected, static, redistribution, and summary routes to switch A and C. Switch B does not advertise any routes learned from switch A (and the reverse).

Figure 102 EIGRP Stub Router Configuration

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

For more information about EIGRP stub routing, see IP Routing: EIGRP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T.

Complete the EIGRP network strategy and planning for your network.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router eigrp 1

Configure a remote or distribution router to run an EIGRP process and enter router configuration mode.

3.

network network-number

Associate networks with an EIGRP routing process.

4.

eigrp stub [ receive-only | connected | static | summary ]

Configure a remote router as an EIGRP stub router. The keywords have these meanings:

■Enter receive-only to set the router as a receive-only neighbor.

■Enter connected to advertise connected routes.

■Enter static to advertise static routes.

■Enter summary to advertise summary routes.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show ip eigrp neighbor detail

Verify that a remote router has been configured as a stub router with EIGRP. The last line of the output shows the stub status of the remote or spoke router.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Enter the show ip eigrp neighbor detail privileged EXEC command from the distribution router to verify the configuration.

In the following example, the eigrp stub command is used to configure the router as a stub that advertises connected and summary routes:

Switch(config)# router eigrp 1
Switch(config-router)# network 10.0.0.0
Switch(config-router)# eigrp stub

You can delete neighbors from the neighbor table. You can also display various EIGRP routing statistics.

Command
Purpose

clear ip eigrp neighbors [ if-address | interface ]

Delete neighbors from the neighbor table.

show ip eigrp interface [ interface ] [ as numbe r]

Display information about interfaces configured for EIGRP.

show ip eigrp neighbors [ type-number ]

Display EIGRP discovered neighbors.

show ip eigrp topology [ autonomous-system-number ] | [[ ip-address ] mask ]]

Display the EIGRP topology table for a given process.

show ip eigrp traffic [ autonomous-system-number ]

Display the number of packets sent and received for all or a specified EIGRP process.

The Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an exterior gateway protocol used to set up an interdomain routing system for loop-free exchanges of routing information between autonomous systems. Autonomous systems are made up of routers that operate under the same administration and that run Interior Gateway Protocols (IGPs), such as RIP or OSPF, within their boundaries and that interconnect by using an Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP). BGP Version 4 is the standard EGP for interdomain routing in the Internet.

For details about BGP configuration and commands, see the BGP documents listed in Related Documents.

Routers that belong to the same autonomous system (AS) and that exchange BGP updates run internal BGP (IBGP), and routers that belong to different autonomous systems and that exchange BGP updates run external BGP (EBGP). Most configuration commands are the same for configuring EBGP and IBGP. The difference is that the routing updates are exchanged either between autonomous systems (EBGP) or within an AS (IBGP). Figure 103 shows a network that is running both EBGP and IBGP.

Figure 103 EBGP, IBGP, and Multiple Autonomous Systems

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

Before exchanging information with an external AS, BGP ensures that networks within the AS can be reached by defining internal BGP peering among routers within the AS and by redistributing BGP routing information to IGPs that run within the AS, such as IGRP and OSPF.

Routers that run a BGP routing process are often referred to as BGP speakers. BGP uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) as its transport protocol (specifically port 179). Two BGP speakers that have a TCP connection to each other for exchanging routing information are known as peers or neighbors. In Figure 103, Routers A and B are BGP peers, as are Routers B and C and Routers C and D. The routing information is a series of AS numbers that describe the full path to the destination network. BGP uses this information to construct a loop-free map of autonomous systems.

The network has these characteristics:

■Routers A and B are running EBGP, and Routers B and C are running IBGP. Note that the EBGP peers are directly connected and that the IBGP peers are not. As long as there is an IGP running that allows the two neighbors to reach one another, IBGP peers do not have to be directly connected.

■All BGP speakers within an AS must establish a peer relationship with each other. That is, the BGP speakers within an AS must be fully meshed logically. BGP4 provides two techniques that reduce the requirement for a logical full mesh: confederations and route reflectors.

■AS 200 is a transit AS for AS 100 and AS 300—that is, AS 200 is used to transfer packets between AS 100 and AS 300.

BGP peers initially exchange their full BGP routing tables and then send only incremental updates. BGP peers also exchange keepalive messages (to ensure that the connection is up) and notification messages (in response to errors or special conditions).

In BGP, each route consists of a network number, a list of autonomous systems that information has passed through (the autonomous system path), and a list of other path attributes. The primary function of a BGP system is to exchange network reachability information, including information about the list of AS paths, with other BGP systems. This information can be used to determine AS connectivity, to prune routing loops, and to enforce AS-level policy decisions.

A router or switch running Cisco IOS does not select or use an IBGP route unless it has a route available to the next-hop router and it has received synchronization from an IGP (unless IGP synchronization is disabled). When multiple routes are available, BGP bases its path selection on attribute values. See Configuring BGP Decision Attributes for information about BGP attributes.

BGP Version 4 supports classless interdomain routing (CIDR) so you can reduce the size of your routing tables by creating aggregate routes, resulting in supernets. CIDR eliminates the concept of network classes within BGP and supports the advertising of IP prefixes.

This section includes the following topics:

■Default BGP Configuration

■Enabling BGP Routing

■Managing Routing Policy Changes

■Configuring BGP Decision Attributes

■Configuring BGP Filtering with Route Maps

■Configuring BGP Filtering by Neighbor

■Configuring Prefix Lists for BGP Filtering

■Configuring BGP Community Filtering

■Configuring BGP Neighbors and Peer Groups

■Configuring Aggregate Addresses

■Configuring Routing Domain Confederations

■Configuring BGP Route Reflectors

■Configuring Route Dampening

■Monitoring and Maintaining BGP

Feature
Default Setting

Aggregate address

Disabled: None defined.

AS path access list

None defined.

Auto summary

Enabled.

Best path

■The router considers as-path in choosing a route and does not compare similar routes from external BGP peers.

■Compare router ID: Disabled.

BGP community list

■Number: None defined. When you permit a value for the community number, the list defaults to an implicit deny for everything else that has not been permitted.

■Format: Cisco default format (32-bit number).

BGP confederation identifier/peers

■Identifier: None configured.

■Peers: None identified.

BGP Fast external fallover

Enabled.

BGP local preference

100. The range is 0 to 4294967295 with the higher value preferred.

BGP network

None specified; no backdoor route advertised.

BGP route dampening

Disabled by default. When enabled:

■Half-life is 15 minutes.

■Re-use is 750 (10-second increments).

■Suppress is 2000 (10-second increments).

■Max-suppress-time is 4 times half-life; 60 minutes.

BGP router ID

The IP address of a loopback interface if one is configured or the highest IP address configured for a physical interface on the router.

Default information originate (protocol or network redistribution)

Disabled.

Default metric

Built-in, automatic metric translations.

Distance

■External route administrative distance: 20 (acceptable values are from 1 to 255).

■Internal route administrative distance: 200 (acceptable values are from 1 to 255).

■Local route administrative distance: 200 (acceptable values are from 1 to 255).

Distribute list

■In (filter networks received in updates): Disabled.

■Out (suppress networks from being advertised in updates): Disabled.

Internal route redistribution

Disabled.

IP prefix list

None defined.

Multi exit discriminator (MED)

■Always compare: Disabled. Does not compare MEDs for paths from neighbors in different autonomous systems.

■Best path compare: Disabled.

■MED missing as worst path: Disabled.

■Deterministic MED comparison is disabled.

Neighbor

■Advertisement interval: 30 seconds for external peers; 5 seconds for internal peers.

■Change logging: Enabled.

■Conditional advertisement: Disabled.

■Default originate: No default route is sent to the neighbor.

■Description: None.

■Distribute list: None defined.

■External BGP multihop: Only directly connected neighbors are allowed.

■Filter list: None used.

■Maximum number of prefixes received: No limit.

Neighbor

■Next hop (router as next hop for BGP neighbor): Disabled.

■Password: Disabled.

■Peer group: None defined; no members assigned.

■Prefix list: None specified.

■Remote AS (add entry to neighbor BGP table): No peers defined.

■Private AS number removal: Disabled.

■Route maps: None applied to a peer.

■Send community attributes: None sent to neighbors.

■Shutdown or soft reconfiguration: Not enabled.

■Timers: keepalive: 60 seconds; holdtime: 180 seconds.

■Update source: Best local address.

■Version: BGP Version 4.

■Weight: Routes learned through BGP peer: 0; routes sourced by the local router: 32768.

NSF5 Awareness

Disabled6. Allows Layer 3 switches to continue forwarding packets from a neighboring NSF-capable router during hardware or software changes.

Route reflector

None configured.

Synchronization (BGP and IGP)

Enabled.

Table map update

Disabled.

Timers

Keepalive: 60 seconds; holdtime: 180 seconds.

The BGP NSF Awareness feature is supported for IPv4 in the IP services image. To enable this feature with BGP routing, you need to enable Graceful Restart. When the neighboring router is NSF-capable, and this feature is enabled, the Layer 3 switch continues to forward packets from the neighboring router during the interval between the primary Route Processor (RP) in a router failing and the backup RP taking over, or while the primary RP is manually reloaded for a nondisruptive software upgrade. For more information, see IP Routing: BGP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T.

To enable BGP routing, you establish a BGP routing process and define the local network. Because BGP must completely recognize the relationships with its neighbors, you must also specify a BGP neighbor.

BGP supports two kinds of neighbors: internal and external. Internal neighbors are in the same AS; external neighbors are in different autonomous systems. External neighbors are usually adjacent to each other and share a subnet, but internal neighbors can be anywhere in the same AS.

The switch supports the use of private AS numbers, usually assigned by service providers and given to systems whose routes are not advertised to external neighbors. The private AS numbers are from 64512 to 65535. You can configure external neighbors to remove private AS numbers from the AS path by using the neighbor remove-private-as router configuration command. Then when an update is passed to an external neighbor, if the AS path includes private AS numbers, these numbers are dropped.

If your AS must pass traffic through it from another AS to a third AS, it is important to be consistent about the routes it advertises. If BGP advertises a route before all routers in the network learn about the route through the IGP, the AS might receive traffic that some routers can not yet route. To prevent this from happening, BGP must wait until the IGP has propagated information across the AS so that BGP is synchronized with the IGP. Synchronization is enabled by default. If your AS does not pass traffic from one AS to another AS, or if all routers in your autonomous systems are running BGP, you can disable synchronization, which allows your network to carry fewer routes in the IGP and allows BGP to converge more quickly.

You should know your network design and how you want traffic to flow through it before configuring BGP. Gather the network requirements you need, which should include the following:

■Whether you need to run IBGP for internal connectivity

■External connectivity to the service provider network

■Configuration parameters such as neighbor IP addresses and their AS number, and which networks you will advertise through BGP

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip routing

Enable IP routing (required only if IP routing is disabled).

3.

router bgp autonomous-system

Enable a BGP routing process, assign it an AS number, and enter router configuration mode. The AS number can be from 1 to 65535, with 64512 to 65535 designated as private autonomous numbers.

4.

network network-number [ mask network-mask ] [ route-map route-map-name ]

Configure a network as local to this AS, and enter it in the BGP table.

5.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } remote-as number

Add an entry to the BGP neighbor table specifying that the neighbor identified by the IP address belongs to the specified AS.

For EBGP, neighbors are usually directly connected, and the IP address is the address of the interface at the other end of the connection.

For IBGP, the IP address can be the address of any of the router interfaces.

6.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } remove-private-as

(Optional) Remove private AS numbers from the AS-path in outbound routing updates.

7.

no synchronization

(Optional) Disable synchronization between BGP and an IGP.

8.

no auto-summary

(Optional) Disable automatic network summarization. By default, when a subnet is redistributed from an IGP into BGP, only the network route is inserted into the BGP table.

9.

bgp fast-external-fallover

(Optional) Automatically reset a BGP session when a link between external neighbors goes down. By default, the session is not immediately reset.

10.

bgp graceful-restart

(Optional) Enable NSF awareness on switch. By default, NSF awareness is disabled.

11.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

12.

show ip bgp network network-number
or
show ip bgp neighbor

Verify the configuration.

Verify that NSF awareness (Graceful Restart) is enabled on the neighbor.

If NSF awareness is enabled on the switch and the neighbor, this message appears:

Graceful Restart Capability: advertised and received
 

If NSF awareness is enabled on the switch, but not on the neighbor, this message appears:

Graceful Restart Capability: advertised

13.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no router bgp autonomous-system global configuration command to remove a BGP AS. Use the no network network-number router configuration command to remove the network from the BGP table. Use the no neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } remote-as number router configuration command to remove a neighbor. Use the no neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } remove-private-as router configuration command to include private AS numbers in updates to a neighbor. Use the synchronization router configuration command to re-enable synchronization.

These examples show how to configure BGP on the routers in Figure 103.

Router A:

Switch(config)# router bgp 100
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 129.213.1.1 remote-as 200
 

Router B:

Switch(config)# router bgp 200
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 129.213.1.2 remote-as 100
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 175.220.1.2 remote-as 200
 

Router C:

Switch(config)# router bgp 200
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 175.220.212.1 remote-as 200
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 192.208.10.1 remote-as 300
 

Router D:

Switch(config)# router bgp 300
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 192.208.10.2 remote-as 200
 

To verify that BGP peers are running, use the show ip bgp neighbors privileged EXEC command. This is the output of this command on Router A:

Switch# show ip bgp neighbors
 
BGP neighbor is 129.213.1.1, remote AS 200, external link
BGP version 4, remote router ID 175.220.212.1
BGP state = established, table version = 3, up for 0:10:59
Last read 0:00:29, hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds
Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds
Received 2828 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue
Sent 2826 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue
Connections established 11; dropped 10
 

Anything other than state = established means that the peers are not running. The remote router ID is the highest IP address on that router (or the highest loopback interface). Each time the table is updated with new information, the table version number increments. A table version number that continually increments means that a route is flapping, causing continual routing updates.

For exterior protocols, a reference to an IP network from the network router configuration command controls only which networks are advertised. This is in contrast to Interior Gateway Protocols (IGPs), such as EIGRP, which also use the network command to specify where to send updates.

Routing policies for a peer include all the configurations that might affect inbound or outbound routing table updates. When you have defined two routers as BGP neighbors, they form a BGP connection and exchange routing information. If you later change a BGP filter, weight, distance, version, or timer, or make a similar configuration change, you must reset the BGP sessions so that the configuration changes take effect.

There are two types of reset: hard reset and soft reset. The switch supports a soft reset without any prior configuration when both BGP peers support the soft route refresh capability, which is advertised in the OPEN message sent when the peers establish a TCP session. A soft reset allows the dynamic exchange of route refresh requests and routing information between BGP routers and the subsequent re-advertisement of the respective outbound routing table.

■When soft reset generates inbound updates from a neighbor, it is called dynamic inbound soft reset.

■When soft reset sends a set of updates to a neighbor, it is called outbound soft reset.

A soft inbound reset causes the new inbound policy to take effect. A soft outbound reset causes the new local outbound policy to take effect without resetting the BGP session. As a new set of updates is sent during outbound policy reset, a new inbound policy can also take effect.

Table 64 Advantages and Disadvantages of Hard and Soft Resets

Type of Reset
Advantages
Disadvantages

Hard reset

No memory overhead.

The prefixes in the BGP, IP, and FIB tables provided by the neighbor are lost. Not recommended.

Outbound soft reset

No configuration; no storing of routing table updates.

Does not reset inbound routing table updates.

Dynamic inbound soft reset

Does not clear the BGP session and cache.

Does not require storing of routing table updates and has no memory overhead.

Both BGP routers must support the route refresh capability.

Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

show ip bgp neighbors

Display whether a neighbor supports the route refresh capability. When supported, this message appears for the router:

Received route refresh capability from peer.

2.

clear ip bgp { * | address | peer-group-name }

Reset the routing table on the specified connection.

■Enter an asterisk (*) to specify that all connections be reset.

■Enter an IP address to specify the connection to be reset.

■Enter a peer group name to reset the peer group.

3.

clear ip bgp { * | address | peer-group-name } soft out

(Optional) Perform an outbound soft reset to reset the inbound routing table on the specified connection. Use this command if route refresh is supported.

■Enter an asterisk (*) to specify that all connections be reset.

■Enter an IP address to specify the connection to be reset.

■Enter a peer group name to reset the peer group.

4.

show ip bgp
show ip bgp neighbors

Verify the reset by checking information about the routing table and about BGP neighbors.

In the following example, an outbound soft reset is initiated for sessions with all routers in the autonomous system numbered 35700:

Switch# clear ip bgp 35700 soft out

When a BGP speaker receives updates from multiple autonomous systems that describe different paths to the same destination, it must choose the single best path for reaching that destination. The decision is based on the value of attributes that the update contains and other BGP-configurable factors. The selected path is entered into the BGP routing table and propagated to its neighbors.

When a BGP peer learns two EBGP paths for a prefix from a neighboring AS, it chooses the best path and inserts that path in the IP routing table. If BGP multipath support is enabled and the EBGP paths are learned from the same neighboring autonomous systems, multiple paths are installed in the IP routing table. Then, during packet switching, per-packet or per-destination load balancing is performed among the multiple paths. The maximum-paths router configuration command controls the number of paths allowed.

These factors summarize the order in which BGP evaluates the attributes for choosing the best path:

1. If the path specifies a next hop that is inaccessible, drop the update. The BGP next-hop attribute, automatically determined by the software, is the IP address of the next hop that is going to be used to reach a destination. For EBGP, this is usually the IP address of the neighbor specified by the neighbor remote-as router configuration command. You can disable next-hop processing by using route maps or the neighbor next-hop-self router configuration command.

2. Prefer the path with the largest weight (a Cisco proprietary parameter). The weight attribute is local to the router and not propagated in routing updates. By default, the weight attribute is 32768 for paths that the router originates and zero for other paths. You can use access lists, route maps, or the neighbor weight router configuration command to set weights.

3. Prefer the route with the highest local preference. Local preference is part of the routing update and exchanged among routers in the same AS. The default value of the local preference attribute is 100. You can set local preference by using the bgp default local-preference router configuration command or by using a route map.

4. Prefer the route that was originated by BGP running on the local router.

5. Prefer the route with the shortest AS path.

6. Prefer the route with the lowest origin type. An interior route or IGP is lower than a route learned by EGP, and an EGP-learned route is lower than one of unknown origin or learned in another way.

7. Prefer the route with the lowest multi-exit discriminator (MED) metric attribute if the neighboring AS is the same for all routes considered. You can configure the MED by using route maps or by using the default-metric router configuration command. When an update is sent to an IBGP peer, the MED is included.

8. Prefer the external (EBGP) path over the internal (IBGP) path.

9. Prefer the route that can be reached through the closest IGP neighbor (the lowest IGP metric). This means that the router will prefer the shortest internal path within the AS to reach the destination (the shortest path to the BGP next-hop).

10. If these conditions are all true, insert the route for this path into the IP routing table:

  • Both the best route and this route are external.
  • Both the best route and this route are from the same neighboring autonomous system.
  • Maximum-paths is enabled.

11. If multipath is not enabled, prefer the route with the lowest IP address value for the BGP router ID. The router ID is usually the highest IP address on the router or the loopback (virtual) address, but might be implementation-specific.

Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router bgp autonomous-system

Enable a BGP routing process, assign it an AS number, and enter router configuration mode.

3.

bgp best-path as-path ignore

(Optional) Configure the router to ignore AS path length in selecting a route.

4.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } next-hop-self

(Optional) Disable next-hop processing on BGP updates to a neighbor by entering a specific IP address to be used instead of the next-hop address.

5.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } weight weight

(Optional) Assign a weight to a neighbor connection. Acceptable values are from 0 to 65535; the largest weight is the preferred route. Routes learned through another BGP peer have a default weight of 0; routes sourced by the local router have a default weight of 32768.

6.

default-metric number

(Optional) Set a MED metric to set preferred paths to external neighbors. All routes without a MED will also be set to this value. The range is 1 to 4294967295. The lowest value is the most desirable.

7.

bgp bestpath med missing-as-worst

(Optional) Configure the switch to consider a missing MED as having a value of infinity, making the path without a MED value the least desirable path.

8.

bgp always-compare med

(Optional) Configure the switch to compare MEDs for paths from neighbors in different autonomous systems. By default, MED comparison is only done among paths in the same AS.

9.

bgp bestpath med confed

(Optional) Configure the switch to consider the MED in choosing a path from among those advertised by different subautonomous systems within a confederation.

10.

bgp deterministic med

(Optional) Configure the switch to consider the MED variable when choosing among routes advertised by different peers in the same AS.

11.

bgp default local-preference value

(Optional) Change the default local preference value. The range is 0 to 4294967295; the default value is 100. The highest local preference value is preferred.

12.

maximum-paths number

(Optional) Configure the number of paths to be added to the IP routing table. The default is to only enter the best path in the routing table. The range is from 1 to 8. Having multiple paths allows load balancing among the paths.

13.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

14.

show ip bgp
show ip bgp neighbors

Verify the reset by checking information about the routing table and about BGP neighbors.

15.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no form of each command to return to the default state.

The following example forces all updates destined for 10.108.1.1 to advertise this router as the next hop:

Switch(config)# router bgp 109
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 10.108.1.1 next-hop-self
 

In the following example, the local BGP routing process is configured to compare the MED from alternative paths, regardless of the autonomous system from which the paths are received:

Switch(config)# router bgp 500000
Switch(config-router)# bgp always-compare-med

Within BGP, you can use route maps to control and to modify routing information and to define the conditions by which routes are redistributed between routing domains. See Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information for more information about route maps. Each route map has a name that identifies the route map ( map tag) and an optional sequence number.

Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

route-map map-tag [[ permit | deny ] | sequence-number ]]

Create a route map, and enter route-map configuration mode.

3.

set ip next-hop ip-address [...ip-address ] [ peer-address ]

(Optional) Set a route map to disable next-hop processing.

■In an inbound route map, set the next hop of matching routes to be the neighbor peering address, overriding third-party next hops.

■In an outbound route map of a BGP peer, set the next hop to the peering address of the local router, disabling the next-hop calculation.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show route-map [ map-name ]

Display all route maps configured or only the one specified to verify configuration.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no route-map map-tag command to delete the route map. Use the no set ip next-hop ip-address command to re-enable next-hop processing.

In the following example, the inbound route map named rmap sets the next hop:

Switch(config)# route-map rmap permit 10
Switch(config-route-map)# set ip next-hop 10.2.0.1

You can filter BGP advertisements by using AS-path filters, such as the as-path access-list global configuration command and the neighbor filter-list router configuration command. You can also use access lists with the neighbor distribute-list router configuration command. Distribute-list filters are applied to network numbers. See Controlling Advertising and Processing in Routing Updates for information about the distribute-list command.

You can use route maps on a per-neighbor basis to filter updates and to modify various attributes. A route map can be applied to either inbound or outbound updates. Only the routes that pass the route map are sent or accepted in updates. On both inbound and outbound updates, matching is supported based on AS path, community, and network numbers. Autonomous-system path matching requires the match as-path access-lis t route-map command, community-based matching requires the match community-list route-map command, and network-based matching requires the ip access-list global configuration command.

Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router bgp autonomous-system

Enable a BGP routing process, assign it an AS number, and enter router configuration mode.

3.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group name } distribute-list { access-list-number | name } { in | out }

(Optional) Filter BGP routing updates to or from neighbors as specified in an access list.

Note: You can also use the neighbor prefix-list router configuration command to filter updates, but you cannot use both commands to configure the same BGP peer.

4.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group name } route-map map-tag { in | out }

(Optional) Apply a route map to filter an incoming or outgoing route.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show ip bgp neighbors

Verify the configuration.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no neighbor distribute-list command to remove the access list from the neighbor. Use the no neighbor route-map map-tag router configuration command to remove the route map from the neighbor.

The following router configuration mode example applies list 39 to incoming advertisements from neighbor172.16.4.1. List 39 permits the advertisement of network 10.109.0.0.

Switch(config)# router bgp 109
Switch(config-router)# network 10.108.0.0
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 172.16.4.1 distribute-list 39 in

Another method of filtering is to specify an access list filter on both incoming and outbound updates, based on the BGP autonomous system paths. Each filter is an access list based on regular expressions. (See Using Regular Expressions in BGP for more information on forming regular expressions.) To use this method, define an autonomous system path access list, and apply it to updates to and from particular neighbors.

Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip as-path access-list access-list-number { permit | deny } as-regular-expressions

Define a BGP-related access list.

3.

router bgp autonomous-system

Enter BGP router configuration mode.

4.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group name } filter-list { access-list-number | name } { in | out | weight weight }

Establish a BGP filter based on an access list.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show ip bgp neighbors [ paths regular-expression]

Verify the configuration.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

In the following example, an autonomous system path access list (number 500) is defined to configure the router to not advertise any path through or from autonomous system 65535 to the 10.20.2.2 neighbor:

Switch(config)# ip as-path access-list 500 deny _65535_
Switch(config)# ip as-path access-list 500 deny ^65535$
Switch(config)# router bgp 50000
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 192.168.1.1 remote-as 65535
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 10.20.2.2 remote-as 40000
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 10.20.2.2 filter-list 500 out
Switch(config-router)# end

You can use prefix lists as an alternative to access lists in many BGP route filtering commands, including the neighbor distribute-list router configuration command. Filtering by a prefix list involves matching the prefixes of routes with those listed in the prefix list, as when matching access lists. When there is a match, the route is used. Whether a prefix is permitted or denied is based upon these rules:

■An empty prefix list permits all prefixes.

■An implicit deny is assumed if a given prefix does not match any entries in a prefix list.

■When multiple entries of a prefix list match a given prefix, the sequence number of a prefix list entry identifies the entry with the lowest sequence number.

By default, sequence numbers are generated automatically and incremented in units of five. If you disable the automatic generation of sequence numbers, you must specify the sequence number for each entry. You can specify sequence values in any increment. If you specify increments of one, you cannot insert additional entries into the list; if you choose very large increments, you might run out of values.

You do not need to specify a sequence number when removing a configuration entry. Show commands include the sequence numbers in their output.

Before using a prefix list in a command, you must set up the prefix list.

Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip prefix-list list-name [ seq seq-value ] deny | permit network / len [ ge ge-value ] [ le le-value ]

Create a prefix list with an optional sequence number to deny or permit access for matching conditions. You must enter at least one permit or deny clause.

■ network / len is the network number and length (in bits) of the network mask.

■(Optional) ge and le values specify the range of the prefix length to be matched. The specified ge-value and le-value must satisfy this condition: len < ge-value < le-value < 32

3.

ip prefix-list list-name seq seq-value deny | permit network / len [ ge ge-value ] [ le le-value ]

(Optional) Add an entry to a prefix list, and assign a sequence number to the entry.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show ip prefix list [ detail | summary ] name [ network / len ] [ seq seq-num ] [ longer ] [ first-match ]

Verify the configuration by displaying information about a prefix list or prefix list entries.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To delete a prefix list and all of its entries, use the no ip prefix-list list-name global configuration command. To delete an entry from a prefix list, use the no ip prefix-list seq seq-value global configuration command. To disable automatic generation of sequence numbers, use the no ip prefix-list sequence number command; to reenable automatic generation, use the ip prefix-list sequence number command. To clear the hit-count table of prefix list entries, use the clear ip prefix-list privileged EXEC command.

In the following example, a prefix list is configured to deny the default route 0.0.0.0/0:

Switch(config)# ip prefix-list RED deny 0.0.0.0/0
 

In the following example, a prefix list is configured to permit traffic from the 172.16.1.0/24 subnet:

Switch(config)# ip prefix-list BLUE permit 172.16.1.0/24
 

In the following example, a prefix list is configured to permit routes from the 10.0.0.0/8 network that have a mask length that is less than or equal to 24 bits:

Switch(config)# ip prefix-list YELLOW permit 10.0.0.0/8 le 24
 

In the following example, a prefix list is configured to deny routes from the 10.0.0.0/8 network that have a mask length that is greater than or equal to 25 bits:

Switch(config)# ip prefix-list PINK deny 10.0.0.0/8 ge 25
 

In the following example, a prefix list is configured to permit routes from any network that have a mask length from 8 to 24 bits:

Switch(config)# ip prefix-list GREEN permit 0.0.0.0/0 ge 8 le 24
 

In the following example, a prefix list is configured to deny any route with any mask length from the 10.0.0.0/8 network:

Switch(config)# ip prefix-list ORANGE deny 10.0.0.0/8 le 32
 

One way that BGP controls the distribution of routing information based on the value of the COMMUNITIES attribute. A community is a group of destinations that share some common attribute. Each destination can belong to multiple communities. AS administrators can define to which communities a destination belongs. By default, all destinations belong to the general Internet community. The community is identified by the COMMUNITIES attribute, an optional, transitive, global attribute in the numerical range from 1 to 4294967200. These are some predefined, well-known communities:

internet —Advertise this route to the Internet community. All routers belong to it.

no-export —Do not advertise this route to EBGP peers.

no-advertise —Do not advertise this route to any peer (internal or external).

local-as — Do not advertise this route to peers outside the local autonomous system.

Based on the community, you can control which routing information to accept, prefer, or distribute to other neighbors. A BGP speaker can set, append, or modify the community of a route when learning, advertising, or redistributing routes. When routes are aggregated, the resulting aggregate has a COMMUNITIES attribute that contains all communities from all the initial routes.

You can use community lists to create groups of communities to use in a match clause of a route map. As with an access list, a series of community lists can be created. Statements are checked until a match is found. As soon as one statement is satisfied, the test is concluded.

To set the COMMUNITIES attribute and match clauses based on communities, see the match community-list and set community route-map configuration commands in the Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information.

By default, no COMMUNITIES attribute is sent to a neighbor. You can specify that the COMMUNITIES attribute be sent to the neighbor at an IP address by using the neighbor send-community router configuration command.

Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip community-list community-list-number { permit | deny } community-number

Create a community list, and assign it a number.

■The community-list-number is an integer from 1 to 99 that identifies one or more permit or deny groups of communities.

■The community-number is the number configured by a set community route-map configuration command.

3.

router bgp autonomous-system

Enter BGP router configuration mode.

4.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group name } send-community

Specify that the COMMUNITIES attribute be sent to the neighbor at this IP address.

5.

set comm-list list-num delete

(Optional) Remove communities from the community attribute of an inbound or outbound update that match a standard or extended community list specified by a route map.

6.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

7.

ip bgp-community new-format

(Optional) Display and parse BGP communities in the format AA:NN.

A BGP community is displayed in a two-part format 2 bytes long. The Cisco default community format is in the format NNAA. In the most recent RFC for BGP, a community takes the form AA:NN, where the first part is the AS number and the second part is a 2-byte number.

8.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

9.

show ip bgp community

Verify the configuration.

10.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

In the following example, a standard community list is configured that permits routes from network 10 in autonomous system 50000:

Router(config)# ip community-list 1 permit 50000:10

In the following router configuration mode example, the router belongs to autonomous system 109 and is configured to send the communities attribute to its neighbor at IP address 172.16.70.23:

Switch(config)# router bgp 109
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 172.16.70.23 send-community
 

In the following example, a router that uses the 32-bit number community format is upgraded to use the AA:NN format:

Switch(config)# ip bgp-community new-format
 

The following sample output shows how BGP community numbers are displayed when the ip bgp-community new-format command is enabled:

Switch# show ip bgp 10.0.0.0
BGP routing table entry for 10.0.0.0/8, version 4
Paths: (2 available, best #2, table Default-IP-Routing-Table)
Advertised to non peer-group peers:
10.0.33.35
35
10.0.33.35 from 10.0.33.35 (192.168.3.3)
Origin incomplete, metric 10, localpref 100, valid, external
Community: 1:1
Local
0.0.0.0 from 0.0.0.0 (10.0.33.34)
Origin incomplete, metric 0, localpref 100, weight 32768, valid, sourced, best

Often many BGP neighbors are configured with the same update policies (that is, the same outbound route maps, distribute lists, filter lists, update source, and so on). Neighbors with the same update policies can be grouped into peer groups to simplify configuration and to make updating more efficient. When you have configured many peers, we recommend this approach.

To configure a BGP peer group, you create the peer group, assign options to the peer group, and add neighbors as peer group members. You configure the peer group by using the neighbor router configuration commands. By default, peer group members inherit all the configuration options of the peer group, including the remote-as (if configured), version, update-source, out-route-map, out-filter-list, out-dist-list, minimum-advertisement-interval, and next-hop-self. All peer group members also inherit changes made to the peer group. Members can also be configured to override the options that do not affect outbound updates.

To assign configuration options to an individual neighbor, specify any of these router configuration commands by using the neighbor IP address. To assign the options to a peer group, specify any of the commands by using the peer group name. You can disable a BGP peer or peer group without removing all the configuration information by using the neighbor shutdown router configuration command.

Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router bgp autonomous-system

Enter BGP router configuration mode.

3.

neighbor peer-group-name peer-group

Create a BGP peer group.

4.

neighbor ip-address peer-group peer-group-name

Make a BGP neighbor a member of the peer group.

5.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } remote-as number

Specify a BGP neighbor. If a peer group is not configured with a remote-as number, use this command to create peer groups containing EBGP neighbors. The range is 1 to 65535.

6.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } description text

(Optional) Associate a description with a neighbor.

7.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } default-originate [ route-map map-name ]

(Optional) Allow a BGP speaker (the local router) to send the default route 0.0.0.0 to a neighbor for use as a default route.

8.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } send-community

(Optional) Specify that the COMMUNITIES attribute be sent to the neighbor at this IP address.

9.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } update-source interface

(Optional) Allow internal BGP sessions to use any operational interface for TCP connections.

10.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } ebgp-multihop

(Optional) Allow BGP sessions, even when the neighbor is not on a directly connected segment. The multihop session is not established if the only route to the multihop peer’s address is the default route (0.0.0.0).

11.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } local-as number

(Optional) Specify an AS number to use as the local AS. The range is 1 to 65535.

12.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } advertisement-interval seconds

(Optional) Set the minimum interval between sending BGP routing updates.

13.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } maximum-prefix maximum [ threshold ]

(Optional) Control how many prefixes can be received from a neighbor. The range is 1 to 4294967295. The threshold (optional) is the percentage of maximum at which a warning message is generated. The default is 75 percent.

14.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } next-hop-self

(Optional) Disable next-hop processing on the BGP updates to a neighbor.

15.

neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} password string

(Optional) Set MD5 authentication on a TCP connection to a BGP peer. The same password must be configured on both BGP peers, or the connection between them is not made.

16.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } route-map map-name { in | out }

(Optional) Apply a route map to incoming or outgoing routes.

17.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } send-community

(Optional) Specify that the COMMUNITIES attribute be sent to the neighbor at this IP address.

18.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } timers keepalive holdtime

(Optional) Set timers for the neighbor or peer group.

■The keepalive interval is the time within which keepalive messages are sent to peers. The range is 1 to 4294967295 seconds; the default is 60.

■The holdtime is the interval after which a peer is declared inactive after not receiving a keepalive message from it. The range is 1 to 4294967295 seconds; the default is 180.

19.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } weight weight

(Optional) Specify a weight for all routes from a neighbor.

20.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } distribute-list { access-list-number | name } { in | out }

(Optional) Filter BGP routing updates to or from neighbors, as specified in an access list.

21.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } filter-list access-list-number { in | out | weight weight }

(Optional) Establish a BGP filter.

22.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } version value

(Optional) Specify the BGP version to use when communicating with a neighbor.

23.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } soft-reconfiguration inbound

(Optional) Configure the software to start storing received updates.

24.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

25.

show ip bgp neighbors

Verify the configuration.

26.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable an existing BGP neighbor or neighbor peer group, use the neighbor shutdown router configuration command. To enable a previously existing neighbor or neighbor peer group that had been disabled, use the no neighbor shutdown router configuration command.

The following example configures a peer group and sets the minimum time between sending BGP routing updates to 10 seconds for the peer group:

Switch(config)# router bgp 45000
Switch(config-router)# neighbor mygroup peer-group
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 192.168.1.2 remote-as 40000
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 192.168.3.2 remote-as 50000
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 192.168.1.2 peer-group mygroup
Switch(config-router)# neighbor 192.168.3.2 peer-group mygroup
Switch(config-router)# neighbor mygroup advertisement-interval 10

Classless interdomain routing (CIDR) enables you to create aggregate routes (or supernets) to minimize the size of routing tables. You can configure aggregate routes in BGP either by redistributing an aggregate route into BGP or by creating an aggregate entry in the BGP routing table. An aggregate address is added to the BGP table when there is at least one more specific entry in the BGP table.

Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router bgp autonomous-system

Enter BGP router configuration mode.

3.

aggregate-address address mask

Create an aggregate entry in the BGP routing table. The aggregate route is advertised as coming from the AS, and the atomic aggregate attribute is set to indicate that information might be missing.

4.

aggregate-address address mask as-set

(Optional) Generate AS set path information. This command creates an aggregate entry following the same rules as the previous command, but the advertised path will be an AS_SET consisting of all elements contained in all paths. Do not use this keyword when aggregating many paths because this route must be continually withdrawn and updated.

5.

aggregate-address address-mask summary-only

(Optional) Advertise summary addresses only.

6.

aggregate-address address mask suppress-map map-name

(Optional) Suppress selected, more specific routes.

7.

aggregate-address address mask advertise-map map-name

(Optional) Generate an aggregate based on conditions specified by the route map.

8.

aggregate-address address mask attribute-map map-name

(Optional) Generate an aggregate with attributes specified in the route map.

9.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

10.

show ip bgp neighbors [ advertised-routes ]

Verify the configuration.

11.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To delete an aggregate entry, use the no aggregate-address address mask router configuration command. To return options to the default values, use the command with keywords.

In the following example, an aggregate BGP address is created in router configuration mode. The path advertised for this route will be an AS_SET consisting of all elements contained in all paths that are being summarized.

Switch(config)# router bgp 50000
Switch(config-router)# aggregate-address 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 as-set
 

In the following example, a route map called MAP-ONE is created to match on an AS-path access list. The path advertised for this route will be an AS_SET consisting of elements contained in paths that are matched in the route map.

Switch(config)# ip as-path access-list 1 deny ^1234_
Switch(config)# ip as-path access-list 1 permit.*
Switch(config)# !
Switch(config)# route-map MAP-ONE
Switch(config-route-map)# match ip as-path 1
Switch(config-route-map)# exit
Switch(config)# router bgp 50000
Switch(config-router)# address-family ipv4
Switch(config-router-af)# aggregate-address 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 as-set advertise-map MAP-ONE
Switch(config-router-af)# end

One way to reduce the IBGP mesh is to divide an autonomous system into multiple subautonomous systems and to group them into a single confederation that appears as a single autonomous system. Each autonomous system is fully meshed within itself and has a few connections to other autonomous systems in the same confederation. Even though the peers in different autonomous systems have EBGP sessions, they exchange routing information as if they were IBGP peers. Specifically, the next hop, MED, and local preference information is preserved. You can then use a single IGP for all of the autonomous systems.

To configure a BGP confederation, you must specify a confederation identifier that acts as the autonomous system number for the group of autonomous systems.

Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router bgp autonomous-system

Enter BGP router configuration mode.

3.

bgp confederation identifier autonomous-system

Configure a BGP confederation identifier.

4.

bgp confederation peers autonomous-system [ autonomous-system ...]

Specify the autonomous systems that belong to the confederation and that will be treated as special EBGP peers.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show ip bgp neighbor

show ip bgp network

Verify the configuration.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

In the following example, the routing domain is divided into autonomous systems 50001, 50002, 50003, 50004, 50005, and 50006 and is identified by the confederation identifier 50007. Neighbor 10.2.3.4 is a peer inside of the routing domain confederation. Neighbor 10.4.5.6 is a peer outside of the routing domain confederation. To external peers and routing domains, the confederation appears as a single autonomous system with the number 50007.

router bgp 50000
bgp confederation identifier 50007
bgp confederation peers 50001 50002 50003 50004 50005 50006
neighbor 10.2.3.4 remote-as 50001
neighbor 10.4.5.6 remote-as 40000
end

BGP requires that all of the IBGP speakers be fully meshed. When a router receives a route from an external neighbor, it must advertise it to all internal neighbors. To prevent a routing information loop, all IBPG speakers must be connected. The internal neighbors do not send routes learned from internal neighbors to other internal neighbors.

With route reflectors, all IBGP speakers need not be fully meshed because another method is used to pass learned routes to neighbors. When you configure an internal BGP peer to be a route reflector, it is responsible for passing IBGP learned routes to a set of IBGP neighbors. The internal peers of the route reflector are divided into two groups: client peers and nonclient peers ( all the other routers in the autonomous system). A route reflector reflects routes between these two groups. The route reflector and its client peers form a cluster. The nonclient peers must be fully meshed with each other, but the client peers need not be fully meshed. The clients in the cluster do not communicate with IBGP speakers outside their cluster.

When the route reflector receives an advertised route, it takes one of these actions, depending on the neighbor:

■A route from an external BGP speaker is advertised to all clients and nonclient peers.

■A route from a nonclient peer is advertised to all clients.

■A route from a client is advertised to all clients and nonclient peers. Hence, the clients need not be fully meshed.

Usually a cluster of clients have a single route reflector, and the cluster is identified by the route reflector router ID. To increase redundancy and to avoid a single point of failure, a cluster might have more than one route reflector. In this case, all route reflectors in the cluster must be configured with the same 4-byte cluster ID so that a route reflector can recognize updates from route reflectors in the same cluster. All the route reflectors serving a cluster should be fully meshed and should have identical sets of client and nonclient peers.

Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router bgp autonomous-system

Enter BGP router configuration mode.

3.

neighbor ip-address | peer-group-name route-reflector-client

Configure the local router as a BGP route reflector and the specified neighbor as a client.

4.

bgp cluster-id cluster-id

(Optional) Configure the cluster ID if the cluster has more than one route reflector.

5.

no bgp client-to-client reflection

(Optional) Disable client-to-client route reflection. By default, the routes from a route reflector client are reflected to other clients. However, if the clients are fully meshed, the route reflector does not need to reflect routes to clients.

6.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

7.

show ip bgp

Verify the configuration. Display the originator ID and the cluster-list attributes.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

In the following router configuration mode example, the local router is a route reflector. It passes learned IBGP routes to the neighbor at 172.16.70.24.

router bgp 5
neighbor 172.16.70.24 route-reflector-client

Route flap dampening minimizes the propagation of flapping routes across an internetwork. A route is considered to be flapping when it is repeatedly available, then unavailable, then available, then unavailable, and so on. When route dampening is enabled, a numeric penalty value is assigned to a route when it flaps. When a route’s accumulated penalties reach a configurable limit, BGP suppresses advertisements of the route, even if the route is running. The reuse limit is a configurable value that is compared with the penalty. If the penalty is less than the reuse limit, a suppressed route that is up is advertised again.

Dampening is not applied to routes that are learned by IBGP. This policy prevents the IBGP peers from having a higher penalty for routes external to the AS.

Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router bgp autonomous-system

Enter BGP router configuration mode.

3.

bgp dampening

Enable BGP route dampening.

4.

bgp dampening half-life reuse suppress max-suppress [ route-map map ]

(Optional) Change the default values of route dampening factors.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show ip bgp flap-statistics [{ regexp regexp } | { filter-list list } | { address mask [ longer-prefix ]}]

(Optional) Monitor the flaps of all paths that are flapping. The statistics are deleted when the route is not suppressed and is stable.

7.

show ip bgp dampened-paths

(Optional) Display the dampened routes, including the time remaining before they are suppressed.

8.

clear ip bgp flap-statistics [{ regexp regexp } | { filter-list list } | { address mask [ longer-prefix ]}

(Optional) Clear BGP flap statistics to make it less likely that a route will be dampened.

9.

clear ip bgp dampening

(Optional) Clear route dampening information, and unsuppress the suppressed routes.

10.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable flap dampening, use the no bgp dampening router configuration command without keywords. To set dampening factors back to the default values, use the no bgp dampening router configuration command with values.

In the following example, BGP dampening is applied to prefixes filtered through the route-map named BLUE:

Switch(config)# ip prefix-list RED permit 10.0.0.0/8
Switch(config)# !
Switch(config)# route-map BLUE
 
Switch(config-route-map)# match ip address ip prefix-list RED
Switch(config-route-map)# exit
Switch(config)# router bgp 50000
 
Switch(config-router)# address-family ipv4
Switch(config-router-af)# bgp dampening route-map BLUE
Switch(config-router-af)# end

You can remove all contents of a particular cache, table, or database. This might be necessary when the contents of the particular structure have become or are suspected to be invalid.

You can display specific statistics, such as the contents of BGP routing tables, caches, and databases. You can use the information to get resource utilization and solve network problems. You can also display information about node reachability and discover the routing path your device’s packets are taking through the network.

Command
Purpose

clear ip bgp address

Reset a particular BGP connection.

clear ip bgp *

Reset all BGP connections.

clear ip bgp peer-group tag

Remove all members of a BGP peer group.

show ip bgp prefix

Display peer groups and peers not in peer groups to which the prefix has been advertised. Also display prefix attributes such as the next hop and the local prefix.

show ip bgp cidr-only

Display all BGP routes that contain subnet and supernet network masks.

show ip bgp community [ community-number ] [ exact ]

Display routes that belong to the specified communities.

show ip bgp community-list community-list-number [ exact-match ]

Display routes that are permitted by the community list.

show ip bgp filter-list access-list-number

Display routes that are matched by the specified AS path access list.

show ip bgp inconsistent-as

Display the routes with inconsistent originating autonomous systems.

show ip bgp regexp regular-expression

Display the routes that have an AS path that matches the specified regular expression entered on the command line.

show ip bgp

Display the contents of the BGP routing table.

show ip bgp neighbors [ address ]

Display detailed information on the BGP and TCP connections to individual neighbors.

show ip bgp neighbors [ address ] [ advertised-routes | dampened-routes | flap-statistics | paths regular-expression | received-routes | routes ]

Display routes learned from a particular BGP neighbor.

show ip bgp paths

Display all BGP paths in the database.

show ip bgp peer-group [ tag ] [ summary ]

Display information about BGP peer groups.

show ip bgp summary

Display the status of all BGP connections.

You can also enable the logging of messages generated when a BGP neighbor resets, comes up, or goes down by using the bgp log-neighbor changes router configuration command.

The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) Connectionless Network Service (CLNS) protocol is a standard for the network layer of the Open System Interconnection (OSI) model. Addresses in the ISO network architecture are referred to as network service access point (NSAP) addresses and network entity titles (NETs). Each node in an OSI network has one or more NETs. In addition, each node has many NSAP addresses.

When you enable connectionless routing on the switch by using the clns routing global configuration command, the switch makes only forwarding decisions, with no routing-related functionality. For dynamic routing, you must also enable a routing protocol. The switch supports the Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) dynamic routing protocols for ISO CLNS networks. This routing protocol supports the concept of areas. Within an area, all routers know how to reach all the system IDs. Between areas, routers know how to reach the proper area. IS-IS supports two levels of routing: station routing (within an area) and area routing (between areas).

The key difference between the ISO IGRP and IS-IS NSAP addressing schemes is in the definition of area addresses. Both use the system ID for Level 1 routing (routing within an area). However, they differ in the way addresses are specified for area routing. An ISO IGRP NSAP address includes three separate fields for routing: the domain, area, and system ID. An IS-IS address includes two fields: a single continuous area field (comprising the domain and area fields) and the system ID.

For more detailed information about ISO CLNS, see the ISO CLNS documents listed in the Related Documents.

IS-IS is an ISO dynamic routing protocol. Enabling IS-IS requires that you create an IS-IS routing process and assign it to a specific interface, rather than to a network. You can specify more than one IS-IS routing process per Layer 3 switch or router by using the multiarea IS-IS configuration syntax. You then configure the parameters for each instance of the IS-IS routing process.

Small IS-IS networks are built as a single area that includes all the routers in the network. As the network grows larger, it is usually reorganized into a backbone area made up of the connected set of all Level 2 routers from all areas, which is in turn connected to local areas. Within a local area, routers know how to reach all system IDs. Between areas, routers know how to reach the backbone, and the backbone routers know how to reach other areas.

Routers establish Level 1 adjacencies to perform routing within a local area (station routing). Routers establish Level 2 adjacencies to perform routing between Level 1 areas (area routing).

A single Cisco router can participate in routing in up to 29 areas and can perform Level 2 routing in the backbone. In general, each routing process corresponds to an area. By default, the first instance of the routing process configured performs both Level 1and Level 2 routing. You can configure additional router instances, which are automatically treated as Level 1 areas. You must configure the parameters for each instance of the IS-IS routing process individually.

For IS-IS multiarea routing, you can configure only one process to perform Level 2 routing, although you can define up to 29 Level 1 areas for each Cisco unit. If Level 2 routing is configured on any process, all additional processes are automatically configured as Level 1. You can configure this process to perform Level 1 routing at the same time. If Level 2 routing is not desired for a router instance, remove the Level 2 capability using the is-type global configuration command. Use the is-type command also to configure a different router instance as a Level 2 router.

This section briefly describes how to configure IS-IS routing. For more detailed information about IS-IS, see the IS-IS documents listed in the Related Documents.

This section includes the following topics:

■Default IS-IS Configuration

■Nonstop Forwarding Awareness

■Configuring IS-IS Global Parameters

■Configuring IS-IS Interface Parameters

Feature
Default Setting

Ignore link-state PDU (LSP) errors

Enabled.

IS-IS type

Conventional IS-IS: the router acts as both a Level 1 (station) and a Level 2 (area) router.

Multiarea IS-IS: the first instance of the IS-IS routing process is a Level 1-2 router. Remaining instances are Level 1 routers.

Default-information originate

Disabled.

Log IS-IS adjacency state changes.

Disabled.

LSP generation throttling timers

Maximum interval between two consecutive occurrences: 5 seconds.

Initial LSP generation delay: 50 ms.

Hold time between the first and second LSP generation: 5000 ms.

LSP maximum lifetime (without a refresh)

1200 seconds (20 minutes) before the LSP packet is deleted.

LSP refresh interval

Send LSP refreshes every 900 seconds (15 minutes).

Maximum LSP packet size

1497 bytes.

NSF7 Awareness

Enabled8. Allows Layer 3 switches to continue forwarding packets from a neighboring NSF-capable router during hardware or software changes.

Partial route computation (PRC) throttling timers

Maximum PRC wait interval: 5 seconds.

Initial PRC calculation delay after a topology change: 2000 ms.

Hold time between the first and second PRC calculation: 5000 ms.

Partition avoidance

Disabled.

Password

No area or domain password is defined, and authentication is disabled.

Set-overload-bit

Disabled. When enabled, if no arguments are entered, the overload bit is set immediately and remains set until you enter the no set-overload-bit command.

Shortest path first (SPF) throttling timers

Maximum interval between consecutive SFPs: 10 seconds.

Initial SFP calculation after a topology change: 5500 ms.

Holdtime between the first and second SFP calculation: 5500 ms.

Summary-address

Disabled.

The integrated IS-IS NSF Awareness feature is supported for IPv4 in the IP services image. The feature allows customer premises equipment (CPE) routers that are NSF-aware to help NSF-capable routers perform nonstop forwarding of packets. The local router is not necessarily performing NSF, but its awareness of NSF allows the integrity and accuracy of the routing database and link-state database on the neighboring NSF-capable router to be maintained during the switchover process.

This feature is automatically enabled and requires no configuration. For more information on this feature, see the “Configuring Nonstop Forwarding” chapter in the High Availability Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15S.

To enable IS-IS, you specify a name and NET for each routing process. You then enable IS-IS routing on the interface and specify the area for each instance of the routing process.

You should know your network design and how you want traffic to flow through it before configuring IS-IS. Define areas, prepare an addressing plan for the devices (including defining the NETs), and determine the interfaces that will run integrated IS-IS. To facilitate verification, a matrix of adjacencies should be prepared before you configure your devices, showing what neighbors should be expected in the adjacencies table.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

clns routing

Enable ISO connectionless routing on the switch.

3.

router isis [ area tag ]

Enable the IS-IS routing for the specified routing process and enter IS-IS routing configuration mode.

(Optional) Use the area tag argument to identify the area to which the IS-IS router is assigned. You must enter a value if you are configuring multiple IS-IS areas.

The first IS-IS instance configured is Level 1-2 by default. Later instances are automatically Level 1. You can change the level of routing by using the is-type global configuration command.

4.

net network-entity-title

Configure the NETs for the routing process. If you are configuring multiarea IS-IS, specify a NET for each routing process. You can specify a name for a NET and for an address.

5.

i s-type { level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only }

(Optional) You can configure the router to act as a Level 1 (station) router, a Level 2 (area) router for multi-area routing, or both (the default):

level-1 —act as a station router only

level-1-2 —act as both a station router and an area router

level 2 —act as an area router only

6.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

7.

interface interface-id

Specify an interface to route IS-IS, and enter interface configuration mode. If the interface is not already configured as a Layer 3 interface, enter the no switchport command to put it into Layer 3 mode.

8.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

9.

ip router isis [ area tag ]

Configure an IS-IS routing process for ISO CLNS on the interface and attach an area designator to the routing process.

10.

clns router isis [ area tag ]

Enable ISO CLNS on the interface.

11.

ip address ip-address-mask

Define the IP address for the interface. An IP address is required on all interfaces in an area enabled for IS-IS if any one interface is configured for IS-IS routing.

12.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

13.

show isis [ area tag ] database detail

Verify your entries.

14.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable IS-IS routing, use the no router isis area-tag router configuration command.

This example shows how to configure three routers to run conventional IS-IS as an IP routing protocol. In conventional IS-IS, all routers act as Level 1 and Level 2 routers (by default).

Router A:

Switch(config)# clns routing
Switch(config)# router isis
Switch(config-router)# net 49.0001.0000.0000.000a.00
Switch(config-router)# exit
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# ip router isis
Switch(config-if)# clns router isis
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# ip router isis
Switch(config-if)# clns router isis
Switch(config-router)# exit
 

Router B:

Switch(config)# clns routing
Switch(config)# router isis
Switch(config-router)# net 49.0001.0000.0000.000b.00
Switch(config-router)# exit
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# ip router isis
Switch(config-if)# clns router isis
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# ip router isis
Switch(config-if)# clns router isis
Switch(config-router)# exit
 

Router C:

Switch(config)# clns routing
Switch(config)# router isis
Switch(config-router)# net 49.0001.0000.0000.000c.00
Switch(config-router)# exit
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# ip router isis
Switch(config-if)# clns router isis
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# ip router isis
Switch(config-if)# clns router isis
Switch(config-router)# exit

These are some optional IS-IS global parameters that you can configure:

■You can force a default route into an IS-IS routing domain by configuring a default route controlled by a route map. You can also specify other filtering options configurable under a route map.

■You can configure the router to ignore IS-IS LSPs that are received with internal checksum errors or to purge corrupted LSPs, which causes the initiator of the LSP to regenerate it.

■You can assign passwords to areas and domains.

■You can create aggregate addresses that are represented in the routing table by a summary address (route-summarization). Routes learned from other routing protocols can also be summarized. The metric used to advertise the summary is the smallest metric of all the specific routes.

■You can set an overload bit.

■You can configure the LSP refresh interval and the maximum time that an LSP can remain in the router database without a refresh

■You can set the throttling timers for LSP generation, shortest path first computation, and partial route computation.

■You can configure the switch to generate a log message when an IS-IS adjacency changes state (up or down).

■If a link in the network has a maximum transmission unit (MTU) size of less than 1500 bytes, you can lower the LSP MTU so that routing will still occur.

■The partition avoidance router configuration command prevents an area from becoming partitioned when full connectivity is lost among a Level1-2 border router, adjacent Level 1 routers, and end hosts.

Enable IS-IS routing as described in the Enabling IS-IS Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

clns routing

Enable ISO connectionless routing on the switch.

3.

router isis

Specify the IS-IS routing protocol and enter router configuration mode.

4.

default-information originate [ route-map map-name ]

(Optional) Force a default route into the IS-IS routing domain. If you enter route-map map-name, the routing process generates the default route if the route map is satisfied.

5.

ignore-lsp-errors

(Optional) Configure the router to ignore LSPs with internal checksum errors, instead of purging the LSPs. This command is enabled by default (corrupted LSPs are dropped). To purge the corrupted LSPs, enter the no ignore-lsp-errors router configuration command.

6.

area-password password

(Optional Configure the area authentication password, which is inserted in Level 1 (station router level) LSPs.

7.

domain-password password

(Optional) Configure the routing domain authentication password, which is inserted in Level 2 (area router level) LSPs.

8.

summary-address address mask [ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ]

(Optional) Create a summary of addresses for a given level.

9.

set-overload-bit [ on-startup { seconds | wait-for-bgp }]

(Optional) Set an overload bit (a hippity bit) to allow other routers to ignore the router in their shortest path first (SPF) calculations if the router is having problems.

■(Optional) on-startup —sets the overload bit only on startup. If on-startup is not specified, the overload bit is set immediately and remains set until you enter the no set-overload-bit command. If on-startup is specified, you must enter a number of seconds or wait-for-bgp.

■ seconds —When the on-startup keyword is configured, causes the overload bit to be set upon system startup and remain set for this number of seconds. The range is from 5 to 86400 seconds.

wait-for-bgp —When the on-startup keyword is configured, causes the overload bit to be set upon system startup and remain set until BGP has converged. If BGP does not signal IS-IS that it is converged, IS-IS will turn off the overload bit after 10 minutes.

10.

lsp-refresh-interval seconds

(Optional) Set an LSP refresh interval in seconds. The range is from 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is to send LSP refreshes every 900 seconds (15 minutes).

11.

max-lsp-lifetime seconds

(Optional) Set the maximum time that LSP packets remain in the router database without being refreshed. The range is from 1 to 65535 seconds. The default is 1200 seconds (20 minutes). After the specified time interval, the LSP packet is deleted.

12.

lsp-g en-interval [ level-1 | level-2 ] lsp-max-wait [ lsp-initial-wait lsp-second-wait ]

(Optional) Set the IS-IS LSP generation throttling timers:

■ lsp-max-wait —the maximum interval (in seconds) between two consecutive occurrences of an LSP being generated. The range is 1 to 120, the default is 5.

■ lsp-initial-wait —the initial LSP generation delay (in milliseconds). The range is 1 to 10000; the default is 50.

■ lsp-second-wait— the hold time between the first and second LSP generation (in milliseconds). The range is 1 to 10000; the default is 5000.

13.

spf-interval [ level-1 | level-2 ] spf-max-wait [ spf-initial-wait spf-second-wait ]

(Optional) Sets IS-IS shortest path first (SPF) throttling timers.

■ spf-max-wait —the maximum interval between consecutive SFPs (in seconds). The range is 1 to 120, the default is 10.

■ spf-initial-wait —the initial SFP calculation after a topology change (in milliseconds). The range is 1 to 10000; the default is 5500.

■ spf-second-wait —the holdtime between the first and second SFP calculation (in milliseconds). The range is 1 to 10000; the default is 5500.

14.

prc-interval prc-max-wait [ prc-initial-wait prc-second-wait ]

(Optional) Sets IS-IS partial route computation (PRC) throttling timers.

■ prc-max-wait— the maximum interval (in seconds) between two consecutive PRC calculations. The range is 1 to 120; the default is 5.

■ prc-initial-wait— the initial PRC calculation delay (in milliseconds) after a topology change. The range is 1 to 10,000; the default is 2000.

■ prc-second-wait— the hold time between the first and second PRC calculation (in milliseconds). The range is 1 to 10,000; the default is 5000.

15.

log-adjacency-changes [ detail ]

(Optional) Set the router to log IS-IS adjacency state changes. Enter detail to include all changes generated by events that are not related to the Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System Hellos, including End System-to-Intermediate System PDUs and link state packets (LSPs).

16.

lsp-mtu size

(Optional) Specify the maximum LSP packet size in bytes. The range is 128 to 4352; the default is 1497 bytes.

Note: If any link in the network has a reduced MTU size, you must change the LSP MTU size on all routers in the network.

17.

partition avoidance

(Optional) Causes an IS-IS Level 1-2 border router to stop advertising the Level 1 area prefix into the Level 2 backbone when full connectivity is lost among the border router, all adjacent level 1 routers, and end hosts.

18.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

19.

show clns

Verify your entries.

20.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable default route generation, use the no default-information originate router configuration command. Use the no area-password or no domain-password router configuration command to disable passwords. To disable LSP MTU settings, use the no lsp mtu router configuration command. To return to the default conditions for summary addressing, LSP refresh interval, LSP lifetime, LSP timers, SFP timers, and PRC timers, use the no form of the commands. Use the no partition avoidance router configuration command to disable the output format.

Switch(config)# clns routing
Switch(config)# router isis
Switch(config-router)# set-overloadbit on-startup 360
Switch(config-router)# log-adjacency-changes
Switch(config-router)# ignore-lsp-errors
Switch(config-router)# max-lsp-lifetime 65535
Switch(config-router)# lsp-refresh-interval 65000
Switch(config-router)# spf-interval 5 1 50
Switch(config-router)# prc-interval 5 1 50
Switch(config-router)# lsp-gen-interval 5 1 50
Switch(config-router)# end

You can optionally configure certain interface-specific IS-IS parameters, independently from other attached routers. However, if you change some values from the defaults, such as multipliers and time intervals, it makes sense to also change them on multiple routers and interfaces. Most of the interface parameters can be configured for level 1, level 2, or both.

These are some interface level parameters you can configure:

■The default metric on the interface, which is used as a value for the IS-IS metric and assigned when there is no quality of service (QoS) routing performed.

■The hello interval (length of time between hello packets sent on the interface) or the default hello packet multiplier used on the interface to determine the hold time sent in IS-IS hello packets. The hold time determines how long a neighbor waits for another hello packet before declaring the neighbor down. This determines how quickly a failed link or neighbor is detected so that routes can be recalculated. Change the hello multiplier in circumstances where hello packets are lost frequently and IS-IS adjacencies are failing unnecessarily. You can raise the hello multiplier and lower the hello interval correspondingly to make the hello protocol more reliable without increasing the time required to detect a link failure.

■Other time intervals:

–Complete sequence number PDU (CSNP) interval. CSNPs are sent by the designated router to maintain database synchronization.

–Retransmission interval. This is the time between retransmission of IS-IS LSPs for point-to-point links.

–IS-IS LSP retransmission throttle interval. This is the maximum rate (number of milliseconds between packets) at which IS-IS LSPs are re-sent on point-to-point links This interval is different from the retransmission interval, which is the time between successive retransmissions of the same LSP.

■Designated router election priority, which allows you to reduce the number of adjacencies required on a multiaccess network, which in turn reduces the amount of routing protocol traffic and the size of the topology database.

■The interface circuit type, which is the type of adjacency desired for neighbors on the specified interface.

■Password authentication for the interface.

Enable IS-IS routing as described in the Enabling IS-IS Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Specify the interface to be configured and enter interface configuration mode. If the interface is not already configured as a Layer 3 interface, enter the no switchport command to put it into Layer 3 mode.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

4.

isis metric default-metric [ level -1 | level-2 ]

(Optional) Configure the metric (or cost) for the specified interface. The range is from 0 to 63. The default is 10. If no level is entered, the default is to apply to both Level 1 and Level 2 routers.

5.

isis hello-interval { seconds | minimal } [ level-1 | level-2 ]

(Optional) Specify the length of time between hello packets sent by the switch. By default, a value three times the hello interval seconds is advertised as the holdtime in the hello packets sent. With smaller hello intervals, topological changes are detected faster, but there is more routing traffic.

minimal— causes the system to compute the hello interval based on the hello multiplier so that the resulting hold time is 1 second.

■ seconds the range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 10 seconds.

6.

isis hello-multiplier multiplier [ level-1 | level-2 ]

(Optional) Specify the number of IS-IS hello packets a neighbor must miss before the router should declare the adjacency as down. The range is from 3 to 1000. The default is 3. Using a smaller hello multiplier causes fast convergence, but can result in more routing instability.

7.

isis csnp-interval seconds [ level-1 | level-2 ]

(Optional) Configure the IS-IS complete sequence number PDU (CSNP) interval for the interface. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 10 seconds.

8.

isis retransmit-interval seconds

(Optional) Configure the number of seconds between retransmission of IS-IS LSPs for point-to-point links. The value you specify should be an integer greater than the expected round-trip delay between any two routers on the network. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 5 seconds.

9.

isis retransmit-throttle-interval milliseconds

(Optional) Configure the IS-IS LSP retransmission throttle interval, which is the maximum rate (number of milliseconds between packets) at which IS-IS LSPs will be re-sent on point-to-point links. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is determined by the isis lsp-interval command.

10.

isis priority value [ level-1 | level-2 ]

(Optional) Configure the priority to use for designated router election. The range is from 0 to 127. The default is 64.

11.

isis circuit-type { level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only }

(Optional) Configure the type of adjacency desired for neighbors on the specified interface (specify the interface circuit type).

level-1 —a Level 1 adjacency is established if there is at least one area address common to both this node and its neighbors.

level-1-2 —a Level 1 and 2 adjacency is established if the neighbor is also configured as both Level 1 and Level 2 and there is at least one area in common. If there is no area in common, a Level 2 adjacency is established. This is the default.

level 2 —a Level 2 adjacency is established. If the neighbor router is a Level 1 router, no adjacency is established.

12.

isis password password [ level-1 | level-2 ]

(Optional) Configure the authentication password for an interface. By default, authentication is disabled. Specifying Level 1 or Level 2 enables the password only for Level 1 or Level 2 routing, respectively. If you do not specify a level, the default is Level 1 and Level 2.

13.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

14.

show clns interface interface-id

Verify your entries.

15.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To return to the default settings, use the no forms of the commands.

The following configuration example for an IS-IS routing process called area1 sets a global default metric of 111 for the IS-IS interfaces:

interface Ethernet3/1
ip address 172.16.10.2 255.255.0.0
ip router isis area1
no ip route-cache
duplex half
!
interface Ethernet3/2
ip address 192.168.242.2 255.255.255.0
ip router isis area1
no ip route-cache
duplex half
router isis area1
net 01.0000.0309.1234.00
metric-style wide
metric 111
 

You can remove all contents of a CLNS cache or remove information for a particular neighbor or route. You can display specific CLNS or IS-IS statistics, such as the contents of routing tables, caches, and databases. You can also display information about specific interfaces, filters, or neighbors.

Command
Purpose

clear clns cache

Clear and reinitialize the CLNS routing cache.

clear clns es-neighbors

Remove end system (ES) neighbor information from the adjacency database.

clear clns is-neighbors

Remove intermediate system (IS) neighbor information from the adjacency database.

clear clns neighbors

Remove CLNS neighbor information from the adjacency database.

clear clns route

Remove dynamically derived CLNS routing information.

show clns

Display information about the CLNS network.

show clns cache

Display the entries in the CLNS routing cache.

show clns es-neighbors

Display ES neighbor entries, including the associated areas.

show clns filter-expr

Display filter expressions.

show clns filter-set

Display filter sets.

show clns interface [ interface-id ]

Display the CLNS-specific or ES-IS information about each interface.

show clns neighbor

Display information about IS-IS neighbors.

show clns protocol

List the protocol-specific information for each IS-IS or ISO IGRP routing process in this router.

show clns route

Display all the destinations to which this router knows how to route CLNS packets.

show clns traffic

Display information about the CLNS packets this router has seen.

show ip route isis

Display the current state of the IS-IS IP routing table.

show isis database

Display the IS-IS link-state database.

show isis routes

Display the IS-IS Level 1 routing table.

show isis spf-log

Display a history of the shortest path first (SPF) calculations for IS-IS.

show isis topology

Display a list of all connected routers in all areas.

show route-map

Display all route maps configured or only the one specified.

trace clns destination

Discover the paths taken to a specified destination by packets in the network.

which-route { nsap-address | clns-name }

Display the routing table in which the specified CLNS destination is found.

The Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Protocol quickly detects forwarding-path failures for a variety of media types, encapsulations, topologies, and routing protocols. It operates in a unicast, point-to-point mode on top of any data protocol being forwarded between two systems to track IPv4 connectivity between directly connected neighbors. BFD packets are encapsulated in UDP packets with a destination port number of 3784 or 3785.

In EIGRP, IS-IS, and OSPF deployments, the closest alternative to BFD is the use of modified failure-detection mechanisms. Although reducing the EIGRP, IS-IS, and OSPF timers can result in a failure-detection rate of 1 to 2 seconds, BFD can provide failure detection in less than 1 second. BFD can be less CPU-intensive than the reduced timers and, because it is not tied to any particular routing protocol, it can be used as a generic and consistent failure detection mechanism for multiple routing protocols.

To create a BFD session, you must configure BFD on both systems (BFD peers). Enabling BFD at the interface and routing protocol level on BFD peers creates a BFD session. BFD timers are negotiated and the BFD peers send control packets to each other at the negotiated intervals. If the neighbor is not directly connected, BFD neighbor registration is rejected.

Figure 104 shows a simple network with two routers running OSPF and BFD. When OSPF discovers a neighbor (1), it sends a request to the BFD process to initiate a BFD neighbor session with the neighbor OSPF router (2), establishing the BFD neighbor session (3).

Figure 104 Establishing a BFD Session

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

Figure 105 shows what happens when a failure occurs in the network (1). The BFD neighbor session with the OSPF neighbor closes (2). BFD notifies the OSPF process that the BFD neighbor is no longer reachable, and the OSPF process breaks the OSPF neighbor relationship (4). If an alternative path is available, the routers start converging on it.

Figure 105 Breaking an OSPF Neighbor Relationship

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

BFD clients are routing protocols that register neighbors with BFD. The switch supports IS-IS, OSPF v1 and v2, BGP, EIGRP, and HSRP clients. You can use one BFD session for multiple client protocols. For example, if a network is running OSPF and EIGRP across the same link to the same peer, you need to create only one BFD session, and information is shared with both routing protocols.

The switch supports BFD version 0 and version 1. BFD neighbors automatically negotiate the version and the protocol always runs at the higher version. The default version is version 1.

By default, BFD neighbors exchange both control packets and echo packets for detecting forwarding failures. The switch sends echo packets at the configured BFD interval rate (from 50 to 999 ms), and control packets at the BFD slow-timer rate (from 1000 to 3000 ms).

Failure-rate detection can be faster in BFD echo mode, which is enabled by default when you configure BFD session. In this mode, the switch sends echo packets from the BFD software layer, and the BFD neighbor responds to the echo packets through its fast-switching layer. The echo packets do not reach the BFD neighbor software layer, but are reflected back over the forwarding path for failure detection. You configure the rate at which each BFD interface sends BFD echo packets by entering the bfd interval interface configuration command.

To reduce bandwidth consumption, you can disable the sending of echo packets by entering the no bfd echo interface configuration command. When echo mode is disabled, control packets are used to detect forwarding failures. Control packets are exchanged at the configured slow-timer rate, which could result in longer failure-detection time. You configure this rate by entering the bfd slow-timer global configuration command. The range is from 1000 to 3000 ms; the default rate is every 1000 ms.

You can enable or disable echo processing at a switch interface independent of the BFD neighbor configuration. Disabling echo mode only disables the sending of echo packets by the interface. The fast-switching layer that receives an echo packet always reflects it back to the sender.

To run BFD on a switch, you need to configure basic BFD interval parameters on BFD interfaces, enable routing on the switch, and enable one or more one routing protocol clients for BFD. You also need to confirm that Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) is enabled (the default) on participating switches.

For more information on the configuration and commands, see the BFD documents listed in the Related Documents.

This section includes the following topics:

■Default BFD Configuration

■Default BFD Configuration Guidelines

■Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface

■Enabling BFD Routing Protocol Clients

■No BFD sessions are configured. BFD is disabled on all interfaces.

■When configured, BFD version 1 is the default, but switches negotiate for version. Version 0 is also supported.

■Standby BFD (for HSRP) is enabled by default.

■Asynchronous BFD echo mode is enabled when a BFD session is configured.

The switch supports a maximum of 28 BFD sessions at one time.

■Configure basic BFD interval parameters on each interface over which you want to run BFD sessions.

■Enable routing on the switch. You can configure BFD without enabling routing, but BFD sessions do not become active unless routing is enabled on the switch and on the BFD interfaces.

■Enable one or more one routing protocol clients for BFD. You should implement fast convergence for the routing protocol that you are using.

Note: We recommend that you configure the BFD interval parameters on an interface before configuring the routing protocol commands, especially when using EIGRP.

Confirm that CEF is enabled on participating switches (the default) as well as IP routing.

BFD is supported on physical interfaces that are configured as routing interfaces. It is not supported on Layer 2 interfaces, pseudowires, static routes, SVI interfaces, or port channels.

Although you can configure BFD interface commands on a Layer 2 port, BFD sessions do not operate on the interface unless it is configured as a Layer 3 interface (no switchport) and assigned an IP address.

In HSRP BFD, standby BFD is enabled globally by default and on all interfaces. If you disable it on an interface, you then must disable and reenable it globally for BFD sessions to be active.

When using BFD echo mode (the default), you should disable sending of ICMP redirect messages by entering the no ip redirects interface configuration command on the BFD interface.

Before you can start a BFD session on an interface, you must put the interface into Layer 3 mode and set the baseline BFD parameters on it.

Note: Although you can configure BFD on Layer 2 interfaces, a BFD session cannot start until both interfaces are in Layer 3 mode and routing is enabled on the switch.

See Default BFD Configuration Guidelines.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Specify an interface for a BFD session, and enter interface configuration mode. Only physical interfaces support BFD.

3.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. User network interfaces (UNIs) and enhanced network interfaces (ENIs) are disabled by default; network node interfaces (NNIs) are enabled by default.

4.

no switchport

Remove the interface from Layer 2 configuration mode.

5.

ip address ip-address subnet-mask

Configure the IP address and IP subnet mask.

6.

bfd interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value

Set BFD parameters for echo packets on the interface.

interval —Specify the rate at which BFD echo packets are sent to BFD peers. The range is from 50 to 999 milliseconds (ms).

min_rx —Specify the rate at which BFD echo packets are expected to be received from BFD peers. The range is from 50 to 999 ms.

multiplier —Specify the number of consecutive BFD echo packets that must be missed from a BFD peer before BFD declares that it is unavailable and informs the other BFD peer of the failure. The range is from 3 to 50.

Note: There are no baseline BFD parameter defaults.

7.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

show running-config

Verify your entries.

9.

show bfd neighbor detail

(Optional) Display the final configured or negotiated values when the session is created with a neighbor.

10.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To remove the BFD parameter configuration, enter the no bfd interval interface configuration command.

After you configure BFD parameters on an interface, you can start a BFD session for one or more routing protocols. You must first enable routing by entering the ip routing global configuration command on the switch. Note that there can be more than one way to start a BFD session on an interface, depending on the routing protocol.

■Configuring BFD for OSPF

■Configuring BFD for IS-IS

■Configuring BFD for BGP

■Configuring BFD for EIGRP

■Configuring BFD for HSRP

When you start BFD sessions for OSPF, OSPF must be running on all participating devices. You can enable BFD support for OSPF by enabling it globally on all OSPF interfaces or by enabling it on one or more interfaces.

■Configure BFD parameters as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface.

■Configure OSPF as described in the Configuring OSPF.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router ospf process- id

Specify an OSPF process, and enter router configuration mode.

3.

bfd all-interfaces

Enable BFD globally on all interfaces associated with the OSPF routing process.

4.

exit

(Optional) Return to global configuration mode if you want to disable BFD on one or more OSPF interfaces.

5.

interface interface-id

(Optional) Specify an interface, and enter interface configuration mode.

6.

ip ospf bfd disable

(Optional) Disable BFD on the specified OSPF interface. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for all OSPF interfaces on which you do not want to run BFD sessions.

7.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

show bfd neighbors [ detail ]

Verify the configuration.

9.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable OSPF BFD on all interfaces, enter the no bfd all-interfaces router configuration command.To disable it on an interface, enter the no ip osfp bfd or the ip ospf bfd disable interface configuration command on the interface.

If you want to run OSPF BFD on only one or a few interfaces, you can enter the ip ospf bfd interface configuration command on those interfaces instead of enabling it globally. See the next procedure.

Note: If you try to configure OSPF BFD on a Layer 2 interface, the configuration is not recognized.

This is an example of enabling BFD for OSPF on all OSPF interfaces:

Switch(config)# router ospf 109
Switch(config-router)# bfd all-interfaces
Switch(config-router)# exit

■Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface.

■Configure OSPF as described in the Configuring OSPF.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router ospf process- id

Specify an OSPF process, and enter router configuration mode.

3.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

4.

interface interface-id

Specify an interface, and enter interface configuration mode.

5.

ip ospf bfd

Enable BFD on the specified OSPF interface. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all OSPF interfaces on which you want to run BFD sessions.

6.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

7.

show bfd neighbors [ detail ]

Verify the configuration.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable OSPF BFD on an interface, enter the no ip osfp bfd or the ip ospf bfd disable interface configuration command on the interface.

This is an example of enabling BFD for OSPF on a single interface:

Switch(config)# router ospf 109
Switch(config-router)# exit
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# ip ospf bfd

When you start BFD sessions for IS-IS, IS-IS must be running on all devices participating in BFD. You can enable BFD support for IS-IS by enabling it globally on all IS-IS interfaces or by enabling it on one or more interfaces.

■Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface.

■Configure IS-IS as described in the Configuring IS-IS Dynamic Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router is-is area-tag

Specify an IS-IS process and enter router configuration mode.

3.

bfd all-interfaces

Enable BFD globally on all interfaces associated with the IS-IS routing process.

4.

exit

(Optional) Return to global configuration mode if you want to disable BFD on one or more IS-IS interfaces.

5.

interface interface-id

(Optional) Specify an interface and enter interface configuration mode.

6.

ip router isis

(Optional) Enable IPv4 IS-IS routing on the interface.

7.

isis bfd disable

(Optional) Disable BFD on the IS-IS interface. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for all IS-IS interfaces on which you do not want to run BFD sessions.

8.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

9.

show bfd neighbors [ detail ]

Verify the configuration.

10.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable IS-IS BFD on all interfaces, enter the no bfd all-interfaces router configuration command. To disable it on the specified interface, enter the no isis bfd or the isis bfd disable interface configuration command on the interface.

If you only want to run IS-IS BFD on a few interfaces, instead of enabling it globally, you can enter the isis bfd interface configuration command on those interfaces. See the next procedure.

Note: Although IS-IS BFD operates only on Layer 3 interfaces, you can configure it on interfaces in Layer 2 or Layer 3 mode. When you enable it, you see this message:
%ISIS BFD is reverting to router mode configuration, and remains disabled.

This is an example of setting fast convergence and enabling BFD for IS-IS on all IS-IS interfaces:

Switch(config)# router is-is tag1
Switch(config-router)# bfd all-interfaces
Switch(config-router)# exit

■Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface.

■Configure IS-IS as described in the Configuring IS-IS Dynamic Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router is-is area-tag

Specify an IS-IS process and enter router configuration mode.

3.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

4.

interface interface-id

Specify an interface, and enter interface configuration mode.

5.

isis bfd

Enable BFD on the specified IS-IS interface. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all IS-IS interfaces on which you want to run BFD sessions.

6.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

7.

show bfd neighbors [ detail ]

Verify the configuration.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable IS-IS BFD on an interface, enter the no isis bfd or the isis bfd disable interface configuration command on the interface.

This is an example of enabling BFD for IS-IS on a single interface:

Switch(config)# router is-is tag1
Switch(config-router)# exit
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# isis bfd

When you start BFD sessions for BGP, BGP must be running on all participating devices. You enter the IP address of the BFD neighbor to enable BFD for BGP.

■Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface.

■Configure BGP as described in the Configuring BGP.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router bgp as-tag

Specify a BGP autonomous system, and enter router configuration mode.

3.

neighbor ip-address fall-over bfd

Enable BFD support for fallover on the BFD neighbor.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show bfd neighbors [ detail ] > show ip bgp neighbor

Verify the configuration.

Display information about BGP connections to neighbors.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable BGP BFD, enter the no neighbor ip-address fall-over bfd router configuration command.

When you start BFD sessions for EIGRP, EIGRP must be running on all participating devices.You can enable BFD support for EIGRP by globally enabling it on all EIGRP interfaces or by enabling it on one or more interfaces.

■Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface.

■Configure EIGRP as described in the Configuring EIGRP.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router eigrp as-number

Specify an EIGRP autonomous system number, and enter router configuration mode.

3.

log-adjacency changes [ detail ]

Configure the switch to send a system logging message when an EIGRP neighbor goes up or down.

4.

bfd { all-interfaces | interface interface-id }

Enable BFD for EIGRP.

■Enter all-interfaces to globally enable BFD on all interfaces associated with the EIGRP routing process.

■Enter interface interface-id to enable BFD on a per-interface basis for one or more interfaces associated with the EIGRP routing process.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show bfd neighbors [ detail ]

Verify the configuration.

7.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable EIGRP BFD on all interfaces, enter the no bfd all-interfaces router configuration command. To disable it on an interface, enter the no bfd interface interface-id router configuration command.

HSRP supports BFD by default; it is globally enabled on all interfaces. If HSRP support has been manually disabled, you can reenable it in interface or global configuration mode.

■Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface.

■Ensure that all participating devices have HSRP enabled and CEF enabled (the default).

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Specify an interface for a BFD session, and enter interface configuration mode. Only physical interfaces support BFD.

3.

ip address ip-address subnet-mask

Configure the IP address and IP subnet mask for the interface.

4.

standby [ group-number ] ip [ ip-address ] [ secondary ]]

Activate HSRP.

5.

standby bfd

(Optional) Enable HSRP support for BFD on the interface.

6.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

7.

standby bfd all-interfaces

(Optional) Enable HSRP support for BFD on all interfaces.

8.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

9.

show standby neighbors

Verify your entries.

10.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable HSRP support for BFD on all interfaces, enter the no standby bfd all-interfaces global configuration command. To disable it on an interface, enter the no standby bfd interface configuration command.

Note: If you disable standby BFD on an interface by entering the no standby bfd interface configuration command, to activate BFD sessions on other interfaces, you must disable and reenable it globally by entering the no standby bfd all-interfaces global configuration command followed by the standby bfd all-interfaces global configuration command.

The following example shows how to reenable HSRP BFD peering if it has been disabled on a switch:

Switch(config)# standby bfd all-interfaces

When you configure a BFD session, BFD echo mode is enabled by default on BFD interfaces. You can disable echo mode on an interface so it sends no echo packets and but only sends back echo packets received from a neighbor. When echo mode is disabled, control packets are used to detect forwarding failures. You can configure slow timers to reduce the frequency of BFD control packets.

Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter a BFD interface and enter interface configuration mode.

3.

no bfd echo

Disable BFD echo mode on the interface. It is enabled by default, but can be disabled independently on BFD neighbors.

4.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

5.

bfd slow-timer [ milliseconds ]

(Optional) Configure a BFD slow-timer value. The range is from 1000 to 30000 milliseconds. The default is 1000 milliseconds.

6.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

7.

show bfd neighbors detail

Verify your entries.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To reenable echo mode on the switch, enter the bfd echo global configuration command.

The following example disables echo mode between BFD neighbors:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface Ethernet 0/1
Switch(config-if)# no bfd echo

Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) provide a secure way for customers to share bandwidth over an ISP backbone network. A VPN is a collection of sites sharing a common routing table. A customer site is connected to the service-provider network by one or more interfaces, and the service provider associates each interface with a VPN routing table, called a VPN routing/forwarding (VRF) table.

The switch supports multiple VPN routing/forwarding (multi-VRF) instances in customer edge (CE) devices (multi-VRF CE). With multi-VRF CE, a service provider can support two or more VPNs with overlapping IP addresses.

Note: The switch does not use Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) to support VPNs. For information about MPLS VRF, refer to the MPLS: Layer 3 VPNs Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T.

■Information About Multi-VRF CE

■Default Multi-VRF CE Configuration

■Multi-VRF CE Configuration Guidelines

■Configuring VRFs

■Configuring VRF-Aware Services

■Configuring a VPN Routing Session

■Configuring BGP PE to CE Routing Sessions

■Displaying Multi-VRF CE Status

Multi-VRF CE allows a service provider to support two or more VPNs, where IP addresses can be overlapped among the VPNs. Multi-VRF CE uses input interfaces to distinguish routes for different VPNs and forms virtual packet-forwarding tables by associating one or more Layer 3 interfaces with each VRF. Interfaces in a VRF can be either physical, such as Ethernet ports, or logical, such as VLAN SVIs, but an interface cannot belong to more than one VRF at any time.

Note: Multi-VRF CE interfaces must be Layer 3 interfaces.

Multi-VRF CE includes these devices:

■Customer edge (CE) devices provide customers access to the service-provider network over a data link to one or more provider edge routers. The CE device advertises the site local routes to the router and learns the remote VPN routes from it. The Cisco Connected Grid switch can be a CE.

■Provider edge (PE) routers exchange routing information with CE devices by using static routing or a routing protocol such as BGP, RIPv2, OSPF, or EIGRP. The PE is only required to maintain VPN routes for those VPNs to which it is directly attached, eliminating the need for the PE to maintain all of the service-provider VPN routes. Each PE router maintains a VRF for each of its directly connected sites. Multiple interfaces on a PE router can be associated with a single VRF if all of these sites participate in the same VPN. Each VPN is mapped to a specified VRF. After learning local VPN routes from CEs, a PE router exchanges VPN routing information with other PE routers by using internal BGP (IBPG).

■Provider routers or core routers are any routers in the service provider network that do not attach to CE devices.

With multi-VRF CE, multiple customers can share one CE, and only one physical link is used between the CE and the PE. The shared CE maintains separate VRF tables for each customer and switches or routes packets for each customer based on its own routing table. Multi-VRF CE extends limited PE functionality to a CE device, giving it the ability to maintain separate VRF tables to extend the privacy and security of a VPN to the branch office.

Figure 106 shows a configuration using Cisco Connected Grid switches as multiple virtual CEs. This scenario is suited for customers who have low bandwidth requirements for their VPN service, for example, small companies. In this case, multi-VRF CE support is required in the Cisco Connected Grid switches. Because multi-VRF CE is a Layer 3 feature, each interface in a VRF must be a Layer 3 interface.

Figure 106 Switches Acting as Multiple Virtual CEs

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

When the CE switch receives a command to add a Layer 3 interface to a VRF, it sets up the appropriate mapping between the VLAN ID and the policy label (PL) in multi-VRF-CE-related data structures and adds the VLAN ID and PL to the VLAN database.

When multi-VRF CE is configured, the Layer 3 forwarding table is conceptually partitioned into two sections:

■The multi-VRF CE routing section contains the routes from different VPNs.

■The global routing section contains routes to non-VPN networks, such as the Internet.

VLAN IDs from different VRFs are mapped into different policy labels, which are used to distinguish the VRFs during processing. If no route is found in the multi-VRF CE section of the Layer 3 forwarding table, the global routing section is used to determine the forwarding path. For each new VPN route learned, the Layer 3 setup function retrieves the policy label by using the VLAN ID of the ingress port and inserts the policy label and new route to the multi-VRF CE routing section. If the packet is received from a routed port, the port internal VLAN ID number is used; if the packet is received from an SVI, the VLAN number is used.

This is the packet-forwarding process in a multi-VRF-CE-enabled network:

■When the switch receives a packet from a VPN, the switch looks up the routing table based on the input policy label number. When a route is found, the switch forwards the packet to the PE.

■When the ingress PE receives a packet from the CE, it performs a VRF lookup. When a route is found, the router adds a corresponding MPLS label to the packet and sends it to the MPLS network.

■When an egress PE receives a packet from the network, it strips the label and uses the label to identify the correct VPN routing table. Then it performs the normal route lookup. When a route is found, it forwards the packet to the correct adjacency.

■When a CE receives a packet from an egress PE, it uses the input policy label to look up the correct VPN routing table. If a route is found, it forwards the packet within the VPN.

To configure VRF, you create a VRF table and specify the Layer 3 interface associated with the VRF. Then configure the routing protocols in the VPN and between the CE and the PE. BGP is the preferred routing protocol used to distribute VPN routing information across the provider’s backbone. The multi-VRF CE network has three major components:

■VPN route target communities—lists of all other members of a VPN community. You need to configure VPN route targets for each VPN community member.

■Multiprotocol BGP peering of VPN community PE routers—propagates VRF reachability information to all members of a VPN community. You need to configure BGP peering in all PE routers within a VPN community.

■VPN forwarding—transports all traffic between all VPN community members across a VPN service-provider network.

Feature
Default Setting

VRF

Disabled. No VRFs are defined.

Maps

No import maps, export maps, or route maps are defined.

VRF maximum routes

5000

Forwarding table

The default for an interface is the global routing table.

These are considerations when configuring VRF in your network:

■A switch with multi-VRF CE is shared by multiple customers, and each customer has its own routing table.

■Because customers use different VRF tables, the same IP addresses can be reused. Overlapped IP addresses are allowed in different VPNs.

■Multi-VRF CE lets multiple customers share the same physical link between the PE and the CE. Trunk ports with multiple VLANs separate packets among customers. Each customer has its own VLAN.

■Multi-VRF CE does not support all MPLS-VRF functionality. It does not support label exchange, LDP adjacency, or labeled packets.

■For the PE router, there is no difference between using multi-VRF CE or using multiple CEs. In Figure 106, multiple virtual Layer 3 interfaces are connected to the multi-VRF CE device.

■The switch supports configuring VRF by using physical ports, VLAN SVIs, or a combination of both. The SVIs can be connected through an access port or a trunk port.

■A customer can use multiple VLANs as long as they do not overlap with those of other customers. A customer’s VLANs are mapped to a specific routing table ID that is used to identify the appropriate routing tables stored on the switch.

■The switch supports one global network and up to 26 VRFs.

■Most routing protocols (BGP, OSPF, RIP, EIGRP, and static routing) can be used between the CE and the PE. However, we recommend using external BGP (EBGP) for these reasons:

–BGP does not require multiple algorithms to communicate with multiple CEs.

–BGP is designed for passing routing information between systems run by different administrations.

–BGP makes it easy to pass attributes of the routes to the CE.

■Multi-VRF CE does not affect the packet switching rate.

■If no VRFs are configured, up to 105 policies can be configured.

■If even one VRF is configured than 41 policies can be configured.

■If more than 41 policies are configured then VRF cannot be configured.

■VRF and private VLANs are mutually exclusive. You cannot enable VRF on a private VLAN. Similarly, you cannot enable private VLAN on a VLAN with VRF configured on the VLAN interface.

■VRF and policy-based routing (PBR) are mutually exclusive on a switch interface. You cannot enable VRF when PBR is enabled on an interface. In contrast, you cannot enable PBR when VRF is enabled on an interface.

Follow the steps in this procedure to configure one or more VRFs.

See Multi-VRF CE Configuration Guidelines.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip routing

Enable IP routing.

3.

ip vrf vrf-name

Name the VRF, and enter VRF configuration mode.

4.

rd route-distinguisher

Create a VRF table by specifying a route distinguisher. Enter either an AS number and an arbitrary number (xxx:y) or an IP address and arbitrary number (A.B.C.D:y).

5.

route-target { export | import | both } route-target-ext-community

Create a list of import, export, or import and export route target communities for the specified VRF. Enter either an AS system number and an arbitrary number (xxx:y) or an IP address and an arbitrary number (A.B.C.D:y). The route-target-ext-community should be the same as the route-distinguisher entered in Step 4.

6.

import map route-map

(Optional) Associate a route map with the VRF.

7.

interface interface-id

Specify the Layer 3 interface to be associated with the VRF, and enter interface configuration mode. The interface can be a routed port or SVI.

8.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

9.

ip vrf forwarding vrf-name

Associate the VRF with the Layer 3 interface.

10.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

11.

show ip vrf [ brief | detail | interfaces ] [ vrf-name ]

Verify the configuration. Display information about the configured VRFs.

12.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no ip vrf vrf-name global configuration command to delete a VRF and to remove all interfaces from it. Use the no ip vrf forwarding interface configuration command to remove an interface from the VRF.

The following example shows how to import a route map to a VRF instance named VPN1:

Switch(config)# ip vrf vpn1
Switch(config-vrf)# rd 100:2
Switch(config-vrf)# route-target both 100:2
Switch(config-vrf)# route-target import 100:1

IP services can be configured on global interfaces, and these services run within the global routing instance. IP services are enhanced to run on multiple routing instances; they are VRF-aware. Any configured VRF in the system can be specified for a VRF-aware service.

VRF-aware services are implemented in platform-independent modules. VRF means multiple routing instances in Cisco IOS. Each platform has its own limit on the number of VRFs it supports.

VRF-aware services have the following characteristics:

■The user can ping a host in a user-specified VRF.

■ARP entries are learned in separate VRFs. The user can display Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) entries for specific VRFs.

These services are VRF-aware:

■ARP

■Ping

■Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

■Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP)

■Syslog

■Traceroute

■FTP and TFTP

Note: VRF-aware services are not supported for Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding (uRPF).

Use the arp command in global configuration mode to add a VRF to the ARP cache.

Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

arp vrf vrf-name hardware-address encap-type [ interface-type ] [alias]

Add a VRF instance. The vrf-name argument is the name of the VRF table.

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

switch(config)# arp vrf vpn1 0800.0900.1834

To check if a configured VRF is working, you can use the ping vrf command.

When attempting to ping from a provider edge (PE) router to a customer edge (CE) router, or from a PE router to PE router, the standard ping command will not usually work. The ping vrf command allows you to ping the IP addresses of LAN interfaces on CE routers.

If you are on a PE router, be sure to indicate the specific VRF (VPN) name, as shown in the “Examples” section.

If all required information is not provided at the command line, the system will enter the interactive dialog (extended mode) for ping.

Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

ping vrf vrf-name ip-host

Tests a connection in the context of a specific VPN connection.

In the following example, the target host in the domain 209.165.201.1 is pinged (using IP/ICMP) in the context of the “CustomerA” VPN connection:

Switch# ping vrf CustomerA 209.165.201.1
Type escape sequence to abort.
Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 209.165.201.1, timeout is 2 seconds:
!!!!!
Success rate is 100 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 176/264/576 ms
 

Follow the steps in this procedure to configure configure VRF-aware services for SNMP.

Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

snmp-server trap authentication vrf

Enable VRF instance context authentication notifications.

3.

snmp-server engineID remote <host> vrf <vpn instance> <engine-id string>

Configure a name for the remote SNMP engine on a switch.

4.

snmp-server host <host> vrf <vpn instance> traps <community>

Specify the recipient of an SNMP trap operation and specify the VRF table to be used for sending SNMP traps.

5.

snmp-server host <host> vrf <vpn instance> informs <community>

Specify the recipient of an SNMP inform operation and specify the VRF table to be used for sending SNMP informs.

6.

snmp-server user <user> <group> remote <host> vrf <vpn instance> <security model>

Add a user to an SNMP group for a remote host on a VRF for SNMP access.

7.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

The following example specifies the SNMP engine ID and configures the VRF name traps-vrf for SNMP communications with the remote device at 172.16.20.3:

Switch(config)# snmp-server engineID remote 172.16.20.3 vrf trap-vrf 80000009030000B064EFE100
 

The following example shows how to send all SNMP notifications to example.com over the VRF named trap-vrf using the community string public:

Switch(config)# snmp-server host example.com vrf trap-vrf public

Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) support for VRFs ensures that HSRP virtual IP addresses are added to the correct IP routing table.

Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

3.

no switchport

Remove the interface from Layer 2 configuration mode if it is a physical interface.

4.

ip vrf forwarding <vrf-name>

Configure VRF on the interface.

Executing this command on an interface removes the IP address.

5.

ip address ip address

Enter the IP address for the interface.

6.

standby 1 ip ip address

Enable HSRP and configure the virtual IP address.

7.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Switch(config)# interface ethernet 0
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ip vrf forwarding vpn1
Switch(config-if)# ip address 172.16.1.3
Switch(config-if)# standby 1 ip
 

Follow the steps in this procedure to configure VRF-aware services for Syslog.

Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

logging on

Enable or temporarily disable logging of storage router event message.

3.

logging host ip address vrf vrf name

Specify the host address of the syslog server where logging messages are to be sent.

4.

logging buffered logging buffered size debugging

Log messages to an internal buffer.

5.

logging trap debugging

Limit the logging messages sent to the syslog server.

6.

logging facility facility

Send system logging messages to a logging facility.

7.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

The following example specifies a VRF that connects to the syslog server host:

Switch(config)# logging host 192.168.200.225 vrf vpn1

Follow the steps in this procedure to find the destination address in a VRF.

Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.

 
Command
Purpose

traceroute vrf vrf-name ipaddress

Specify the name of a VPN VRF in which to find the destination address.

The following example displays output of the traceroute command with the vrf keyword. Output includes the incoming VRF name/tag and the outgoing VRF name/tag.

Switch# traceroute vrf red 10.0.10.12
Type escape sequence to abort.
Tracing the route to 10.0.10.12
VRF info: (vrf in name/id, vrf out name/id)
1 10.1.13.15 (red/13,red/13) 0 msec
10.1.16.16 (red/13,red/13) 0 msec
10.1.13.15 (red/13,red/13) 1 msec
2 10.1.8.13 (red/13,red/13) 0 msec
10.1.7.13 (red/13,red/13) 0 msec
10.1.8.13 (red/13,red/13) 0 msec
3 10.1.2.11 (red/13,blue/10) 1 msec 0 msec 0 msec
4 * * *

FTP and TFTP are VRF-aware, which means that file transfer is supported across an interface within a VRF instance. To specify a VRF as a source for FTP or TFTP connections, the VRF must be associated with the same interface that you configure with the ip ftp source-interface command. In this configuration, FTP looks for the destination IP address for file transfer in the specified VRF table. If the specified source interface is not up, Cisco IOS software selects the address of the interface closest to the destination as the source address.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip ftp source-interface interface-type interface-number

Specify the source IP address for FTP connections.

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To specify the IP address of an interface as the source address for TFTP connections, use the ip tftp source-interface show mode command. To return to the default, use the no form of this command.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip tftp source-interface interface-type interface-number

Specify the source IP address for TFTP connections.

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

The following example shows how to configure the switch to use the VRF table named vpn1 to look for the destination IP address for the transfer of FTP packets:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# ip ftp source-interface ethernet 0
Switch(config)# ip vrf vpn1
Switch(config-vrf)# rd 200:1
Switch(config-vrf)# route-target both 200:1
Switch(config-vrf)# interface ethernet 0
Switch(config-if)# ip vrf forwarding vpn1
Switch(config-if)# end

To configure VRF-aware RADIUS, you must first enable AAA on a RADIUS server. The switch supports the ip vrf forwarding vrf-name server-group configuration and the ip radius source-interface global configuration commands.

Routing within the VPN can be configured with any supported routing protocol (RIP, OSPF, EIGRP, or BGP) or with static routing. The configuration shown here is for OSPF, but the process is the same for other protocols.

Note: To configure an EIGRP routing process to run within a VRF instance, you must configure an autonomous-system number by entering the autonomous-system a utonomous-system-number address-family configuration mode command.

Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router ospf process-id vrf vrf-name

Enable OSPF routing, specify a VPN forwarding table, and enter router configuration mode.

3.

log-adjacency-changes

(Optional) Log changes in the adjacency state. This is the default state.

4.

redistribute bgp autonomous-system-number subnets

Set the switch to redistribute information from the BGP network to the OSPF network.

5.

network network-number area area-id

Define a network address and mask on which OSPF runs and the area ID for that network address.

6.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

7.

show ip ospf process-id

Verify the configuration of the OSPF network.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no router ospf process-id vrf vrf-name global configuration command to disassociate the VPN forwarding table from the OSPF routing process.

This example shows a basic OSPF configuration using the router ospf command to configure OSPF VRF processes for the VRFs first, second, and third:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# router ospf 12 vrf first
Switch(config)# router ospf 13 vrf second
Switch(config)# router ospf 14 vrf third
Switch(config)# exit

■Complete the BGP network strategy and planning for your network.

■Configure OSPF as described in the Configuring OSPF.

■Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router bgp autonomous-system-number

Configure the BGP routing process with the AS number passed to other BGP routers, and enter router configuration mode.

3.

network network-number mask network-mask

Specify a network and mask to announce using BGP.

4.

redistribute ospf process-id match internal

Set the switch to redistribute OSPF internal routes.

5.

network network-number area area-id

Define a network address and mask on which OSPF runs and the area ID for that network address.

6.

address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name

Define BGP parameters for PE to CE routing sessions, and enter VRF address-family mode.

7.

neighbor address remote-as as-number

Define a BGP session between PE and CE routers.

8.

neighbor address activate

Activate the advertisement of the IPv4 address family.

9.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

10.

show ip bgp [ ipv4 ] [ neighbors ]

Verify BGP configuration.

11.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no router bgp autonomous-system-number global configuration command to delete the BGP routing process. Use the command with keywords to delete routing characteristics.

The following example configures BGP for CE to PE routing:

Switch(config)# router bgp 800
Switch(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf vl2
Switch(config-router-af)# redistribute ospf 2 match internal
Switch(config-router-af)# neighbor 83.0.0.3 remote-as 100
Switch(config-router-af)# neighbor 83.0.0.3 activate
Switch(config-router-af)# network 8.8.2.0 mask 255.255.255.0
Switch(config-router-af)# exit
Switch(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf vl1
Switch(config-router-af)# redistribute ospf 1 match internal
Switch(config-router-af)# neighbor 38.0.0.3 remote-as 100
Switch(config-router-af)# neighbor 38.0.0.3 activate
Switch(config-router-af)# network 8.8.1.0 mask 255.255.255.0
Switch(config-router-af)# end

You can use the following privileged EXEC commands to display information about multi-VRF CE configuration and status.

Command
Purpose

show ip protocols vrf vrf-name

Display routing protocol information associated with a VRF.

show ip route vrf vrf-name [ connected ] [ protocol [ as-number ]] [ list ] [ mobile ] [ odr ] [ profile ] [ static ] [ summary ] [ supernets-only ]

Display IP routing table information associated with a VRF.

show ip vrf [ brief | detail | interfaces ] [ vrf-name ]

Display information about the defined VRF instances.

This section describes how to configure IP routing protocol-independent features. For a complete description of the IP routing protocol-independent commands in this chapter, see the Cisco IOS IP Routing: Protocol-Independent Command Reference.

This section includes the following topics:

■Configuring Cisco Express Forwarding

■Configuring the Number of Equal-Cost Routing Paths

■Configuring Static Unicast Routes

■Specifying Default Routes and Networks

■Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information

■Configuring Policy-Based Routing

■Filtering Routing Information

■Managing Authentication Keys

Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) is a Layer 3 IP switching technology used to optimize network performance. CEF implements an advanced IP look-up and forwarding algorithm to deliver maximum Layer 3 switching performance. CEF is less CPU-intensive than fast switching route caching, allowing more CPU processing power to be dedicated to packet forwarding. In dynamic networks, fast switching cache entries are frequently invalidated because of routing changes, which can cause traffic to be process switched using the routing table, instead of fast switched using the route cache. CEF uses the Forwarding Information Base (FIB) lookup table to perform destination-based switching of IP packets.

The two main components in CEF are the distributed FIB and the distributed adjacency tables.

■The FIB is similar to a routing table or information base and maintains a mirror image of the forwarding information in the IP routing table. When routing or topology changes occur in the network, the IP routing table is updated, and those changes are reflected in the FIB. The FIB maintains next-hop address information based on the information in the IP routing table. Because the FIB contains all known routes that exist in the routing table, CEF eliminates route cache maintenance, is more efficient for switching traffic, and is not affected by traffic patterns.

■Nodes in the network are said to be adjacent if they can reach each other with a single hop across a link layer. CEF uses adjacency tables to prepend Layer 2 addressing information. The adjacency table maintains Layer 2 next-hop addresses for all FIB entries.

Because the switch uses Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs) to achieve Gigabit-speed line rate IP traffic, CEF forwarding applies only to the software-forwarding path, that is, traffic that is forwarded by the CPU.

CEF is enabled globally by default. If for some reason it is disabled, you can re-enable it by using the ip cef global configuration command.

The default configuration is CEF enabled on all Layer 3 interfaces. Entering the no ip route-cache cef interface configuration command disables CEF for traffic that is being forwarded by software. This command does not affect the hardware forwarding path. Disabling CEF and using the debug ip packet detail privileged EXEC command can be useful to debug software-forwarded traffic. To enable CEF on an interface for the software-forwarding path, use the ip route-cache cef interface configuration command.

Caution: Although the no ip route-cache cef interface configuration command to disable CEF on an interface is visible in the CLI, we strongly recommend that you do not disable CEF on interfaces except for debugging purposes.

■Cisco Express Forwarding requires a software image that includes Cisco Express Forwarding and IP routing enabled on the switch.

■If you enable Cisco Express Forwarding and then create an access list that uses the log keyword, the packets that match the access list are not Cisco Express Forwarding switched. They are process switched. Logging disables Cisco Express Forwarding.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip cef

Enable CEF operation.

3.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

4.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

5.

ip route - cache cef

Enable CEF on the interface for software-forwarded traffic.

6.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

7.

show ip cef

Display the CEF status on all interfaces.

8.

show cef linecard [ detail ]

Display CEF-related interface information.

9.

show cef interface [ interface-id ]

Display detailed CEF information for all interfaces or the specified interface.

10.

show adjacency

Display CEF adjacency table information.

11.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Switch(config)# ip cef
Switch(config)# interface ethernet 0
Switch(config-if)# ip route-cache cef
Switch(config-if)# end
 

When a router has two or more routes to the same network with the same metrics, these routes can be thought of as having an equal cost. The term parallel path is another way to see occurrences of equal-cost routes in a routing table. If a router has two or more equal-cost paths to a network, it can use them concurrently. Parallel paths provide redundancy in case of a circuit failure and also enable a router to load balance packets over the available paths for more efficient use of available bandwidth.

Although the router automatically learns about and configures equal-cost routes, you can control the maximum number of parallel paths supported by an IP routing protocol in its routing table.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router { bgp | rip | ospf | eigrp }

Enter router configuration mode.

3.

maximum-paths maximum

Set the maximum number of parallel paths for the protocol routing table. The range is from 1 to 8; the default is 4 for most IP routing protocols, but only 1 for BGP.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show ip protocols

Verify the setting in the Maximum path field.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no maximum-paths router configuration command to restore the default value.

The following example shows how to allow a maximum of 16 paths to a destination in an OSPF routing process:

Switch(config)# router ospf 3
Switch(config-router)# maximum-paths 16

Static unicast routes are user-defined routes that cause packets moving between a source and a destination to take a specified path. Static routes can be important if the router cannot build a route to a particular destination and are useful for specifying a gateway of last resort to which all unroutable packets are sent.

The switch retains static routes until you remove them. However, you can override static routes with dynamic routing information by assigning administrative distance values. Each dynamic routing protocol has a default administrative distance, as listed in Table 2. If you want a static route to be overridden by information from a dynamic routing protocol, set the administrative distance of the static route higher than that of the dynamic protocol.

Table 65 Default Administrative Distance Values

Route Source
Default Distance

Connected interface

0

Static route

1

Enhanced IRGP summary route

5

External BGP

20

Internal Enhanced IGRP

90

IGRP

100

OSPF

110

Internal BGP

200

Unknown

225

Static routes that point to an interface are advertised through RIP, IGRP, and other dynamic routing protocols, whether or not static redistribute router configuration commands were specified for those routing protocols. These static routes are advertised because static routes that point to an interface are considered in the routing table to be connected and hence lose their static nature. However, if you define a static route to an interface that is not one of the networks defined in a network command, no dynamic routing protocols advertise the route unless a redistribute static command is specified for these protocols.

When an interface goes down, all static routes through that interface are removed from the IP routing table. When the software can no longer find a valid next hop for the address specified as the forwarding router's address in a static route, the static route is also removed from the IP routing table.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip route prefix mask { address | interface } [ distance ]

Establish a static route.

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show ip route

Display the current state of the routing table to verify the configuration.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no ip route prefix mask { address | interface } global configuration command to remove a static route.

The following example shows how to choose an administrative distance of 110. In this case, packets for network 10.0.0.0 will be routed to a router at 172.31.3.4 if dynamic information with an administrative distance less than 110 is not available.

ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 172.31.3.4 110

A router might not be able to learn the routes to all other networks. To provide complete routing capability, you can use some routers as smart routers and give the remaining routers default routes to the smart router. (Smart routers have routing table information for the entire internetwork.) These default routes can be dynamically learned or can be configured in the individual routers. Most dynamic interior routing protocols include a mechanism for causing a smart router to generate dynamic default information that is then forwarded to other routers.

If a router has a directly connected interface to the specified default network, the dynamic routing protocols running on that device generate a default route. In RIP, it advertises the pseudonetwork 0.0.0.0.s

A router that is generating the default for a network also might need a default of its own. One way a router can generate its own default is to specify a static route to the network 0.0.0.0 through the appropriate device.

When default information is passed through a dynamic routing protocol, no further configuration is required. The system periodically scans its routing table to choose the optimal default network as its default route. In IGRP networks, there might be several candidate networks for the system default. Cisco routers use administrative distance and metric information to set the default route or the gateway of last resort.

If dynamic default information is not being passed to the system, candidates for the default route are specified with the ip default-network global configuration command. If this network appears in the routing table from any source, it is flagged as a possible choice for the default route. If the router has no interface on the default network, but does have a path to it, the network is considered as a possible candidate, and the gateway to the best default path becomes the gateway of last resort.

The ip default-network command is a classful command. It is effective only if the network mask of the network that you wish to configure as a candidate route for computing the gateway of last resort matches the network mask in the Routing Information Base (RIB).

For example, if you configure ip default-network 10.0.0.0, then the mask considered by the routing protocol is 10.0.0.0/8, as it is a Class A network. The gateway of last resort is set only if the RIB contains a 10.0.0.0/8 route.

If you need to use the ip default-network command, ensure that the RIB contains a network route that matches the major mask of the network class.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ip default-network network number

Specify a default network.

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show ip route

Display the selected default route in the gateway of last resort display.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no ip default-network network number global configuration command to remove the route.

The following example defines a static route to network 10.0.0.0 as the static default route:

ip route 10.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 10.108.3.4
ip default-network 10.0.0.0

The switch can run multiple routing protocols simultaneously, and it can redistribute information from one routing protocol to another. Redistributing information from one routing protocol to another applies to all supported IP-based routing protocols.

You can also conditionally control the redistribution of routes between routing domains by defining enhanced packet filters or route maps between the two domains. The match and set route-map configuration commands define the condition portion of a route map. The match command specifies that a criterion must be matched. The set command specifies an action to be taken if the routing update meets the conditions defined by the match command. Although redistribution is a protocol-independent feature, some of the match and set route-map configuration commands are specific to a particular protocol.

One or more match commands and one or more set commands follow a route-map command. If there are no match commands, everything matches. If there are no set commands, nothing is done, other than the match. Therefore, you need at least one match or set command.

Note: A route map with no set route-map configuration commands is sent to the CPU, which causes high CPU utilization.

You can also identify route-map statements as permit or deny. If the statement is marked as a deny, the packets meeting the match criteria are sent back through the normal forwarding channels (destination-based routing). If the statement is marked as permit, set clauses are applied to packets meeting the match criteria. Packets that do not meet the match criteria are forwarded through the normal routing channel.

You can use the BGP route map continue clause to execute additional entries in a route map after an entry is executed with successful match and set clauses. You can use the continue clause to configure and organize more modular policy definitions so that specific policy configurations need not be repeated within the same route map. The switch supports the continue clause for outbound policies. For more information about using the route map continue clause, see the “BGP Route-Map Continue” section in the IP Routing: BGP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T.

Note: Although each of Steps 3 through 14 in the following section is optional, you must enter at least one match route-map configuration command and one set route-map configuration command.

You should know your network design and how you want traffic to flow through it before configuring route redistribution or policy-based routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

route-map map-tag [ permit | deny ] [ sequence number ]

Define any route maps used to control redistribution and enter route-map configuration mode.

■ map-tag —A meaningful name for the route map. The redistribute router configuration command uses this name to reference this route map. Multiple route maps might share the same map tag name.

■(Optional) If permit is specified and the match criteria are met for this route map, the route is redistributed as controlled by the set actions. If deny is specified, the route is not redistributed.

■ sequence number (Optional)— Number that indicates the position a new route map is to have in the list of route maps already configured with the same name.

3.

match as-path path-list-number

Match a BGP AS path access list.

4.

match community-list community-list-number [ exact ]

Match a BGP community list.

5.

match ip address { access-list-number | access-list-name } [...access-list-number | ...access-list-name ]

Match a standard access list by specifying the name or number. It can be an integer from 1 to 199.

6.

match metric metric-value

Match the specified route metric. The metric-valu e can be an EIGRP metric with a specified value from 0 to 4294967295.

7.

match ip next-hop { access-list-number | access-list-name } [...access-list-number | ...access-list-name ]

Match a next-hop router address passed by one of the access lists specified (numbered from 1 to 199).

8.

match tag tag value [...tag-value ]

Match the specified tag value in a list of one or more route tag values. Each can be an integer from 0 to 4294967295.

9.

match interface type number [...type number ]

Match the specified next hop route out one of the specified interfaces.

10.

match ip route-source { access-list-number | access-list-name } [...access-list-number |...access-list-name ]

Match the address specified by the specified advertised access lists.

11.

match route-type { local | internal | external [ type-1 | type-2 ]}

Match the specified route-type :

local —Locally generated BGP routes.

internal —OSPF intra-area and interarea routes or EIGRP internal routes.

external —OSPF external routes (Type 1 or Type 2) or EIGRP external routes.

12.

set dampening halflife reuse suppress max-suppress-time

Set BGP route dampening factors.

13.

set local-preference value

Assign a value to a local BGP path.

14.

set origin { igp | egp as | incomplete }

Set the BGP origin code.

15.

set as-path { tag | prepend as-path-string }

Modify the BGP autonomous system path.

16.

set level { level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2 | stub-area | backbone }

Set the level for routes that are advertised into the specified area of the routing domain. The stub-area and backbone are OSPF NSSA and backbone areas.

17.

set metric metric value

Set the metric value to give the redistributed routes (for EIGRP only). The metric value is an integer from -294967295 to 294967295.

18.

set metric bandwidth delay reliability loading mtu

Set the metric value to give the redistributed routes (for EIGRP only):

■ bandwidth —Metric value or IGRP bandwidth of the route in kilobits per second in the range 0 to 4294967295

■ delay —Route delay in tens of microseconds in the range 0 to 4294967295.

■ reliability —Likelihood of successful packet transmission expressed as a number between 0 and 255, where 255 means 100 percent reliability and 0 means no reliability.

■ loading — Effective bandwidth of the route expressed as a number from 0 to 255 (255 is 100 percent loading).

■ mtu —Minimum maximum transmission unit (MTU) size of the route in bytes in the range 0 to 4294967295.

19.

set metric-type { type-1 | type-2 }

Set the OSPF external metric type for redistributed routes.

20.

set metric-type internal

Set the multi-exit discriminator (MED) value on prefixes advertised to external BGP neighbor to match the IGP metric of the next hop.

21.

set weight

Set the BGP weight for the routing table. The value can be from 1 to 65535.

22.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

23.

show route-map

Display all route maps configured or only the one specified to verify configuration.

24.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To delete an entry, use the no route-map map tag global configuration command or the no match or no set route-map configuration commands.

The following example shows how to redistribute Routing Information Protocol (RIP) routes with a hop count equal to 1 to Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). These routes will be redistributed to OSPF as external link-state advertisements (LSAs) with a metric of 5, metric type of Type 1, and a tag equal to 1.

Switch(config)# router ospf 109
Switch(config-router)# redistribute rip route-map rip-to-ospf
Switch(config-router)# exit
Switch(config)# route-map rip-to-ospf permit
Switch(config-route-map)# match metric 1
Switch(config-route-map)# set metric 5
Switch(config-route-map)# set metric-type type1
Switch(config-route-map)# set tag 1

You can distribute routes from one routing domain into another and control route distribution. Note that the keywords in this procedure are the same as defined in the previous procedure.

The metrics of one routing protocol do not necessarily translate into the metrics of another. In these situations, an artificial metric is assigned to the redistributed route. Uncontrolled exchanging of routing information between different routing protocols can create routing loops and seriously degrade network operation.

If you have not defined a default redistribution metric that replaces metric conversion, some automatic metric translations occur between routing protocols:

■RIP can automatically redistribute static routes. It assigns static routes a metric of 1 (directly connected).

■Any protocol can redistribute other routing protocols if a default mode is in effect.

Review the usage guidelines and additional examples for the redistribute command in the Cisco IOS IP Routing: Protocol-Independent Command Reference.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router { bgp | rip | ospf | eigrp }

Enter router configuration mode.

3.

redistribute protocol [ process-id ] { level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 } [ metric metric-value ] [ metric-type type-value ] [ match internal | external t ype-value ] [ tag tag-value ] [ route-map map-tag ] [ weight weight ] [ subnets ]

Redistribute routes from one routing protocol to another routing protocol. If no route-maps are specified, all routes are redistributed. If the keyword route-map is specified with no map-tag, no routes are distributed.

4.

default-metric number

Cause the current routing protocol to use the same metric value for all redistributed routes (BGP, RIP, and OSPF).

5.

default-metric bandwidth delay reliability loading mtu

Cause the EIGRP routing protocol to use the same metric value for all non-EIGRP redistributed routes.

6.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

7.

show route-map

Display all route maps configured or only the one specified to verify configuration.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable redistribution, use the no form of the commands.

Given the following configuration, a RIP-learned route for network 160.89.0.0 and an ISO IGRP-learned route with prefix 49.0001.0002 will be redistributed into an IS-IS Level 2 link-state PDU with metric 5:

router isis
redistribute rip route-map ourmap
redistribute iso-igrp remote route-map ourmap
route-map ourmap permit
match ip address 1
match clns address ourprefix
set metric 5
set level level-2
access-list 1 permit 160.89.0.0 0.0.255.255
clns filter-set ourprefix permit 49.0001.0002...
 

You can use policy-based routing (PBR) to configure a defined policy for traffic flows. By using PBR, you can have more control over routing by reducing the reliance on routes derived from routing protocols. PBR can specify and implement routing policies that allow or deny paths based on:

■Identity of a particular end system

■Application

■Protocol

You can use PBR to provide equal-access and source-sensitive routing, routing based on interactive versus batch traffic, or routing based on dedicated links. For example, you could transfer stock records to a corporate office on a high-bandwidth, high-cost link for a short time while transmitting routine application data such as e-mail over a low-bandwidth, low-cost link.

With PBR, you classify traffic using access control lists (ACLs) and then make traffic go through a different path. PBR is applied to incoming packets. All packets received on an interface with PBR enabled are passed through route maps. Based on the criteria defined in the route maps, packets are forwarded (routed) to the appropriate next hop.

■If packets do not match any route map statements, all set clauses are applied.

■If a statement is marked as permit and the packets do not match any route-map statements, the packets are sent through the normal forwarding channels, and destination-based routing is performed.

■For PBR, route-map statements marked as deny are not supported.

For more information about configuring route maps, see Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information.

You can use standard IP ACLs to specify match criteria for a source address or extended IP ACLs to specify match criteria based on an application, a protocol type, or an end station. The process proceeds through the route map until a match is found. If no match is found, normal destination-based routing occurs. There is an implicit deny at the end of the list of match statements.

If match clauses are satisfied, you can use a set clause to specify the IP addresses identifying the next hop router in the path.

For details about PBR commands and keywords, see IP Routing: Protocol-Independent Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T .

Before configuring PBR, you should be aware of this information:

■Multicast traffic is not policy-routed. PBR applies to only to unicast traffic.

■You can enable PBR on a routed port or an SVI.

■The switch does not support route-map deny statements for PBR.

■You can apply a policy route map to an EtherChannel port channel in Layer 3 mode, but you cannot apply a policy route map to a physical interface that is a member of the EtherChannel. If you try to do so, the command is rejected. When a policy route map is applied to a physical interface, that interface cannot become a member of an EtherChannel.

■You can define a maximum of 246 IP policy route maps on the switch.

■You can define a maximum of 512 access control entries (ACEs) for PBR on the switch.

■When configuring match criteria in a route map, follow these guidelines:

–Do not match ACLs that permit packets destined for a local address. PBR would forward these packets, which could cause ping or Telnet failure or route protocol flapping.

–Do not match ACLs with deny ACEs. Packets that match a deny ACE are sent to the CPU, which could cause high CPU utilization.

■To use PBR, you must first enable the default template by using the sdm prefer default global configuration command. PBR is not supported with the Layer 2 template.

■VRF and PBR are mutually-exclusive on a switch interface. You cannot enable VRF when PBR is enabled on an interface. In contrast, you cannot enable PBR when VRF is enabled on an interface.

■The number of TCAM entries used by PBR depends on the route map itself, the ACLs used, and the order of the ACLs and route-map entries.

■Policy-based routing based on packet length, IP precedence and TOS, set interface, set default next hop, or set default interface are not supported. Policy maps with no valid set actions or with set action set to Don’t Fragment are not supported.

By default, PBR is disabled on the switch. To enable PBR, you must create a route map that specifies the match criteria and the resulting action if all of the match clauses are met. Then, you must enable PBR for that route map on an interface. All packets arriving on the specified interface matching the match clauses are subject to PBR.

PBR can be fast-switched or implemented at speeds that do not slow down the switch. Fast-switched PBR supports most match and set commands. PBR must be enabled before you enable fast-switched PBR. Fast-switched PBR is disabled by default.

Packets that are generated by the switch, or local packets, are not normally policy-routed. When you globally enable local PBR on the switch, all packets that originate on the switch are subject to local PBR. Local PBR is disabled by default.

See PBR Configuration Guidelines.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

route-map map-tag [ permit ] [ sequence number ]

Define any route maps used to control where packets are output, and enter route-map configuration mode.

■ map-tag —A meaningful name for the route map. The ip policy route-map interface configuration command uses this name to reference the route map. Multiple route maps might share the same map tag name.

■(Optional) If permit is specified and the match criteria are met for this route map, the route is policy-routed as controlled by the set actions.

Note: The route-map deny statement is not supported in PBR route maps to be applied to an interface.

■ sequence number (Optional)— Number that shows the position of a new route map in the list of route maps already configured with the same name.

3.

match ip address { access-list-number | access-list-name } [...access-list-number | ...access-list-name ]

Match the source and destination IP address that is permitted by one or more standard or extended access lists.

Note: Do not enter an ACL with a deny ACE or an ACL that permits a packet destined for a local address.

If you do not specify a match command, the route map applies to all packets.

4.

set ip next-hop ip-address [...ip-address ]

Specify the action to take on the packets that match the criteria. Set next hop to which to route the packet (the next hop must be adjacent).

5.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

6.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the interface to configure.

7.

no shutdown

Enable the interface if necessary. By default, UNIs and ENIs are disabled and NNIs are enabled.

8.

ip policy route-map map-tag

Enable PBR on a Layer 3 interface, and identify the route map to use. You can configure only one route map on an interface. However, you can have multiple route map entries with different sequence numbers. These entries are evaluated in sequence number order until the first match. If there is no match, packets are routed as usual.

Note: If the IP policy route map contains a deny statement, the configuration fails.

9.

ip route-cache policy

(Optional) Enable fast-switching PBR. You must first enable PBR before enabling fast-switching PBR.

10.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

11.

ip local policy route-map map-tag

(Optional) Enable local PBR to perform policy-based routing on packets originating at the switch. This applies to packets generated by the switch and not to incoming packets.

12.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

13.

show route-map [ map-name ]

(Optional) Display all route maps configured or only the one specified to verify configuration.

14.

show ip policy

(Optional) Display policy route maps attached to interfaces.

15.

show ip local policy

(Optional) Display whether or not local policy routing is enabled and, if so, the route map being used.

16.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no route-map map-tag global configuration command or the no match or no set route-map configuration commands to delete an entry. Use the no ip policy route-map map-tag interface configuration command to disable PBR on an interface. Use the no ip route-cache policy interface configuration command to disable fast-switching PBR. Use the no ip local policy route-map map-tag global configuration command to disable policy-based routing on packets originating on the switch.

The following example sends packets with the destination IP address of 172.21.16.18 to a router at IP address 172.30.3.20:

interface serial 0
ip policy route-map wethersfield
!
route-map wethersfield
match ip address 172.21.16.18
set ip next-hop 172.30.3.20

You can filter routing protocol information by performing the tasks described in this section.

Note: When routes are redistributed between OSPF processes, no OSPF metrics are preserved.

To prevent other routers on a local network from dynamically learning about routes, you can use the passive-interface router configuration command to keep routing update messages from being sent through a router interface. When you use this command in the OSPF protocol, the interface address you specify as passive appears as a stub network in the OSPF domain. OSPF routing information is neither sent nor received through the specified router interface.

In networks with many interfaces, to avoid having to manually set them as passive, you can set all interfaces to be passive by default by using the passive-interface default router configuration command and manually setting interfaces where adjacencies are desired.

You should know your network design and how you want traffic to flow through it before filtering routing information.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router { bgp | rip | ospf | eigrp }

Enter router configuration mode.

3.

passive-interface interface-id

Suppress sending routing updates through the specified Layer 3 interface.

4.

passive-interface default

(Optional) Set all interfaces as passive by default.

5.

no passive-interface interface type

(Optional) Activate only those interfaces that need to have adjacencies sent.

6.

network network-address

(Optional) Specify the list of networks for the routing process. The network-address is an IP address.

7.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use a network monitoring privileged EXEC command such as show ip ospf interface to verify the interfaces that you enabled as passive, or use the show ip interface privileged EXEC command to verify the interfaces that you enabled as active.

To re-enable the sending of routing updates, use the no passive-interface interface-id router configuration command.

The following example sends EIGRP updates to all interfaces on network 10.108.0.0 except Ethernet interface 1:

router eigrp 109
network 10.108.0.0
passive-interface ethernet 1
 

The following example sets all interfaces as passive and then activates Ethernet interface 0:

router ospf 100
passive-interface default
no passive-interface ethernet0
network 10.108.0.1 0.0.0.255 area 0
 

You can use the distribute-list router configuration command with access control lists to suppress routes from being advertised in routing updates and to prevent other routers from learning one or more routes. When used in OSPF, this feature applies to only external routes, and you cannot specify an interface name.

You can also use a distribute-list router configuration command to avoid processing certain routes listed in incoming updates. (This feature does not apply to OSPF.)

Configure an access list defining which networks are to be sent or received and which are to be suppressed in routing updates.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router { bgp | rip | eigrp }

Enter router configuration mode.

3.

distribute-list { access-list-number | access-list-name } out [ interface-name | routing process | autonomous-system-number ]

Permit or deny routes from being advertised in routing updates, depending upon the action listed in the access list.

4.

distribute-list { access-list-number | access-list-name } in [ type-number ]

Suppress processing in routes listed in updates.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no distribute-list in router configuration command to change or cancel a filter. To cancel suppression of network advertisements in updates, use the no distribute-list out router configuration command.

In the following example, a prefix list and distribute list are defined to configure the BGP routing process to accept traffic from only network 10.1.1.0/24, network 192.168.1.0, and network 10.108.0.0. An inbound route refresh is initiated to activate the distribute-list.

Switch(config)# ip prefix-list RED permit 10.1.1.0/24
Switch(config)# ip prefix-1ist RED permit 10.108.0.0/16
Switch(config)# ip prefix-list RED permit 192.168.1.0/24
Switch(config)# router bgp 50000
Switch(config-router)# network 10.108.0.0
Switch(config-router)# distribute-list prefix RED in
Switch(config-router)# end
Switch# clear ip bgp in
 

Because some routing information might be more accurate than others, you can use filtering to prioritize information coming from different sources. An administrative distance is a rating of the trustworthiness of a routing information source, such as a router or group of routers. In a large network, some routing protocols can be more reliable than others. By specifying administrative distance values, you enable the router to intelligently discriminate between sources of routing information. The router always picks the route whose routing protocol has the lowest administrative distance.

Because each network has its own requirements, there are no general guidelines for assigning administrative distances.

■Always set the administrative distance from the least to the most specific network.

■Review the usage guidelines and additional examples for the distance command in the Cisco IOS IP Routing: Protocol-Independent Command Reference.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router { bgp | rip | ospf | eigrp }

Enter router configuration mode.

3.

distance weight { ip-address { ip-address mask }}
[ ip access list ]

Define an administrative distance.

■ weight —The administrative distance as an integer from 10 to 255. Used alone, weight specifies a default administrative distance that is used when no other specification exists for a routing information source. Routes with a distance of 255 are not installed in the routing table.

■(Optional) ip access list —An IP standard or extended access list to be applied to incoming routing updates.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show ip protocols

Display the default administrative distance for a specified routing process.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To remove a distance definition, use the no distance router configuration command.

In the following example, the routereigrp global configuration command sets up EIGRP routing in autonomous system number 109. The network router configuration commands specify EIGRP routing on networks 192.168.7.0 and 172.16.0.0. The first distance command sets the administrative distance to 90 for all routers on the Class C network 192.168.7.0. The second distance command sets the administrative distance to 120 for the router with the address 172.16.1.3.

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# router eigrp 109
Switch(config-router)# network 192.168.7.0
Switch(config-router)# network 172.16.0.0
Switch(config-router)# distance 90 192.168.7.0 0.0.0.255
Switch(config-router)# distance 120 172.16.1.3 0.0.0.255
Switch(config-router)# end
 

In the following example, the set distance is from the least to the most specific network:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# router eigrp 109
Switch(config-router)# distance 22 10.0.0.0 0.0.0.255
Switch(config-router)# distance 33 10.11.0.0 0.0.0.255
Switch(config-router)# distance 44 10.11.12.0 0.0.0.255
Switch(config-router)# end

Key management is a method of controlling authentication keys used by routing protocols. Not all protocols can use key management. Authentication keys are available for EIGRP and RIP Version 2.

To manage authentication keys, define a key chain, identify the keys that belong to the key chain, and specify how long each key is valid. Each key has its own key identifier (specified with the key number key chain configuration command), which is stored locally. The combination of the key identifier and the interface associated with the message uniquely identifies the authentication algorithm and Message Digest 5 (MD5) authentication key in use.

You can configure multiple keys with life times. Only one authentication packet is sent, regardless of how many valid keys exist. The software examines the key numbers in order from lowest to highest, and uses the first valid key it encounters. The lifetimes allow for overlap during key changes. Note that the router must know these lifetimes.

Before you manage authentication keys, you must enable authentication. See the appropriate protocol section to see how to enable authentication for that protocol.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

key chain name-of-chain

Identify a key chain, and enter key chain configuration mode.

3.

key number

Identify the key number. The range is 0 to 2147483647.

4.

key-string text

Identify the key string. The string can contain from 1 to 80 uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric characters, but the first character cannot be a number.

5.

accept-lifetime start-time { infinite | end-time | duration seconds }

(Optional) Specify the time period during which the key can be received.

The start-time and end-time syntax can be either hh : mm : ss Month date year or hh : mm : ss date Month year. The default is forever with the default start-time and the earliest acceptable date as January 1, 1993. The default end-time and duration is infinite.

6.

send-lifetime start-time { infinite | end-time | duration seconds }

(Optional) Specify the time period during which the key can be sent.

The start-time and end-time syntax can be either hh : mm : ss Month date year or hh : mm : ss date Month year. The default is forever with the default start-time and the earliest acceptable date as January 1, 1993. The default end-time and duration is infinite.

7.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

8.

show key chain

Display authentication key information.

9.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To remove the key chain, use the no key chain name-of-chain global configuration command.

The following example configures a key chain named chain1. The key named key1 will be accepted from 1:30 p.m. to 3:30 p.m. and be sent from 2:00 p.m. to 3:00 p.m. The key named key2 will be accepted from 2:30 p.m. to 4:30 p.m. and be sent from 3:00 p.m. to 4:00 p.m. The overlap allows for migration of keys or a discrepancy in the set time of the router. There is a 30-minute leeway on each side to handle time differences.

Router(config)# interface ethernet 0
Router(config-if)# ip rip authentication key-chain chain1
Router(config-if)# ip rip authentication mode md5
!
Router(config)# router rip
Router(config-router)# network 172.19.0.0
Router(config-router)# version 2
!
Router(config)# key chain chain1
Router(config-keychain)# key 1
Router(config-keychain-key)# key-string key1
Router(config-keychain-key)# accept-lifetime 13:30:00 Jan 25 1996 duration 7200
Router(config-keychain-key)# send-lifetime 14:00:00 Jan 25 1996 duration 3600
Router(config-keychain-key)# exit
Router(config-keychain)# key 2
Router(config-keychain-key)# key-string key2
Router(config-keychain-key)# accept-lifetime 14:30:00 Jan 25 1996 duration 7200
Router(config-keychain-key)# send-lifetime 15:00:00 Jan 25 1996 duration 3600

You can remove all contents of a particular cache, table, or database. You can also display specific statistics.

Command
Purpose

clear ip route { network [ mask | * ]}

Clear one or more routes from the IP routing table.

show ip protocols

Display the parameters and state of the active routing protocol process.

show ip route [ address [ mask ] [ longer-prefixes ]] | [ protocol [ process-id ]]

Display the current state of the routing table.

show ip route summary

Display the current state of the routing table in summary form.

show ip route supernets-only

Display supernets.

show ip cache

Display the routing table used to switch IP traffic.

show route-map [ map-name ]

Display all route maps configured or only the one specified.

Cisco IOS Master Command List, All Releases

IP Addressing: ARP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T

Cisco IOS IP Routing: RIP Command Reference

IP Routing: RIP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T

Cisco IOS IP Routing: OSPF Command Reference

IP Routing: OSPF Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T

Cisco IOS IP Routing: EIGRP Command Reference

IP Routing: EIGRP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T

Cisco IOS IP Routing: BGP Command Reference

IP Routing: BGP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T

Cisco IOS ISO CLNS Command Reference

ISO CLNS Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T

Cisco IOS IP Routing: ISIS Command Reference

IP Routing: ISIS Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T

High Availability Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15S

IP Routing: BFD Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T

Cisco IOS IP Routing: Protocol-Independent Command Reference

IP Routing: Protocol-Independent Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T

■ Internet Routing Architectures, published by Cisco Press


Page 20

This chapter describes how to configure IPv6 unicast routing on the Cisco Industrial Ethernet Switches, hereafter referred to as “switch.”

To use this feature, the switch must be running the IP services image. To enable IPv6 routing, you must configure the switch to use a dual IPv4 and IPv6 switch database management (SDM) template. See Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks.

Note: For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see the Cisco IOS documentation listed in the Related Documents.

■Information About IPv6

■Prerequisites

■Guidelines and Limitations

■Default Settings

■Configuring IPv6

■Verifying Configuration

■Configuration Example

■Related Documents

IPv4 users can move to IPv6 and receive services such as end-to-end security, quality of service (QoS), and globally unique addresses. The IPv6 address space reduces the need for private addresses and Network Address Translation (NAT) processing by border routers at network edges.

This section describes IPv6 implementation on the switch and includes the following topics:

■IPv6 Addresses

■Supported IPv6 Unicast Routing Features

■Unsupported IPv6 Unicast Routing Features

The switch supports only IPv6 unicast addresses. It does not support site-local unicast addresses, anycast addresses, or multicast addresses.

The IPv6 128-bit addresses are represented as a series of eight 16-bit hexadecimal fields separated by colons in the format: n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n. This is an example of an IPv6 address:

2031:0000:130F:0000:0000:09C0:080F:130B

For easier implementation, leading zeros in each field are optional. This is the same address without leading zeros:

2031:0:130F:0:0:9C0:80F:130B

You can also use two colons (::) to represent successive hexadecimal fields of zeros, but you can use this short version only once in each address:

2031:0:130F::09C0:080F:130B

For more information about IPv6 address formats, address types, and the IPv6 packet header, see IPv6 Addressing and Basic Connectivity Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T in the IPv6 Configuration Library, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T.

In the “Information About Implementing Basic Connectivity for IPv6” chapter, these sections apply to the switch:

■IPv6 Address Formats

■IPv6 Address Type: Unicast

■IPv6 Address Output Display

■Simplified IPv6 Packet Header

Support on the switch includes expanded address capability, header format simplification, improved support of extensions and options, and hardware parsing of the extension header. The switch supports hop-by-hop extension header packets, which are routed or bridged in software.

The switch provides IPv6 routing capability over 802.1Q trunk ports for static routes, Routing Information Protocol (RIP) for IPv6, and Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Version 3 Protocol. It supports up to 16 equal-cost routes and can simultaneously forward IPv4 and IPv6 frames at line rate.

Note: For more information about the IPv6 unicast routing features described in this section, see IPv6 Configuration Library, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T and IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T.

■128-Bit Unicast Addresses

■DNS for IPv6

■Path MTU Discovery for IPv6 Unicast

■ICMPv6

■Neighbor Discovery

■Default Router Preference

■IPv6 Stateless Autoconfiguration and Duplicate Address Detection

■IPv6 Applications

■Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks

■DHCP for IPv6 Address Assignment

■Static Routes for IPv6

■RIP for IPv6

■OSPF for IPv6

■EIGRP IPv6

■Multiprotocol BGP for IPv6

■SNMP and Syslog Over IPv6

■HTTP(S) Over IPv6

The switch supports aggregatable global unicast addresses and link-local unicast addresses. It does not support site-local unicast addresses.

■Aggregatable global unicast addresses are IPv6 addresses from the aggregatable global unicast prefix. The address structure enables strict aggregation of routing prefixes and limits the number of routing table entries in the global routing table. These addresses are used on links that are aggregated through organizations and eventually to the Internet service provider.

These addresses are defined by a global routing prefix, a subnet ID, and an interface ID. Current global unicast address allocation uses the range of addresses that start with binary value 001 (2000::/3). Addresses with a prefix of 2000::/3(001) through E000::/3(111) must have 64-bit interface identifiers in the extended unique identifier (EUI)-64 format.

■Link local unicast addresses can be automatically configured on any interface by using the link-local prefix FE80::/10(1111 1110 10) and the interface identifier in the modified EUI format. Link-local addresses are used in the neighbor discovery protocol (NDP) and the stateless autoconfiguration process. Nodes on a local link use link-local addresses and do not require globally unique addresses to communicate. IPv6 routers do not forward packets with link-local source or destination addresses to other links.

IPv6 supports Domain Name System (DNS) record types in the DNS name-to-address and address-to-name lookup processes. The DNS AAAA resource record types support IPv6 addresses and are equivalent to an A address record in IPv4. The switch supports DNS resolution for IPv4 and IPv6.

The switch supports advertising the system maximum transmission unit (MTU) to IPv6 nodes and path MTU discovery. Path MTU discovery allows a host to dynamically discover and adjust to differences in the MTU size of every link along a given data path. In IPv6, if a link along the path is not large enough to accommodate the packet size, the source of the packet handles the fragmentation. The switch does not support path MTU discovery for multicast packets.

The Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) in IPv6 generates error messages, such as ICMP destination unreachable messages, to report errors during processing and other diagnostic functions. In IPv6, ICMP packets are also used in the neighbor discovery protocol and path MTU discovery.

The switch supports NDP for IPv6, a protocol running on top of ICMPv6, and static neighbor entries for IPv6 stations that do not support NDP. The IPv6 neighbor discovery process uses ICMP messages and solicited-node multicast addresses to determine the link-layer address of a neighbor on the same network (local link), to verify the reachability of the neighbor, and to keep track of neighboring routers.

The switch supports ICMPv6 redirect for routes with mask lengths less than 64 bits. ICMP redirect is not supported for host routes or for summarized routes with mask lengths greater than 64 bits.

Neighbor discovery throttling ensures that the switch CPU is not unnecessarily burdened while it is in the process of obtaining the next hop forwarding information to route an IPv6 packet. The switch drops any additional IPv6 packets whose next hop is the same neighbor that the switch is actively trying to resolve. This drop avoids further load on the CPU.

The switch supports IPv6 default router preference (DRP), an extension in router advertisement messages. DRP improves the ability of a host to select an appropriate router, especially when the host is multihomed and the routers are on different links. The switch does not support the Route Information Option in RFC 4191.

An IPv6 host maintains a default router list from which it selects a router for traffic to offlink destinations. The selected router for a destination is then cached in the destination cache. NDP for IPv6 specifies that routers that are reachable or probably reachable are preferred over routers whose reachability is unknown or suspect. For reachable or probably reachable routers, NDP can either select the same router every time or cycle through the router list. By using DRP, you can configure an IPv6 host to prefer one router over another, provided both are reachable or probably reachable.

The switch uses stateless autoconfiguration to manage link, subnet, and site addressing changes, such as management of host and mobile IP addresses. A host autonomously configures its own link-local address, and booting nodes send router solicitations to request router advertisements for configuring interfaces.

■Ping, traceroute, Telnet, TFTP, and FTP

■Secure Shell (SSH) over an IPv6 transport

■HTTP server access over IPv6 transport

■DNS resolver for AAAA over IPv4 transport

■Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) support for IPv6 addresses

You must use the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template to allocate hardware memory usage to both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols.

Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Support on an Interface shows a router forwarding both IPv4 and IPv6 traffic through the same interface, based on the IP packet and destination addresses.

Figure 107 Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Support on an Interface

Which two events will cause the VTP revision number on a VTP server to change? (Choose two)

Use the dual IPv4 and IPv6 switch database management (SDM) template to enable IPv6 routing dual stack environments (supporting both IPv4 and IPv6).

■If you try to configure IPv6 without first selecting a dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, a warning message appears.

■In IPv4-only environments, the switch routes IPv4 packets and applies IPv4 QoS and ACLs in hardware. IPv6 packets are not supported.

■In dual IPv4 and IPv6 environments, the switch routes both IPv4 and IPv6 packets and applies IPv4 QoS in hardware.

■IPv6 QoS is not supported.

■If you do not plan to use IPv6, do not use the dual stack template because it results in less hardware memory availability for each resource.

DHCPv6 enables DHCP servers to pass configuration parameters, such as IPv6 network addresses, to IPv6 clients. The address assignment feature manages nonduplicate address assignment in the correct prefix based on the network where the host is connected. Assigned addresses can be from one or multiple prefix pools. Additional options, such as default domain and DNS name-server address, can be passed back to the client. Address pools can be assigned for use on a specific interface, on multiple interfaces, or the server can automatically find the appropriate pool.

Static routes are manually configured and define an explicit route between two networking devices. Static routes are useful for smaller networks with only one path to an outside network or to provide security for certain types of traffic in a larger network.

Routing Information Protocol (RIP) for IPv6 is a distance-vector protocol that uses hop count as a routing metric. It includes support for IPv6 addresses and prefixes and the all-RIP-routers multicast group address FF02::9 as the destination address for RIP update messages.

The switch supports Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) for IPv6, a link-state protocol for IP.

The switch supports Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) for IPv6. It is configured on the interfaces on which it runs and does not require a global IPv6 address.

Before running, an instance of EIGRP IPv6 requires an implicit or explicit router ID. An implicit router ID is derived from a local IPv4 address, so any IPv4 node always has an available router ID. However, EIGRP IPv6 might be running in a network with only IPv6 nodes and therefore might not have an available IPv4 router ID.

Multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is the supported exterior gateway protocol for IPv6. Multiprotocol BGP extensions for IPv6 support the same features and functionality as IPv4 BGP. IPv6 enhancements to multiprotocol BGP include support for IPv6 address family and network layer reachability information (NLRI) and next-hop (the next router in the path to the destination) attributes that use IPv6 addresses.

The switch does not support multicast BGP or non-stop forwarding (NSF) for IPv6 or for BGP IPv6.

To support both IPv4 and IPv6, IPv6 network management requires both IPv6 and IPv4 transports. Syslog over IPv6 supports address data types for these transports.

SNMP and syslog over IPv6 provide these features:

■Support for both IPv4 and IPv6

■IPv6 transport for SNMP and to modify the SNMP agent to support traps for an IPv6 host

■SNMP- and syslog-related MIBs to support IPv6 addressing

■Configuration of IPv6 hosts as trap receivers

For support over IPv6, SNMP modifies the existing IP transport mapping to simultaneously support IPv4 and IPv6. These SNMP actions support IPv6 transport management:

■Opens User Datagram Protocol (UDP) SNMP socket with default settings

■Provides a new transport mechanism called SR_IPV6_TRANSPORT

■Sends SNMP notifications over IPv6 transport

■Supports SNMP-named access lists for IPv6 transport

■Supports SNMP proxy forwarding using IPv6 transport

■Verifies SNMP Manager feature works with IPv6 transport

The HTTP client sends requests to both IPv4 and IPv6 HTTP servers, which respond to requests from both IPv4 and IPv6 HTTP clients. URLs with literal IPv6 addresses must be specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons.

The accept socket call chooses an IPv4 or IPv6 address family. The accept socket is either an IPv4 or IPv6 socket. The listening socket waits for both IPv4 and IPv6 signals that indicate a connection. The IPv6 listening socket is bound to an IPv6 wildcard address.

The underlying TCP/IP stack supports a dual-stack environment. HTTP relies on the TCP/IP stack and the sockets for processing network-layer interactions.

Basic network connectivity (ping) must exist between the client and the server hosts before HTTP connections can be made.

■IPv6 policy-based routing

■IPv6 virtual private network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) table support

■Support for Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) routing

■IPv6 packets destined to site-local addresses

■Tunneling protocols, such as IPv4-to-IPv6 or IPv6-to-IPv4

■The switch as a tunnel endpoint supporting IPv4-to-IPv6 or IPv6-to-IPv4 tunneling protocols

■IPv6 unicast reverse-path forwarding

■IPv6 general prefixes

■HSRP for IPv6

Select a dual IPv4 and IPv6 template as described in the Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks.

Because IPv6 is implemented in switch hardware, some limitations occur due to the IPv6 compressed addresses in the hardware memory. This results in some loss of functionality and some feature limitations.

■When using user-network interface (UNI) or enhanced network interface (ENI) ports for any IPv6-related features, you must first globally enable IP routing and IPv6 routing on the switch by entering the ip routing and ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration commands even if you are not using IPv6 routing.

■ICMPv6 redirect functionality is not supported for IPv6 host routes (routes used to reach a specific host) or for IPv6 routes with masks greater than 64 bits. The switch cannot redirect hosts to a better first-hop router for a specific destination that is reachable through a host route or through a route with masks greater than 64 bits.

■Load balancing using equal cost and unequal cost routes is not supported for IPv6 host routes or for IPv6 routes with a mask greater than 64 bits.

■The switch cannot forward SNAP-encapsulated IPv6 packets.

■The switch routes IPv6-to-IPv4 and IPv4-to-IPv6 packets in hardware, but the switch cannot be an IPv6-to-IPv4 or IPv4-to-IPv6 tunnel endpoint.

■Bridged IPv6 packets with hop-by-hop extension headers are forwarded in software. In IPv4, these packets are routed in software but bridged in hardware.

■In addition to the normal SPAN and RSPAN limitations defined in the software configuration guide, these limitations are specific to IPv6 packets:

–When you send RSPAN IPv6-routed packets, the source MAC address in the SPAN output packet might be incorrect.

–When you send RSPAN IPv6-routed packets, the destination MAC address might be incorrect. Normal traffic is not affected.

■The switch cannot apply QoS classification or policy-based routing on source-routed IPv6 packets in hardware.

■The switch cannot generate ICMPv6 Packet Too Big messages for multicast packets.

Feature
Default Setting

SDM template

Default.

IPv6 routing

Disabled globally and on all interfaces.

CEFv6

Disabled (IPv4 CEF is enabled by default).

Note: When IPv6 routing is enabled, CEFv6 is automatically enabled.

IPv6 addresses

None configured.

■Configuring IPv6 Addressing and Enabling IPv6 Routing

■Configuring Default Router Preference

■Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks

■Configuring DHCP for IPv6 Address Assignment

■Configuring IPv6 ICMP Rate Limiting

■Configuring CEF for IPv6

■Configuring Static Routing for IPv6

■Configuring RIP for IPv6

■Configuring OSPF for IPv6

■Configuring EIGRP for IPv6

■Configuring BGP for IPv6

To forward IPv6 traffic on an interface, you must configure a global IPv6 address on that interface. Configuring an IPv6 address on an interface automatically configures a link-local address and activates IPv6 for the interface. The configured interface automatically joins these required multicast groups for that link:

■solicited-node multicast group FF02:0:0:0:0:1:ff00::/104 for each unicast address assigned to the interface (the address for the neighbor discovery process)

■all-nodes link-local multicast group FF02::1

■all-routers link-local multicast group FF02::2

For more information about configuring IPv6 routing, see the “Implementing Addressing and Basic Connectivity for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T.

■Be sure to select a dual IPv4 and IPv6 SDM template.

■Not all features discussed in this chapter are supported by the switch. See Unsupported IPv6 Unicast Routing Features.

■In the ipv6 address interface configuration command, you must enter the ipv6-address and ipv6-prefix variables with the address specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons. The prefix-length variable (preceded by a slash [/]) is a decimal value that shows how many of the high-order contiguous bits of the address comprise the prefix (the network portion of the address).

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 { default | routing | vlan }

Select an SDM template that supports IPv4 and IPv6.

default —Set the switch to the default template to balance system resources.

routing —Set the switch to the routing template to support IPv4 and IPv6 routing, including IPv4 policy-based routing.

vlan —Maximize VLAN configuration on the switch with no routing supported in hardware.

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

reload

Reload the operating system.

5.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

6.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure. The interface can be a physical interface, a switch virtual interface (SVI), or a Layer 3 EtherChannel.

7.

no switchport

Remove the interface from Layer 2 configuration mode (if it is a physical interface).

8.

ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix length eui-64

or

ipv6 address ipv6-address link-local

or

ipv6 enable

Specify a global IPv6 address with an extended unique identifier (EUI) in the low-order 64 bits of the IPv6 address. Specify only the network prefix; the last 64 bits are automatically computed from the switch MAC address. This enables IPv6 processing on the interface.

Specify a link-local address on the interface to be used instead of the link-local address that is automatically configured when IPv6 is enabled on the interface. This command enables IPv6 processing on the interface.

Automatically configure an IPv6 link-local address on the interface, and enable the interface for IPv6 processing. The link-local address can only be used to communicate with nodes on the same link.

9.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

10.

ip routing

Enable IP routing on the switch.

11.

ipv6 unicast-routing

Enable forwarding of IPv6 unicast data packets.

12.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

13.

show ipv6 interface interface-id

Verify your entries.

14.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To remove an IPv6 address from an interface, use the no ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix length eui-64 or no ipv6 address ipv6-address link-local interface configuration command. To remove all manually configured IPv6 addresses from an interface, use the no ipv6 address interface configuration command without arguments. To disable IPv6 processing on an interface that has not been explicitly configured with an IPv6 address, use the no ipv6 enable interface configuration command. To globally disable IPv6 routing, use the no ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command.

This example shows how to enable IPv6 with both a link-local address and a global address based on the IPv6 prefix 2001:0DB8:c18:1::/64. The EUI-64 interface ID is used in the low-order 64 bits of both addresses. Output from the show ipv6 interface EXEC command is included to show how the interface ID (20B:46FF:FE2F:D940) is appended to the link-local prefix FE80::/64 of the interface.

Switch(config)# sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 default
Switch(config)# ipv6 unicast-routing
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address 2001:0DB8:c18:1::/64 eui 64
Switch(config-if)# end
Switch# show ipv6 interface gigabitethernet0/11
GigabitEthernet0/2 is up, line protocol is up
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::20B:46FF:FE2F:D940
Global unicast address(es):
2001:0DB8:c18:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D940, subnet is 2001:0DB8:c18:1::/64 [EUI]
Joined group address(es):
FF02::1
FF02::2
FF02::1:FF2F:D940
MTU is 1500 bytes
ICMP error messages limited to one every 100 milliseconds
ICMP redirects are enabled
ND DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 1
ND reachable time is 30000 milliseconds
ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds
ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds
ND router advertisements are sent every 200 seconds
ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds
Hosts use stateless autoconfig for addresses.

Router advertisement messages are sent with the default router preference (DRP) configured by the ipv6 nd router-preference interface configuration command. If no DRP is configured, router advertisements are sent with a medium preference.

A DRP is useful when two routers on a link might provide equivalent, but not equal-cost routing, and policy might dictate that hosts should prefer one of the routers.

Complete the Configuring IPv6 Addressing and Enabling IPv6 Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and enter the Layer 3 interface on which you want to specify the DRP.

3.

ipv6 nd router-preference { high | medium | low }

Specify a DRP for the router on the switch interface.

4.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

5.

show ipv6 interface

Verify the configuration.

6.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

Use the no ipv6 nd router-preference interface configuration command to disable an IPv6 DRP.

This example shows how to configure a DRP of high for the router on an interface:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 nd router-preference high
Switch(config-if)# end
 

Follow this procedure to configure a Layer 3 interface to support both IPv4 and IPv6 and to enable IPv6 routing.

Before configuring IPv6 routing, you must select an SDM template that supports IPv4 and IPv6. If not already configured, use the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 { default | routing | vlan} global configuration command to configure a template that supports IPv6. When you select a new template, you must reload the switch by using the reload privileged EXEC command so that the template takes effect.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 { default | routing | vlan }

Select an SDM template that supports IPv4 and IPv6.

default —Set the switch to the default template to balance system resources.

routing —Set the switch to the routing template to support IPv4 and IPv6 routing, including IPv4 policy-based routing.

vlan —Maximize VLAN configuration on the switch with no routing supported in hardware.

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

reload

Reload the operating system.

5.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

6.

ip routing

Enable IPv4 routing on the switch.

7.

ipv6 unicast-routing

Enable forwarding of IPv6 data packets on the switch.

8.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

9.

no switchport

Remove the interface from Layer 2 configuration mode (if it is a physical interface).

10.

ip address ip-address mask [ secondary ]

Specify a primary or secondary IPv4 address for the interface.

11.

ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix length eui-64

or

ipv6 address ipv6-address link-local

or

ipv6 enable

Specify a global IPv6 address. Specify only the network prefix; the last 64 bits are automatically computed from the switch MAC address.

Specify a link-local address on the interface to be used instead of the automatically configured link-local address when IPv6 is enabled on the interface.

Automatically configure an IPv6 link-local address on the interface, and enable the interface for IPv6 processing. The link-local address can only be used to communicate with nodes on the same link.

12.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

13.

show interface interface-id

show ip interface interface-id

show ipv6 interface interface-id

Verify your entries.

14.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable IPv4 routing, use the no ip routing global configuration command. To disable IPv6 routing, use the no ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command. To remove an IPv4 address from an interface, use the no ip address ip-address mask interface configuration command. To remove an IPv6 address from an interface, use the no ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix length eui-64 or no ipv6 address ipv6-address link-local interface configuration command. To remove all manually configured IPv6 addresses from an interface, use the no ipv6 address interface configuration command without arguments. To disable IPv6 processing on an interface that has not been explicitly configured with an IPv6 address, use the no ipv6 enable interface configuration command.

This example shows how to enable IPv4 and IPv6 routing on an interface:

Switch(config)# sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 default
Switch(config)# ip routing
Switch(config)# ipv6 unicast-routing
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# no switchport
Switch(config-if)# ip address 192.168.99.1 244.244.244.0
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address 2001:0DB8:c18:1::/64 eui 64
Switch(config-if)# end

This document describes only the DHCPv6 address assignment. For more information about configuring the DHCPv6 client, server, or relay agent functions, see the “Implementing DHCP for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T.

■Default DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration

■DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration Guidelines

■Enabling the DHCPv6 Server Function

■Enabling the DHCPv6 Client Function

By default, no Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) features are configured on the switch.

When configuring a DHCPv6 address assignment, consider these guidelines:

■In the procedures, the specified interface must be one of these Layer 3 interfaces:

–DHCPv6 IPv6 routing must be enabled on a Layer 3 interface.

–SVI: a VLAN interface created by using the interface vlan vlan_id command.

–EtherChannel port channel in Layer 3 mode: a port-channel logical interface created by using the interface port-channel port-channel-number command.

■Before configuring DHCPv6, you must select a Switch Database Management (SDM) template that supports IPv4 and IPv6.

■The switch can act as a DHCPv6 client, server, or relay agent. The DHCPv6 client, server, and relay function are mutually exclusive on an interface.

See DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration Guidelines.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ipv6 dhcp pool poolname

Enter DHCP pool configuration mode, and define the name for the IPv6 DHCP pool. The pool name can be a symbolic string (such as Engineering) or an integer (such as 0).

3.

address prefix IPv6-prefix lifetime {t1 t1 | infinite }

(Optional) Specify an address prefix for address assignment.

This address must be in hexadecimal, using 16-bit values between colons.

lifetime t1 t1 —Specify a time interval (in seconds) that an IPv6 address prefix remains in the valid state. The range is 5 to 4294967295 seconds. Specify infinite for no time interval.

4.

link-address IPv6-prefix

(Optional) Specify a link-address IPv6 prefix.

When an address on the incoming interface or a link-address in the packet matches the specified IPv6 prefix, the server uses the configuration information pool.

This address must be in hexadecimal, using 16-bit values between colons.

5.

vendor-specific vendor-id

(Optional) Enter vendor-specific configuration mode, and enter a vendor-specific identification number. This number is the vendor IANA Private Enterprise Number. The range is 1 to 4294967295.

6.

suboption number { address IPv6-address | ascii ASCII-string | hex hex-string}

(Optional) Enter a vendor-specific suboption number. The range is 1 to 65535. Enter an IPv6 address, ASCII text, or a hex string as defined by the suboption parameters.

7.

exit

Return to DHCP pool configuration mode.

8.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

9.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the interface to configure.

10.

ipv6 dhcp server [ poolname | automatic ] [ rapid-commit ] [ preference value] [ allow-hint ]

Enable the DHCPv6 server function on an interface.

■ poolname —(Optional) User-defined name for the IPv6 DHCP pool. The pool name can be a symbolic string (such as Engineering) or an integer (such as 0).

automatic —(Optional) Enables the system to automatically determine which pool to use when allocating addresses for a client.

rapid-commit —(Optional) Allow two-message exchange method.

preference value —(Optional) The preference value carried in the preference option in the advertise message sent by the server. The range is from 0 to 255. The preference value default is 0.

allow-hint —(Optional) Specifies whether the server should consider client suggestions in the SOLICIT message. By default, the server ignores client hints.

11.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

12.

show ipv6 dhcp pool

or

show ipv6 dhcp interface

Verify DHCPv6 pool configuration.

Verify that the DHCPv6 server function is enabled on an interface.

13.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To delete a DHCPv6 pool, use the no ipv6 dhcp pool poolname global configuration command. Use the no form of the DHCP pool configuration mode commands to change the DHCPv6 pool characteristics. To disable the DHCPv6 server function on an interface, use the no ipv6 dhcp server interface configuration command.

This example shows how to configure a pool called engineering with an IPv6 address prefix:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# ipv6 dhcp pool engineering
Switch(config-dhcpv6)#address prefix 2001:1000::0/64
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# end
 

This example shows how to configure a pool called testgroup with three link-addresses and an IPv6 address prefix:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# ipv6 dhcp pool testgroup
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# link-address 2001:1001::0/64
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# link-address 2001:1002::0/64
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# link-address 2001:2000::0/48
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# address prefix 2001:1003::0/64
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# end
 

This example shows how to configure a pool called 350 with vendor-specific options:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# ipv6 dhcp pool 350
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# address prefix 2001:1005::0/48
Switch(config-dhcpv6)# vendor-specific 9
Switch(config-dhcpv6-vs)# suboption 1 address 1000:235D::1
Switch(config-dhcpv6-vs)# suboption 2 ascii "IP-Phone"
Switch(config-dhcpv6-vs)# end

See DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration Guidelines.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the interface to configure.

3.

ipv6 address dhcp [ rapid-commit ]

Enable the interface to acquire an IPv6 address from the DHCPv6 server.

rapid-commit—(Optional) Allow two-message exchange method for address assignment.

4.

ipv6 dhcp client request [ vendor-specific ]

(Optional) Enable the interface to request the vendor-specific option.

5.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

6.

show ipv6 dhcp interface

Verify that the DHCPv6 client is enabled on an interface.

To disable the DHCPv6 client function, use the no ipv6 address dhcp interface configuration command. To remove the DHCPv6 client request, use the no ipv6 address dhcp client request interface configuration command.

This example shows how to acquire an IPv6 address and to enable the rapid-commit option:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address dhcp rapid-commit

ICMP rate limiting is enabled by default with a default interval between error messages of 100 milliseconds and a bucket size (maximum number of tokens to be stored in a bucket) of 10.

Complete the Configuring IPv6 Addressing and Enabling IPv6 Routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ipv6 icmp error-interval interval [ bucketsize ]

Configure the interval and bucket size for IPv6 ICMP error messages:

■ interval— The interval (in milliseconds) between tokens being added to the bucket. The range is from 0 to 2147483647 milliseconds.

■ bucketsize —(Optional) The maximum number of tokens stored in the bucket. The range is from 1 to 200.

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show ipv6 interface [ interface-id ]

Verify your entries.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To return to the default configuration, use the no ipv6 icmp error-interval global configuration command.

This example shows how to configure an IPv6 ICMP error message interval of 50 milliseconds and a bucket size of 20 tokens:

Switch(config)#ipv6 icmp error-interval 50 20

Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) is a Layer 3 IP switching technology, allowing more CPU processing power to be dedicated to packet forwarding. IPv4 CEF is enabled by default. IPv6 CEF is disabled by default, but automatically enabled when you configure IPv6 routing.

To route IPv6 unicast packets, first globally configure forwarding of IPv6 unicast packets by using the ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command. You must also configure an IPv6 address and IPv6 processing on an interface by using the ipv6 address interface configuration command.

To disable IPv6 CEF, use the no ipv6 cef global configuration command. To reenable IPv6 CEF, use the ipv6 cef global configuration command. You can verify the IPv6 state by entering the show ipv6 cef privileged EXEC command.

For more information about configuring CEF, see the “Implementing IPv6 Addressing and Basic Connectivity” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T.

Before configuring a static IPv6 route, you must:

■Enable routing by using the ip routing global configuration command.

■Enable the forwarding of IPv6 packets by using the ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command.

■Enable IPv6 on at least one Layer 3 interface by configuring an IPv6 address on the interface.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ipv6 route ipv6-prefix/prefix length { ipv6-address | interface-id [ ipv6-address ]} [ administrative distance ]

Configure a static IPv6 route.

■ ipv6-prefix— The IPv6 network that is the destination of the static route. It can also be a hostname when static host routes are configured.

■ /prefix length— The length of the IPv6 prefix. A decimal value that shows how many of the high-order contiguous bits comprise the prefix (the network portion of the address). A slash mark must precede the decimal value.

■ ipv6-address — The IPv6 address of the next hop that can be used to reach the specified network. The next hop does not need to be directly connected; recursion finds the IPv6 address of the directly connected next hop. The address must be specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons.

■ interface-id —Specify direct static routes from point-to-point and broadcast interfaces. On point-to-point interfaces, you do not need to specify the IPv6 address of the next hop. On broadcast interfaces, you should always specify the IPv6 address of the next hop, or ensure that the specified prefix is assigned to the link, specifying a link-local address as the next hop. You can optionally specify the IPv6 address of the next hop to which packets are sent.

Note: You must specify an interface-id when using a link-local address as the next hop. The link-local next hop must be an adjacent router.

■ administrative distance— (Optional) An administrative distance. The range is 1 to 254; the default value is 1, which gives static routes precedence over all but connected routes. To configure a floating static route, use an administrative distance greater than that of the dynamic routing protocol.

3.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

4.

show ipv6 static [ ipv6-address | ipv6-prefix/prefix length ] [ interface interface-id ] [ recursive ] [ detail ]

or

show ipv6 route static [ updated ]

Verify your entries by displaying the IPv6 routing table.

interface interface-id— (Optional) Display only those static routes with the specified interface as an egress interface.

■recursive—(Optional) Display only recursive static routes. The recursive keyword is mutually exclusive with the interface keyword, but it can be used with or without the IPv6 prefix in the command syntax.

■detail—(Optional) Display this additional information:

–For valid recursive routes, the output path set, and maximum resolution depth.

–For invalid routes, the reason why the route is not valid.

5.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To remove a configured static route, use the no ipv6 route ipv6-prefix/prefix length { ipv6-address | interface-id [ ipv6-address ]} [ administrative distance ] global configuration command.

For more information about configuring static IPv6 routing, see the “Implementing Static Routes for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T.

This example shows how to configure a floating static route to an interface. The route has an administrative distance of 130:

Switch(config)# ipv6 route 2001:0DB8::/32 gigabitethernet0/1 130

Before configuring the switch to run IPv6 RIP, you must:

■Enable routing by using the ip routing global configuration command.

■Enable the forwarding of IPv6 packets by using the ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command.

■Enable IPv6 on any Layer 3 interfaces on which IPv6 RIP is to be enabled.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ipv6 router rip name

Configure an IPv6 RIP routing process, and enter router configuration mode for the process.

3.

maximum-paths number-paths

(Optional) Define the maximum number of equal-cost routes that IPv6 RIP can support. The range is from 1 to 64, and the default is 4 routes.

4.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

5.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

6.

ipv6 rip name enable

Enable the specified IPv6 RIP routing process on the interface.

7.

ipv6 rip name default-information { only | originate }

(Optional) Originate the IPv6 default route (::/0) into the RIP routing process updates sent from the specified interface.

Note: To avoid routing loops after the IPv6 default route (::/0) is originated from any interface, the routing process ignores all default routes received on any interface.

only —Select to originate the default route, but suppress all other routes in the updates sent on this interface.

originate —Select to originate the default route in addition to all other routes in the updates sent on this interface.

8.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

9.

show ipv6 rip [ name ] [ interface interface-id ] [ database ] [ next-hops ]

or

show ipv6 route rip [ updated ]

Display information about current IPv6 RIP processes.


Display the current contents of the IPv6 routing table.

10.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable a RIP routing process, use the no ipv6 router rip name global configuration command. To disable the RIP routing process for an interface, use the no ipv6 rip name interface configuration command.

For more information about configuring RIP routing for IPv6, see the “Implementing RIP for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T.

This example shows how to enable the RIP routing process cisco with a maximum of eight equal-cost routes and to enable it on an interface:

Switch(config)# ipv6 router rip cisco
Switch(config-router)# maximum-paths 8
Switch(config)# exit
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/3
Switch(config-if)# ipv6 rip cisco enable

You can customize OSPF for IPv6 for your network. However, the defaults are set to meet the requirements of most customers and features.

Be careful when changing the defaults for IPv6 commands. Doing so might adversely affect OSPF for the IPv6 network.

Before you enable IPv6 OSPF on an interface, you must:

■Enable routing by using the ip routing global configuration command.

■Enable the forwarding of IPv6 packets by using the ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command.

■Enable IPv6 on Layer 3 interfaces on which you are enabling IPv6 OSPF.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

ipv6 router ospf process-id

Enable OSPF router configuration mode for the process. The process ID is the number assigned administratively when enabling the OSPF for IPv6 routing process. It is locally assigned and can be a positive integer from 1 to 65535.

3.

area area-id range { ipv6-prefix/prefix length } [ advertise | not-advertise ] [ cost cost ]

(Optional) Consolidate and summarize routes at an area boundary.

■ area-id— Identifier of the area about which routes are to be summarized. It can be specified as either a decimal value or as an IPv6 prefix.

■ ipv6-prefix/prefix length — The destination IPv6 network and a decimal value that shows how many of the high-order contiguous bits of the address comprise the prefix (the network portion of the address). A slash mark (/) must precede the decimal value.

advertise —(Optional) Set the address range status to advertise and to generate a Type 3 summary link-state advertisement (LSA).

not-advertise —(Optional) Set the address range status to DoNotAdvertise. The Type 3 summary LSA is suppressed, and component networks remain hidden from other networks.

cost cost —(Optional) Metric or cost for this summary route, which is used during OSPF SPF calculation to determine the shortest paths to the destination. The value can be 0 to 16777215.

4.

maximum paths number-paths

(Optional) Define the maximum number of equal-cost routes to the same destination that IPv6 OSPF should enter in the routing table. The range is from 1 to 64, and the default is 16 paths.

5.

exit

Return to global configuration mode.

6.

interface interface-id

Enter interface configuration mode, and specify the Layer 3 interface to configure.

7.

ipv6 ospf process-id area area-id [ instance instance-id ]

Enable OSPF for IPv6 on the interface.

instance instance-id— (Optional) Instance identifier.

8.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

9.

show ipv6 ospf [ process-id ] [ area-id ] interface [ interface-id ]

or

show ipv6 ospf [ process-id ] [ area-id ]

Display information about OSPF interfaces.

Display general information about OSPF routing processes.

10.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

To disable an OSPF routing process, use the no ipv6 router ospf process-id global configuration command. To disable the OSPF routing process for an interface, use the no ipv6 ospf process-id area area-id interface configuration command.

For more information about configuring OSPF routing for IPv6, see the “Implementing OSPF for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T.

By default, EIGRP for IPv6 is disabled. You can configure EIGRP for IPv6 on an interface. After configuring the router and the interface for EIGRP, enter the no shutdown privileged EXEC command to start EIGRP.

Note: If EIGRP for IPv6 is not in shutdown mode, EIGRP might start running before you enter the EIRGP router-mode commands to configure the router and the interface.

To set an explicit router ID, use the show ipv6 eigrp command to see the configured router IDs, and then use the router-id command.

As with EIGRP IPv4, you can use EIGRPv6 to specify your EIGRP IPv4 interfaces and to select a subset of those as passive interfaces. Use the passive-interface default command to make all interfaces passive, and then use the no passive-interface command on selected interfaces to make them active. EIGRP IPv6 does not need to be configured on a passive interface.

For more configuration procedures, see the “Implementing EIGRP for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T.

When configuring multiprotocol BGP extensions for IPv6, you must create the BGP routing process, configure peering relationships, and customize BGP for your particular network. Note that BGP functions the same in IPv6 as in IPv4.

Before configuring the router to run BGP for IPv6, you must use the ipv6 unicast-routing command to globally enable IPv6 routing.

 
Command
Purpose

1.

configure terminal

Enter global configuration mode.

2.

router bgp as-number

Configure a BGP routing process, and enter BGP router configuration mode for the autonomous system number.

3.

no bgp default ipv4-unicast

Disable the IPv4 unicast address family for the BGP routing process specified in the previous step.

Routing information for the IPv4 unicast address family is advertised by default for each BGP routing session unless you enter this command before configuring the neighbor remote-as command.

4.

bgp router-id ip-address

(Optional) Configure a fixed 32-bit router ID as the identifier of the local router running BGP. By default, the router ID is the IPv4 address of a router loopback interface. On a router enabled only for IPv6 (no IPv4 address), you must manually configure the BGP router ID.

Note: Configuring a router ID by using this command resets all active BGP peering sessions.

5.

neighbor { ip-address | ipv6-address[%] interface-type interface-number | peer-group-name } remote-as as-number

Add the IPv6 address of the neighbor in the specified autonomous system to the IPv6 multiprotocol BGP neighbor table of the local router.

Note: The ipv6-address must be in hexadecimal, using 16-bit values between colons.

6.

address-family ipv6

Specify the IPv6 address family and enter address family configuration mode

7.

neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name | ipv6-address } activate

Enable the neighbor to exchange prefixes for the IPv6 address family with the local router.

8.

end

Return to privileged EXEC mode.

9.

show bgp ipv6

Display information about IPv6 BGP configuration.

10.

copy running-config startup-config

(Optional) Save your entries in the configuration file.

For more configuration procedures, see the “Implementing Multiprotocol BGP for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T.

The switch does not support multicast IPv6 BGP, nonstop forwarding (NSF) for IPv6 BGP, 6PE multipath (EoMPLS), or IPv6 VRF.

router bgp 1
bgp router-id 1.1.1.1
no bgp default ipv4-unicast
!--- Without configuring ""no bgp default ipv4-unicast"" only IPv4 will be
!--- advertised
bgp log-neighbor-changes
neighbor 2010:AB8:0:2:C601:10FF:FE58:0 remote-as 2
!
address-family ipv6
neighbor 2010:AB8:0:2:C601:10FF:FE58:0 activate
network 2010:AB8:2::/48
network 2010:AB8:3::/48
exit-address-family
!
Command
Purpose

show bgp ipv6

Display BGP IPv6 configuration and routing tables.

show ipv6 access-list

Display IPv6 access lists.

show ipv6 cef

Display Cisco Express Forwarding for IPv6.

show ipv6 interface interface-id

Display IPv6 interface status and configuration.

show ipv6 mtu

Display IPv6 MTU per destination cache.

show ipv6 neighbors

Display IPv6 neighbor cache entries.

show ipv6 ospf

Display IPv6 OSPF information.

show ipv6 prefix-list

Display IPv6 prefix lists.

show ipv6 protocols

Display IPv6 routing protocols on the switch.

show ipv6 rip

Display IPv6 RIP routing protocol status.

show ipv6 route

Display IPv6 route table entries.

show ipv6 routers

Display local IPv6 routers.

show ipv6 static

Display IPv6 static routes.

show ipv6 traffic

Display IPv6 traffic statistics.

Command
Purpose

show ipv6 eigrp [ as-number ] interface

Display information about interfaces configured for EIGRP IPv6.

show ipv6 eigrp [ as-number ] neighbor

Display the neighbors discovered by EIGRP IPv6.

show ipv6 eigrp [ as-number ] traffic

Display the number of EIGRP IPv6 packets sent and received.

show ipv6 eigrp topology [ as-number | ipv6-address ] [ active | all-links | detail-links | pending | summary | zero-successors ]

Display EIGRP entries in the IPv6 topology table.

Command
Purpose

show ip http server history

Display the previous 20 connections to the HTTP server, including the IP address accessed and the time when the connection was closed.

show ip http server connection

Display the current connections to the HTTP server, including the local and remote IP addresses being accessed.

show ip http client connection

Display the configuration values for HTTP client connections to HTTP servers.

show ip http client history

Display a list of the last 20 requests made by the HTTP client to the server.

This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 interface privileged EXEC command:

Switch# show ipv6 interface
Vlan1 is up, line protocol is up
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is FE80::20B:46FF:FE2F:D940
Global unicast address(es):
3FFE:C000:0:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D940, subnet is 3FFE:C000:0:1::/64 [EUI]
Joined group address(es):
FF02::1
FF02::2
FF02::1:FF2F:D940
MTU is 1500 bytes
ICMP error messages limited to one every 100 milliseconds
ICMP redirects are enabled
ND DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 1
ND reachable time is 30000 milliseconds
ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds
ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds
ND router advertisements are sent every 200 seconds
ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 cef privileged EXEC command:

Switch# show ipv6 cef
::/0
nexthop 3FFE:C000:0:7::777 Vlan7
3FFE:C000:0:1::/64
attached to Vlan1
3FFE:C000:0:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D940/128
receive
3FFE:C000:0:7::/64
attached to Vlan7
3FFE:C000:0:7::777/128
attached to Vlan7
3FFE:C000:0:7:20B:46FF:FE2F:D97F/128
receive
3FFE:C000:111:1::/64
attached to GigabitEthernet0/11
3FFE:C000:111:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D945/128
receive
3FFE:C000:168:1::/64
attached to GigabitEthernet0/43
3FFE:C000:168:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D94B/128
receive
3FFE:C000:16A:1::/64
attached to Loopback10
3FFE:C000:16A:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D900/128
receive
 
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 protocols privileged EXEC command:

Switch# show ipv6 protocols
IPv6 Routing Protocol is “connected”
IPv6 Routing Protocol is “static”
IPv6 Routing Protocol is “rip fer”
Interfaces:
Vlan6
GigabitEthernet0/4
GigabitEthernet0/11
GigabitEthernet0/12
Redistribution:
None
 

This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 rip privileged EXEC command:

Switch# show ipv6 rip
RIP process "fer", port 521, multicast-group FF02::9, pid 190
Administrative distance is 120. Maximum paths is 16
Updates every 30 seconds, expire after 180
Holddown lasts 0 seconds, garbage collect after 120
Split horizon is on; poison reverse is off
Default routes are not generated
Periodic updates 9040, trigger updates 60
Interfaces:
Vlan6
GigabitEthernet0/4
GigabitEthernet0/11
GigabitEthernet0/12
Redistribution:
None
 

This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 neighbor privileged EXEC command:

Switch# show ipv6 neighbors
IPv6 Address Age Link-layer Addr State Interface
3FFE:C000:0:7::777 - 0007.0007.0007 REACH Vl7
3FFE:C101:113:1::33 - 0000.0000.0033 REACH Gi0/13
 

This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 static privileged EXEC command:

Switch# show ipv6 static
IPv6 Static routes
Code: * - installed in RIB
* ::/0 via nexthop 3FFE:C000:0:7::777, distance 1
 

This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 route privileged EXEC command:

Switch# show ipv6 route
IPv6 Routing Table - 21 entries
Codes: C - Connected, L - Local, S - Static, R - RIP, B - BGP
U - Per-user Static route
I1 - ISIS L1, I2 - ISIS L2, IA - ISIS interarea, IS - ISIS summary
O - OSPF intra, OI - OSPF inter, OE1 - OSPF ext 1, OE2 - OSPF ext 2
ON1 - OSPF NSSA ext 1, ON2 - OSPF NSSA ext 2
S ::/0 [1/0]
via 3FFE:C000:0:7::777
C 3FFE:C000:0:1::/64 [0/0]
via ::, Vlan1
L 3FFE:C000:0:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D940/128 [0/0]
via ::, Vlan1
C 3FFE:C000:0:7::/64 [0/0]
via ::, Vlan7
L 3FFE:C000:0:7:20B:46FF:FE2F:D97F/128 [0/0]
via ::, Vlan7
C 3FFE:C000:111:1::/64 [0/0]
via ::, GigabitEthernet0/11
L 3FFE:C000:111:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D945/128 [0/0]
C 3FFE:C000:168:1::/64 [0/0]
via ::, GigabitEthernet0/4
L 3FFE:C000:168:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D94B/128 [0/0]
via ::, GigabitEthernet0/4
C 3FFE:C000:16A:1::/64 [0/0]
via ::, Loopback10
L 3FFE:C000:16A:1:20B:46FF:FE2F:D900/128 [0/0]
via ::, Loopback10
 
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 traffic privileged EXEC command.

Switch# show ipv6 traffic
IPv6 statistics:
Rcvd: 1 total, 1 local destination
0 source-routed, 0 truncated
0 format errors, 0 hop count exceeded
0 bad header, 0 unknown option, 0 bad source
0 unknown protocol, 0 not a router
0 fragments, 0 total reassembled
0 reassembly timeouts, 0 reassembly failures
Sent: 36861 generated, 0 forwarded
0 fragmented into 0 fragments, 0 failed
0 encapsulation failed, 0 no route, 0 too big
0 RPF drops, 0 RPF suppressed drops
Mcast: 1 received, 36861 sent
 
ICMP statistics:
Rcvd: 1 input, 0 checksum errors, 0 too short
0 unknown info type, 0 unknown error type
unreach: 0 routing, 0 admin, 0 neighbor, 0 address, 0 port
parameter: 0 error, 0 header, 0 option
0 hopcount expired, 0 reassembly timeout,0 too big
0 echo request, 0 echo reply
0 group query, 0 group report, 0 group reduce
1 router solicit, 0 router advert, 0 redirects
0 neighbor solicit, 0 neighbor advert
Sent: 10112 output, 0 rate-limited
unreach: 0 routing, 0 admin, 0 neighbor, 0 address, 0 port
parameter: 0 error, 0 header, 0 option
0 hopcount expired, 0 reassembly timeout,0 too big
0 echo request, 0 echo reply
0 group query, 0 group report, 0 group reduce
0 router solicit, 9944 router advert, 0 redirects
84 neighbor solicit, 84 neighbor advert
 
UDP statistics:
Rcvd: 0 input, 0 checksum errors, 0 length errors
0 no port, 0 dropped
Sent: 26749 output
 
TCP statistics:
Rcvd: 0 input, 0 checksum errors
Sent: 0 output, 0 retransmitted

For information about how Cisco Systems implements IPv6:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6553/products_ios_technology_home.html

For information about IPv6 and other features in this chapter:

IPv6 Configuration Library, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T

■IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T


Page 21

This document describes how to configure unicast routing on the Cisco Industrial Ethernet Switches, hereafter referred to as switch. To use unicast routing, the switch must be running the IP services image.

This chapter provides an overview of the following unicast routing features:

■IPv4 Unicast Routing

■IPv6 Unicast Routing

■Enhanced Object Tracking

Routers and Layer 3 switches can route packets in the following ways:

■By using default routing—sending traffic with a destination unknown to the router to a default outlet or destination.

■By using preprogrammed static routes for the traffic

Static unicast routing forwards packets from predetermined ports through a single path into and out of a network. Static routing does not automatically respond to changes in the network and therefore, might result in unreachable destinations.

■By dynamically calculating routes by using a routing protocol

Dynamic routing protocols are used by routers to dynamically calculate the best route for forwarding traffic. Routing protocols supported by the switch are Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol, Enhanced IGRP (EIGRP), System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS), and Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD).

IPv4 users can move to IPv6 and receive services such as end-to-end security, quality of service (QoS), and globally unique addresses. The IPv6 address space reduces the need for private addresses and Network Address Translation (NAT) processing by border routers at network edges.

IPv6 unicast routing support on the switch includes expanded address capability, header format simplification, improved support of extensions and options, and hardware parsing of the extension header. The switch supports hop-by-hop extension header packets, which are routed or bridged in software.

The switch provides IPv6 routing capability over 802.1Q trunk ports for static routes, Routing Information Protocol (RIP) for IPv6, and Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Version 3 Protocol. It supports up to 16 equal-cost routes and can simultaneously forward IPv4 and IPv6 frames at line rate.

Enhanced object tracking on the switch provides a more complete alternative to the Hot Standby Routing Protocol (HSRP) tracking mechanism, which allows you to track the line-protocol state of an interface. If the line protocol state of an interface goes down, the HSRP priority of the interface is reduced and another HSRP device with a higher priority becomes active. The enhanced object tracking feature separates the tracking mechanism from HSRP and creates a separate, standalone tracking process that can be used by processes other than HSRP. This allows tracking other objects in addition to the interface line-protocol state.

A client process, such as HSRP or Gateway Local Balancing Protocol (GLBP), can register an interest in tracking objects and request notification when the tracked object changes state.This feature increases the availability and speed of recovery of a routing system and decreases outages and outage duration.


Page 22

Cisco Industrial Ethernet switches supports Ethernet CFM. Ethernet CFM is an end-to-end per-service-instance (per VLAN) Ethernet layer OAM protocol that includes proactive connectivity monitoring, fault verification, and fault isolation. End-to-end can be provider-edge-to-provider-edge (PE-to-PE) device or customer-edge-to-customer-edge (CE-to-CE) device. Ethernet CFM, as specified by 802.1ag, is the standard for Layer 2 ping, Layer 2 traceroute, and end-to-end connectivity check of the Ethernet network.

For complete command and configuration information for Ethernet CFM, see the Configuring Ethernet OAM, CFM, and E-LMI chapter of the System Management guide at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/switches/connectedgrid/cg-switch-sw-master/software/configuration/guide/sysmgmt/CGS_1000_Sysmgmt/sm_oam.html


Page 23

This chapter describes the Dying-Gasp feature for the Cisco Industrial Ethernet series switches.

Dying Gasp resides on a hardware component on the High-performance WAN Interface Card (HWIC) and supports Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The networking devices rely on a temporary back-up power supply on a capacitor, that allows for a graceful shutdown and the generation of the dying-gasp message. This temporary power supply is designed to last from 10 to 20 milliseconds to perform these tasks.

Dying-Gasp packets are created when you configure the host by using the dying-gasp configuration command. The show dying-gasp packets command displays the detailed information about the created packets.

The SNMP server for the SNMP Dying Gasp message is specified through the snmp-server host configuration command. The syslog server sending the syslog Dying Gasp message is specified through the logging host hostname-or-ipaddress transport udp command. The Ethernet-OAM Dying Gasp packets are created for interfaces where Ethernet-OAM is enabled.

Dying Gasp packets can be sent to a maximum number of 5 servers for each notification type.

For more information about configuring Dying Gasp, see the Configuring Dying Gasp chapter of the System Management guide at this URL:
http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/switches/connectedgrid/cg-switch-sw-master/software/configuration/guide/sysmgmt/CGS_1000_Sysmgmt/cgs_dying_gasp.html